Welcome to the Lectora Information Center

The Lectora Information Center was designed so that you can quickly find the information you need and continue working on your Lectora titles. The Information Center is divided into the following main sections:  Getting Started View important information that you should know before using Lectora.

The Lectora Workspace Familiarize yourself with the important features of the Lectora Workspace so you can make your Lectora experience easy and efficient. Building a Title This section contains topics for starting out with a blank title to adding chapters, sections, and pages. Working with Text This section contains topics about using text to enhance your title. Working with Objects This section contains topics about adding objects like images, audio, and video. Tests, Surveys and Questions Add tests, surveys, and questions to test your users' knowledge and interact with your users. Working with Forms Add forms to capture data and feedback from your users. Actions and Variables Actions and variables can be used to create interesting titles with varying interactivity and dynamically updated information. Tools and Wizards Learn about time-saving tools and helpful wizards available within Lectora. Publishing a Title View the options available for publishing your completed title. Lectora and 508 Compliancy Learn how to create titles that comply with the standards set in Section 508 - 1194.22 of the Rehabilitation Act.

     

  

What's New
The following updates are available in this release:

Tools

Create images and capture your screen using Snagit Snagit allows you to create images and capture and save a portion of your screen. This is valuable when creating stepby-step software demonstrations, displaying examples of Web pages, or capturing a screen sequence on your system. Create videos and record screen activity using Camtasia Camtasia is a complete video editing solution. Use it to create captivating videos and record screen activity. Creating Content using Flypaper Flypaper is a Flash content management tool. It enables you to create and manage high-impact, interactive content,

 

Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010

edit and repurpose the content, and include it into your title, all without touching any programming code.

Speed/Ease of Use

Improved launch pad interface The launch pad has a new, easy-to-use look.

Getting Started
This chapter presents information to help you get started with Lectora. In this chapter, the following topics are covered:  System Requirements  Installing Lectora  Registering Lectora  Accessing Help  Tips and Training  Uninstalling Lectora  How Lectora Works

System Requirements
Be sure you meet the following minimum system requirements before installing Lectora:  Intel® or AMD® class processor  500MB RAM  1.1GB free hard disk space for the application  Microsoft® .NET Framework 3.5 SP1 (required to install Flypaper) Internet courses produced by Lectora require Internet Explorer 6.0 or newer or any version of Mozilla Firefox. CD-ROM courses produced by Lectora require one of the following operating systems and a CD-ROM drive:  Microsoft Windows® NT  Microsoft Windows XP  Microsoft Windows Vista®  Microsoft Windows 7 To use the test submittal, form submittal, and e-mail features of Lectora-published HTML content, Macintosh-based users must ensure their browser supports LiveConnect. LiveConnect enables JavaScript and Java to freely interchange data on a Web site. Windows-based browsers provide LiveConnect support, by default.

Installing Lectora
1. Insert the Lectora product CD into your computer’s CD drive. 2. If the CD does not automatically start, double-click the CD icon and follow the on-screen instructions. See also: Uninstalling Lectora

Registering Lectora
Register your copy of Lectora so that Trivantis can inform you of updates and provide information about new features and products. Do one of the following:  Install Lectora to access the Registration window, and then follow the on-screen instructions. An active Internet connection is required. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010

Register at any time by choosing Help > Register. Be sure to register within 2 weeks of activation. Otherwise, the software becomes inactive.

Accessing Help
The Lectora Information Center is a browser-based system that provides Help topics of the tasks you can complete using Lectora tools. To access the Help, click the Help button where available. You can also select Contents from the Help menu within Lectora or any of the Suite tools. The Help menu item corresponds with clicking the toolbar graphic or typing the F1 key.

Navigating the Information Center To navigate the Information Center, click the plus sign (+) to the left of the section name to expand the section. Click the title of the topic to display the topic. Click the minus sign (-) to collapse a section. Click the Index tab to access the Information Center Index. To quickly navigate the Index, type in a keyword in the keyword field at the top of the Index. Topics matching the Index words appear in the navigation pane. Click the title of the topic to display the topic. Click the Search tab to enter words or phrases to quickly find topics. Topics containing the search words or phrases appear in the navigation pane. Click the title of the topic to display the topic. To improve your search, use quotation marks around a phrase, such as “Group Object”. Only those topics containing all words in the phrase are displayed. Other ways to get help: Lectora provides the following additional information:  Video Agent Help View the Video Agents for introductions and overviews of Lectora’s powerful and time-saving features. You can access the Video Agents using one of the following ways: - Click Run Overview when you start Lectora for the first time - Click the Video Agent graphic on Lectora windows where available - Select Video Tour from the Help menu for a complete video title - Select Video Tour Agents from the Help menu for individual topics

  

Lectora Information Center PDF Open a printable version of the Lectora Information Center Tool tips Tool tips contain information about Lectora tools. Position your cursor over a tool to view the tool tip information. Lectora Lounge Share and exchange ideas with Lectora users and experts.

Tips and Training
A variety of resources are available with Lectora: The Quick Start Guide included with the Lectora product packaging details the top ten features of the Lectora interface. A handy list of shortcut keys that can be used to add objects, publish your title and more, can be found on the back side of the guide. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010

Trivantis also offers the following instructor-led training courses to enhance your Lectora experience. These courses are offered at the Trivantis locations or can be scheduled at your location. Online training is also available. For more information, visit http://www.trivantis.com/elearning-software-training/lectora-training. Lectora Fundamentals Learn how to create a title from scratch. Begin by creating the title’s organization and add images, text, buttons and other objects to the title. Create interactive components such as rollovers and hotspots. Use some of Lectora’s time-saving tools and wizards to create buttons, page numbering, and backgrounds. Learn how to create a graded test assessment, and how to submit it to an email address, a back-end database, or a Learning Management System. Finally, error check and publish the title to the desired format. Take your Lectora knowledge to the next level and learn how to create additional interactivity. This course focuses on the use of variables within Lectora. Variables can be used to display generic information such as the user’s name (pulled from a Learning Management system) or the current date on a page. Use variables to conditionally branch within the title, display test results on a certificate of completion, and display completion status within a title. Move beyond the basics of Lectora to produce advanced functionality. Create pre-tests that will count towards completion of a course; display completion status of chapters within a title. Create custom, gradable questions that are not of the standard 6 question types. Interact with Flash objects, and learn how to pass information to and retrieve information from a Flash object. Create software simulations and use form elements to store user input. This course relies heavily on the use of variables to create advanced functionality within a title.

Lectora Intermediate

Lectora Extreme

Uninstalling Lectora
To uninstall Lectora, use the Windows Control Panel. Select Add or Remove Programs and locate Lectora in the list of programs. Select Uninstall and follow the on-screen instructions.

How Lectora Works
Lectora relies on two basic concepts that novice users should learn before using Lectora. This section explains the book metaphor from which Lectora is based, defines the title hierarchy, and describes how to inherit objects to simplify creating a title. Understanding these concepts will make using Lectora easier and will enable you to maximize its full potential. The following sections present additional information about the book metaphor and inheritance:  Understanding the Book Metaphor  Understanding Inheritance

Understanding the Book Metaphor
Lectora uses a book metaphor to help you create an organized hierarchy of content. The title represents the overall course (or book metaphorically), and the course (book) can contain and be organized using chapters, sections, sub-sections, and pages. The pages represent the physical pages that are designed by the author. Chapters, sections, and sub-sections are not physical pages, but rather a means of organizing the title. Here’s a more detailed look at these title components: The Title  Holds all the information on a particular subject  Contains pages  Organizes those pages into chapters or sections, or both  Can include title-wide features such as a company logo or forward and backward navigation The Chapters Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010

   

Contain logical “major” subdivisions of information about the subject Can be further subdivided into sections Contain sections, pages, or both, but not other chapters Can include chapter-wide features that are apparent on every page within that chapter The Sections  Contain logical “minor” subdivisions of information about the subject  Can be further subdivided into smaller sections (called sub-sections)  Contain sub-sections, pages, or both  Can include section-wide features that are apparent on every page within that section The Pages  Contain physical objects such as text, images, and video  Cannot be further subdivided  Are the physical pages that your users will see With Lectora, you can use the same approach to organizing your content. There is a direct relationship between the elements of a book and the elements that comprise your Lectora title. The title can contain only pages or you can organize those pages into chapters, sections, and subsections.

Understanding Inheritance
One of the biggest time-saving features that Lectora offers is a concept called inheritance. This concept may not be natural to you, and it will very likely be the aspect of Lectora that requires the most thought when you are designing a new title. The scenario in which you’ll realize the greatest benefits from using inheritance is when you have an object or a group of common objects that need to appear on more than one page of your title. A Scenario For instance, let’s imagine that your course will have a How to Sharpen a Pencil section with 10 pages in it, and you want the student to be able to traverse forward and backward through the pages by using a Next button and a Previous button. Furthermore, you always want a Glossary button to appear on each of those pages, so the student can quickly display a Glossary of terms when necessary. Suppose also that the last page of your How to Sharpen a Pencil section is the last page of the entire title. Since it is the last page of your title, it should not have a Next button. Achieving the Scenario Without Using Inheritance Traditionally, you would create ten new pages in the How to Sharpen a Pencil section. You would then import and place the Next, Previous and Glossary buttons on one of the pages, and make the Action of each button go specifically to the next page, the previous page, and the glossary respectively. Finally, you would copy and paste all three of the buttons on the remaining nine pages within the section (minus the Next button on the last page). Achieving the Scenario Using Inheritance Alternatively, take advantage of Lectora’s inheritance feature. With inheritance, you can import and place those three buttons ( Next, Previous, and Glossary) on the Section level object that you titled How to Sharpen a Pencil instead of placing them on all the pages. You will place these three buttons on that Section one time, you will set the buttons actions one time, and then you will simply start creating new pages in that section. The inheritance feature enables those three buttons to automatically appear on every new page you create in the How to Sharpen a Pencil section! Anything you place on the section level will automatically appear on every page you create in that section. You Don’t Always Have to Inherit Everything As mentioned above in the scenario, the last page should not have a Next button, since it is the last page of the title. By placing all three buttons on the Section, every page created in that Section contains all three buttons, which we know is not desirable on the last page. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010

To solve this problem, Lectora offers you the ability to exclude certain objects from being inherited. By using this feature, you can continue to inherit the three buttons throughout the section, while excluding the Next button from the last page. See also: Excluding Objects Using Inheritance

Inheritance Summary  Anything placed on a page appears on only that page  Anything placed on a section appears on every Page* of every sub-Section in that Section  Anything placed on a chapter appears on every Page* of every Section in that Chapter  Anything placed on a test appears on every Page* of every Section in that Test  Anything placed on your title appears on every Page* of every Section of every Chapter in that Title *Unless you use the Exclude Inheritance of Certain Objects property on the page.

The Lectora Workspace
Each time you launch Lectora, a launch pad is displayed that presents options for creating new titles and accessing existing titles. Once you have opened a title, the Lectora workspace is revealed. It consists of menus, toolbars, the Title Explorer, and a work area. You can further customize your Lectora workspace by setting preferences. The following sections present additional information about the Lectora workspace:  Using the Launch Pad  The Lectora Interface  Setting Lectora Preferences

Using the Launch Pad
The launch pad opens when you start Lectora. (It also opens when you select File > New Title or File > Open an Existing Title.) Using the launch pad, you can:  Start the Title Wizard  Use a pre-designed template  Create a new, blank title  Open an existing title  Take a video tour of Lectora  See tips for using Lectora You must create a title before you can start adding chapters, sections, pages, and media objects.

Starting the Title Wizard
The Title Wizard makes it easy to get rolling with Lectora. The Title Wizard guides you through creating a title from one of the pre-designed title styles. Your answers to the Wizard’s questions will enable Lectora to create the framework for the style of title you selected. Click Title Wizard to start the Title Wizard. Use the Title Wizard window to quickly select one of the pre-designed titles. Previews of the first page of each title are displayed on the right of the window and short descriptions of each title are displayed in the lower-right corner of the window. Double-click the desired style or select the desired style from the window and click Start Wizard.

Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010

within a window. The tour starts automatically or you can select individual videos you want to view. See also: Using a template Saving a Title as a Template Creating a new. See also: Opening an existing title Taking the Video Tour Select this to launch a complete video tour of Lectora. Templates are a convenient way to store boilerplate versions of titles that can be used as a starting point for future titles that are created. Use the list to select an individual video. double-click the title from the Recently Used Files list (or select it and click OK. Enter the name of the new title in the New Title Name field and use the Choose Folder button to select a location to which to save the title. click on it to view the help agent corresponding to the property Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Double-click the desired template or select the desired template from the window and click Use Template. click Templates. If you need to return to the Title Wizard to create another title. When you have answered all of the questions and clicked Finish.) Otherwise. starting with an introduction to Lectora.Follow the on-screen instructions to build your title. For instance. You can also launch the individual video help agents directly from many of the properties windows in Lectora. You would then use this template when creating all of your titles. if your organization has a standard “look and feel” that should be applied to all titles. The outline is displayed in the Title Explorer and the first page is displayed in the work space on the right. use the Browse button to search for a title that does not appear in the list. click Blank Title. blank title To create a new title from scratch without the use of a wizard. you can create a template that contains the layout and all associated text and graphics for that title. Click OK to create the new title. your title is displayed in the work area.awt. click File > New Title and select Title Wizard. This tab displays the last six titles that you have opened using Lectora. The default location is My Documents\My Titles\<title name>. To open one of the listed titles. When you see the Video Agent graphic you are setting. See also: Creating a new title Opening an existing title To open an existing title using the launch pad. click Open Existing Title. See also: Creating a title using the Title Wizard Using a pre-designed template To use a pre-designed template to create a new title.

click the Save toolbar graphic on the Standard toolbar. See also: Using the sidebar Title Explorer Displays the structure of your title and the objects contained within it. See also: Using the work area Status bar Displays useful information such as the current cursor location and the RGB value of the color of the current cursor location. dock it to a side of the interface. and mnemonics are included for each menu title and menu item. See also: Using the toolbar area Dockable properties window Displays property details. Use the controls on the right to browse through several different tips. then it will also have the same graphic Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . For example. and double-click on objects to review their properties. Drag-and-drop objects to the work area to place them within your title. Keyboard shortcuts appear to the right of the frequently used menu items. Most of the functions that exist within the menus are also accessible from the toolbars. to quickly save your title. You can copy and paste within the Title Explorer. Toolbars can be rearranged within this area by dragging-and-dropping the toolbar to the new location. hide it in the sidebar. For example. See also: Using the dockable properties window Sidebar The sidebar is a thin area on a side of the interface that you use for accessing windows that are currently hidden from view. If the menu item has a graphic located to its left.Viewing the Tip of the Day Learn more about Lectora by reading the tip of the day. You can float the window. See also: Using the Status bar Using the menu bar Use the menu bar to access all the functions of Lectora. See also: Using the Title Explorer Work area Allows you to interactively manage the objects contained within up your title. You can also hide the Title Explorer. or hide it completely. See also: Using the Menu bar Toolbar area Contains toolbars for quickly completing commands and selecting tools. The Lectora Interface The Lectora interface consists of the following areas and menus: Menu bar Contains menus organized by tasks. as well as drag-and-drop objects from one level of your title to another. the Add menu contains commands for adding different objects to your title.

use Browse to navigate to it. You will be prompted to save the current title if you made changes to it. Save Title Select this to save the current title. you are prompted for the folder to which to save a copy of the current title. See also: Saving a Title This menu item corresponds with clicking the toolbar graphic or typing the Ctrl+S keyboard shortcut. When you select this item. the Lectora launch pad appears. New Title Select this to start a new title. After the title is copied. When you select this menu item. You can type the name of the title you want to create and click OK to open it. Save As Select this to create a copy of the current title. Close Title Select this to close the current title. the Lectora launch pad appears. See also: Opening an existing title This menu item corresponds with clicking the toolbar graphic or typing the Ctrl+O keyboard shortcut. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . See also: Creating a new title This menu item corresponds with clicking the toolbar graphic or typing the Ctrl+N keyboard shortcut. When you select this menu item.representation on one of the toolbars. or select a title from the list of Recently Used Files. This menu item is available after you open a title. the current title will be closed and the newly created copy of the title will be opened. The menu bar consists of the following menus:  File  Edit  Add  Layout  Tools  Mode  Publish  View  Help See also: Specifying hotkeys preferences File menu Use the File menu to manage your titles. This menu item is available if you have made changes that need to be saved to the current title. Open an Existing Title Select this to open an existing title. opened to the New Title tab. opened to the Open Existing Title tab. You can type the name of an existing title.

Lectora supports a number of different printing options such as Storyboard and Outline. section. See also: Saving a Title Save Title as Template Select this to save the current title as a template. Right-click on a chapter. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . This menu item corresponds with clicking the toolbar graphic or typing the Ctrl+P keyboard shortcut. Import Select this to import content from the following supported import types:  CSV Question File  QTI  Lectora Online Package  XML  Zip See also: Importing and Exporting Content Export Select this to export content to the following supported export types:  QTI  Word  Lectora Online Package  XML  Zip See also: Importing and Exporting Content Preferences Select this to access the preference settings for your Lectora application. section. The current title will remain open.See also: Saving a Title Save a Copy of Title Select this to create a copy of the current title. Options selected within the Preferences will remain until they are changed. See also: Saving a Title as a Template Print Select this to print the current title. You can also contextually print title content. This menu item is available after you open a title. you are prompted for the folder to which to save a copy of the current title. or page in the Title Explorer and select Print to open the Print window with the print pages pre-filled to only print the content within the chapter. Exit Select this to exit Lectora. You will be prompted if you made changes that need to be saved to the current title. You will be prompted if you made changes that need to be saved to the current title. See also: Setting Lectora Preferences (Recently used files) Select one of the files listed to open it. When you select this item. or page you selected.

Redo Insert). Lectora can redo up to 20 commands. and buttons and actions. This menu item corresponds with clicking the toolbar graphic or typing the Ctrl+Y keyboard shortcut. Delete Select this to delete the selected object or item. which you cut or copied to the clipboard. the Find window opens. The menu item will change to reflect the most recently processed command (for example. Copy Select this to copy the selected item or object and store it in the clipboard. Lectora can undo up to 20 commands. This menu item corresponds to clicking the toolbar graphic or typing the Ctrl+V keyboard shortcut. Type the word or phrase you want to find in the Find what field and click Find to find words or phrases. The pasted text will use the default font style instead. Find Select this to search for text within your title. When you select this menu item. Unicode Text Unformatted Text Use this to paste text from the clipboard and remove its original formatting. Cut Select this to cut the selected object and store it in the clipboard. Paste Unformatted Text Select this to paste the text. Undo Select this to undo your unsaved changes one-at-a-time. Redo Select this to redo your unsaved changes one-at-a-time.Edit menu Use the Edit menu to manage your changes. Paste the object in another location using Paste. This menu item corresponds to clicking the toolbar graphic or typing the Ctrl+C keyboard shortcut. Paste As Select this to paste text that you cut or copied to the clipboard as one of the following: Unformatted Use this to paste text from the clipboard and remove its original unicode formatting. including "behind the scenes" text for menus. for example. This menu item corresponds to typing the Ctrl+Shift+V keyboard shortcut. This menu item corresponds to clicking the toolbar graphic or typing the Ctrl+X keyboard shortcut. This menu item corresponds to typing the Del key. Paste the item or object in another location using Paste. Undo Move). The menu item will change to reflect the most recently processed command (for example. This menu item corresponds with clicking the toolbar graphic or typing the Ctrl+Z keyboard shortcut. hyperlinks. Paste Select this to paste the item or object that you cut or copied to the clipboard. so that it does not retain its original formatting. Enable Title Contents if you want to search within the contents Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 .

This menu item corresponds to clicking the toolbar graphic or typing the Ctrl+F keyboard shortcut. See also: Working with Sections This menu item corresponds to clicking the toolbar graphic or typing the Ctrl+2 keyboard shortcut. This menu item corresponds to typing the Ctrl+H keyboard shortcut. Find Next Select this to find the next instance of the word or phrase for which you are searching. see Adding an assignable unit. This menu item corresponds to clicking the toolbar graphic or pressing F3. This menu item corresponds to typing the Ctrl+0 keyboard shortcut. See also: Working with Chapters This menu item corresponds to clicking the toolbar graphic or typing the Ctrl+1 keyboard shortcut. Section Select this to add a section to your title. enable Notes if you want to search within the notes in your title.of your title. See also: Adding Objects to Your Title Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . and enable Object Name to search for objects by name. See also: Working with Assignable Units Chapter Select this to add a chapter to your title. Assignable Unit Select this to add an assignable unit to your title. See also: Working with Pages This menu item corresponds to clicking the toolbar graphic or typing the Ctrl+3 keyboard shortcut. Object Select this to add an object to your title. Add menu Use the Add menu to add objects to your title. Page Select this to add a page to your title. For details about adding assignable units. Replace Select this to search and replace the text specified in the Find window.

These menu items correspond to clicking the associated toolbar graphic or typing the keyboard shortcuts listed below: Form (Ctrl+Alt+2) Radio button group (Ctrl+Alt+3) Radio button (Ctrl+Alt+4) Check box (Ctrl+Alt+5) Entry field (Ctrl+Alt+6) Drop-down list (Ctrl+Alt+7) List box (Ctrl+Alt+8) Action Select this to add an action to your title. Group Select this to add a group to your title.Use the Add > Object submenu to add the following objects. These menu items correspond to clicking the associated toolbar graphic or typing the keyboard shortcuts listed below: Animation (Ctrl+9) Audio (Ctrl+Shift+0) Button (Ctrl+Shift+1) Document (Ctrl+Shift+2) Equation (Ctrl+Shift+3) External HTML (Ctrl+Shift+4) Image (Ctrl+Shift+ 5) IPIX image (Ctrl+Shift+6) Menu (Ctrl+Shift+7) Progress bar (Ctrl+Alt+9) Reference list (Ctrl+Shift+8) Table of contents (Ctrl+Shift+ 9) Text block (Ctrl+Alt+0) Video (Ctrl+Alt+1) Use the Add > Object > Form Object submenu to add the following objects. See also: Adding an action This menu item corresponds to clicking the toolbar graphic or typing the Ctrl+4 keyboard shortcut. See also: Grouping and Ungrouping Objects This menu item corresponds to clicking the toolbar graphic or typing the Ctrl+5 keyboard shortcut. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 .

Align Select this to align selected objects to the direction you want. See also: Adding Questions This menu item corresponds to clicking the toolbar graphic or typing the Ctrl+8 keyboard shortcut. Left Top Horizontal center See also: Aligning objects Right Bottom Vertical center Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Survey Select this to add a survey to your title. These menu items correspond to clicking the associated toolbar graphic. Question Select this to add a question to your title. Layout menu Use the Layout menu to manage the arrangement of objects and text used in your title.Test Select this to add a test to your title. See also: Creating a test This menu item corresponds to clicking the toolbar graphic or typing the Ctrl+6 keyboard shortcut. See also: Adding sections to a test This menu item corresponds to clicking the toolbar graphic or typing the Ctrl+7 keyboard shortcut. This menu item is available if you have a test in your title. These menu items are available if multiple objects are selected. See also: Creating a survey This menu item corresponds to clicking the toolbar graphic or typing the Alt+6 keyboard shortcut. See also: Adding Survey Questions This menu item corresponds to clicking the toolbar graphic or typing the Alt+8 keyboard shortcut. Use the Layout > Align submenu to select from the following directions. Survey Question Select this to add a survey question to your title. Test Section Select this to add a test section to your title.

Use the Layout > Center submenu to select from the following centering options. See also: Using Page Layouts Tools menu Use the Tools menu to run checks. See also: Running an Error Check Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . and import and export layouts.  Delete Layout deletes the selected user-created layout.  Export Layout launches the Save As window to save and name the file. Error Check Select this to check for errors within your title.  Import Layout launches the Open window to add layouts to the list. You cannot delete the predefined layouts. the Page Layouts window opens. These menu items are available if multiple objects are selected. These menu items correspond to clicking the associated toolbar graphic: Horizontal Vertical See also: Centering objects on a page Space Evenly Select this to space several objects evenly on a page. Use this window to:  Replace layout with current page layout modifies the selected layout to match the current page layout of objects. if you have placed a Next Page button on the last page of your title. When you select this menu item. These menu items are available if at least one object is selected. Lectora will issue an error indicating that you have a button with an invalid destination. Use the Layout > Space Evenly submenu to select from the following spacing options. Use the Layout > Make Same Size submenu to select from the following sizing options. and use tools to prepare your title for publishing. Width Height Both See also: Making objects the same size Page Layouts Select this to manage the available page layouts. customize the pre-defined layouts. access wizards. These menu items correspond to clicking the associated toolbar graphic. These menu items are available if more than two objects are selected.Center Select this to center the selected objects within the page. You can add your own layouts to the list.  Add new layout from current page layout creates a new layout based off the layout of objects on the current page. For example. Across Down See also: Spacing objects evenly Make Same Size Select this to size objects consistently on a page. These menu items correspond to clicking the associated toolbar graphic.

Triangle Bar. Trapezoid Bar. trapezoids and parallelograms are available from the Block Arrow Bar.wmf) enabling you to resize them without losing quality. Set line/file properties Line Arrow Two way arrow Rectangle Rounded rectangle Diamond Ellipse Pentagon Hexagon Octagon Block Arrows Triangles Trapezoids Parallelograms Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . These menu items correspond to clicking the associated toolbar graphics within the Shape Bar. sections. These objects can be used to place emphasis on a particular part of a page. See also: Importing Objects from Existing Lectora Titles Spell Check Select this to check the spelling of all text in your title. Use the Tools > Spell Check submenu to select whether to check the Current Page or the Entire Title. You can import entire titles. triangles. You can also specify spelling Options such as whether to consider case-sensitivity. AICC/Web-based. messages. and menu items. Use the Tools > Shapes/Lines submenu to select from the following options. The 508 Compliance Checker only applies to titles that will be published to a web-based format (HTML. Additional shapes such as block arrows. button text.508 Compliance Check Select this to check that your title is complaint with Section 508 of the Rehabilitation Act. and pages.22 (a) through (p) for Web-based Intranet and Internet Information and Applications. See also: Checking Spelling Shapes/Lines Select this to add shapes and lines to your title. including all text blocks. The images are created in Windows Media Format (. CourseMill. chapters. as well as individual objects and text blocks. See also: Checking for 508 Compliance Import from Existing Title Select this to save time by importing objects from existing Lectora titles. Paragraph 1194. question feedback. and SCORM/Web-based). and Parallelogram Bar.

The objects are saved in a Library folder. You can add and remove categories and media as your media library grows. Variables are objects within a Lectora title that enable you to store. Backgrounds enhance the appearance of your title. The name of the file that the resource represents can be changed. This location can be changed and kept on a shared network drive. Resources in Lectora are the actual files that are used for objects such as images. The default location of the Library folder is C:\ Program Files\Trivantis\Lectora\Library. and test values of numbers or strings during the runtime of a published title. and it lists all instances of the resource in the title. audio and video. See also: Working with the Media Library Organizer Background Wizard Select this to start a wizard that helps you add backgrounds to your title. See also: Creating a Notes Report Variable Manager Select this to manage the variables used in your title. Lines and Arrows Library Object Select this to organize various objects in one location so you can easily share them with others. Selecting one of the occurrences in the list presents a preview of the resource. See also: Adding a Note Notes Report Select this to create a report of the notes included in a title. The Media Organizer makes it easy to find the media you are looking for by organizing the files into categories. Use the Tools > Library Object submenu to select from the following options:  Save current selection as Library Object  Insert Library Object from file  Share a Library Object Online  Insert an Online Library object See also: Working with Library Objects Add a Note Select this to add a note to your title to share ideas or provide instructions. See also: Using the Variable Manager Resource Manager Select this to view a list of the resources in your title. modify. See also: Creating Custom Backgrounds Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . You can use variable values to conditionally perform actions in a title or set the contents of a text block.See also: Adding Shapes. See also: Managing Resources Media Library Organizer You can use the Media Organizer to find and share digital media files that are on your computer or shared among team members on a network folder.

See also: Creating Videos using Camtasia Launch Flypaper Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . This tool enables you to create videos and capture your screen sequences as a video. See also: Creating Custom Charts Page Numbering Tool Select this to number pages throughout your title. Translation Tool Select this to extract and place text from your title into a rich text format (RFT) file. the chart is added as an image that you can size and move within the page. such as Microsoft Word or WordPad. Choose from custom color buttons with text or stock buttons from clipart. This tool enables you to create and edit images and capture portions of your screen. See also: Translating Your Title's Text Launch Snagit Select this to launch the Snagit image editing tool.Button Wizard Select this to start a wizard that helps you add buttons to your title. See also: Integrating PowerPoint presentations into your Title *This tool is available as optional software. See also: Creating Custom Certificates Chart Tool Create and customize charts using the Chart Tool. See also: Automatically Numbering Pages PowerPoint Slide Tool* Select this to import PowerPoint slides into your title. Choose from a variety of charts based on standard spreadsheet-formatted data. The tool guides you through customizing a certificate to add to your title. When completed. This enables you to translate the text into another language using an RTF editor. See also: Creating Custom Buttons Certificate Tool Create and customize certificates using the Certificate Tool. the certificate is added as a page within your title. The translated text can then be imported into your title. See also: Creating Images using Snagit Launch Camtasia Select this to launch the Camtasia video editing program. When completed.

Run Select this to view your title with all buttons. and include it into your title. Preview Select this to preview your title in a centered background outside of the Lectora interface. This menu item corresponds to clicking the toolbar graphic or typing the F10 key. and actions active. The New Animation Tool allows you to manage the animation frame-by-frame. Preview in Browser Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . all without touching any programming code. links. See also: Using Lectora's Modes Edit Select this to return to the working mode in which you create your title. Actions performed on a page are recorded in a Debug window along with variable values and additional information. links. edit and repurpose the content. See also: Using the New Animation Tool New Image Tool Select this to create new images and modify existing ones using the Snagit image editor. All buttons. This menu item corresponds to clicking the toolbar graphic or typing the F12 key.Select this to launch the Flypaper Flash content management program. and actions active. Select from the following audio recording formats:  Flash Audio  Windows Media Audio  Real Audio  WAV audio See also: Using the Audio Recording Tool New Animation Tool Select this to add an animation to your title. links. See also: Creating Content using Flypaper Audio Recording Tool Select this to record and insert audio in your title. This menu item corresponds to clicking the toolbar graphic or typing the F11 key. and actions are active. See also: Using the New Image Tool Mode menu Use the Mode menu to switch between the various modes. Debug Select this to view your title with all button. interactive content. This tool enables you to create and manage highimpact.

Publish menu Use the Publish menu to select the appropriate publishing format. IMS. See also: Publishing to a single file executable This menu item corresponds to typing the F2 key. See also: Publishing to CD-ROM This menu item corresponds to typing the F6 key. Publish to SCORM/Web-Based Select this to publish your title so that it is compatible with the Shareable Content Object Reference Model (SCORM). See also: Publishing to HTML This menu item corresponds to typing the F8 key. This menu item corresponds to clicking the toolbar graphic or typing the F9 key. See also: Publishing to AICC This menu item corresponds to typing the Ctrl+F6 keyboard shortcut. All actions on the page are active. documents. Lectora will automatically perform an error check before publishing to the chosen format. See also: Publishing to CourseMill This menu item corresponds to typing the Ctrl+F2 keyboard shortcut. Publish to CourseMill Select this to publish your title so that it is compatible with the CourseMill Enterprise learning management system offered by Trivantis. Publish to AICC/Web-Based Select this to publish your title so that it is compatible with the Aviation Industry CBT Committee (AICC).aicc. This option compresses the entire title and all supporting files into a single file and creates an auto-start file that will automatically launch the title when the CD is placed into a CD-ROM drive.org. Publish to Single File Executable Select this to publish your title as a self-contained executable file. and IEEE to create a unified Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . refer to the official AICC website at http://www. This option compacts the entire title and all supporting files into a single file for easier distribution. Publish to CDRom Select this to publish your title for writing to a CD. For the latest specifications. AICC was established in 1988 to define standards on how Computer Managed Instruction (CMI) systems should operate in presenting title materials to students. The publishing properties will appear when the title is free from errors. as a downloaded file from the Web. and explanations of terms. SCORM is a set of interrelated technical specifications built upon the work of the AICC. for example. navigation to other pages will not function. Publish to HTML Select this to publish your title to HTML so you can post the resulting pages on the Web. but because only a single page is published.Select this to preview your title in a chosen browser.

Toolbars and Docking Windows Select this to choose which toolbars and docking windows you want to be displayed in the user interface. and creating online content. docked windows.gov. and explanations of terms. rulers. The current docking windows are listed. See also: Publishing to LRN Publish to SCORM/Disconnected Select this to publish your title so that it is compatible with the Shareable Content Object Reference Model (SCORM) for use in an off-line environment. refer to the official SCORM website at http://www.adlnet. and explanations of terms. SCORM is a set of interrelated technical specifications built upon the work of the AICC. You can change the display status by selecting the menu item with the toolbar or docked window’s name. sharing. and design tools (grid. documents. The toolbars and docked windows that have a check mark in front of their name will be shown in the interface. LRN is a Microsoftspecified content interchange descriptor that provides to content creators a standard way of identifying. For the latest specifications. Publish to LRN Select this to publish your title so that it is compatible with the Learning Resource Interchange (LRN).gov See also: Publishing to SCORM Disconnected View menu Use the View menu to select the various toolbars. When you select a toolbar for the user interface.adlnet. IMS. Choose from the following toolbars:  Standard Toolbar  Text Toolbar  Mode Bar  Insert Toolbar  Layout Bar  Form Bar  Tools Bar  Shape Bar  Block Arrow Bar  Triangle Bar  Trapezoid Bar  Parallelogram Bar  Title Explorer  Properties See also: Using the toolbar area Status Bar Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . For the latest specifications.content model for Web-based learning content. documents. a check appears to the left of the View > Toolbars and Docking Windows sub-menu item. updating. and guides) that you want displayed or used within the Lectora interface. refer to the official SCORM website at http://www. and IEEE to create a unified content model for Web-based learning content. See also: Publishing to SCORM This menu item corresponds to typing the Ctrl+F8 keyboard shortcut.

When you select to snap to guide. width and height if an object is selected. a check appears to the left of the View > Show Rulers menu item. Displaying the rulers allows for the creation of guides. The current zoom setting is displayed by default. See also: Specifying Grids and Guides preferences Snap to Guides Select this to move objects to the nearest guide. When you select to show the grid. a check appears to the left of the View > Status Bar sub-menu item. a check appears to the left of the View > Show Grid menu item. Using the Zoom > Zoom sub-menu. When you select to snap to grid. you can move objects to the nearest guide for proper alignment.coordinates. When you select the information to display. The grid is an alignment and spacing guide that is displayed as a page background. Snap to Grid Select this to move objects to the nearest grid increment for proper alignment. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . When you select to show guides. When you select to show the rulers.and y. When used with Snap to Guide. green (G).Select this to choose the information you want displayed in the Status Bar. you can zoom in up to 400% or zoom out to 25% of the actual page size. See also: Specifying Grids and Guides preferences Zoom Select this to change the zoom level. and additionally the x. a check appears to the left of the View > Snap to Grid menu item. Displays values of the red (R). Guides are horizontal and vertical lines that originate from the ruler and can be placed anywhere on the page for object alignment. Show Guides Select this to display guides in the work area. you can move objects to the nearest grid increment for proper alignment. See also: Specifying Grids and Guides preferences This menu item corresponds to typing the Ctrl+E keyboard shortcut. a check appears to the left of the View > Snap to Guide menu item. Show Rulers Select this to display the horizontal and vertical rulers to the left and top of the work area. a check appears to the left of the View > Show Guides menu item. This feature is only available in Edit mode. When used with Snap to Grid. Using the Status bar Show Grid Select this to display the grid in the work area. See also: Specifying Grids and Guides preferences This menu item corresponds to typing the Ctrl+R keyboard shortcut.Choose from the following status bar display options: Current Position Color at Cursor Position See also: Displays the current position of the mouse cursor within an image. and blue (B) color codes. See also: Specifying Grids and Guides preferences This menu item corresponds to typing the Ctrl+G keyboard shortcut.

and Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . PDF version of the Lectora Information Center. Lectora Community Forum Select this to launch Lectora's online community forum at http://forum. The PDF document can be saved to your computer or printed. .com. starting with an introduction to Lectora. Within the community forum you can exchange tips. View the following information:  Serial number  Version number. See also: Using the Status bar Theme Select this to change the look of the interface. The tour starts automatically or you can select individual videos you want to view. Select from a variety of different interface appearances. Refresh Select this to refresh or update the currently displayed page. showing text labels. along with the service pack and build levels  Copyright notice Register If you have not yet registered your copy of Lectora. and find out about product updates directly from Trivantis developers and other Lectora users. this option will appear within the Help menu. This menu item corresponds to clicking the toolbar graphic or typing the F1 key. select tasks from the Contents or search for words or phrases in the Information Center. adding and removing commands. Selecting the Zoom > Zoom Out sub-menu item corresponds to clicking the Alt+Space Bar keyboard shortcut. ask questions. Lectora Information Center PDF Select this to launch the online. Contents Select this to open the Lectora Information Center. You can customize the toolbar area by rearranging the toolbars. See also: Accessing help Video Tour Select this to launch a complete video tour of Lectora. About Lectora Select this to display product information about the version of Lectora you are using. See also: Registering Lectora Using the toolbar area The toolbar area contains toolbars for quickly completing commands and selecting tools. An Internet connection is required to access the community forum. Help menu Use the Help menu to access the available help and to view information about your version of Lectora. You can search words in the Index.trivantis.Selecting the Zoom > Zoom In sub-menu item corresponds to clicking the Ctrl+Space Bar keyboard shortcut. Select this to register Lectora. This menu item corresponds to typing the F5 key.

such as opening an existing file and cutting and paste content. Parallelogram Toolbar Contains commands for creating parallelograms of the type chosen. Triangle Toolbar Contains commands for creating triangles of the type chosen. or rearranged within the toolbar area: Standard toolbar Contains commands for managing your files. You can also create a custom toolbar.showing large graphics. Arrow Toolbar Contains commands for creating arrows of the type chosen. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Alignment Toolbar Contains commands for aligning objects. Insert Toolbar Contains commands for inserting objects into your title. Text Toolbar Contains commands for editing and working with text. Trapezoid Toolbar Contains commands for creating trapezoids of the type chosen. See these topics for more information:  Rearranging the toolbar area  Adding and removing commands  Showing large graphics  Showing text labels  Creating a custom toolbar The following toolbars can be added. Modes Toolbar Contains commands for switching between Lectora’s modes. remove.

2. drag it toward the Title Explorer or work area. and while holding the right mouse button down. Rearranging the toolbar area You can rearrange the order of the toolbars as they are displayed in the toolbar area. You can also drag a toolbar off the toolbar area and float it. Form Toolbar Contains commands for inserting form objects into your title. select the graphic from the submenu. 3. Select Customize from the Add or Remove Buttons submenu. 3. Click the Toolbar Options drop-down graphic located at the end of a toolbar. Click Reset to restore the toolbar to the original settings. Showing large icons Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . You can also drag the toolbar and fasten it to a side of the interface. To add a toolbar that you removed. To add a graphic that you removed from the toolbar. select the far left side of the toolbar. To add or remove graphics from a toolbar: 1. 4. Unselect the toolbars that you want to remove from the toolbar area and click Close. Click the Toolbar Options drop-down graphic located at the end of a toolbar that you want to customize. Tools Toolbar Contains commands for accessing tools. Select the specific toolbar submenu item representing the toolbar you want to customize. To float a toolbar.Shapes/Line Toolbar Contains commands for creating and editing shapes and lines. Unselect the graphic that you want to remove from the toolbar. To rearrange the toolbar area. drag the toolbar to the new location within the toolbar area. Another submenu will open showing which graphics are currently displayed on the toolbar. 2. To add and remove toolbars from the toolbar area: 1. The Add or Remove Buttons submenu opens. The Add or Remove Buttons submenu opens. The Customize window opens. select the unselected toolbar and click Close. Adding and removing toolbars and toolbar graphics You can select which toolbars to view and select which toolbar graphics you want your toolbars to contain. Click the Toolbars tab on the Customize window.

The text labels for the graphics on the toolbar you selected are displayed. 8. The Customize window opens.You can select to display large toolbar icons. The Customize window opens. located at the end of a toolbar. Click OK. To create a custom toolbar: 4. Click the Toolbar Options drop-down graphic Remove Buttons submenu. The large toolbar icons are displayed. The Toolbar Name window opens. The Customize window opens. Click the Toolbar Options drop-down graphic The Add or Remove Buttons submenu opens. 2. Click the Toolbar Options drop-down graphic Remove Buttons submenu. 3. . located at the end of a toolbar. 7. Provide a toolbar name and click OK. Select Customize from the Add or Showing text labels You can select to show the text labels associated with the graphics on a toolbar. Select the toolbar and enable the Show text labels check box. To show large icons: 1. 4. click the Commands tab on the Customize window and select the Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 located at the end of a toolbar. A small floating toolbar appears. 5. 7. 6. Click the Toolbars tab on the Customize window. Click the Options tab on the Customize window. To load a toolbar graphic onto the new toolbar. 8. To show text labels: 5. Click the Toolbars tab and click New. Select the Large Icons check box. Click OK. 6. Select Customize from the Add or Creating a custom toolbar You can add custom toolbars and load toolbar graphics onto them. Click Customize.

The Title Explorer will appear as a tab in the side of the interface. copy and paste objects directly within the Title Explorer or drag and drop objects to reorganize your title. Double-click the tab to open the Title Explorer or hover over the tab to temporarily view it's contents. Docking Fasten the Title Explorer to a side of the interface. or hold down the Ctrl key to select multiple objects not in a list. You can dock and hide the Title Explorer. Auto Hide Hide the window in the side of the interface. Auto Hide Hide the Title Explorer in the side of the interface. While in Edit mode. See also: Using the sidebar Using the View menu Using the sidebar The sidebar is a thin area on a side of the interface that you use for accessing windows that are currently hidden from view. Tabs in the sidebar represent the windows that are hidden. The window title will appear as a tab in the side of the interface. Clicking the pushpin icon also hides the window. The window will then automatically snap into the side you selected. For instance. or hide it. the properties of the component are displayed in a dockable window. use your keyboard's Page Up and Page Down keys to navigate between pages in your title. Double-click a tab to open the window or hover over the tab to temporarily view the window's contents. Hold down the Shift key to select a list of objects. press Ctrl while dragging it. Docking Fasten the window to a side of the interface. Double-click a tab to open the window or hover over the tab to temporarily view the window's contents. you can temporarily hide the Title Explorer from view if you want a larger workspace. You can use the View menu to select whether display or hide the window. Using the dockable properties window When you select a component of your title. Right-click on the title bar of the properties window to see the docking options: Floating Place the window anywhere. Use the View menu to re-access the hidden window. You can cut. Clicking the pushpin icon also hides the window. like a pop-up. Drag the command onto the floating toolbar. select the window and drag it until your cursor is over one of the docking graphics displayed on the screen. See also: Using the dockable properties window Using the View menu Using the Title Explorer The Title Explorer displays the entire structure of your title. Repeat as necessary.appropriate category. When an object is selected in the Title Explorer. To move a window without snapping it into place. Docked windows can also be accessed using the View menu. like a pop-up. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . focus is placed on that object within the work area to the right. Hide Hide the window from view. like an image on a page or an action in the Title Explorer. Use this pane to access object properties by double-clicking on the object icon. float it. To change the docking side of the interface. You can dock the window to a side of the interface. Right-click on the Title Explorer's title bar to see the docking options: Floating Place the Title Explorer anywhere. Dockable windows can also be hidden within a sidebar.

View percentage Object coordinates Object width and height Cursor position Color at cursor position See also: Moving and Resizing Objects Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . The status bar is divided into the following sections: Message area Located in the lower-left corner. Coordinates are relative to the top-left corner of the page. Each object that is visible within the work area will also have a representation in the Title Explorer. the width and height of the object will be displayed here. audio. the X and Y coordinates of the object will be displayed here. See also: Supported Media Types Using the status bar The status bar provides information on the current position of the mouse cursor on the page. Use your mouse to drag and move items on a page. Use the View menu to re-access the hidden window. Type a numeric value directly into the width or height areas to resize the object to the specified dimensions. The window will then automatically snap into the side you selected. and double-click on an object to reveal its properties. the description of the tool is displayed in the message area. press Ctrl while dragging it. To change the docking side of the interface.Hide Hide the Title Explorer from view. Displays the current zoom value. Type a numeric value directly into the X or Y coordinate areas to reposition the object to the specified location. When an object is selected. as well as information about the currently selected object. video and other supported media types directly to the work area. When an object is selected. Displays the RGB color value. this area displays status messages and tool descriptions. Drag and drop images. Displays the X and Y coordinates of the cursor position. when you place your cursor over a toolbar graphic. See also: Showing buttons for hiding objects in the Title Explorer Showing visibility check boxes in Title Explorer Using Lectora's Modes Using the work area The work area enables you to interactively manage the layout of objects that make up your title. For example. Select a zoom value to change the current view. To move a window without snapping it into place. Coordinates are relative to the top-left corner of the page. select the Title Explorer and drag it until your cursor is over one of the docking graphics displayed on the screen.

located at the end of a toolbar. See these topics for more information:  Assigning and removing keyboard shortcuts  Setting a keyboard accelerator Assigning and removing keyboard shortcuts You can assign custom keyboard shortcuts to save time and be more efficient. Next. 3. press the new shortcut sequence you want to add. Add new shortcut keys or replace the default shortcuts. The Customize window opens. The Current Keys box lists the keyboard shortcuts defined for each command. Click the Toolbar Options drop-down graphic The Add or Remove Buttons submenu opens. located at the end of a toolbar. press and hold the Ctrl key and type a letter to add a Ctrl keyboard shortcut. Click the Toolbar Options drop-down graphic The Add or Remove Buttons submenu opens. Selecting a keyboard accelerator A keyboard accelerator is a keystroke or a combination of keystrokes that generates a command. Using your keyboard. To remove a shortcut from the Current Keys list. Select Customize from the Add or Remove Buttons submenu. Use the Category drop-down list to select the category of the command containing the shortcut you want to add or change. To assign a custom keyboard shortcut: 1. Click the Keyboard tab on the Customize window. The commands for each category are listed. Otherwise. 4. The key sequence you type is displayed in the Press new shortcut key field. select the command from the Commands list. To assign a custom keyboard shortcut: 1. 5. 2. The Customize window opens. To remove all custom shortcuts and restore the keyboard shortcuts to the default assignments. Place your cursor in the Press New Shortcut Key field. click Reset all. select the shortcut and click Remove. 6. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . 2.Managing keyboard shortcuts You can create your own keyboard shortcuts and set keyboard accelerators. Click Assign. Select Customize from the Add or Remove Buttons submenu. Type a letter to add a Alt keyboard shortcut. A short description of the command is also provided. The new shortcut is added to the Current Keys list. Keyboard shortcuts and accelerators allow users to complete commands without having to use a mouse.

Type a letter to add a Alt keyboard shortcut. press and hold the Ctrl key and type a letter to add a Ctrl keyboard shortcut. Preferences must only be set once. and section objects. Click Assign. and persist with each title you create. select the command from the Commands list. 6. Otherwise. The commands for each category are listed. To remove all custom shortcuts and restore the keyboard shortcuts to the default assignments. Next. Using your keyboard.3. Place your cursor in the Press New Shortcut Key field. The new shortcut is added to the Current Keys list. press the new shortcut sequence you want to add. For example. 5. click Reset all. To remove a shortcut from the Current Keys list. select the shortcut and click Remove. 4. A short description of the command is also provided. The Current Keys box lists the keyboard shortcuts defined for each command. You can complete the following within the Preferences window: General tab  Show buttons for hiding objects in the Title Explorer  Show visibility check boxes in Title Explorer  Configure the Title Explorer  Show HTML published object names in object properties  Use resource names as object names  Enable spell check while typing  Show text formatting marks  Use default IMS metadata when creating objects  Specify the location of your media library  Specify your user name Editors tab  Set editor preferences CourseMill tab  Set CourseMill preferences Auto Save tab  Set auto save preferences Auto Update tab  Specify when to check for program updates Notes tab  Specify notes preferences Grid/Guides tab  Specify grids and guides preferences Publish Strings tab  Specify publish strings preferences Publish Messages tab  Specify publish messages preferences Form Elements tab  Specify form elements preferences Hotkeys tab  Specify hotkeys preferences Showing buttons for hiding objects in the Title Explorer Choose whether to show buttons in the Title Explorer that allow you to hide title. Click the Keyboard tab on the Customize window. Setting Lectora Preferences Use the Preferences window to specify how you want your version of Lectora to perform. Use the Category drop-down list to select the category of the command containing the shortcut you want to add or change. The Title Explorer will display clickable plus (+) and minus (-) icons that allow you to collapse or expand the icons representing objects Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . select whether or not you want the program to perform auto save or auto-update functions. chapter. The key sequence you type is displayed in the Press new shortcut key field.

and the object will be made invisible within the work area. Click the General tab if the Preferences window is not already opened to this tab. 5. If disabled. The visibility state icon is enabled in the Title Explorer. The visibility icons do not affect your title’s functionality while viewing it in Run or Preview mode. You might want these definitions to appear in the same place on the page. A closed eye conceals the corresponding object from view. This could be helpful when working with multiple objects layered on a page. The Preferences window opens. Visibility states are preserved between sessions of Lectora. 6. Click the General tab if the Preferences window is not already opened to this tab. but only once the user has clicked on the corresponding hyperlink. while working with the other. Configuring the Title Explorer By default.residing above the page level. Select Preferences from the File menu. 2. Click OK. the background in the Title Explorer uses a gradient effect. To make it easy to work with these definitions. To turn visibility off. you can uncheck the visibility icon for one of them. and vice versa. Lectora will display a solid white background in the Title Explorer. The Title Explorer will display an eye graphic next to the object that is visible. While in Edit mode. To enable the visibility-state icon in the Title Explorer: 4. Check the Show buttons for hiding objects in the Title Explorer box. Click OK. The gradient color is determined by the color scheme set within your computer’s Display Properties located in the Control Panel. and does not affect the published title. Showing visibility check boxes in Title Explorer Choose whether to show visibility check boxes in the Title Explorer. To enable showing the expand and collapse icons in the Title Explorer: 1. suppose you have two hyperlinks on a page that will display the definitions of the hyperlinked words. Select Preferences from the File menu. To change to a solid white background in the Title Explorer: Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . an open eye displays the corresponding object on the page. Visibility states are preserved between sessions of Lectora. You can change it to a solid background. 3. The icons are enabled in the Title Explorer. Check the Show visibility check boxes in the Title Explorer box. The Preferences window opens. For example. click on the eye and the graphic will disappear in the Title Explorer.

and Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Click the General tab if the Preferences window is not already opened to this tab. To show HTML published object names in the Properties window: 1. Uncheck the Use color gradient background in the Title Explore box. The Preferences window opens. 3. Every object. Select Preferences from the File menu. action and page used within your title will have a unique HTML name. with this option selected. The Preferences window opens. Spelling changes you add to the dictionaries will be reflected in the automatic spell checking results. spaces. You can also right-click on underlined words to select from a list of suggested spellings. Misspelled words will appear underlined in red.1. Check the Use resource names for object names box. Select Preferences from the File menu. When this option is enabled. tabs. the image will appear listed in the Title Explorer as MyImage. 2. If an underlined word is not misspelled. if you drag-and-drop MyImage. Check the Spell check text objects while typing box. Click the General tab if the Preferences window is not already opened to this tab. Showing text formatting marks You can show text formatting marks within text blocks. Click the General tab if the Preferences window is not already opened to this tab. To enable automatically assigning the file name to an object: 1. the HTML object name will appear in the upper-right corner of the General tab within every objects’ Properties window. The Preferences window opens. For example. The background in the Title Explorer changes to a solid white color.jpg into your title. 2. Click OK. 3. Click the General tab if the Preferences window is not already opened to this tab. it can be added to the dictionary. 3. Click OK. Select Preferences from the File menu. Check the Show HTML published object names in object properties box. Click OK. The Preferences window opens. 2. Showing HTML published object names in object properties You can display the corresponding HTML object name for referencing within external HTML code. hard and soft returns. This preference is initially disabled. Using resource names as object names You can automatically assign the file name (minus the extension) to an object as the object name. The red underlines will only be visible while the text block is being edited. Enabling spell check while typing You can have Lectora automatically check the spelling of text as you type it. 2. Select Preferences from the File menu. See also: Checking Spelling To enable automatic spell checking: 1. such as paragraph returns. 3. Click OK.

your user name will appear on them. 3. Notes are helpful when working in a team environment. Click OK. and still want to be able to access the clip art installed with Lectora. If you specify a different location for your Media Library. Specify the folder in the Media Library Folder field or click the Browse button to navigate and select the folder. and can be placed on pages as reminders or additional information. Click OK. the Lectora ClipArt folder is the default directory for the Media Libary Organizer. This location can be changed to a local or network folder where media intended for reuse is stored. Click the General tab if the Preferences window is not already opened to this tab. Click the General tab if the Preferences window is not already opened to this tab. 3. 2. Notes are only displayed in Lectora's Edit mode and are not visible in published titles. 2. Select Preferences from the File menu. See also: Working with the Media Library Organizer To specify the location of your Media Library folder: 1. Specifying your user name If you create notes to add to your title. you can automatically define all the objects that you add to your title to have IMS metadata data elements (IEEE LTSC LOM). Check the Show text formatting marks box. When you install Lectora. Check the Use default IMS metadata when creating objects box. 5. To select the use default IMS metadata preference: 4. To show text formatting marks: 1. When enabled. The Preferences window opens. To quickly enable and disable this feature while working within your title. you should copy or move the entire ClipArt (C:\Program Files\Trivantis\Lectora\ClipArt) directory from Lectora's installation path and paste it into your new Media Library location. 6.page breaks. The media can then be accessed from Lectora and added to any title. The Preferences window opens. Using default IMS metadata when creating objects To save time. Click OK. This eliminates having to manually define each object's IMS metadata data element. See also: Specifying notes preferences Adding a Note Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . See also: Including metadata for an object Specifying the location of your media library Use the Media Library Folder field to specify the location of your shared media library. right-click on a text block and select Show Text Formatting Marks. a check mark appears next to the Show Text Formatting Marks menu item. Click the General tab if the Preferences window is not already opened to this tab. The Preferences window opens. Select Preferences from the File menu. Select Preferences from the File menu.

The Preferences window opens. documents. By default. Click the General tab if the Preferences window is not already opened to this tab. this value is www. 2. specify the Web address of the CourseMill server. type the full file path and name of the corresponding editor’s executable file or use the browse button to locate and select it. If you install the Lectora Publisher (also known as the Lectora Enterprise Edition). com. you can edit the resource by selecting the Edit option from the object’s right-click menu or by selecting the Edit button from the object’s properties window. Setting auto save preferences You can specify how Lectora automatically saves your work. Select Preferences from the File menu. Lectora will automatically reload the modified resource when you return focus to the Lectora title. you must specify your own editing applications for the different media types. the corresponding Suite tool editors are automatically populated on this tab. Setting editor preferences You can specify the editor applications used by Lectora to externally edit resource files used within a title. Select Preferences from the File menu. video. this tab can be ignored. specify the location on the CourseMill server where the CourseMill system resides. In the Path to CourseMill on Host field. Until you have defined a resource editor for a particular resource type. Select Preferences from the File menu. the information specified on this tab will enable you to easily transfer published titles to the server. with the current resource as the editor’s target. 3. 1. enter coursemill in this field. Specify your user name in the User Name field. 2. Click the Editors tab. 2. The Auto Save feature minimizes the loss of work due to Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Click the CourseMill tab. In the CourseMill Host field. the Edit options discussed above will be disabled.CourseMill.To specify your user name: 1. If the CourseMill system was installed with the default settings. and text files). If you save changes to the resource in the external editor. this value is set to /. If you are not using a CourseMill server. The Preferences window opens. For each resource type. 4. This action will then launch the defined editor for the resource type. animations. When you install the Lectora Professional Publishing Suite. Within Lectora. Click OK. 3. audio. To specify the location of the CourseMill server: 1. Setting CourseMill preferences CourseMill® is a learning management system designed and developed by Trivantis Corporation. For each type of editable resource supported by Lectora (images. Click OK. The Preferences window opens. If you are using a CourseMill server. Specify the Web address of the CourseMill server and the location on the CourseMill server where the CourseMill system resides. you can define an external application that edits that resource type. By default. Click OK. 3.

Click the Auto Save tab. Do not rely on Auto Save as a substitute for regularly saving your work by clicking the Save toolbar graphic . at each time interval specified. If Use recovery file for Auto Save option is not selected. To specify your program update preferences: 1. If an update is available. When you save the title. Lectora saves to the original file at each time interval specified.awt file in the directory and renames the temporary file. 4. 2. You can customize the way your notes will appear within your title. Click the Notes tab. Select Preferences from the File menu. Click OK. Click the Auto Update tab. Use Save every n minutes to specify how often you want your title to be automatically saved. In the Default Note Color field. specify the default note color as one of the following: o Emergency Red! o Pink o Yellow Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Select Preferences from the File menu. as well as the amount of minutes between every save occurrence.unexpected computer issues or power outages. Lectora saves a title every five minutes. which is identified by a tilde (~). Enable Check for program updates every n days to have Lectora check for updates and specify the number of days. Select Preferences from the File menu. You must have administrative rights on your computer to set this feature. See also: Adding a Note To use the Notes tab on the Preferences window: 1. Lectora will not overwrite the original . If you want to check for updates now. Follow the on-screen instructions to download and update your version of Lectora. If the Use recovery file for Auto Save option is selected. Specifying notes preferences Add notes throughout a title as a way to share ideas or provide instructions to the other authors of the title. There is also a Use recovery file for Auto Save option that is selected by default. Clear the Auto Save on/off check box to disable the Auto Save feature. The Preferences window opens. See also: Saving a Title To specify your auto save preferences: 1. Specifying when to check for program updates You can specify when Lectora should automatically check for program updates. 2. Lectora deletes the original . The Preferences window opens.awt title. 4. The Preferences window opens. 3. click the Check for Updates Now button. Click OK. Auto Save defaults to on and saves a title every five minutes. 3. The on/off status can be changed. 2. but instead save it to a temporary file. By default. Lectora will notify you.

For grid preferences. objects you move will be pulled toward the closest guide lines. Select the Show Rulers check box to show rulers along the top and left-side of the work area. To specify grid and guide preferences: 1. The Description column lists instances at which the corresponding text in the Value column will be displayed. specify the text style to use when writing notes. Click OK. to more sensitive terminology. In the Text Style field. The Value column lists Lectora default text that is displayed to the student during the corresponding instance in the Description column. which enables you to select from a list of predefined Publish String sets when publishing titles for different audiences and languages. This is useful for accurate placement of objects. Click OK. Publish strings can also be changed here if you are producing content written in a language other than English. use the Color drop-down list to select the color to use for grids. Select the Show Grid check box if you want the grid displayed in the background of the work area. Additional custom Publish String sets can be created. Select the Snap to Grid check box to enable the Snap to Grid feature. 3. Click the Grid/Guides tab. For example. and some program buttons. test questions or form objects. Click Add to add a new string set. The default is 20. Click Delete to delete a string set. Guides are horizontal and vertical lines which originate from the ruler and can be placed anywhere on a page for object alignment. use the Color drop-down list to select the color to use for guides. Use the String Set drop-down to select the string set that you want to customize. Specifying publish strings preferences You can customize the text used in the Lectora runtime. Select Preferences from the File menu bar. 4. 2. 4. Use the Grid Spacing field to specify the grid spacing in pixels. objects you move will be pulled toward the closest grid point. Select the Show Guides check box to show guides in the content area. 3. content generated emails. When the Snap to Grid check box is enabled. Click the Publish Strings tab. you can change the FAILED text message. The Preferences window opens. The Snap to Grid feature enables you to move Lectora-created objects to the nearest grid increment. Click within a ruler and drag the guide onto the page. The Preferences window opens. This enables you to translate and change the publish strings of the exported text file using any text editor and import them back into Lectora. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Click Import to import a text file of a string set. Select Preferences from the File menu. This is useful for accurate placement of objects. The Snap to Guide feature enables you to move Lectora-created objects to the nearest guide increment. Select the row you want to change and alter the text in the Value column as necessary. Specifying grids and guides preferences You can specify preferences for grid and guide features. Click the Snap to Guides checkbox to enable the Snap to Guides feature. When the Snap to Guides check box is enabled.o White o Blue o Green 3. Click Export to save a string set to a text file. that is displayed within test results to students with a non-passing test score. For guide preferences. Change the text displayed within the Test Results window. The guides can be removed from a page by dragging each off the page while holding down the Ctrl key on your keyboard. These are useful for precisely aligning objects such as images. The grid is an alignment and spacing framework that is displayed as a page background. 2. To specify Publish String preferences: 1.

4. Select the Radio Buttons check box to enable customizing the images for radio buttons. Use the Selected list to select an image to use for selected check boxes. Locate and select the image you want to use and click Open. select Custom Image from the list. The Preferences window opens. Select Preferences from the File menu bar. You can also set form elements properties on a title basis. Select from the following warning options: Show warnings for resource sizes Show warnings for unused resources/ variables Show warnings for Macintosh content 4. The Preferences window opens. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . video. Samples are displayed to the right. Click OK. Change the text and click OK to return to the Publish Strings tab. Select this to display warning messages for anything that might not display properly on a Macintosh computer. This can occur with resources that were added to the title but then later deleted. select Custom Image from the list. 8. Select the Show only errors and warnings check box if you want informational messages (displayed in black) to be omitted from the Publish and Error Check windows. Specifying publish messages preferences You can specify the type of messages that are displayed during an error check. Using custom images for these type of form elements will affect the appearance of test and survey questions. 3. Select the Check Boxes check box to enable customizing the images for check boxes. Selections made here will determine the information is displayed during an error check initiated from the Tools menu or by publishing. Lectora will ask during the error-check process if those unused resources and variables should be removed. Repeat Steps 3 through 5 as necessary. Locate and select the image you want to use and click Open. To choose your own image. Use the Selected list to select an image to use for radio buttons that have been selected. Select this to display warnings for any resources (images. audio. 5. Samples are displayed to the right. along with any individual radio buttons or check boxes that are added to a title. 6. 2. and so on) and variables that are not used within the title. Specifying form elements preferences You can use custom images for radio buttons and check boxes. For details. Select the Show HTML Warnings check box to enable the selection of HTML-specific warnings. Click OK. Use the Unselected image list to select an image to use for radio buttons that are not selected. Select Preferences from the File menu bar. Click the Form Elements tab. Select from the available images or import your own images. see Specifying form elements properties. To specify Form Elements preferences: 7. To choose your own image. Use the Unselected image pull-down list to select an image to use for unselected check boxes. Click the Publish Messages tab. To determine which publish messages should be displayed during an error check: 1. Select this to display warnings for any resources used within the title that are larger than 128Kb in size. 9.

The Preferences window opens. click the command you want to update. Add new shortcut keys or replace the default shortcuts. 3. Building a Title This chapter explains how to start building your title using Lectora. Otherwise. click Reset all. Using the list of commands. Using your keyboard. The box under the commands list provides a brief description of each command. 5. Select from the following categories: o File o Edit o Add o Layout o Tools o Mode o Publish o View o Help o Text o Other The commands for each category are listed. Click Assign. Type a letter to add a Alt hotkey. Select Preferences from the File menu bar. Click OK. 2. it is a good idea to review the concepts discussed in How Lectora Works before building titles. you will find it easier to use the information provided in this chapter. Click the Hotkeys tab. To assign custom hotkeys: 1. 6. To remove all custom shortcuts and restore the Hotkey shortcuts to the default assignments. In this chapter. press and hold the Ctrl key and type a letter to add a Ctrl hotkey. The key sequence you type is displayed in the Press new shortcut key field. Select the category of the command containing the shortcut you want to add or change. the following topics are covered:  Creating a Title  Configuring Title Properties  Saving a Title  Saving a Title as a Template Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . The new shortcut is added to the Current keys list. When you understand the essentials behind Lectora. Specifying hotkeys preferences You can assign custom hotkeys to save time and be more efficient. If you are a novice Lectora user. highlight the shortcut and click Remove. The Current keys box lists the hotkeys defined for each command.10. press the new shortcut sequence you want to add. Place your cursor in the Press new shortcut key field. To remove a shortcut from the Current keys list. 4. Click OK.

Enter the name of the new title in the New Title Name field and use the Choose Folder button to select a location to which to save the title. buttons. pages. The new title is displayed in Edit mode and you can begin adding objects to complete its functionality. do one of the following: o From the File menu. 3. Click the Title Wizard tab. If the Lectora launch pad is not already displayed. and navigation. select New Title o Click the New Title toolbar graphic o Type Ctrl+N 2. Respond to the on-screen questions and click Finish to create your title.awt where <title name> is your new title name. Follow these steps to create a title using the Title Wizard: 1. If the Lectora launch pad is not already displayed. select New Title o Click the New Title toolbar graphic o Type Ctrl+N 2. Select from one of the styles in the Title Wizard Gallery and click OK. including pages. Creating a new title Follow these steps to create a new title: 1. This section describes how to create a title by one of the following ways:  Create a title using the Title Wizard  Create a new title (without the Title Wizard)  Open an existing title  Use a template Creating a title using the Title Wizard Use the Title Wizard to quickly generate titles with a pre-designed “look and feel”. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . do one of the following: o From the File menu. Click OK to create the new title. Click the New Title tab if the window is not already opened to this tab. if it is not already opened. The Title Wizard will ask you questions that will enable Lectora to automatically create a functional title for you. The blank title is displayed in Edit mode and you can begin adding objects to complete its functionality.        Working with Chapters Working with Sections Working with Pages Working with Assignable Units Using Page Layouts Working with Frames Using Lectora's Modes How Lectora Organizes Your Content Creating a Title You must first create a title before you can start adding chapters. sections. The default location is \My Documents\My Titles\<title name>\<title name>. and media objects. 3. 4. Notice how the New Title Location changes when you type in your New Title Name.

If the Lectora launch pad is not already displayed. 3.) Otherwise. You would then use this template when creating additional titles. To open one of the listed titles. use one of the many pre-installed templates. You can create and import templates. Select the iPhone gallery for predefined templates designed specifically for the iPhone and iPod Touch. Templates that you have created or imported are stored within the My Templates gallery. double-click the title from the Recently Used Files list (or select it and click OK. Select a color gallery to access over 200 pre-installed templates. select Open an Existing Title o Click the Open toolbar graphic o Type Ctrl+O 2. For example. If the Lectora launch pad is not already displayed. do one of the following: o From the File menu. or access online templates. Select Templates Online to access templates that have been shared online. The window displays the last six titles that you have opened using Lectora. Hundreds of pre-installed templates are available. use the Browse button to search for a title that does not appear in the list. Descriptions and previews are available when you select a template. do one of the following: o From the File menu. including a gallery for the iPhone® and iPod® Touch. you can create a template that contains the layout and all associated text and graphics for that title. select New Title o Click the New Title toolbar graphic o Type Ctrl+N 2. See also: Using Lectora's Modes Using a template Templates are a convenient way to store boilerplate versions of titles that can be used as a starting point for future titles that are created. Your title is displayed in Edit mode and you can begin adding objects to complete its functionality. if your organization has a standard "look and feel" for a title that should be applied to all titles. Use the list to select from a gallery of custom and predefined templates or select from templates available online. Click the Templates tab. Online templates are organized by category. Color categories include: o Aqua o Blue o Brown o Gray o Green o Orange o Purple o Red o Teal o White Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . 1.See also: Using Lectora's Modes Opening an existing title Follow these steps to open an existing title: 1. 3. Click the Open Existing Title tab if the window is not already opened to this tab.

Click Finish to create the new title. Double-click the title graphic in the Title Explorer.o Yellow 3. In the Title Name field. you can set up the overall appearance of your title including page size and alignment. Click OK. and specify the type of title you are creating. The Title Properties window opens. background colors and sounds. Your newly created title is displayed in Edit mode and you can begin adding objects to complete its functionality. Within the Title Properties. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . and default text styles. See also: Saving a title as a template Sharing templates online Using Lectora's Modes Configuring Title Properties Title Properties are especially important. 3. These settings can be changed at any time by revisiting the Title Properties. You can also specify the use of additional files.awt. specify the name of your title as you want it to appear at the top of the Title Explorer. 4. sections or pages. Settings made within the Title Properties will be applied to all pages within your title. Click the General tab if the Title Properties window is not already opened to this tab. Double-click the desired template or select the desired template from the window and click OK. Enter the name of the new title in the New Title Name field and use the Choose Folder button to select a location to which to save the title. The default location is My Documents\My Titles\<title name>\<title name>. or you can specify separate properties for individual chapters. The New Title window opens. See also: Working with Chapters Working with Sections Working with Pages You can complete the following within the Title Properties window: General tab Additional files tab  Change the name of your title  Add additional files to your title  Change a title's page size and alignment Form Elements  Specifying form elements properties Background tab  Change a title's background properties Author Control tab  Change a title's text properties  Protect your title with a password Content tab  Specify the type of title  Setting CD-published titles to run in full-screen mode  Designating a title as a dynamic title Frames tab  Specify frame properties Transitions tab  Set a title's transition properties Changing the name of your title To change the name of your title: 1. 2.

The default page size takes the 15-pixel vertical scroll bar into account for properly displaying content. 2. Choose the Page Alignment for HTML Publishing from the list. See also: Matching Colors Used within Your Title If you choose a background image. The alignment will determine how the content is displayed within the user's browser window for any Web-based. or select Custom to select a custom color from the Color wheel. the browser will cache the image and only load the image one time. published content. You can also choose Centered. the default background image. You can also click on the arrow within the Import button to choose from the following: From File Media Library Select this to navigate and select an image. Click the Background tab. 4. The Title Properties window opens. Double-click the title graphic in the Title Explorer. Specify the following background information: De fau lt Ba ck gr ou nd Co lor De fau lt Ba ck gr ou nd Im ag e Use the list to select the default background color for your pages. Consideration should be made for your intended users. Click OK. and the default background sound used on the pages within your title. 3. Select a predefined color. To change the page size of your title: 1. Click the General tab if the Title Properties window is not already opened to this tab. 2. To use a background image for the pages of your title. select the eye-dropper tool to use a color from elsewhere within your title. The default is Left Justified. See also: Working with the Media Library Organizer You can also use the Background Wizard to create a background for your title. In the Page Size in Screen Pixels box. specify the Width and Height of the page or select the Use Default check box to use the default page size (785 x 600). To change these background properties: 1.Changing a title's page size and alignment Each page within your title will use the default page size and alignment specified within the Title Properties. however. select a previously imported image from the list or click on the Import button to navigate and select the image. and the width of the page size should match the most common resolution of users' monitors. This is a much more efficient Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Lectora will automatically tile that image across and down your page. Select this to launch your media library to select an image. Double-click the title graphic in the Title Explorer. Changing a title's background properties You can change the default background color. The Title Properties window opens. you will not be able to see your background color. If you use a background image that is smaller than your page size.

or Tahoma. It is best to use common. select a previously imported audio file from the list or click on the Import button to navigate and select the audio file. and will repeat. To create a new text style. select the eye-dropper tool to use a color from elsewhere within your title. If you choose a background image. Double-click the title graphic in the Title Explorer. To use a background sound for the pages of your title. Web-friendly fonts such as Arial. Select a predefined color. Lectora does not embed the fonts into the published work. 2. De fau lt Ba ck gr ou nd So un d 3.manner of creating a background as opposed to one large background image that will have a much longer load time. click on the Styles button. Selecting the AICC/SCORM option in this window provides you with the option of using multiple assignable units throughout your title. the background color will not be visible. Text blocks created within your title will be automatically formatted to the selected style. Use the list to select the color to be used for all hyperlinks within your title. unless the image is somewhere transparent. See also: Matching Colors Used within Your Title De fau lt Lin k Co lor 3. See also: Managing text styles Keep in mind that if you are publishing to HTML. The sound will continue playing as users navigate throughout the title. If you do not set this option. Click the Background tab. See also: Working with Assignable Units Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . The Title Properties window opens. Click OK. You can also click on the arrow within the Import button to choose from the following: From File Media Library Select this to navigate and select an audio file. Verdana. Specify the following text information: De fau lt Te xt Sty le Use the list to select a default text style to be used within your title. Specifying the type of title Your type of title should be consistent with the preferred publishing format for your title. Changing a title's text properties You can change the default text style and the default link color used on the pages of your title. Select this to launch your media library to select an audio file. Click OK. you will be unable to add assignable units. To change these text properties: 1. or select Custom to select a custom color from the Color wheel. See also: Working with the Media Library Organizer A background sound will play continuously throughout the entire title.

0 (or old er) Pu bli sh ed Titl e AI CC / SC OR M/ Co urs eM ill (3.To specify the type of title: 1. Double-click the title graphic in the Title Explorer. Click the Content tab. Select from: St This is a title that will be published to either CD-ROM. Use this option if you are running CourseMill 3.0 learning management system.x or above.1.2 conformances or SCORM 2004 for integration in most learning management systems. This is the default. 1. This option will publish your title to SCORM 1. urs eM ill 2. The Title Properties window opens.0. Select the type of title you are publishing. da rd Le ct or a Titl e Co This is a title that is being created for placement on the CourseMill 2. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . 1. Selecting this automatically adds an assignable unit to your title and provides the option of later adding multiple assignable units. 2. a single-file executable or HTML without any extra an specifications. x an d ab ov e) Pu bli sh ed Titl This is a title that needs to be in compliance with AICC or SCORM regulations.

Adding additional files to your title You can add files that you want to launch that are not natively supported by Lectora (for example. Any additional files added to your title will appear within the list on the Additional Files tab of the title properties. Click OK. Click Open and click OK to add the file. If you want to specify the frame size in percentages. If the file is not a supported media type. Lectora will prompt you with a message asking if the file should be added as an additional file. Click the Frames tab.or SCORM-compatible and should not be used for any AICC. and a contents frame. or CourseMill Published titles. PDF files). To add an additional file: 1. Additional files require that the user have the corresponding application on their computer that will open the file. The Top Row Height and Left Column Width fields are enabled based on the frame style you have selected. where the topic information is displayed. You can specify the size of the frames directly in pixels or as a percentage of the total width and height of your pages. 3. Double-click the title graphic in the Title Explorer. Click the Additional files tab. See also: Working with Frames Frames are not AICC. if you have added a PDF as an additional file. Select from one of the predefined frame styles from the Frame Style list. If you want to specify the frame size in pixels. The Title Properties window opens. Frames can be used to subdivide your pages into separate areas. The Title Properties window opens. Click OK. a copy of the file will be placed in an extern folder located within the title directory. 3. Specifying frame properties You can configure the use of frames within your title. To specify the frame properties: 1. select the Specify Size in Percentages check box and specify the height percentage in the Top Row Height field and the width percentage in the Left Column Width field. typically where you would place advertisements (banner ads) or notices. Double-click the title graphic in the Title Explorer. Click the Add File button and browse to the file you want to add. See also: Supported Media Types Protecting your title with a password Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Select the Use Thick Visible Frames check box to display thick borders around each frame. accessing the PDF would require that the user have Adobe Acrobat installed on their computer. Lectora will generate a preview of the style in the Preview box. Specifying the files enables you to publish them along with all other imported resources. uncheck the Specify Size in Percentages check box and specify the height in pixels in the Top Row Height field and the width in pixels in the Left Column Width field. SCORM. For example. 2. For example. 4. Click OK.e 3. a navigation frame where the course menu would be located. 5. you can have a top frame. You can also simply drag-and-drop the additional file directly onto a page. 2. When you add an additional file using the Additional Files tab.

The Title Properties window opens. 3. Use the Unselected image pull-down list to select an image to use for unselected check boxes. During a single editing session. To choose your own image. Double-click the title graphic in the Title Explorer. select Custom Image from the list. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . The Set Author Control Password window opens. Select the Check Boxes check box to enable customizing the images for check boxes. Using custom images for these type of form elements will affect the appearance of test and survey questions. Click the Author Control tab. Click OK. you place a restricted lock on one or more items within a title (and by inheritance. Click the Transitions tab. 4. any item in the title can be placed under author control by either selecting the Author Control option from the right-click context menu for an individual item or by selecting the Author Control check box in the General Properties window for that item. You can select from over 20 different transitions. Locate and select the image you want to use and click Open. If the Author Control password is forgotten.You can protect portions of your work from being changed by other users. 5. Use the Selected list to select an image to use for selected check boxes. Double-click the title graphic in the Title Explorer. Use the Unselected image list to select an image to use for radio buttons that are not selected. Transitions will produce a special effect as users navigate from one page to another. To set your title's transitions: 1. Type the same password in both fields and click OK on the Set Author Control Password window. Select from the available images or import your own images. To choose your own image. 4. Double-click the title graphic in the Title Explorer. Samples are displayed to the right. To specify Form Elements preferences: 3. Once enabled. any children items that are related to the item on which the restriction is placed). Specifying form elements properties You can save custom form elements on a title basis. Select the Radio Buttons check box to enable customizing the images for radio buttons. the author will have full editing capabilities within the title. Setting a title's transition properties You can specify how your pages will load within the title. The Title Properties window opens. 2. Use the Selected list to select an image to use for radio buttons that have been selected. Samples are displayed to the right. To enable author control: 1. Select the Enable Author Control check box to enable the feature and then click Set Password to set a password for the current title. 6. Click the Form Elements tab. along with any individual radio buttons or check boxes that are added to a title. After the correct password has been given. Click OK. With Author Control enabled. an author will only be prompted to enter the Author Control password once. an item or its children cannot be modified in any way within the title unless the Author Control restriction is lifted using the master Author Control password. There is a Slow to Fast slider to determine the speed at which the transition takes place. When you enable Author Control. the author must import the contents of the title into a new title to make any changes to the protected items. The Title Properties window opens. Locate and select the image you want to use and click Open. select Custom Image from the list.

Select a transition from the Transition Type list. as well as frequently throughout title creation. When the title is displayed in a browser. to the location you specify. Click the Contents tab. Select Run title in full screen mode for CD publishing.  Select Save As or Save a Copy of Title from the File menu. 6. Within your title folder. To set your title to run in full-screen for CD publishing: 4. Select Dynamic Title. 8. Click the Contents tab. you can update specific text of an HTML-published title without republishing. The My Titles directory is automatically created on your hard drive when you install Lectora. 5. Publishing your title is not the same as saving. named dyntitle. 9. See also: How Lectora Organizes Your Content You should save your work on a regular basis. To designate a title as a dynamic title: 7. See also: Enabling dynamic text for a text block Saving a Title Lectora organizes the files you use to create your title. Click OK. Click OK. The Title Properties window opens. 3. Click OK. the text blocks that you designate as dynamic text are copied to an associated XML file. Setting CD-published titles to run in full-screen mode You can select to run titles that are published to CD-ROM in full-screen mode. Use Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 .xml. or press Ctrl-S on the keyboard. Use Save As to save and close the original title and open the new copy of the title. When the title is initially published to HTML. You can save your title in different ways:  Select Save Title from the File menu. Double-click the title graphic in the Title Explorer. buttons and hyperlinks are disabled until a the transition is complete. so you should always save before you publish. xml. with all of its media files. Lectora automatically creates a folder specifically for that title in the My Titles directory. The Title Properties window opens. Double-click the title graphic in the Title Explorer. Whenever you create a new title. Transitions are not recommended for titles published to the Web. This is because an entire page needs to load before the transition occurs and a result. Lectora organizes all your media and image files. and adjust the Slow/Fast slider accordingly. text within the title is substituted with text found within dyntitle. Selecting the Dynamic Title option will enable the Dynamic Text property when configuring text blocks within your title.2. See also: Publishing to a CD-ROM Designating a title as a dynamic title With dynamic titles.  Click the Save toolbar graphic. Both menu items save your entire title.

awp file extension. See also: Using a template Importing and exporting templates Sharing templates online Importing and exporting templates You can import and export templates. You can also import and export templates for use in creating titles. Provide descriptions and keywords for quick retrieval. To export a template: 1. To share a template online: 1. 2. Click Cancel to close the window. 3. Click the Templates tab. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Use the pull-down list to select the My Templates folder. typically C:/Program Files/Trivantis/Lectora. 2. Templates saved to this directory will automatically appear within the My Templates gallery on the Templates tab of Lectora’s launch pad for easy access. asking you to enter a file name with the . You must agree to the terms and conditions specified in the Terms of Use before sharing a template online. The Share Template Online window opens. and click Share Online. 3. See also: Setting auto save preferences Saving a title as a template Saving a Title as a Template Use Save Title as Template to create a template with the same framework and dimensions as the current title. Click Cancel to close the window. A window appears. 2. Templates are saved to a Templates directory located in the same location as Lectora was installed. Select the template you want to export and click Export. The Save As window opens. select the template. Select New Title from the File menu.Save a Copy of Title to save a copy of the title and resume working on the original title. Select New Title from the File menu. Next. Click Import to navigate and add a custom template to the list of custom templates. Navigate and save the template to the desired location. To import a template: 1. To save the current title as a template. Click the Templates tab. Click the Templates tab. Custom template files contain the . 4.awp file extension and a description for the new template. This will enable you to add templates for use in creating titles (import) and save a copy of a template (export) in a location for easy access for sharing or emailing. Select New Title from the File menu. Sharing templates online You can store templates online and share them globally with the entire Lectora community. The templates are screened before they are made available online. select Save Title as Template from the File menu.

section or page you want to rename in the Title Explorer. section and pages  Change text properties for chapters. Common Chapter. section or page graphic in the Title Explorer. section or page from the table of contents  Enable author control on chapters. Click Upload. sections and pages  Setting transition properties for chapters. section and pages  Specify inheritance properties for chapters. e na me De Specify a short description of the template. Click OK. The following can be completed within chapter. section and page sizes and alignment  Removing a chapter. yw or ds Au Specify the author. sections and pages Changing the name of a chapter. You can access these properties for a chapter. The template is uploaded. sections and pages are the same. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . 3. section or page by double-clicking the chapter. In the Name field. specify the name of your chapter. tho r 4. or by selecting the chapter. or page graphic of the chapter.3. Section and Page Properties Many properties for chapters. The Properties window opens. Select the Terms of Use check box and complete the following fields: Se Select the subcategory in which to place the template. section or page: 1. Click the General tab if the Properties window is not already opened to this tab. lec t Ca teg ory Fil Specify the name of the template file. scr ipti on Ke Specify keywords used to find the template. section or page and pressing the Enter key. Double-click the chapter . section or page as you want it to appear in the Title Explorer. section . section or page To change the name of your chapter. section and page properties:  Change the name of a chapter. section or page  Change chapter. 2.

Changes applied to the page size and alignment within a chapter's properties will only be applied to the pages contained within the chapter. The Properties window opens. sections. If Use Default is selected. When you remove a section from the Table of Contents. and the width of the page size should match the most common resolution of users' monitors. When you remove a page from the Table of Contents. Consideration should be made for your intended users. In the Page Size in Screen Pixels box. section or page from the table of contents A Table of Contents in Lectora is a menu system that is automatically populated with the chapters. and pages are included in a Table of Contents. Click the General tab if the Properties window is not already opened to this tab. Choose the Page Alignment for HTML Publishing from the list. Double-click the chapter . section or page from the Table of Contents: 1. section and page sizes and alignment When setting these options. 2. Removing a chapter. By default. The page alignment will determine how the content is displayed within the user's browser window for any Web-based. the inherited page size is used. published content. section or page: 1.Changing chapter. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . or page graphic of the chapter. When you remove a chapter from the Table of Contents. The page size and alignment of a page are inherited by default from the chapter (or section) to which it belongs. published content. and the width of the page size should match the most common resolution of users' monitors. See also: Working with Tables of Contents Working with Progress Bars To remove a chapter. The Default page alignment is inherited. Double-click the chapter . To change the page size of your chapter. These settings also affect the Table of Contents progress bar. Click OK. The page size and alignment of a section are inherited by default from the chapter to which it belongs. however you can specify not to include individual chapters. The page size and alignment of a chapter are inherited from the title properties by default. neither the chapter nor any of the pages within the chapter will appear within the Table of Contents. The alignment will determine how the content is displayed within the user's browser window for any Web-based. Changes applied to the page size and alignment within a section's properties will only be applied to the pages contained within the section. section . section or page you want to change in the Title Explorer. Users can use the Table of Contents to navigate to the different areas of your title. sections and pages within your title. section . the page will not appear within the Table of Contents. 4. Changes applied to the page size and alignment within your page's properties will only be applied to the current page. Click the General tab if the Properties window is not already opened to this tab. neither the section nor any of the pages within the section will appear within the Table of Contents. clear the Use Default check box to specify the Width and Height of the pages. sections or pages. consideration should be made for your intended users. section or page you want to change in the Title Explorer. or page graphic of the chapter. The Properties window opens. all chapters. 3.

To change these background properties: 1. Double-click the chapter . section or page you want to change in the Title Explorer. Check the Author Control check box. A chapter's default background image is inherited from the title properties. Click the Background tab. image. and when you enable Author Control on a page. image. Changing background properties for chapters. Double-click the chapter .2. or sound within a chapter's properties will only be applied to the pages contained within the chapter. 3. section or page you want to change in the Title Explorer. Enabling author control on chapters. Click OK. Clear the Include in Table of Contents check box. sections and pages The default background color. Changes applied to the background color. With Author Control enabled. The Properties window opens. and the default background sound are automatically inherited. section . See also: Protecting your title with a password To enable Author Control on a chapter. When you enable Author Control on a section. Select a predefined color. Click OK. and a page's default background color is inherited from the section or chapter to which it belongs. and changes applied to the background color. Changes applied to the background color. section or page: 1. section or page by enabling Author Control. or sound within a page's properties will only be applied to the current page. or sound within a section's properties will only be applied to the pages contained within the section. 2. or page graphic of the chapter. sections and pages You can protect the contents of a chapter. additional authors will not be able to edit the page or any of the objects on the page. 3. Click the General tab if the Properties window is not already opened to this tab. When you enable Author Control on a chapter. or select Custom to select a custom color from the Color wheel. you will not be able to see your background color. section or page unless they have the master Author Control password. image. the default background image. Specify the following background information: De fau lt Ba ck gr ou nd Co lor De A chapter's default background color is inherited from the title properties. The Properties window opens. additional authors will not be able to edit the chapter or any of the sections or pages within the chapter. The master Author Control password must first be set within the Title Properties. Use the list to select a new default background color. or page graphic of the chapter. A section's default Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . additional authors will not be able to edit the contents of the chapter. A section's default background color is inherited from the chapter to which it belongs. additional authors will not be able to edit the section or any of the pages within the section. select the eye-dropper tool to use a color from elsewhere within your title. section . 2. See also: Matching Colors Used within Your Title If you choose a background image.

section or page you want to change in the Title Explorer. select a previously imported audio file from the list or click on the Import button to navigate and select the audio file. To use a new background sound for your chapter. Click OK. 3. or off the page. select a previously imported image from the list or click on the Import button to navigate and select the image. and a page's default background image is inherited from the section or chapter to which it belongs. the browser will cache the image and only load the image one time. section or page. unless the image is somewhere transparent. See also: Working with the Media Library Organizer You can also use the Background Wizard to create a background for your title. and changes applied to the text style and link color within a page's properties will only be applied to the current page. section or page. and a page's default background sound is inherited from the section or chapter to which it belongs. You can also click on the arrow within the Import button to choose from the following: From File Media Library Select this to navigate and select an image. Lectora will automatically tile that image across and down your page. If you use a background image that is smaller than your page size.fau lt Ba ck gr ou nd Im ag e background image is inherited from the chapter to which it belongs. or page graphic of the chapter. Select this to launch your media library to select an audio file. If you choose a background image. Changes applied to the text style and link color within a section's properties will only be applied to the pages contained within the section. Select this to launch your media library to select an image. Click the Background tab. To use a new background image for your chapter. Double-click the chapter . A section's default background sound is inherited from the chapter to which it belongs. You can also click on the arrow within the Import button to choose from the following: From File Media Library Select this to navigate and select an audio file. Changes applied to the text style and link color within a chapter's properties will only be applied to the pages contained within the chapter. a section or only while on a page. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . section . The Properties window opens. the background color will not be visible. Changing text properties for chapters. The sound will continue playing and repeat until the user navigates out of the chapter. Se Working with the Media Library Organizer e als o: A background sound will play continuously while users navigate within a chapter. De fau lt Ba ck gr ou nd So un d A chapter's default background sound is inherited from the title properties. sections and pages The default text style and link color are automatically inherited. To change these text properties: 1. out of the section. This is a much more efficient manner of creating a background as opposed to one large background image that will have a much longer load time. however.

Text blocks created within your chapter. select the eye-dropper tool to use a color from elsewhere within your title. A section's default text style is inherited from the chapter to which it belongs. Lectora does not embed the fonts into the published work. and a page's default link color is inherited from the section or chapter to which it belongs. Click OK. section or page. Transitions will produce a special effect as users navigate from one Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . sections and pages With Lectora’s inheritance capabilities. or page graphic of the chapter. If the object is excluded within the properties of a section. The Properties window opens. Select several obj 3. Setting transition properties for chapters. or Tahoma. Web-friendly fonts such as Arial. and if the object is excluded within the properties of a page. it will not appear on any page within that chapter. sections and pages You can specify how your pages will load within the title. Specifying inheritance properties for chapters. Select a predefined color. To exclude an inherited object: 1. section .2. Objects added directly to a section will appear on every page in that section and objects added directly to a page will appear only on that page. If the object is excluded within the properties of a chapter. click on the Styles button. A section's default link color is inherited from the chapter to which it belongs. 3. any objects added directly to a chapter will appear on every page in that chapter including pages that are inside of a section within the chapter. 2. section or page you want to change in the Title Explorer. Use the list to select a new default text style to be used within your chapter. Specify the following text information: De fau lt Te xt Sty le A chapter's default text style is inherited from the title properties. Verdana. See also: Matching Colors Used within Your Title Textual hyperlinks are underlined and displayed in the selected color. objects you add directly to the main title will appear on every page of your title. Click OK. See also: Understanding Inheritance The inherit tab is available within all chapter. Use the list to select the color to be used for all hyperlinks within your chapter. De fau lt Lin k Co lor A chapter's default link color is inherited from the title properties. section or page. Select from one of the following inheritance options: Inherit all objects from parent Places all objects within the Inherited list. It is best to use common. Furthermore. These objects will co Inherit no objects from parent Places all objects within the Excluded list. To create a new text style. Double-click the chapter . or select Custom to select a custom color from the Color wheel. These objects will no Exclude inheritance of certain Moves objects from one list to the other. Select an object in eith objects list to the other in the direction of the buttons. it will not appear on any page within that section. section and page properties. and a page's default text style is inherited from the section or chapter to which it belongs. Click the Inherit tab. section or page will be automatically formatted to the selected style. See also: Managing text styles Keep in mind that if you are publishing to HTML. then the object will be excluded from that page.

and adjust the Slow/Fast slider accordingly. Chapters are the largest unit of organization in a title. buttons and hyperlinks are disabled until the transition is complete. To set transitions: 1. and changes applied to the transition type within a page's properties will only be applied to the current page. The Chapter Properties window opens. a chapter graphic appears in the Title Explorer. Changes applied to the transition type within a section's properties will only be applied to the pages contained within the section. Double-click the chapter graphic of the chapter you want to change in the Title Explorer. you can specify the following within the Chapter Properties window: General tab Inherit tab  Change the name of a chapter  Specify a chapter's inheritance properties Transitions tab  Change a chapter's page size and alignment  Set a chapter's transition properties  Remove a chapter from the table of contents  Enable author control for a chapter Background tab  Change a chapter's background properties  Change a chapter's text properties Adding a chapter To add a chapter to your title. 3. Transitions are not recommended for titles published to the Web. You can select from over 20 different transitions. See also: Understanding the Book Metaphor This section describes:  Adding a chapter Once you have added a chapter. and can be applied to a chapter. select Chapter    Select the Add Chapter toolbar graphic Right-click and select New > Chapter Type Ctrl+1 When you add the new chapter. Select a transition from the Transition Type list. section or page.page to another. This is because an entire page needs to load before the transition occurs and a result. but they can contain sections and pages. The transition type is automatically inherited. highlight the location in the title where you want to add the chapter. There is a Slow to Fast slider to determine the speed at which the transition takes place. Chapters cannot contain other chapters. in the Title Explorer. Changes applied to the transition type within a chapter's properties will only be applied to the pages contained within the chapter. Click the Transitions tab. Click OK. and do one of the following:  From the Add menu. 2. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Working with Chapters This section describes how to add chapters to your title without using the Title Wizard.

A section is the second largest unit of organization in a title. Lectora will attempt to assign a number to the new section. You can easily re-order items in the Title Explorer by clicking on them. a section graphic appears in the Title Explorer in the chapter (or section) you selected. Lectora will attempt to assign a number to the new chapter. and while holding down the left mouse button. or if you would like to rename the section. and while holding down the left mouse button.  The new chapter is inserted after the object that was highlighted in the Title Explorer. dragging the item within the Title Explorer to its new location. highlight the chapter (or section) in the title to which you want to add the section (or sub-section). click on the text located next to the section graphic in the Title Explorer. and the item will be moved. Once the location is chosen. or if you would like to rename the chapter. If the sequence is out-of-order. you can specify the following within the Section Properties window: General tab Inherit tab Change the name of a section   Specify a section's inheritance properties Transitions tab  Change a section's page size and alignment  Set a section's transition properties  Remove a section from the table of contents  Enable author control for a section Background tab  Change a section's background properties  Change a section's text properties Adding a section To add a section to your title.  Working with Sections This section describes how to add sections to your title. and do one of the following:  From the Add menu. release the left mouse button. and enter the new name for the chapter.   The new section is inserted into the chapter or section that was highlighted in the Title Explorer. Sections can contain pages or other sections. See also: Understanding the Book Metaphor This section describes:  Adding a section Once you have added a section. dragging the item within the Title Explorer to its new location. called sub-sections. You can easily re-order items in the Title Explorer by clicking on them. release the left mouse button. in the Title Explorer. select Section    Select the Add Section toolbar graphic Right-click and select New > Section Type Ctrl+2 When you add the new section. Once the location is chosen. and the item will be moved. click on the text located next to the chapter graphic in the Title Explorer. If the sequence is out-of-order.  Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . and enter the new name for the section.

an external XML file containing metadata. you can specify the following within the Page Properties window: General tab Inherit tab  Change the name of a page  Specify a page's inheritance properties  Change a page's size and alignment Transitions tab  Remove a page from the table of contents  Set a page's transition properties  Enable author control on a page Background tab  Change a page's background properties  Change a page's text properties Metadata tab  Include metadata on a page Adding a page To add a page to your title. The metadata can be specified as custom metadata. See also: Understanding the Book Metaphor This section describes:  Adding a page Once you have added a page. It typically includes information such as a description of the object.  Including metadata on a page You can associate metadata with a page. and the item will be moved. and enter the new name for the page. The pages are what your users will see when they are viewing the published title. select Page    Select the Add Page toolbar graphic Right-click and select New > Page Type Ctrl+3 When you add the new page. You can easily re-order items in the Title Explorer by clicking on them. Metadata added to objects within a title that is published strictly to HTML will be written directly to the resulting HTML pages containing the objects. Once the location is chosen. A page is the smallest unit of organization within your title. If the sequence is out-of-order. Lectora will attempt to assign a number to the new page. the date it was created.   The new page is inserted into the chapter or section that was highlighted in the Title Explorer. release the left mouse button. the author. Search engines look within metadata for relevant information to the term that was searched. Metadata is data about data. or as name/value pairs using predefined IMS Metadata Data Elements following the IEEE LTSC LOM standard. a page graphic appears in the Title Explorer in the chapter (or section) you selected. click on the text located next to the page graphic in the Title Explorer. dragging the item within the Title Explorer to its new location. To include metadata on your page: Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 .Working with Pages This section describes how to add pages to your title. and while holding down the left mouse button. or CourseMill published titles. or if you would like to rename the page. the metadata will be published as standard XML metadata into the accompanying imsmanifest. and do one of the following:  From the Add menu.xml file for any AICC. Within Lectora objects. and so on. SCORM. highlight the chapter (or section) in the title to which you want to add the page. in the Title Explorer.

and you publish to AICC. Assignable units cannot contain other assignable units. Select a predefined data element from the Name combo box and specify a data element value from the Value edit/combo box. but they can contain chapters. The Page Properties window 2. Jumps between assignable units on a Web-published title violate the AICC guidelines for LMS direction of flow between assignable units. Double-click the page graphic opens. of the page you want to change in the Title Explorer. Click OK. Select this to import an external XML file containing metadata. This section describes:  Adding an assignable unit Once you have added an Assignable Unit. an assignable unit that encompasses the entire title is generated. Click the Add button to open the Metadata Data Element Entry window.2 (IEEE LTSC LOM) required IMS Metadata data elements. When you select AICC/SCORM in the Title Properties window. tests. Click the Metadata tab. An assignable unit is the largest unit of organization in an AICC/SCORM published title.1. With the addition of multiple assignable units. IMS Metadata Data Elements Select this to display a pre-populated list of name value pairs for all the SCORM 1. Select Use Metadata and select one of the following metadata options: Custom Metadata Use external XML file for custom Metadata Select this to display the Custom Metadata text field for you to directly enter custom metadata. Clear this option if you do not want the metadata included in the published title. Select OK to accept the data element. sections. you can specify the following within the Assignable Unit Properties window: General tab Inherit tab  Change the name of an assignable unit  Specify an assignable unit's inheritance properties Assignable Unit Properties tab  Change an assignable unit's page size and alignment  Specify assignable unit properties  Remove an assignable unit from the table of contents Prerequisites tab  Enable author control for an assignable unit  Specify assignable unit prerequisites Background tab  Change an assignable unit's background properties  Change an assignable unit's text properties Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . SCORM or CourseMill. several new restrictions have been added to AICC/SCORM-published title materials generated by Lectora:  Jumps between assignable units are only supported when publishing the content to SCORM (disconnected). an assignable unit encompassing the entire title is automatically created. and/or pages. Select from previously entered data elements from the Name/Value lists and click Edit or Remove to edit or remove the selected element. 4. Working with Assignable Units Assignable units are specific to AICC/SCORM titles.  There must always be at least one assignable unit defined within the title. 3. Publish this object’s Metadata is checked by default so that the metadata is included in the published title. If this option is not selected.

release the left mouse button. Consideration should be made for your intended users. and enter the new name for the assignable unit.  Changing the name of an assignable unit The name of your assignable unit is used by the AICC/SCORM learning management system. or if you would like to rename the assignable unit. the Assignable Unit will be converted to a SCO (the SCORM equivalent). You can easily re-order items in the Title Explorer by clicking on them. The Assignable Unit Properties window opens. If the sequence is out-of-order.   The new assignable unit is inserted after the chapter or assignable unit that was highlighted in the Title Explorer. 3. This is the name that the course will be referred to within the system. To change the page size of your assignable unit: 1. Double-click the assignable unit graphic of the assignable unit you want to change in the Title Explorer. and do one of the following:  From the Add menu. dragging the item within the Title Explorer to its new location. Click the General tab if the Assignable Unit Properties window is not already Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . click on the text located next to the assignable unit graphic in the Title Explorer. To add an assignable unit. select Assignable Unit  Right-click and select New > Assignable Unit  Type Ctrl+0 When you add the new assignable unit. in the Title Explorer. If you choose not to select this option and still publish to AICC/SCORM. Changes applied to the page size and alignment within your assignable unit's properties will only be applied to the pages contained within the assignable unit. Double-click the assignable unit graphic of the assignable unit you want to rename in the Title Explorer. and while holding down the left mouse button. See also: Specifying the type of title When publishing to SCORM. select the location within the title into which you want to add the new assignable unit. In the Assignable Unit Name field. and the width of the page size should match the most common resolution of users' monitors. specify the name of your assignable unit as you want it to appear in the Title Explorer and as it will be referenced within your AICC/SCORM learning management system. When this option is set. published content.Adding an assignable unit You can only add assignable units if you have selected the AICC/SCORM Published Title check box in the Content tab of the Title Properties window. an assignable unit will automatically appear in the title. Once the location is chosen. Lectora will attempt to assign a number to the new assignable unit. your entire title will be considered the assignable unit. and the item will be moved. The Assignable Unit Properties window opens. The alignment will determine how the content is displayed within the user's browser window for any Web-based. Click OK. 2. Click the General tab if the Assignable Unit Properties window is not already opened to this tab. Changing an assignable unit's page size and alignment The page size and alignment of your assignable unit are inherited from the title properties by default. To change the name of your assignable unit: 1. an assignable unit graphic appears in the Title Explorer.

To change these background properties: Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . the page size you specified in the title properties will apply. clear the Use Default check box to specify the Width and Height of the assignable unit's pages. Click OK. This setting also affects the Table of Contents progress bar. sections or pages within the assignable unit will appear within the Table of Contents. This includes all pages within the assignable unit and all objects on those pages. Click the General tab if the Assignable Unit Properties window is not already opened to this tab. The Default page alignment is inherited from the title properties. The Assignable Unit Properties window opens. Double-click the assignable unit graphic of the assignable unit you want to change in the Title Explorer. sections or pages. or sound within your assignable unit's properties will only be applied to the pages contained within the assignable unit. none of the chapters. 3. Changes applied to the background color. Click the General tab if the Assignable Unit Properties window is not already opened to this tab. 3. and the default background sound are inherited from the title properties by default. additional authors will not be able to edit the contents of the assignable unit unless they have the master Author Control password. Check the Author Control check box. 2. image. 4. See also: Working with Tables of Contents Working with Progress Bars To remove an assignable unit from the Table of Contents: 1. Click OK. 2. Removing an assignable unit from the table of contents A Table of Contents in Lectora is a menu system that is automatically populated with the chapters. Click OK. Choose the Page Alignment for HTML Publishing from the list. The master Author Control password must first be set within the Title Properties. If Use Default is selected. Users can use the Table of Contents to navigate to the different areas of your title. The Assignable Unit Properties window opens. sections. however you can specify not to include individual chapters. When you remove an assignable unit from the Table of Contents. Clear the Include in Table of Contents check box. sections and pages within your title. Users will not be able to navigate to any area of the assignable unit using the Table of Contents. In the Page Size in Screen Pixels box. all chapters. Double-click the assignable unit graphic of the assignable unit you want to change in the Title Explorer. By default. Changing an assignable unit's background properties The default background color. 3. 2. Enabling author control for an assignable unit You can protect the contents of an assignable unit by enabling Author Control. With Author Control enabled. See also: Protecting your title with a password To enable Author Control for an assignable unit: 1.opened to this tab. the default background image. and pages are included in a Table of Contents.

Specify the following background information: Default Background Color The default background color inherited from the title properties is specified. Lectora will automatically tile that image across and down your page. You can also click on the arrow within the Import button to choose from the following: From File Media Library Select this to navigate and select an image. See also: Working with the Media Library Organizer You can also use the Background Wizard to create a background for your title. Click the Background tab. You can also click on the arrow within the Import button to choose from the following: From File Media Library Select this to navigate and select an audio file. Select this to launch your media library to select an audio file. select the eye-dropper tool to use a color from elsewhere within your title. select a previously imported image from the list or click on the Import button to navigate and select the image. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . The Assignable Unit Properties window opens. If you choose a background image. however.1. you will not be able to see your background color. Select this to launch your media library to select an image. See also: Working with the Media Library Organizer A background sound will play continuously while users navigate within the assignable unit. or select Custom to select a custom color from the Color wheel. the browser will cache the image and only load the image one time. If you use a background image that is smaller than your page size. Use the list to select a new default background color. unless the image is somewhere transparent. Default Background Sound The default background sound inherited from the title properties is specified. See also: Matching Colors Used within Your Title If you choose a background image. Select a predefined color. 2. To use a new background image for the pages of your assignable unit. the background color will not be visible. select a previously imported audio file from the list or click on the Import button to navigate and select the audio file. This is a much more efficient manner of creating a background as opposed to one large background image that will have a much longer load time. To use a new background sound for the pages of your assignable unit. Double-click the assignable unit graphic of the assignable unit you want to change in the Title Explorer. Default Background Image The default background image inherited from the title properties is specified. The sound will continue playing and repeat until the user navigates out of the assignable unit or closes the title.

Verdana. Double-click the assignable unit graphic of the assignable unit you want to change in the Title Explorer. See also: Matching Colors Used within Your Title Textual hyperlinks are underlined and displayed in the selected color. Click OK. Specify the following text information: Default Text Style The default text style inherited from the title properties is specified. Changes applied to the default text style and default link color within your assignable unit's properties will only be applied to the pages contained within the assignable unit. These objects w . Use the list to select a new default text style to be used within your assignable unit. 2. Furthermore. Select from one of the following inheritance options: Inherit all objects from parent Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 Places all objects within the Inherited list. To create a new text style. It is best to use common. See also: Managing text styles Keep in mind that if you are publishing to HTML.3. Select a predefined color. section and page properties. Click OK. Click the Background tab. Double-click the assignable unit graphic of the assignable unit you want to change in the Title Explorer. Changing an assignable unit's text properties The default text style and link color are inherited from the title properties by default. any objects added directly to a chapter will appear on every page in that chapter including pages that are inside of a section within the chapter. or Tahoma. it will not appear in any of the chapters. To change these text properties: 1. select the eye-dropper tool to use a color from elsewhere within your title. click on the Styles button. sections. Use the list to select the color to be used for all hyperlinks within your assignable unit. To exclude an inherited object: 1. Lectora does not embed the fonts into the published work. or select Custom to select a custom color from the Color wheel. The Assignable Unit Properties window opens. If an object is excluded within the properties of an assignable unit. 3. The Assignable Unit Properties window opens. chapter. Web-friendly fonts such as Arial. Text blocks created within your assignable unit will be automatically formatted to the selected style. Objects added directly to a section will appear on every page in that section and objects added directly to a page will appear only on that page. or pages contained within the assignable unit. See also: Understanding Inheritance The inherit tab is available within all assignable unit. 2. Default Link Color The default link color inherited from the title properties is specified. Click the Inherit tab. Specifying an assignable unit's inheritance properties With Lectora’s inheritance capabilities. objects you add directly to the main title will appear on every page of your title and are automatically inherited by assignable units.

Select the required prerequisite assignable units by checking the boxes next to the assignable unit names in the list. If there are multiple assignable units. Click OK. Specify the score that marks the threshold where a user will be considered to have passed the assignable unit. By default. 2. The Assignable Unit Properties window opens. Specify the following information: System ID Developer ID Description This specifies the system identifier of the assignable unit within the current title. the value is set to Lesson. You can select several objects by holding down the Ctrl key while selecting multiple objects. Specify a description of the assignable unit. a student can be required to complete two assignable units before advancing to a third assignable unit. The Assignable Unit Properties window opens. If you leave this field blank. For example. Select se objects. By default. Click the Prerequisites tab 2. Double-click the assignable unit graphic of the assignable unit you want to change in the Title Explorer. To set assignable unit prerequisites: 1. Double-click the assignable unit graphic of the assignable unit you want to change in the Title Explorer. Lectora will automatically supply this value with 100 points times the total number of graded tests within the assignable unit. These objects w Moves objects from one list to the other. Specify the maximum number of points (score) that a user can receive when completing this title. Click OK. Assignable Unit Type Maximum Score Mastery Score Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . 3. prerequisites can be set within the individual assignable units' properties. 3. Specifying assignable unit prerequisites A title can contain multiple assignable units.Inherit no objects from parent Exclude inheritance of certain objects Places all objects within the Excluded list. the value is set to 75% of the maximum score of all tests combined within the assignable unit. Select an object in one list to the other in the direction of the buttons. Specifying assignable unit properties You can provide AICC/SCORM-related information as it pertains to each assignable unit. This is the entry that will appear in most online catalogs for the assignable unit when the title is published to an AICC/SCORM learning management system. To specify AICC/SCORM-related information for an assignable unit: 1. select whether All of the following selected Assignable Units or Any of the following selected Assignable Units are prerequisites for the current assignable unit. If more than two assignable units are checked. Specify the developer or author of the assignable unit. The learning management system will ensure the prerequisites are fulfilled before allowing the student to access the assignable unit. Click the Assignable Unit Properties tab. Specify the short description for the type of assignable unit within the learning management system.

Select Page Layouts from the Layout menu to add your own custom layouts to the layout list. Lectora will create a placeholder for the text. This section covers the following topics:  Applying a page layout to a page  Creating a custom page layout  Replacing a page layout  Deleting a custom page layout  Importing and exporting page layouts Applying a page layout to a page When you apply a page layout to a page. Select the page you want to change in the Title Explorer. and then begin each page with that same layout to ensure consistency. To apply a page layout to a page: 1.Max Time Allowed Specify the maximum time that you want users to be able to spend within the assignable unit. customize the pre-defined layouts. images. You can use page layouts to apply a consistent design to multiple pages. if your title will consist of a number of pages containing an image and corresponding text. select the layout you want from the Page Layout list and click the Page Layout toolbar graphic located to the right of the list. Predefined layouts include the following: Blank Image and bullets columns Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 Title. Used in conjunction with Max Time Allowed. and a placeholder for the image. Lectora puts placeholders on your page for the components that comprise the page layout. Click OK. and import and export layouts so they can be shared in a team. use the list to select the action to take when the max time allowed has elapsed. if you apply the Image and text column page layout to a page. you can use a page layout to ensure that the image and text are always in the same location on those pages. The placeholders are boxes with dotted lines into which you can add text. audio. Time Limit Action 3. For example. they will automatically use the page layout selected. You can apply predefined layouts to your pages or you can create your own custom layouts for use within your title. Page layouts provide a convenient means of creating multiple pages with the same design and organization. For example. Using Page Layouts Page layouts determine how objects are placed on your page. If you add additional pages to your title. Video and text . video or other Lectora objects. The page layout for the page you selected is changed and the placeholders appear on the page. You can then populate these areas with your text and image. When a new page is added. it will use the layout that is currently selected in the layout list on the insert toolbar. On the Insert toolbar. Leave this field empty if you want to give users unlimited time to access the assignable unit. 2. This enables authors that are creating multiple similar content pages to create their layout once.

Select Page Layouts from the Layout menu. In the Layouts Name window. Select the page layout that you want to replace and click the Replace layout with current page layout button. Click the Add new layout from current page layout button. Click Done to exit the Page Layouts window. image and bullets Video and text column Video and text row Video and bullets columns Video and bullets rows Title. suppose you have a page that contains a paragraph of text on the left. Animation and text Title.Title Only Title and Subtitle Title and Text Title and bullets Title and two column text Title and two column bullets Image and text column Image and text row Image and bullets rows Title. Instead of creating a new custom page layout. you can also replace an existing layout based on a page within your title. the page layout will contain a place holder for text on the left. 3. 4. image and text Title. The new layout is added to the list of available page layouts. If you create a custom page layout based off that page. Predefined layouts provided by Lectora cannot be deleted. 5. The Page Layouts window opens. Select the page in the Title Explorer from which you want to define the layout. Animation and bullets Creating a custom page layout You can create a custom page layout based on a page within your title. Click Done. 4. specify a name for the new page layout and click OK. Replacing a page layout You can replace an existing page layout with a new page layout that matches the current page layout. To update a page layout to match the current page layout: 1. Video and bullets Animation and text column Animation and text row Animation and bullets columns Animation and bullets rows Title. 2. For example. Deleting a custom page layout You can delete custom page layouts you are not using. Select the page in the Title Explorer from which you want to create the layout. See also: Replacing a page layout To create the custom page layout: 1. and a textual caption beneath the image. 2. The Page Layouts window opens. a place holder for an image on the right. an image to the right of that text. To delete a page layout: Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Select Page Layouts from the Layout menu. and another place holder for text beneath the image. The Layouts Name window opens. 3.

Click Import Layout to navigate and add a custom layout to the list of available page layouts. and change the content in each region at different times based on various interactions or automation. 6. Navigate and save the layout to the desired location. For example. The possibilities are limitless and Lectora provides you with a wide variety of frame styles from which to choose.1. banner ads. 2. To export a page layout: 5. Click Done. This section describes:  Using frames within your title Once you have added frames to your title. To import a page layout: 4.alt file extension. Select the custom page layout you want to delete and click Delete Layout. The Page Layouts window opens. The Save As window opens. Frames are useful for navigation. Click Done. and more. while yet another area of the screen can be the main area where title information and/or tests are presented. Custom layout files contain the . Click Done. Importing and exporting page layouts You can import and export page layouts. Select Page Layouts from the Layout menu. you can divide your title’s pages into multiple regions. 5. The Page Layouts window opens. The content here is always changing in response to the selections made in the left frame. another region on the screen can hold varying advertisements or instructions. Select Page Layouts from the Layout menu. Select the layout you want to export and click Export Layout. 7. This way. 3. 6. logos. This will enable you to add page layouts for use within your titles (import) and save a copy of a page layout (export) in a location for easy access for sharing or emailing. one region of the screen can always contain buttons for navigating through the title. Using frames. The custom page layout is removed from the list. a very common title design is to use the Contents frame style. which features two frames:  A narrow vertical left frame: Used for a title-wide or global navigation menu.  A wide right-side frame: Contains the main body of the title. decide which content will go in which regions. Working with Frames Lectora enables you to incorporate frames into your title design. The Page Layouts window opens. 8. you can specify the following within the Frame Properties window: General tab Transitions tab  Change the name of a frame  Set a frame's transition properties Background tab  Change a frame's background properties  Change a frame's text properties Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Select Page Layouts from the Layout menu.

Lectora will generate a preview of the style in the Preview box. the buttons or links can refer to pages within the main frame of the title. a narrow top frame for banner advertisements. Using frames within your title You can incorporate frames into your title design. Select this to divide the window into three frames: a narrow top frame. Select this to vertically split the window into two same-size frames on the left and right. When creating navigation components. It is best to add frames to your title before you have created any chapters. Double-click the title graphic in the Title Explorer. 2. you will be asked to provide the referring frame. Select this to divide the window into a narrow right frame and wide main frame. and large main frame. Click the Frames tab. Select this to divide the window into two frames: a narrow top frame and large main frame. Select this to horizontally split the window into two same-size frames on the top and bottom.or SCORM-compatible and should not be used for any AICC. or CourseMill Published titles. Select this to divide the window into two frames: a narrow bottom frame and large main frame. This bottom frame can be useful for banner advertisements or navigation buttons. If you want to specify the frame size in pixels. This option is set as the default. The Title Properties window opens. a large main frame split near the top. if one frame contains your title's navigation. or pages. Select from one of the predefined frame styles from the Frame Style list. Any objects added directly to the frame will appear on every page in that frame including pages that are inside of a chapter or section. sections. The top frame can be useful for navigation buttons or for banner advertisement. and a large main frame for content.   Frames are not AICC. To add frames to your title: 1. an upper left corner frame for a logo. Select the Use Thick Visible Frames check box to display thick borders around each frame. Select this to divide the window into a narrow left frame and wide main frame. For instance. Select this to divide the window into four frames: a narrow left frame for contents. and then add pages according to where they fit within your frames. select the Specify Size in Percentages check box and specify the height percentage in the Top Row Height field and the width percentage in the Left Column Width field. Frames function in the same way as a chapter or a section. 3. uncheck the Specify Size in Percentages check box and specify the Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . You can specify the size of the frames directly in pixels or as a percentage of the total width and height of your pages. SCORM. and a narrow frame along the top right portion of the window. Frames can also refer to one another. The top frame can be useful for banner advertisements or logos. 4. Select this to divide the window into three frames: a narrow left frame that runs from top to bottom. a narrow left frame. If you want to specify the frame size in percentages. Select from the following predefined frame styles: No frames Contents Top Banner and Contents Header Four Pane Split Footer Horizontal Split Vertical Split Banner and Contents Contents on Right Side Select this if you do not want to apply a frame style. The Top Row Height and Left Column Width fields are enabled based on the frame style you have selected.

Use the list to select a new default background color for the pages within your frame. sections. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . 2. Lectora will automatically tile that image across and down your page. You can also click on the arrow within the Import button to choose from the following: From File Media Library Select this to navigate and select an image. Double-click the frame graphic of the frame you want to rename in the Title Explorer. you will not be able to see your background color. The Frame Properties window opens. Default Backgrou nd Image The default background image inherited from the title properties is specified. Changing the name of a frame To change the name of your frame: 1. the browser will cache the image and only load the image one time. Changes applied to the background color. Your frames will be visible as icons in the Title Explorer. You can now add chapters. and objects into the frames. To change these background properties: 1. however. Click OK. Select a predefined color. This is a much more efficient manner of creating a background as opposed to one large background image that will have a much longer load time. or select Custom to select a custom color from the Color wheel. select a previously imported image from the list or click the Import button to navigate and select an image. Changing a frame's background properties The default background color. select the eye-dropper tool to use a color from elsewhere within your title. If you use a background image that is smaller than your page size. and the default background sound are inherited from the title properties by default. Click the Background tab. 3. 2. To use a new background image for the pages of your frame. Double-click the frame graphic of the frame you want to change in the Title Explorer. the default background image. See also: Working with the Media Library Organizer You can also use the Background Wizard to create a background for your title. Select this to launch your media library to select an image. Click OK. The Frame Properties window opens. image. Specify the following background information: Default Backgrou nd Color The default background color inherited from the title properties is specified. 5. or sound within your frame's properties will only be applied to the pages contained within the frame. Click the General tab if the Frame Properties window is not already opened to this tab.height in pixels in the Top Row Height field and the width in pixels in the Left Column Width field. specify the name of your frame as you want it to appear in the Title Explorer. See also: Matching Colors Used within Your Title If you choose a background image. In the Frame Name field. pages.

If you choose a background image. Transitions will produce a special effect as users navigate from one page to another within the frame. Setting a frame's transition properties The transition type is inherited from the title properties by default. It is best to use common. Default Link Color The default link color inherited from the title properties is specified. Click the Background tab. 3. To create a new text style. 2. Double-click the frame graphic of the frame you want to change in the Title Explorer. There is a Slow to Fast Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Click OK. To change these text properties: 1. You can select from over 20 different transitions. unless the image is somewhere transparent. Click OK. See also: Matching Colors Used within Your Title Textual hyperlinks are underlined and displayed in the selected color. the background color will not be visible. Default Backgrou nd Sound The default background sound inherited from the title properties is specified. Select this to launch your media library to select an audio file. Use the list to select the color to be used for all hyperlinks created on pages within your frame. Changes applied to the default text style and default link color within your frame's properties will only be applied to the pages contained within the frame. The Frame Properties window opens. Select a predefined color. The sound will continue playing and repeat until the user closes the title. or Tahoma. Verdana. 3. Changing a frame's text properties The default text style and link color are inherited from the title properties by default. Specify the following text information: Default Text Style The default text style inherited from the title properties is specified. You can also click on the arrow within the Import button to choose from the following: From File Media Library Select this to navigate and select an audio file. To use a new background sound for the pages of your frame. Lectora does not embed the fonts into the published work. See also: Working with the Media Library Organizer A background sound will play continuously while users navigate within the title. click on the Styles button. Web-friendly fonts such as Arial. Changes applied to the transition type within your frame's properties will only be applied to the pages contained within the frame. or select Custom to select a custom color from the Color wheel. Text blocks created on pages within your frame will be automatically formatted to the selected style. select the eye-dropper tool to use a color from elsewhere within your title. select a previously imported sound file from the list or click the Import button to navigate and select a sound file. See also: Managing text styles Keep in mind that if you are publishing to HTML. Use the list to select a new default text style to be used within your frame.

press Esc on your keyboard. To exit Preview mode. and actions are active. links. Preview Mode (F11): Preview mode shows your title in a centered background outside of the Lectora interface. Select a transition from the Transition Type list. Using Lectora's Modes Lectora provides five modes in which to view your title. enabling you to run the content of your title. click the Debug toolbar graphic. a debug window logs all actions executed and all variable manipulations as you preview the functionality of your title. or press F11 on your keyboard. click the Preview toolbar graphic. This functions identically the same as when in Run mode. All actions on the page are active. select Edit from the Mode menu. All buttons. and adjust the Slow/Fast slider accordingly. To view a page within your browser. This is because an entire page needs to load before the transition occurs and a result. you are no longer viewing your title within the Lectora interface.slider to determine the speed at which the transition takes place. and actions are active. enabling you to run the content of your title. select Preview in Browser Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . click the Run toolbar graphic. select Debug from the Mode menu. In addition. links. Transitions are not recommended for titles published to the Web. you may view your title with all buttons. 2. See also: Setting debug options Saving your debug log Printing your debug log Clearing your debug log Changing variables in debug mode Preview in Browser (F9): Preview in Browser mode shows the title in a chosen browser. Click OK. and actions active. When you create a new title. 3. or press F12 on your keyboard. it will navigate to the next page. The Frame Properties window opens. or press F10 on your keyboard. all buttons. but because only a single page is published. however. it will default to Edit mode. These modes will enable you to preview and test your titles before publishing them for distribution. Run Mode (F10): In Run mode. you will be returned to Edit mode. use your keyboard's Page Up and Page Down keys to navigate between pages in your title. To view your title in Preview mode. While in Edit mode. select Preview from the Mode menu. select Run from the Mode menu. Edit Mode (F12): Edit mode is the working mode in which you create your title and edit the changes. Double-click the frame graphic of the frame you want to change in the Title Explorer. click the Edit toolbar graphic. in run mode. To view your title in Debug mode. buttons and hyperlinks are disabled until the transition is complete. In Debug mode. For example. Click the Transitions tab. Be sure to switch back to Edit mode when you want to continue working on the title. when you click on the Next button within your title. links. To view your title in run mode. and test its functionality while having your Title Explorer in view. To view your title in Edit mode. To set your frame's transitions: 1. When you close the debug window. navigation to other pages will not function. Debug Mode: Debug mode is similar to Run mode. and test its functionality while having your Title Explorer in view.

This includes the transfer of test results as well as other communications. That is. See also: Working With Variables Include all With this selected. See also: Working With Variables Include all Variable Writes With this selected. if the variable is modified through a question. along with details of what triggered the action. With this Communications selected. Use the Debug window to complete these tasks:  Save your debug log  Print your debug log  Clear your debug log  Change variable values in debug mode Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Include all LMS This option is only available if you are publishing with Debug mode enabled. print. change contents actions. or press F9 on your keyboard. Setting debug options You can specify the type of information you would like displayed within the debug window. click the Preview in Browser toolbar graphic. To set your debug options: 1. form object. 4.from the Mode menu. form objects. Select any of the following: Include all Variable Reads With this selected. the Debug Window will display an "Action fired!" message every time an Actions Triggered action is triggered. and clear your debug log as well as manipulate variable values when debugging your title. Select the information you would like displayed within the Debug Window. you can save. any POST or GET methods used to communicate within the title will be posted to the debug window when they are executed. the Debug Window will log all communications with the learning management system. Include all HTTP This option is only available if you are publishing with Debug mode enabled. variable modification action or other means. the Debug Window will display new variable values as they are changed on the page. Run your title in debug mode by clicking the Debug Mode toolbar graphic menu. if you load your published title into a learning management system. Click OK to close the Debug Logging Options window. click on the Options button. From the Debug Window. the new variable value will be displayed within the Debug Window. Variable values for questions. the Debug Window will display the original variable values for variables that are associated with objects on the page. submit actions and variable modification actions are displayed within the Debug Window. The Debug Logging Options window appears. 3. With this Communications selected. or by selecting Debug from the Mode 2. Working with the Debug window Using the Debug window.

From the Debug Window. 2. This will clear all of the messages currently contained in your debug log. 2. From the Debug Window. The Save As window opens. Run your title in debug mode by clicking the Debug Mode toolbar graphic menu. and you can begin debugging with an empty log. you can change variable values. click the Print button. or by selecting Debug from the Mode Printing your debug log You can print the debug log from the Debug Window. or by selecting Debug from the Mode Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . To print your debug log: 1. When you save your debug log. click the Clear button.log textual file that you can review. or by selecting Debug from the Mode 2. To change variables in debug mode: 1. 3. The variable's value is updated within the title. To save your debug log: 1. The Watch Variables window opens. you can clear all of the current messages displayed within the window. click the Variables button. From the Debug Window. Run your title in debug mode by clicking the Debug Mode toolbar graphic menu. Run your title in debug mode by clicking the Debug Mode toolbar graphic menu. Changing variable values in debug mode While viewing your title in debug mode. Reserved variables that appear grayed out cannot be changed. click the Save button. This allows for more thorough debugging by manipulating variables as you step through your title. The Debug Window opens. Click Refresh to undo your changes. To clear your debug log: 1. 2.Saving your debug log When testing the functionality of your title. it can be advantageous to save your debug log. or by selecting Debug from the Mode Clearing your debug log While viewing your title in debug mode. Navigate to the location you want to save your log file and click Save. especially if you run into problems. all of the messages contained within the Debug Window are exported to a . Modify a variable's value by changing the value in the field next to the variable name and clicking the Update button. From the Debug Window. 3. displaying the current values for reserved and user-defined variables. Run your title in debug mode by clicking the Debug Mode toolbar graphic menu.

and so on. When you add objects to a title. See also: Working with Variables How Lectora Organizes Your Content Lectora organizes the files you use to create your title. you can double-click on it to expand the text block to fit all of the text contained within it. Your Orientation title folder. The text block object. The text block will automatically resize to accommodate all of the text unless the text block expands beyond the content page. like all other objects. Therefore. Lectora organizes all your media and image files. Arial. a folder called Orientation will be present in the My Titles directory. in its original location . When you publish to HTML or CD-ROM. and can be placed anywhere within your title. Close the Variables window to continue viewing your title in debug mode. Because Lectora copies all of its files. Any time you see the (+) in the bottom right corner of a text block. as well as the title file. For instance. such as Times New Roman. you can begin typing your content. When you have added a text block to a page. Not all users will have the same fonts on their machine as you have. Double-click in the text block to view the cursor tool. then. if your title is called Orientation. Helvetica. corresponding folders containing the published content will also appear in the Orientation folder. another named media. The My Titles directory is automatically created within your My Documents folder when you install Lectora. may contain a folder named images. Lectora will copy the imported file into the title directory.as well as the one used in your title. This chapter covers the following text options:  About Adding Text  Adding Text to Your Title  Specifying Text Block Properties  Changing Paragraph and Text Attributes  Associating References to a Text Block  Adding Hyperlinks to Text  Adding Tables  Adding an Object to a Text Block  Changing the Default Text Style  Formatting Multiple Text Blocks at Once  Finding and Replacing Text  Checking Spelling About Adding Text The following are some basic guidelines to follow when working with text:  Remember not to use soft returns if you plan on converting to HTML. you will always have access to your original file.  Text can be pasted inside of a text block. it is best to use common fonts.  Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Working with Text Textual content in Lectora is created with the use of text blocks. In this case. Within the Orientation folder. you will find copies of every image or media file you have used within the title.4. HTML sometimes reads soft returns as ASCII text. and other Windows standard fonts. the text block will place a (+) in the bottom right corner. Choosing these fonts will preserve the look and feel of your title. Within your title folder. Lectora automatically creates a folder specifically for that title in the My Titles directory. has configurable properties.awt extension. Whenever you create a new title. specified by an .

C Ctr Copies highlighted text to the clipboard and removes it from your text block. You can undo the last l+Z 20 changes. A Serif font can sometimes appear blurry on a computer monitor. the exact opposite applies to online documentation. X Ctr Places cut or copied text from the clipboard at the cursor location within the text block. Use this to delete misspellings or typos. Use this with the Paste function to repeat text in other places in l+ your title. Use this if you unintentionally undo some changes. Tahoma or Verdana will appear crisp and clean. l+ H Adding Text to Your Title Choose from two methods to add text to your title:  Copy and paste text from an existing document  Add a text block and type the text within the text block Copying and pasting text from an existing document Adding text to Lectora can be completed by using standard copy and paste functionality. Undo Redo Copy Cut Paste Paste Unformatt ed Text Delete Find Find Next Replace Ctr Searches and replaces the text specified. such as Arial. l Ctr Searches for text within your title. l+F F3 Searches for the next instance of the text specified. Ctr Reverses the previous undo command. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . l+ Sh ift+ V De Deletes highlighted text. Common Text Formatting Shortcuts Function Ke Description yb oa rd Sh ort cut Ctr Erases the last change done to your title. such as Courier or Times New Roman is best. l+ V Ctr Places cut or copied text from the clipboard at the cursor location without retaining its original formatting. Although print media suggests that a serif font. whereas a Sans Serif font. Use this with the Paste l+ function to remove text and paste it in other places in your title. l+Y Ctr Copies highlighted text to the clipboard.

select the location onto which you want to add text and do one of the following:. Access the text block’s properties to add a background color. 3. or by using the Ctrl+V (formatted) or Ctrl+Shift+V (unformatted) keyboard shortcuts. resize the text block by dragging the sides or corners of the text block to the appropriate size. Highlight and copy the text by right-clicking and selecting Copy or by using the Ctrl+C keyboard shortcut. In the Title Explorer.To copy and paste text from an existing document: 1. Double-click on the text block to automatically resize it vertically until all the text is displayed. size. Double-click the text to access the cursor tool. select Object > Text Block o Click the Add Text Block toolbar graphic on the Insert toolbar. 2. 3. if you are copying from a Microsoft Word document. 2. and begin typing your text. open the document in Word. Click within the content page in Lectora to which you want to add the text. A text block appears in the upper left corner of your page. style. right-click on the text block in the Title Explorer or within your work area and select Properties. or specify other options. it will need to be resized to fit all of the text. however. You can paste the text as formatted or unformatted text. See also: Adding Text to Your Title Use the controls on the Text Properties window to complete the following tasks: General tab Position and Size tab  Change the name of a text block  Specify a text block's position and size Transitions tab  Specify the HTML text type of a text block  Specify a text block's transitions  Change the background color of a text block Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Open the document containing the text to be added. and will instead use the default text style selected within Lectora. o From the Add menu. See also: Moving and Resizing Objects Adding a text block and typing the text within the text block Follow these steps to add a text block to your page: 1. Alternatively. Lectora will automatically create a text block with the pasted text. 4. Drag the text block to the appropriate place on the page. For example. and so on) from the application from which it was copied. Pasting as Formatted Text will paste the text maintaining its current formatting (font face. Pasting as Unformatted Text will paste the text. Paste the text by selecting Paste As > Formatted Text or Paste As >Unformatted Text from the Edit menu. in most cases. a border. See also: Specifying Text Block Properties Specifying Text Block Properties To access the properties of a text block object. abandoning its current formatting.

Click OK. 2. Double-click on the text block graphic of the text block in the Title Explorer. or use the eye-dropper tool to select a color from elsewhere within your title. To specify the HTML text type of a text block: 1. Click OK. select the eye-dropper tool to use a color from elsewhere within your title. an HTML H2 (heading level two). Use the Background Color list to select a background color. Click the General tab if the Text Properties window is not already opened to this tab. The Text Properties window opens. 2. To specify the background color of a text block: 1. Changing the background color of a text block You can select a background color or make the text block transparent. Select a predefined color. The Text Properties window opens. but will define the importance of the text relative to the content. 2. 3. Click the General tab if the Text Properties window is not already opened to this tab. Click the General tab if the Text Properties window is not already opened to this tab.Border and Margin tab Make a text block initially invisible  Specify text block borders and margins Place a text block on the top layer Lock the size and position of a text block Enable author control on a text block Enable dynamic text for a text block Render a text block as an image Wrap text around overlapping objects Display a vertical scroll bar in a text block Associate a text block with a form object You can change the properties at any time by right-clicking on the text block and selecting Properties. To change the name of a text block: 1. Specifying the HTML text type of a text block You can specify whether the text block should be labeled with an HTML H1 (heading level one). Click OK. The background color will appear behind the text in the text block.          Changing the name of a text block Change the name of your text blocks so you can better recognize and manage them. or select Custom to select a custom color from the Color wheel. This selection will not affect the formatting of the text block. The Text Properties window opens. define a custom color. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Double-click on the text block graphic of the text block in the Title Explorer. Specify the new name of the text block in the Text Block Name field. or as normal HTML body text. 3. Select from several predefined colors. These headings are used by search engines to find pages containing content matching the searched keywords. Use the HTML Text Type list to select the type of HTML text. 3. Double-click on the text block graphic of the text block in the Title Explorer.

text blocks are set to be initially visible. Double-click on the text block graphic of the text block in the Title Explorer. a check mark will appear to the left of the Size/Position Locked option within the menu. including the text block. layered on your page. You can initially hide a text block until an action has been executed to show the text block. If multiple objects are set to Always on Top. Select the Size/Position Locked check box. Click OK. Click the General tab if the Text Properties window is not already opened to this tab. Lectora will refer to the ordering of the objects in the Title Explorer to determine which of the objects is on the top-most layer. Click OK. The Text Properties window opens. Clear the Initially Visible check box. Click OK. Click the General tab if the Text Properties window is not already opened to this tab. Placing a text block on the top layer You can force a text block to always be on the top layer of the page. That is. The Text Properties window opens. Double-click on the text block graphic of the text block in the Title Explorer. Double-click on the text block graphic of the text block in the Title Explorer. To force a text block to the top layer: 1. they appear when users open the pages on which the text blocks are located. Select the Always on Top check box. The text block will be locked in size and position within Edit mode. 2. This preserves it from getting accidentally moved by you or by other authors working on your title. The Text Properties window opens. See also: Selecting an action To make a text block initially invisible: 1. This is useful when you have multiple objects. 3. 2. The top-most object listed on the page in the Title Explorer is on the bottom-most layer of the page. See also: Layering Objects Locking the size and position of a text block You can lock the size and position of a text block. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . 3. You can also lock the size and position of the text block by right-clicking on the text block within the Title Explorer or within your work area and selecting Size/Position Locked from the right-click context menu. To lock the position and size of a text block: 1. Click the General tab if the Text Properties window is not already opened to this tab.See also: Matching Colors Used within Your Title Making a text block initially invisible By default. 2. 3. When the text block is locked.

3. Select the Author Control check box.Enabling author control on a text block Protect the contents of a text block by enabling Author Control. the first 128 characters of text is used as its ALT tag. use this setting. To enable dynamic text for a text block: 1. ALT tags have a limitation of 128 characters. see Designating a title as a dynamic title. Some drawbacks of rendering text as an image are increased download time for images as opposed to text. Selecting the Dynamic Title title property enables the Dynamic Text property when configuring text blocks within your title. For details about specifying the Dynamic Title property. Double-click on the text block graphic of the text block in the Title Explorer. the contents of the text block is associated with the text block name within the XML file. word wrapping and line height can sometimes vary between browsers.xml. Click OK. 3. Enabling dynamic text for a text block When you enable dynamic text. you can update specific text of an HTML-published title without republishing. During publishing. The Text Properties window opens. 2.xml. a check mark will appear to the left of the Author Control option within the menu. The master Author Control password must first be set within the Title Properties. is the target of a Change Contents action or if the text block has a vertical scroll bar. The XML file is named dyntitle. The Text Properties window opens. This setting cannot be used if the text block has embedded hyperlinks. and want it to be represented exactly. This can have several advantages. You can also enable author control on the text block by right-clicking on the text block within the Title Explorer or within your work area and selecting Author Control from the right-click context menu. See also: Protecting your title with a password To enable author control on a text block: 1. text within the title is substituted with text found within dyntitle. Double-click on the text block graphic of the text block in the Title Explorer. When author control is enabled. and that a student will not be able to copy text from the text block to the clipboard. or even between versions of the same browser. The text blocks that you designate as dynamic text are copied to an associated XML file when the title is initially published. you can select to publish a text block as an image rather than as text. If a text block is published as an image. Click the General tab if the Text Properties window is not already opened to this tab. Click OK. Click the General tab if the Text Properties window is not already opened to this tab. Also. Select the Dynamic Text check box. When the published title is displayed in a browser. such as when you are aligning overlapping images and text. use this setting if you use a non-standard font. When text is designated as dynamic text. To render a text block as an image when published: Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . With Author Control enabled. additional authors will not be able to edit the contents of the text block unless they have the master Author Control password. 2. Rendering a text block as an image When publishing your title. If you need to maintain exact word alignment.

3. The Text Properties window opens. This is useful when creating titles that comply with the standards set in Section 508 . Click OK. Select the Render text as image when published check box. Double-click on the text block graphic of the text block in the Title Explorer. 2. Double-click on the text block graphic of the text block in the Title Explorer. Click the General tab if the Text Properties window is not already opened to this tab. Wrapping text around overlapping objects You can have text within a text block automatically flow around objects layered above the text block. Click OK. 3. Double-click on the text block graphic of the text block in the Title Explorer. After you have added the form object and text block to the page. The Text Properties window opens. Displaying a vertical scroll bar in a text block For text blocks with more text that can fit within the text block. such as a drop-down list or an entry field. 3. Click the General tab if the Text Properties window is not already opened to this tab. double-click the text block to automatically resize the text block to fit all the text. To associate a text block with a form object: 1. Lectora will display a plus sign (+) in the lower-right corner of a text block to indicate that additional text is unable to be displayed within the text block. you can associate the two to use the text block as a label for the form object. See also: Layering Objects To wrap text around overlapping objects: 1. Double-click on the text block graphic of the text block in the Title Explorer.1194. Selecting to show the vertical scroll bar will disable the ability to wrap text around overlapping objects and rendering text as an image when published. The Text Properties window opens. Objects layered below the text block will not affect the contents of the text block. The Text Properties window opens. 2.1194. Click OK. Click the General tab if the Text Properties window is not already opened to this tab. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . For information about creating Lectora titles that comply with the standards set in Section 508 . 2. If a plus-sign is displayed in the text block. you can provide a vertical scroll bar enabling users to view the entire contents.1. Select the Wrap text around overlapping objects check box. Otherwise.22 of the Rehabilitation Act.22 of the Rehabilitation Act. enable the vertical bar so that users can view the entire content. see Lectora and 508 Compliancy. Associating a text block with a form object You can associate the text block with a form object. Click the General tab if the Text Properties window is not already opened to this tab. Select the Show Vertical Scroll Bar check box. To show a vertical scroll bar within the text block: 1.

2. The Text Properties window opens. Double-click on the text block graphic the Transitions tab. Click OK. 3. You can select from over 20 different transitions. 2. Specifying a text block's position and size You can directly set the position and size of a text block from within its properties. Click the Position and Size tab. To specify the transition: 1.2. Specify the following information: Transition In Transition (In) Type Select this to enable a transition when displaying the text block as the page opens or the text block is made visible with an action. See also: Using the Status bar Specifying a text block's transitions You can specify how a text block is displayed on a page. All measurements are based on pixels. Select the Label for check box and select the form object from the drop-down list. Click OK. You can also specify the position of your text block directly from the status bar. Specify the width of the text block. Specify the height of the text block. Double-click on the text block graphic of the text block in the Title Explorer. There is a Slow to Fast slider to determine the speed at which the transition takes place. Select this to change the reference point (from the bottom) from which the text block is placed. To specify the position and size of a text block: 1. The Text Properties window opens. Click       Box In Box Out Circle In Circle Out Wipe Up Wipe Down       Split out Horizontal Strips Down left Strips Up left Strips Downright Strips Upright Horizontal Bars Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Select a transition type as one of the following: of the text block in the Title Explorer. X Coordinate Specify the horizontal distance of the text block relative to the top-left corner of the page. 3. Y Coordinate Specify the vertical distance of the text block relative to the top-left corner of the page. Specify the following information. Offset from right Offset from bottom Width Height Select this to change the reference point (from the right) from which the text block is placed. Transitions will produce a visual effect as the object appears and disappears.

Select a transition type as one of the following:  Box In  Split out Horizontal  Box Out  Strips Down left  Circle In  Strips Up left  Circle Out  Strips Downright Wipe Up   Strips Upright  Wipe Down  Horizontal Bars  Wipe Right  Vertical Bars  Wipe Left  Fly Top Blinds Vertical   Fly Top right  Blinds Horizontal  Fly Right  Checker Across  Fly Bottom right  Checker Down  Fly Bottom Dissolve   Fly Bottom left  Split in Vertical  Fly Left  Split out Vertical  Fly Top left  Split in Horizontal  Random Effect Specify the delay in seconds before starting the transition. To configure the border and margin: 1. Use the slider to specify the speed at which the transition should occur. Double-click on the text block graphic the Border and Margin tab. Click OK.          Delay before transition Slow > Fast Transition Out Transition (Out) Type Wipe Right Wipe Left Blinds Vertical Blinds Horizontal Checker Across Checker Down Dissolve Split in Vertical Split out Vertical Split in Horizontal           Vertical Bars Fly Top Fly Top right Fly Right Fly Bottom right Fly Bottom Fly Bottom left Fly Left Fly Top left Random Effect Specify the delay in seconds before starting the transition. Use the slider to specify the speed at which the transition should occur. Select this to enable a transition when hiding the text block as the page closes or the text block is hidden with an action. Click . The Text Properties window opens. Specifying text block borders and margins You can add borders and specify margins of your text block. Delay before transition Slow > Fast 3. Select between 0 and 600 seconds. Select between 0 and 600 seconds. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 of the text block in the Title Explorer.

The border will be created along the perimeter of the text block. To apply a text style to your text block: Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . See also: Matching Colors Used within Your Title Margin Size 3. Changing Paragraph and Text Attributes Use Lectora’s Text toolbar to format text and paragraph attributes. or select Custom to select a custom color from the Color wheel. italicize. and underline  Superscript and subscript  Justify text  Highlight text  Add indent levels  Add bullets  Add a numbered list  Changing paragraph spacing  Add a symbol Applying a text style You can define text styles that automatically set text attributes such as the font face. You can complete the following using Lectora's Text toolbar:  Apply a text style  Change the font  Change the font size  Change the font color  Bold. See also: Matching Colors Used within Your Title Border Style Outline Outline Color Select the style of the border. select the eye-dropper tool to use a color from elsewhere within your title. Instead of manually formatting text. Select a predefined color. or select Custom to select a custom color from the Color wheel. you can apply a text style to a text block. Double-click within a text block to display the cursor. size and color.2. select the eye-dropper tool to use a color from elsewhere within your title. Select the size of the margin for the text block. Select the color of the outline. Select a predefined color. and highlight the text whose attributes you want to change. style. The outline is an additional outermost outline that will appear around the perimeter of the text block. Select this to add a one-pixel wide box around the text block. Lectora will then format the text to include all attributes that are specified within the text style. Select the color of the border. Click OK. Specify the following information: Border Size Border Color Select the border size in pixels. The margin is the space between the text within the text block and the border.

A default font can be used throughout your entire title. To change the font size: 1. Double-click within the text block and select the text you want to change. define a custom color. sections. Double-click within the text block and select the text you want to change. Font sizes are displayed in points. 2. Web-friendly fonts such as Arial. Changing font color You can quickly change the color of the font. Select a predefined color. To change the font color: 1. 2. Double-click within the text block and select the text you want to change. Text styles can also be applied to your entire title or to individual chapters. use the Text Style list to select a text style. as in most standard word processing applications. It is best to use common. sections and pages Changing font size You can quickly change the font size of the text in a text block. or on a page. Select from several predefined colors. and pages. On the Text toolbar. Verdana. See also: Managing Text Styles Changing text properties for chapter. within a section. To change the font: 1.1. or Tahoma. On the Text toolbar. use the Font size list to select a font size or type the font size directly in the Font size list. Select the text block you want to change. sections and pages Changing the font You can quickly change the font of the text in a text block. Choose from the following predefined text styles: o Title o Subtitle o Body text You can edit the default styles or create your own styles. 2. See also: Managing Text Styles Changing text properties for chapter. or select Custom to select a custom color from the Color wheel. Keep in mind that if you are publishing to HTML. On the Text toolbar. 2. or use the eyedropper tool to select a color from elsewhere within your title. within a chapter. use the Font color list to select a font color. select the eye-dropper tool to use a color from elsewhere within your title. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Lectora does not embed the fonts into the published work. Lectora automatically matches the font size to the HTML equivalent. If you convert to HTML. On the Text toolbar. use the Font list to select a font.

See also:

Matching Colors Used within Your Title

Bolding, italics, and underlining
You can make text bold, italic, or underlined. To bold, italicize or underline text: 1. Double-click within the text block and select the text you want to change. 2. Choose from three ways to apply these attributes: o Click the appropriate graphic on the Text toolbar: Bold Italic Underline

o Right-click, and select the appropriate attribute from the Font submenu:
Font > Bold Font > Italic Font > Underline Ctrl+B Ctrl+I Ctrl+U Bold Italic Underline Bold Italic Underline

o Type the appropriate keyboard shortcut:

Superscripting and subscripting
You can superscript and subscript text. To superscript or subscript text: 1. Double-click within the text block and select the text you want to change. 2. Choose from two ways to apply these attributes: o Right-click, and select the appropriate attribute from the Font submenu: Font > Superscript Font > Subscripts Alt+4 Alt+5

ASuperscript ASubscript

o Type the appropriate keyboard shortcut: ASuperscript ASubscript

Justifying text
Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010

You can select how the text is to be justified within a text block. Select from aligning left or right, centering in the middle, or justified left and right. To justify your text: 1. Double-click within the text block and select the text you want to change. 2. Choose from two ways to apply these attributes: o Click the appropriate graphic on the Text toolbar: Align left Center Justify left and right Align right

o Right-click, and select the appropriate attribute from the Paragraph submenu:
Paragraph > Align Align left left Paragraph > Center Paragraph > Justify Paragraph > Align Align right right Justify left and right Center

o Type the appropriate keyboard shortcut:
Alt+8 Alt+9 Center Align right

Highlighting text
You can highlight text. When you highlight text, the color chosen will appear behind the selected text. To highlight your text: 1. Double-click within the text block and select the text you want to highlight. 2. On the Text toolbar, use the Highlight list to select the highlight color. Select a predefined color, select the eyedropper tool to use a color from elsewhere within your title, or select Custom to select a custom color from the Color wheel. See also: Matching Colors Used within Your Title

Adding indent levels
You can indent text within a text block. To indent your text: Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010

1. Double-click within the text block and select the text you want to change. 2. Choose from two ways to apply these attributes: o Click the appropriate graphic on the Text toolbar: Decrease indent Increase Indent

o Right-click, and select the appropriate attribute from the Paragraph submenu:
Paragraph > Decrease Indent Paragraph > Increase Indent Increase Indent Decrease Indent

Adding bullets
You can create bulleted lists within a text block. To add bullets to your text: 1. Double-click within the text block and select the text you want to change. 2. Choose from two ways to add bullets: on the Text toolbar. o Click the Bullets graphic

o Right-click, and select Paragraph > Bulleted List. The bulleted list is added to the text block.
Adding a numbered list
You can create a numbered list within a text block To add bullets to your text: 1. Double-click within the text block and select the text you want to change. 2. Choose from two ways to start a numbered list: on the Text toolbar. o Click the Numbered List graphic

o Right-click, and select Paragraph > Numbered List. You can also change the numbering within your numbered list.
See also: Changing numbered lists

Changing numbered lists
You can change the numbering used in your numbered list. To change the numbering used in your numbered list: 1. Double-click within the text block and highlight the numbered list. 2. Right-click, and select Paragraph > Numbering Options. Use the Starting Number field to specify a new starting Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010

number for the current list item. Use the Numbering Style field to select the desired numbering scheme. Choose from the following numbering schemes: Numbering Decimal Uppercase Alpha Lowercase Alpha Upper Roman Lower Roman Example 1., 2., 3. A., B., C. a., b., c. I., II., III. i., ii., iii

Changing paragraph spacing
You can the spacing between lines of text in a text block. To change paragraph spacing: 1. Double-click within the text block and select the text you want to change. 2. Right-click, and select Paragraph > Paragraph Spacing. The Paragraph Spacing window opens. Use the Paragraph Spacing window to specify the following spacing options for your text: Space Before Paragraph Space After Paragraph Line Spacing Specify a number in points to create space before the currently selected paragraph. Specify a number in points to create space after the currently selected paragraph. Select one of the following line spacing options:  Single  1.25 Lines  1.5 Lines  Double  At Least  Multiple If you select At Least, further specify the spacing number in points. The lines will be spaced at least the value specified and more if necessary. If you select Multiple, specify the new line spacing value in the field.

Adding a symbol
You can add symbols, such as © for copyright or ™ for trademark. You can also assign a shortcut key for adding a symbol. Certain symbols will not display correctly if your current font does not support the symbol. Switching to a font that supports a wide range of characters will allow most characters to be displayed, such as Arial Unicode MS. To add a symbol: 1. Double-click within the text block and place the cursor where you want to add the symbol. 2. Click the left side of the Symbols graphic Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 to add the previously selected symbol or click the right side of the

graphic to view a menu of commonly used symbols. Alternatively, select More Symbols to select from additional symbol sets. 3. Click the symbol you want to add and click Insert. The symbol you selected is added to the text block. To assign a keyboard shortcut for adding a symbol: 1. Double-click within the text block and place the cursor where you want to add the symbol. 2. Click the right side of the Symbols graphic and select More Symbols. The Symbols window opens. 3. Select the symbol and click Shortcut Key. The Preferences window opens. 4. Select the symbol key you want to assign from the box under the Categories field. The Current keys box lists the keyboard shortcuts defined for the symbol key you selected. 5. Place your cursor in the Press new shortcut key field. Using your keyboard, press the new shortcut sequence you want to assign to the symbol key. Type a letter to add a Alt keyboard shortcut. Otherwise, press and hold the Ctrl key and type a letter to add a Ctrl keyboard shortcut. The key sequence you type is displayed in the Press new shortcut key field. 6. Click Assign. The new shortcut is added to the Current keys list and the symbol is displayed in the Current Symbol field. 7. Click OK to return to the Symbols window and click Close to continue working on the title.

Associating References to a Text Block
You can associate references to your text block. To associate references to a text block: 1. Highlight the text and click the Reference graphic 2. Specify the following information: Author(s) Title of Work/Web Page Address Publisher Date of Publication 3. Click OK. Specify the names of the authors of the item. Specify either the title of the item or the Web page address. Specify the publisher of the item. Specify the date of publication of the item.

on the Text toolbar. The Reference Properties window opens.

Adding Hyperlinks to Text
You can add hyperlinks to your text. A hyperlink is specially highlighted text that when clicked, enable users to navigate to another location within your title, open a pop-up window, or perform other actions. See also: Selecting an action

Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010

Choose from two ways to add a hyperlink: 1. Double-click within the text block and select the text you want to hyperlink. 2. Choose from two ways to add a hyperlink: on the Text toolbar. o Click the Hyperlink graphic

o Right-click and select Add Hyperlink.
The Text Hyperlink Properties window opens. 3. Select the action you want to execute from the Action drop-down list. Specify additional information based on the action you select. For example, to create a hyperlink that allows users to jump to another part of the title when they click on the link, select Go To from the Action list. Select Chapter, Section, or Page in the Target list and select the name of the page to which you want to navigate from the Name list. 4. Click OK. To edit the Text Hyperlink Properties, double-click on the text block containing the hyperlink, and further double-click on the hyperlink.

Adding Tables
You can create tables within text blocks. Tables can be used to structure data or can be used to align textual information. To insert a table into your text block: 1. Double-click within the text block and place the cursor in the location you want to add a table. 2. Right-click and select Table > Insert Table. The New Table Parameters window opens. 3. Specify the number of rows and columns you want to display in your table. 4. Click OK to display your table. When the table has been created, you can enter the textual content into the individual cells, and format the table as necessary. See also: Formatting tables Formatting cells in a table

Formatting tables
After a table has been created, you can insert and combine rows and columns or format the table by adjusting table cell widths, colors and alignment. To format a table: 1. Double-click within the text block containing the table and select the rows or columns of the table you want to format. 2. Right-click and select the appropriate function from the Table submenu: Insert Row Insert Column Adds a new row to your table. Adds a new column to your table.

Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010

see Lectora and 508 Compliancy. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . header row text will always be bolded within the table. Click this to open the Cell Properties window. Highlight the cell or cells in the table. color. Specify the Row Height. delete an entire column. select the range of cells to which you want to apply the properties. and alignment. or delete an entire row. To specify the cell width and margin properties: 1. Cell Width and Cell Margin in pixels. Double-click on the text block containing the table whose cells you want to format. Use the controls on the Cell Properties window to complete the following tasks: Cell tab Border tab  Specify row height. Select Current Column Formatting cells in a table You can change the appearance of the cells in your table. Selects the entire column in which your cursor is positioned. To format cells in a table. Use this dialog box to specify properties relating to the selected cells of the table. cell width and margin properties You can directly specifying the row height. Click OK. right-click. A preview of the selections is displayed. When publishing to any Web-based format. The Cell Properties window opens.1194. In the Range box.22 of the Rehabilitation Act. 3. For information about creating Lectora titles that comply with the standards set in Section 508 . and select Table > Cell Properties. 2. Provides you with the option to delete a cell. highlight the cell or cells in the table. such as cell width. The Cell Properties window opens. Click the Cell tab if the Cell Properties window is not already opened to this tab. cell width and margin properties  Specify cell border properties Cell Color tab Border Color tab  Specify cell color properties  Specify cell border color properties Alignment tab  Specify cell alignment properties Specifying row height. Merge Cells Split Cells Delete Cells Cell Properties Merges the selected cells to form a single cell. 5. Click Entire Table to apply the change to the entire table or click Selected Cells to apply the change to the cells you selected.Header Row Designates the selected row as a header row. and select Table > Cell Properties. Header rows are also used by assistive technologies to associate the data in the table with the headers specified. cell width and margin properties of cells within a table. 4. Splits a single cell into two cells. right-click.

or select Custom to select a custom color from the Color wheel. In the Range box. 2. 5. Specifying a cell color will change the background color of the selected cells. Center. select the eye-dropper tool to use a color from elsewhere within your title. and Bottom border widths. and select Table > Cell Properties. Right. Highlight the cell or cells in the table. right-click. and select Table > Cell Properties. Click OK. Click Entire Table to apply the change to the entire table or click Selected Cells to apply the change to the cells you selected. 2. 5. Highlight the cell or cells in the table. Specifying cell border properties You can specify border widths for cells of a table. 4. In the Range box. 4. 2. 3. Left. Click Entire Table to apply the change to the entire table or click Selected Cells to apply the change to the cells you selected. The Cell Properties window opens. left. Select a predefined color. To specify the cell alignment properties: 1. Double-click on the text block containing the table whose cells you want to format. Click the Cell Color tab. The Cell Properties window opens. and bottom borders will remain the same. or Bottom of the cell. Click OK. In the Border Width box. and different border widths for each can be selected. select the range of cells to which you want to apply the properties. In the Vertical Alignment box. and select Table > Cell Properties. right-click. 4. and any changes applied to one of the borders will be applied to all borders. 3. the top. Click the Border tab. Select Apply border to each cell to apply the specified borders to all cells within the selected range or select Apply border around cell range to apply the specified borders around the cells Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . use the lists to specify Top. right. Otherwise. A preview of the selections is displayed. Double-click on the text block containing the table whose cells you want to format. right-click. select the range of cells to which you want to apply the properties. To specify the cell color properties: 1. See also: Matching Colors Used within Your Title Specifying cell alignment properties You can specify how text should be vertically aligned within cells of a table. In the Range box. To specify the cell border properties: 1. Select to align contents at the Top. 3. The Cell Properties window opens. If the Make all borders the same width check box is selected. Double-click on the text block containing the table whose cells you want to format. Click the Alignment tab. Use the Cell list to select a cell color. the borders can be changed independently. Click Entire Table to apply the change to the entire table or click Selected Cells to apply the change to the cells you selected. select the range of cells to which you want to apply the properties.Specifying cell color properties You can specify color properties for cells within a table. Highlight the cell or cells in the table. select how text and objects should be vertically aligned within the cell.

Choosing an object other than these four will simply add the object to the page. select the eyedropper tool to use a color from elsewhere within your title. Left. When a text style is applied. A preview of the selections is displayed. and not within the text block. and different border colors for each can be selected. They can also be applied to your entire title or to individual chapters. 5. 4. In the Border Color box. Click Entire Table to apply the change to the entire table or click Selected Cells to apply the change to the cells you selected. or delete unused text styles. Do one of the following: o Select Add > Object from the menu bar and select the object you want to add (Animation. o Click on the Animation . right. Lectora will Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . style. In the Range box. specify Top. 3.within the selected range. left. Place the cursor where you want to place the object within the text block. To add an object within a text block: 1. Equation. you can apply a text style to a text block. 2. The object is inserted at the cursor position inside the text block. Double-click on the text block containing the table whose cells you want to format. 2. You can create new text styles. or Image toolbar graphic on the Insert toolbar. images. edit current text styles. Button . and Bottom border colors. or buttons within a text block. The Cell Properties window opens. Click OK. and pages. equations. A preview of the selections is displayed. right-click. sections. Click OK. the top. Select a predefined color. size and color. o Right-click and select the appropriate object from the Insert submenu. If the Keep all borders the same color check box is selected. 3. 5. Equation . See also: Working with Animations Working with Buttons Working with Equations Working with Images Managing Text Styles Text styles define text attributes such as the font face. Right. select the range of cells to which you want to apply the properties. Instead of manually formatting text. Highlight the cell or cells in the table. Button. To specify the cell border color properties: 1. or Image). and select Table > Cell Properties. Otherwise. Click the Border Color tab. and any changes applied to one of the borders will be applied to all borders. the borders can be changed independently. See also: Matching Colors Used within Your Title Adding an Object to a Text Block You can add animations. and bottom borders will remain the same color. or select Custom to select a custom color from the Color wheel. Specifying cell border color properties You can specify border colors for cells of a table.

Click Done. Click the New button. 2. 5. Font style. Click OK to apply the changes to your font style. 3. If you answer Yes. To edit a text style: 1. This section covers the following topics:  Editing a text style  Creating a new text style  Deleting a text style  Importing and exporting text styles Editing a text style You can edit existing text styles. Use the Text Style window to modify the font attributes. Select the text style from the list you want to edit and click the Edit button. Creating a new text style Create new text styles to use within your titles. To create a custom text style: 1. 4. The Text Styles window opens. The deleted style is removed from Text Styles window and Text Style drop-down menu. and choose the Script type. font Color. 2. 3. 2. Underline. Font style. The new text style is listed in the Text Styles window and added to the Text Styles drop-down list. Click Done. text using the current font style style is not changed. You will be prompted whether to change all text in the current title using the font style you edited. You can select a Font. 5. font Size. Click OK to create your new font style. You can select a Font. Select the custom text style you want to delete and click the Delete button. font Color. and choose the Script type.You cannot deleted predefined text styles. Underline. Click the Text Style drop-down list on the Text toolbar and select Edit Styles. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . The Text Styles window opens. 3. Click Done. Click the Text Style drop-down list on the Text toolbar and select Edit Styles. The Text Styles window opens. The Text Style window opens. all the text using the current font style will be changed. 4. If you answer No.format the text to include all attributes that are specified within the text style. Deleting a text style Delete unused custom text styles. To delete a custom text style: 1. Specify a Style Name and select the font attributes for your new style. font Size. Click the Text Style drop-down list on the Text toolbar and select Edit Styles. The Text Style window opens.

3. See also: Changing a title's text properties Changing text properties for chapters. Navigate and save the text style to the desired location. The same is true for sections. Click the Text Style drop-down list on the Text toolbar and select Edit Styles. The Text Styles window opens. When a text style is specified within chapter properties. sections and pages Formatting Multiple Text Blocks at Once You can simultaneously format multiple text blocks. At any time during creating your title. When a text style is specified within the title properties. Select the Default Text Style from the list. This reformatting can occur at any organizational level. only the text blocks on that page will be automatically formatted using the style chosen. Verdana. Changing the Default Text Style You can change the default text style that is used throughout your title.Importing and exporting text styles You can import and export text styles. Select the text style you want to export and click Export Styles. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Click the Background tab. Lectora does not embed the fonts into the published work. Lectora will reformat all existing text blocks within the title to the new text style chosen. use the Background tab within a Chapter Properties window to change the default text style for that chapter only. Click Import Styles to navigate and add a custom text style to the list of available text styles. it will only be applied to text blocks within that chapter. Click Done. This will enable you to add text styles for use within your titles (import) and save a copy of a text style (export) in a location for easy access for sharing or emailing. To import a text style: 1. 2. The Properties window opens. The Text Styles window opens. section or page you want to change. a section. you can return to the Properties window to assign a different text style. all text blocks within the title will automatically be formatted with the attributes of the text style chosen. 2. or a page. 3. It is best to use common.als file extension. 2. For example. The Text Styles window opens. Double-click the graphic in the Title Explorer next to the title. Click OK. To export a text style: 1. The Save As window opens. See also: Managing Text Styles Keep in mind that if you are publishing to HTML. Web-friendly fonts such as Arial. 3. To change the default font: 1. click the Styles button. or Tahoma. Click Done. Click the Text Style drop-down list on the Text toolbar and select Edit Styles. chapter. Custom text style files contain the . You can select multiple text styles by holding down the Ctrl key while selecting styles. You can also limit a style to be applied within a chapter. 4. when a text style is specified within page properties. To add a new font style or edit an existing font style. Use the Text Styles window to manage your text styles. Finally.

click the left mouse button and while holding it down. To quickly search for every occurrence of a specific word or phrase: 1. draw a rectangular around the text blocks you want to format. o Within the work area. select Find o Click the Find toolbar graphic o Type Ctrl+F The Find window opens.To format multiple text blocks at once: 1. Select Match case if you want the capitalization to match. 2. Go To Web addresses. Click Find to find individual occurrences and replace them individually. Select Edit > Replace from the menu bar or press Ctrl+H. Click Find Next or press F3 to find the next instance or click Cancel to cancel a search in progress. Checking Spelling There are three ways to perform a Spell Check from within Lectora:    Click on the Spell Check toolbar graphic on the text toolbar . 4. Click Find. Click Replace All to replace all occurrences of the found text. You can also configure your Lectora preferences to enable spell check while typing. menu text. Click Replace to replace the occurrence that currently has focus. or click Cancel to exit the Find window. enter the replacement text. To automatically replace text based on a search for a specific word or phrase: 1. Finding and Replacing Text You can find and replace text throughout the title. When the text blocks are selected. enter the text for which you are searching. Select Tools > Spell Check > Current Page or Entire Title from the menu bar. and notes. Press F7 to spell check the current page or Ctrl+F7 to spell check the entire title. The Find window opens. on the Standard toolbar 2. See also: Enabling spell check while typing Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Do one of the following: o From the Edit menu. Select multiple text blocks in one of the following ways: o While holding down the CTRL key. In the Find what field. enter the text for which you are searching. Find does not search the Title Explorer. use the Text toolbar to reformat the text. In the Find what field. In the Replace with field. 3. including question feedback. Select Match case if you want the capitalization to match. 3. Each selected text block will automatically change based on the reformatting changes you make. 2. or from within your work area. select multiple text blocks either from the Title Explorer. messages displayed.

To add a word to your dictionary: 1. right-click and select Add to Dictionary.swf) or animated GIFs (. when you add an object to your title in any way other than dragging and dropping. and how to edit them. how to change their properties. and menu items. button text. messages used in display message actions. click on the Import button to locate and select the appropriate file you want to import. such as images. the General object properties will appear. Each object in Lectora supports a variety of file types. including selecting the main dictionary language as well as many other options. Adding words to the dictionary will no longer identify the added word as a misspelled word when checking spelling. click the Help button. For objects that require a file source. Double-click within the text block containing the word you want to add. This chapter explains how to insert objects into your title. The following topics are covered:              About Adding Objects Adding Objects to Your Title Changing Common Object Properties Working with Animations and Flash files Working with Audio Working with Buttons Working with Documents Working with Equations Working with External HTML Objects Working with Images Working with IPIX Images Working with Menus Working with Progress Bars              Working with Reference Lists Working with Tables of Contents Working with Video Adding Shapes. For those objects that do not require a file Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . For example. Lines and Arrows Grouping and Ungrouping Objects Excluding Objects Using Inheritance Editing Objects Moving and Resizing Objects Locking and Unlocking Objects Aligning and Positioning Objects Layering Objects Working with Library Objects Working with the Media Organizer About Adding Objects In most cases.gif). For additional information regarding the spelling options. select Spell Check > Options. The Spelling Options window opens. You can complete the following for use in checking spelling:  Add words to your dictionary  Configure spelling options Adding words to your dictionary You can add words to the Lectora dictionary.Spell checks will check for spelling errors within all text blocks. Configure the spelling options as necessary. and additional textual information including question feedback. 2. audio or video. 2. Highlight or select the word you want to add. To configure spelling options: 1. the animation object in Lectora can support Flash files (. From the Tools menu. Configuring spelling options You can configure different spelling options. Working with Objects You can add several types of objects to your title.

regardless of how you have added it.source. See also: Supported media types Adding additional files to your title How Lectora organizes your content Adding Objects to Your Title Choose from the following ways to add objects to your title:  Select Add > Object from the menu bar and select the type of object you want to add. Any time you add an object to your title. you will either be prompted to configure the object’s properties. or the object will simply appear within your title.  Right-click in the work area. Lectora will prompt you to add the file as an additional file. if you add an image to your title. and while holding down the left mouse button. Double-click the object or right-click the object and select Properties to access the object's properties. 3. Open a Windows Explorer window containing media files (objects such as images. For example. dragging the item within the Title Explorer to its new location.  Insert the object from the Media Library Organizer. The object will appear in both your work area and in the Title Explorer. Lectora will make a copy of that image file. 2. The objects will then appear in your title. You can easily re-order items in the Title Explorer by clicking on them. Only supported file types can be dragged and dropped into your Lectora title.  Drag and drop the object to your work area. For additional information view these topics:  Dragging and dropping an object  Shortcuts for adding objects  Working with the Media Library Organizer Dragging and dropping an object You can add objects by dragging and dropping them into Lectora from your Windows desktop or from Windows Explorer. Lectora creates a copy of the file and places it within the same directory as your title. select New > Object and select the type of object you want to add. Select any object or multiple objects within Windows Explorer. otherwise. Flash. where you can arrange them in any way you choose. and so on) so that it is along side your Lectora window. video. Shortcuts for adding objects The following keyboard shortcuts are available for quickly adding objects: Assignable Unit Chapter Section Page Ctrl+0 Ctrl+1 Ctrl+2 Ctrl+3 Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . and the item will be moved. To drag and drop objects into your title: 1. Drag the selected object(s) from your Windows Explorer window into your Lectora work area. and place it within the images folder that coincides with your title.  Click the corresponding toolbar graphic. Once the location is chosen. release the left mouse button.

Action Group Test Test Section Question Survey Survey Question Animation Audio Button Document Equation External HTML Image IPIX Image Menu Progress Bar Reference List Table of Contents Text Block Video Form Radio Button Group Radio Button Check Box Entry Field Drop-down List List Box Ctrl+4 Ctrl+5 Ctrl+6 Ctrl+7 Ctrl+8 Alt+6 Alt+8 Ctrl+9 Ctrl+Shift+0 Ctrl+Shift+1 Ctrl+Shift+2 Ctrl+Shift+3 Ctrl+Shift+4 Ctrl+Shift+5 Ctrl+Shift+6 Ctrl+Shift+7 Ctrl+Alt+9 Ctrl+Shift+8 Ctrl+Shift+9 Ctrl+Alt+0 Ctrl+Alt+1 Ctrl+Alt+2 Ctrl+Alt+3 Ctrl+Alt+4 Ctrl+Alt+5 Ctrl+Alt+6 Ctrl+Alt+7 Ctrl+Alt+8 Changing Common Object Properties Many properties for objects in Lectora (images. video and so on) are the same. The following can be completed within most if not all object properties:  Change the name of an object  Make an object initially invisible Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . You can access these properties for individual objects by double-clicking the object or by selecting the object and pressing the Enter key. audio.

Click OK. That is. 2. 2.         Place an object on the top layer Lock the size and position of an object Enable author control on an object Use an empty ALT tag for an object Pre-load an object for Web-based publishing Specify an object's position and size Specify an object's transitions Add a reference for an object Include metadata for an object Changing the name of an object If the object whose name you want to change relies on a resource file. The (Object) Properties window opens. See also: Selecting an action To make an object initially invisible: 1. Double-click on the object within your work area. Making an object initially invisible By default. 2. That is. Click the General tab if the (Object) Properties window is not already opened to this tab.jpg to your title. Select the Always on Top check box. 3. 3. Double-click on the object within your work area. To force an object to the top layer: 1. this is also the name that will be used as the ALT tag when you publish to the Web. This is useful when you have multiple objects layered on your page. objects are set to be initially visible. The (Object) Properties window opens. Click OK. You can initially hide an object until an action has been executed to show the object. Click the General tab if the (Object) Properties window is not already opened to this tab. For images and buttons. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . they appear when users open the pages on which the objects are located. Specify the new name of the object in the (Object) Name field. Double-click on the object within your work area. You can change the name of your objects. Click the General tab if the (Object) Properties window is not already opened to this tab. the image will be named MyImage. it is automatically named from the file in which it originates. Placing an object on the top layer You can force an object to always be on the top layer of the page. See also: Using resource names as object names To change the name of an object: 1. if you added MyImage. The (Object) Properties window opens. Clear the Initially Visible check box.

See also: Layering Objects Locking the size and position of an object You can lock the size and position of an object. additional authors will not be able to edit the object unless they have the master Author Control password. An empty ALT tag will ensure that no tip text is displayed when the user rests their mouse over the object. 2. 3. Click the General tab if the (Object) Properties window is not already opened to this tab. Click OK. Click the General tab if the (Object) Properties window is not already opened to this tab. This preserves it from getting accidentally moved by you or by other authors working on your title. 3. 2. The (Object) Properties window opens. Double-click on the object within your work area. You can also lock the size and position of the object by right-clicking on the object within the Title Explorer (or within your work area) and selecting Size/Position Locked from the right-click context menu. When the object is locked. Using an empty ALT tag for an object You can create an empty ALT tag for an object. The top-most object listed on the page in the Title Explorer is on the bottom layer of the page. Double-click on the object within your work area. The (Object) Properties window opens. Select the Size/Position Locked check box. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Click the General tab if the (Object) Properties window is not already opened to this tab.If multiple objects are set to Always on Top. Select the Use empty ALT when published to HTML check box. Also. With Author Control enabled. Click OK. a check mark will appear to the left of the Size/Position Locked option within the menu. To use an empty ALT tag for an object: 1. The (Object) Properties window opens. The object will be locked in size and position within Edit mode. assistive technologies will not recognize or will skip over any objects containing an empty ALT tag. 3. See also: Locking and Unlocking Objects Enabling author control on an object Protect the object by enabling Author Control. Lectora will refer to the ordering of the objects in the Title Explorer to determine which of the objects is on the top layer. The master Author Control password must first be set within the Title Properties. Double-click on the object within your work area. 2. See also: Protecting your title with a password To enable author control on an object: 1. To lock the position and size of an object: 1. 3. Select the Author Control check box. Click OK. Click OK.

Pre-loading an object for Web-based publishing
You can choose to load an object before the entire Web page is displayed. This option is selected by default, and will ensure that when the page is displayed, the object to which this pertains will be visible to the user. To pre-load an object: 1. Double-click on the object within your work area. The (Object) Properties window opens. Click the General tab if the (Object) Properties window is not already opened to this tab. 2. Select the Preload image when published to HTML check box. 3. Click OK.

Specifying an object's position and size
You can directly set the position and size of an object from within its properties. To specify the position and size of an object: 1. Double-click on the object within your work area. The (Object) Properties window opens. Click the Position and Size tab. 2. Specify the following information. All measurements are based on pixels. X Coordinate Y Coordinate Offset from right Specify the horizontal distance of the object relative to the top-left corner of the page. Specify the vertical distance of the object relative to the top-left corner of the page. Select this to change the reference point (from the right) from which the object is placed.

Offset from bottom Select this to change the reference point (from the bottom) from which the object is placed. Width Height Keep original aspect ratio Specify the width of the object. Specify the height of the object. If this option is selected, and you alter the width of the object, the height will automatically be adjusted maintain the object's original shape. The same is true of the object's width if you alter the height.

3. Click OK. If you have resized an animation, image or a button, and want to revert back to its original size, click the Reset button within the Original Size box. The original dimensions are displayed. You can also specify the position of your object directly from the status bar. See also: Using the Status bar Moving and Resizing Objects Aligning and Positioning Objects

Specifying an object's transitions
You can specify how an object is displayed on a page. Transitions will produce a visual effect as the object appears and disappears. You can select from over 20 different transitions. There is a Slow to Fast slider to determine the speed at which the transition takes place. To specify the transition: 1. Double-click on the object within your work area. The (Object) Properties window opens. Click the Transitions tab. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010

2. Specify the following information: Transition In Transition (In) Type Select this to enable a transition when displaying the object as the page opens or the object is made visible with an action. Select a transition type as one of the following:  Box In  Split out Horizontal Box Out   Strips Down left  Circle In  Strips Up left  Circle Out  Strips Downright  Wipe Up  Strips Upright Wipe Down   Horizontal Bars  Wipe Right  Vertical Bars  Wipe Left  Fly Top  Blinds Vertical  Fly Top right

      
Delay before transition Slow > Fast Transition Out Transition (Out) Type

Blinds Horizontal Checker Across Checker Down Dissolve Split in Vertical Split out Vertical Split in Horizontal

      

Fly Right Fly Bottom right Fly Bottom Fly Bottom left Fly Left Fly Top left Random Effect

Specify the delay in seconds before starting the transition. Select between 0 and 600 seconds. Use the slider to specify the speed at which the transition should occur. Select this to enable a transition when hiding the object as the page closes or the object is hidden with an action. Select a transition type as one of the following:  Box In  Split out Horizontal  Box Out  Strips Down left  Circle In  Strips Up left  Circle Out  Strips Downright Wipe Up   Strips Upright  Wipe Down  Horizontal Bars  Wipe Right  Vertical Bars  Wipe Left  Fly Top Blinds Vertical   Fly Top right  Blinds Horizontal  Fly Right  Checker Across  Fly Bottom right  Checker Down  Fly Bottom Dissolve   Fly Bottom left  Split in Vertical  Fly Left  Split out Vertical  Fly Top left  Split in Horizontal  Random Effect

Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010

Delay before transition Slow > Fast 3. Click OK.

Specify the delay in seconds before starting the transition. Select between 0 and 600 seconds. Use the slider to specify the speed at which the transition should occur.

Adding a reference for an object
You can associate reference information with your object. You can add information such as author name and date of publication. Once you specify reference information for your objects, you can create a complete reference list that will include all of the reference information for the objects within your title. See also: Working with Reference Lists

To specify the reference information: 1. Double-click on the object within your work area. The (Object) Properties window opens. Click the Reference tab. 2. Select the Add a Reference for this Item check box and specify the following information: Author(s) Title of Work/Web Page Address Publisher Date of Publication 3. Click OK. Specify the names of the authors of the item. Specify either the title of the item or the Web page address. Specify the publisher of the item. Specify the date of publication of the item.

Including metadata for an object
Metadata is data about data. It typically includes information such as a description of the object, the author, the date it was created, and so on. Search engines look within metadata for relevant information to the term that was searched. Within Lectora objects, the metadata will be published as standard XML metadata into the accompanying imsmanifest.xml file for any AICC, SCORM, or CourseMill published titles. Metadata added to objects within a title that is published strictly to HTML will be written directly to the resulting HTML pages containing the objects. The metadata can be specified as custom metadata, an external XML file containing metadata, or as name/value pairs using predefined IMS Metadata Data Elements following the IEEE LTSC LOM standard. To include metadata for an object: 1. Double-click on the object within your work area. The (Object) Properties window opens. Click the Metadata tab. 2. Select the Use Metadata check box and specify the following information: Custom Metadata Select this to display the Custom Metadata text field for you to directly enter custom metadata.

External XML File Select this to import an external XML file containing metadata. Click the Import for Custom Metadata button to navigate and select the xml file. IMS Metadata Data Select this to display a pre-populated list of name value pairs for all the SCORM 1.2 Elements (IEEE LTSC required IMS Metadata data elements. Click the Add button to open the Metadata LOM) Data Element Entry window. Select a predefined data element from the Name combo box and specify a data element value from the Value edit/combo box. Select OK to accept the data element. Select from previously entered data elements from the Name/Value lists and click Edit or Remove to edit or remove the selected element.

Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010

Publish this object’s metadata is checked by default so that the metadata is included in the published title. Uncheck this option if you do not want the metadata included in the published title. 3. Click OK.

Working with Animations and Flash Files
Lectora supports the following animation formats:  GIF (.gif)  Flash files (.swf, .spl) This section describes:  Adding an animation and Flash file Once you have added an animation, you can complete the following within the Animation Properties window: General tab Transitions tab  Change the name of an animation  Specify an animation's transitions  Edit the animation's resource file Parameters tab  Make an animation initially invisible  Specify Flash parameters  Place an animation on the top layer Reference tab  Automatically start an animation  Add a reference for an animation  Lock the size and position of an animation Metadata tab  Enable author control on an animation  Include metadata for an animation  Use an empty ALT tag for an animation  Preload an animation for Web-based publishing Position and Size tab  Specify an animation's position and size

Adding an animation and Flash file
Perform the following steps to add an animation to your title: 1. In the Title Explorer, select the location onto which you want to add an animation. 2. Do one of the following: o Right-click in your work area and select New > Object > Animation.

o From the Add menu, select Object > Animation. o Click the Add Animation toolbar graphic o Type Ctrl+9 o Drag and drop a supported animation file from a Windows Explorer window to the Lectora work area.
The Animation Properties window opens (unless the animation was dragged and dropped into your work area). Click the General tab if the Animation Properties window is not already opened to this tab. 3. Click on the Import button to navigate and select the animation file you want to add to your title. A preview of the media is provided to the right. Alternatively, click on the arrow within the Import button to choose from the following: From File Media Library Select this to navigate and select an animation. Select this to launch your media library to select an animation. The Flash category in the Media Library contains predefined Flash animations you can add to enhance your title. on the Insert toolbar.

Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010

See also: Working with the Media Library Organizer Specifying Flash animation parameters 4. Click OK. The animation will appear within your work area.

Automatically starting an animation
You can choose to automatically start the animation when the page containing the animation appears to the user. To automatically start an animation: 1. Double-click on the animation within your work area. The Animation Properties window opens. Click the General tab if the Animation Properties window is not already opened to this tab. 2. Select the Auto Start check box. 3. Click OK.

Specifying Flash parameters
You can specify additional parameters in the HTML declaration for Flash objects. Specify parameters such as making the background of your object appear transparent. You can also edit and remove parameters. For additional information about the different parameters you can specify, see Adobe's knowledge base on "Flash OBJECT and EMBED tag attributes". The parameters are only used when a title is published to HTML. See Specifying Flash animation parameters for information about the parameters associated with the Flash animations available in the Media Library. To specify Flash parameters: 1. Double-click on the animation within your work area. The Animation Properties window opens. Click the Parameters tab. 2. Click the Add button. The Parameter Entry window opens. 3. Type the parameter Name and Value in the entry fields. 4. Click OK. Repeat steps 2 through 4 for each parameter you want to define. 5. Click OK. To edit a parameter's value, select the parameter name or value, click Edit, and specify the new value. To remove a parameter, select the parameter name or value and click Remove. Only custom parameters can be removed.

Specifying Flash animation parameters
The Media Library contains configurable Flash animations you can add to enhance your title. The animations contain parameters that you configure as necessary. An animation wizard starts when you insert the animation into your title. The wizard guides you through configuring the animation. The configuration changes you make are displayed on the right. You can change default settings, browse and select custom resources, and record audio, when necessary. To change the settings after completing the wizard, double-click Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010

on the animation and click Edit to relaunch the wizard. Select from the following Flash animations and configure the parameters as necessary: Animation Description Analog Clock (AnalogClock. swf) Displays an analog clock in a number of different styles.

Arrow Displays an animated arrow pointing in a custom direction. Highlight (ArrowHighlight. swf) Audio Build a speaking animated character with mouth movements and simple hand gestures. Select from 15 Explanation different male characters or 15 different female characters. (AudioExplanati The following functions within the Flash animation can be executed using the Flash command on.swf) Call Function Action. For more information about using the Flash command, see Executing Flash commands. Variable mute unmute pause resume Description Mutes the character's audio Unmutes the character's audio Pauses the character Resumes playback of the character

Bullets Sync Build a speaking animated character that speaks as he or she displays a bulleted list. You must include with Audio one audio file per bullet as the character presents each bullet. Each bullet requires its own audio file. (BulletsSyncWit Select from 15 different male characters or 15 different female characters. hAudio.swf) The following functions within the Flash animation can be executed using the Flash command Call Function Action. For more information about using the Flash command, see Executing Flash commands. Variable mute unmute pause resume Description Mutes the character's audio Unmutes the character's audio Pauses the character Resumes playback of the character

Bullets with The character speaks one audio file and presents multiple bulletsBuild a speaking animated character that One Audio speaks as he or she displays a bulleted list. You must include one audio file for the entire list as the (BulletsWithOne character presents each bullet. Select from 15 different male characters or 15 different female characters. Audio.swf) The following functions within the Flash animation can be executed using the Flash command Call Function Action. For more information about using the Flash command, see Executing Flash commands. Variable mute unmute pause Description Mutes the character's audio Unmutes the character's audio Pauses the character

Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010

This provides a degree of difficulty. The Character user is racing against another character that will move forward after every question except for the number of Race allowed wrong answers. The default is 0. For more information about using the Flash command. A value of 1 signifies a win. see Executing Flash commands. The following variables' value within the Flash animation can be retrieved using the Flash command Get Variable Action. Variabl e score Description Number of questions answered correctly percent Percentage of questions answered correctly based on the total number of age questions Jigsaw puzzle Users assemble a jigsaw puzzle of an image you supply. For more information about using the Flash command. swf) The following variables' value within the Flash animation can be retrieved using the Flash command Get Variable Action. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Displays an digital clock in a number of different styles.swf) Resumes playback of the character Displays a flash card that flips-over when clicked. (JigsawPuzzleG The following variable's value within the Flash animation can be retrieved using the Flash ame. swf) Hangman (Hangman. Percentage of questions answered correctly based on the total number of questions. Categories Displays a quizshow-type question and answer game. see Executing Flash commands. For more information about using the Flash command. see Executing Flash commands. see Executing Flash commands. Displays the classic game in which the user tries to spell a word or a phrase one letter at a time. For more information about using the Flash command.resume Flash Card (CardFlip.swf) Description Result of the game. Variable result score percentage Digital Clock (DigitialClock. Variabl e score Description Number of questions answered correctly percent Percentage of questions answered correctly based on the total number of age questions points Number of accumulated points Question Displays a game in which the user answers True/False questions to move a game character forward. (Categories.swf) The following variables' value within the Flash animation can be retrieved using the Flash command Get Variable Action.swf) command Get Variable Action. a value of -1 signifies a loss. Number of questions answered correctly. (CharacterRace.

For more information about using the Flash command. Displays a game in which the user tries to reveal an image by correctly answering questions on tiles that swf) cover the image. Up to eight matching pairs are supported. swf) Description Number of questions answered correctly Percentage of questions answered correctly based on the total number of questions Prize amount won Number version of the prize Displays photos in a manner similar to cover flow on an iPod. Variable result numWrong Description Result of the game. Number of questions answered correctly. see estion. Game The following variables' value within the Flash animation can be retrieved using the Flash (MatchingPairGa command Get Variable Action. Variabl e solve Description Will solve the puzzle Matching Pair Displays a game in which the user matches flash cards. Variable score percentag e prize prizeNum Photo Viewer (PhotoViewer. A value of 1 signifies a win. The following function within the Flash animation can be executed using the Flash command Call Function Action. see me. Reveal (Reveal. A value of 1 signifies a win. A value of 1 signifies that all questions have been answered.Variabl e result Description Result of the game. Variable result score Description Result of the game. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . The default is 0. The default is 0.swf) Executing Flash commands. For more information about using the Flash command. For more information about using the Flash command. For more information about using the Flash command. Up to 20 photos are supported. The following variables' value within the Flash animation can be retrieved using the Flash command Get Variable Action. Question The following variables' value within the Flash animation can be retrieved using the Flash (MillionDollarQu command Get Variable Action. percentage Percentage of questions answered correctly based on the total number of questions.swf) Executing Flash commands. The default is 0. Number of wrong attempts. see Executing Flash commands. Million Dollar Displays a question-and-answer game. see Executing Flash commands.

Number of questions answered correctly. The default is 0. For more information about using the Flash command.flv)  Uncompressed Windows audio (.rm)  uLaw audio (. e. Correct answers allow them to place an (TicTacToeGam X on the Tic Tac Toe grid. percentage Percentage of questions answered correctly based on the total number of questions.flv) Once you have added audio. Scramble The following variable's value within the Flash animation can be retrieved using the Flash (WordScramble.mp3)  Advanced Systems Format (. command Get Variable Action. see swf) Executing Flash commands. Working with Audio Lectora supports the following audio formats:  Flash Audio (. (TextAnimation. a value of -1 signifies a loss.wma) This section describes:  Adding audio  Converting to Flash (.mid)  MPEG. Word Displays a game in which the user tries to unscramble a word or a phrase. Variable result score Description Result of the game.swf) The following variables' value within the Flash animation can be retrieved using the Flash command Get Variable Action. Users answer True/False questions. Audio layer 3 (. A 0 is placed in the grid when the answer is incorrect. Variable Description result Result of the game. swf) Tic Tac Toe Displays a Tic Tac Toe game. see Executing Flash commands. The default is 0.asf)  RealMedia streaming media (. a value of -1 signifies a loss. A value of 1 signifies a win. you can complete the following within the Audio Properties window: General tab Transitions tab  Change the name of an audio object  Specify audio display transitions Reference tab  Specify the type of audio  Add a reference for an audio object  Edit the audio resource file Metadata tab  Specify a display type for audio  Include metadata for an audio object  Make an audio icon or controller initially invisible Events tab  Place an audio icon or controller on the top layer  Using events Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 .au)  Windows Media audio (. A value of 1 signifies a win.wav)  Standard MIDI (. For more information about using the Flash command.Text Animation Displays animated user-specified text in a number of ways.

The audio will appear within your work area. click on the arrow within the Import button to choose from the following: From File Media Library Select this to navigate and select an audio file. A preview of the media is provided to the right. enter the Web address of the audio stream in the URL field. For streaming audio. Double-click on the audio object within your work area. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . select Object > Audio. Click on the Import button to navigate and select the audio file you want to add to your title. To specify the type of audio: 1. Alternatively. Click OK. Click the General tab if the Audio Properties window is not already opened to this tab. on the Insert toolbar. select the location onto which you want to add the audio. you can specify whether the audio is standard or streaming. Click the General tab if the Audio Properties window is not already opened to this tab. Select the Audio Type from the list. Click the General tab if the Audio Properties window is not already opened to this tab. click the Import button to navigate and select an audio file. Specifying the type of audio When you add audio to your title. 3. The Audio Properties window opens (unless the audio was dragged and dropped into your work area). Click OK. For Standard Audio. See also: Working with the Media Library Organizer 4.    Lock the size and position of an audio icon or controller Enable author control on an audio object Continuously play audio Automatically start audio Position and Size tab  Specify audio position and size  Associate actions with audio events Skins tab  Applying a skin to the controller Adding audio Perform the following steps to add audio to your title: 1. In the Title Explorer. o From the Add menu. Select this to launch your media library to select an audio file. The Audio Properties window opens. See also: Streaming Media 3. o Click the Add Audio toolbar graphic o Type Ctrl+Shift+0 o Drag and drop a supported audio file from a Windows Explorer window to the Lectora work area. Do one of the following: o Right-click in your work area and select New > Object > Audio. 2. you can specify whether to display a speaker icon for the audio or a controller. 2. Double-click on the audio object within your work area. The Audio Properties window opens. To specify the display type for the audio: 1. Specifying a display type for audio When you add audio to your title.

2. The Audio Properties window opens. 2.wma or . To continuously play audio: 1. Click the Events tab. Double-click on the audio object within your work area. Users will have no control over the audio. set within an audio (. users will be able to click on it to toggle the audio on and off. pause. Lectora displays a speaker graphic that when clicked. Click OK. 3. Using events Events. Double-click the audio within your work area or Title Explorer. you can select from predefined skins for the controller. Select the Auto Start check box. Choose a previously imported image from the list. This is especially useful when synchronized captioning is needed for audio.2. 3. (Other image) You can specify your own graphic for use as the speaker icon. Use the Previous Frame and Next Frame buttons (or select Move Backward and Move Forward from the Controls menu) or move the slider under the Audio Sample window to the location within the audio where you want to add the event.flv) audio. and stop the audio. 4. To automatically start audio: 1. Click Add Events. Click the General tab if the Audio Properties window is not already opened to this tab. For Flash (. When you choose your own graphic. The audio will loop until the user has exited the page. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Double-click on the audio object within your work area. 3. Choose from the following four options: Speaker Icon None Controller This is the default display for an audio object. play. See Applying a skin to the controller. 2. Follow these steps to set an event within the audio: 1. or click the Import button next to the Display list to navigate and select an image. also known as script commands.flv) file can be used within a Lectora title to trigger actions while the audio is playing. The Audio Properties window opens. Click OK. This will display an audio controller so users have the ability to fast forward. rewind. Select the Play Continuously check box. Select the Display from the list. will enable users to toggle the audio on and off. This makes the audio transparent on the page. Continuously playing audio You can have audio automatically restart when it has reached the end. 3. The Lectora Video Editor opens. Click OK. Click the General tab if the Audio Properties window is not already opened to this tab. Automatically starting audio You can chose to automatically start the audio when the page containing the audio appears to the user. The Audio Properties window opens.

This is especially useful when you want to synchronize actions with audio. The Insert Event window opens. Use the Name field to specify the name for the event. See also: Selecting an Action Associating actions with audio events Events. Use this window to manage events. set within an audio file can be used to trigger actions while the audio is playing. select View Current Events to see the list of events in the current audio file. The event is added to the audio and the event location is marked on the slider. and if events are present within the audio. 6. select it and click the Edit button. Once the events have been created. also known as script commands. Double-click on the audio within your work area or Title Explorer. When you import the audio file into a Lectora title. Using the Events tab.  To remove an event. The Events window opens. select the event label from the Event list and specify the action that should be executed when the audio has reached the time of the event. Specify additional action information as necessary.  To edit an event. See also: Adding an action. Select the event label from the Event list. all instances of the resource are changed throughout your title. see Using events. Click the Events tab. you can proceed to associate actions with the audio events. Use the Time fields to directly specify the insertion point of the event. The event details are displayed. Specify the details of the new event and click OK. Edit the details as necessary. The Audio Properties window opens. 7. Converting to Flash (. When you convert an object to Flash audio or video. Click OK. click the Add button to open the Update Event window. Viewing current events From the Tools menu. To associate actions with audio events: 1. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Click OK. Click the Insert Event button or select Insert Event from the Tools menu.  To add a new event. 4.flv) audio You can convert your audio objects to Flash (. For information about adding events. Specify the Action to be executed when the audio has reached the event. 3. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each event you want to define. 2. the Events tab within the Audio Properties window can be used to execute specified actions.5.flv). You must first create the events within the audio. select it and click the Remove button.

and choose Convert to FLV. click No to restore the file to its original type. Buttons can be used for navigating within your title or executing other actions. The Convert to FLV window opens. 3.flv. The object is converted to . Click OK to add your updated controller to the page. Applying a skin to the controller When you have selected to display a Flash (. 4. Otherwise. Use the drop-down list to select a predefined skin. Add the audio to your title. 2. 3. This section describes:  Adding a button Once you have added a button. The option is only available for relevant file types. right-click. To convert to Flash audio: 1. Use the slider to select a compression level.Flash . Higher compression levels will result in smaller files. you can complete the following within the Button Properties window: General tab Position and Size tab  Change the name of a button  Specify a button's position and size On Click tab  Make a button initially invisible  Assign an action to a button  Place a button on the top layer Condition tab  Lock the size and position of a button  Place a condition on a button's action  Enable author control on a button Transitions tab  Use a 3-frame animated GIF for a button  Specify a button's transitions  Make a button transparent  Use an empty ALT tag for a button  Preload a button for Web-based publishing Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Double-click on the audio object within your work area. you can apply a predefined or custom skin to the controller. See Specifying a display type for audio. See also: Converting to Flash (. To apply a skin to the controller: 1. but the quality of the media will deteriorate as compression increases. Click Convert.flv) audio object using a controller. the compression results are displayed and you are asked whether to use the new file. Click Yes. Click the Skins tab.flv) audio Working with Buttons You can create buttons in Lectora with the use of images or 3-frame animated GIFs or they can be designated as transparent buttons. The Audio Properties window opens. 5. 2. When the conversion completes. Select the object.flv files require your user's computer to have the Flash plug-in installed.

You can use images or 3-frame animated gifs for your button. select Object > Button. To use a 3-frame animated GIF for a button: 1. see Creating Custom Buttons. o Click the Add Button toolbar graphic o Type Ctrl+Shift+1 on the Insert toolbar. You can also use Lectora's Button Wizard to select from stock buttons from clip art or create buttons with custom text. The Clicked Image represents the clicked state of the button. This is how the button will appear to the user on the page. The Button Properties window opens (unless you used the Button Wizard to create your button). Double-click on the button within your work area. or you can make your button transparent. Click the Import buttons to navigate and select an image or animation of your own. 2. The Button Properties window opens. select the location onto which you want to add a button. Three-frame animated GIFs have the 3 button states (normal. Edit the button's resource files Adding a button Perform the following steps to add a button to your title. and Mouseover Image lists to navigate and select the images for use within the three different states of the button. The ability to import a Clicked Image or a Mouseover Image is disabled. See also: Working with the Media Library Organizer 4. The Normal-State Image represents the normal state of the button. Click the General tab if the Button Properties window is not already opened to this tab. Select this to launch your media library to select an image or animation. You can also use a 3-frame animated gif for your button. In the Title Explorer. Click the General tab if the Button Properties window is not already opened to this tab. 3. o From the Add menu. The button will appear within your work area. The Mouseover Image represents the mouseover state of the button. Select the Use 3-frame animated GIF check box. 2. 3. For information. Alternatively. Do one of the following: o Right-click in your work area and select New > Object > Button. and mouseover) built into them. 1. This is how the button will appear to the user when they have placed their mouse over the button. clicked. This is how the button will appear to the user when they have clicked on the button. or make your button transparent. Use the Import buttons located next to the Normal-State Image. See also: Using a 3-frame animated GIF for a button Making a button transparent Using a 3-frame animated GIF for a button You can use a 3-frame animated GIF for a button. Clicked Image. click on the arrow within the Import button to choose from the following: From File Media Library Select this to navigate and select an image or animation. Click on the Import button next to the Normal-State Image list to navigate and select a 3-frame animated GIF for use Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Click OK.

Double-click on the button within your work area. 2.with your button. The action selected will execute when a user clicks the button. The Target field is enabled when the action requires a target. and Mouseover Image is disabled. To input multiple conditions. select whether All of the Following conditions or Any of the Following conditions should be true to execute the action specified on the On Click tab of the Button Properties window. Conditions require the use of a variable. This enables you to execute the button's action only when the specified conditions have been satisfied. Click OK. 4. Click the On Click tab. Select Perform Action ONLY if the following is TRUE. If multiple conditions are defined. click on the Multiple Conditions button. See also: Making an action conditional To place a condition on a button's action: 1. The ability to import a Normal-State Image. To make a button transparent: 1. Click OK. The Button Properties window opens. 3. 2. See also: About Actions To assign an action to a button: 1. Working with Documents You can embed textual documents into your title. select a Relationship and enter a Value. 2. Click the Condition tab. Use the Action list to select the action to execute when the user clicks the button. Transparent buttons are useful for creating hotspots on regions of an image. See also: Selecting an action Selecting an action's target Placing a condition on a button's action You can specify single or multiple conditions for the action assigned to the button. 3. Assigning an action to a button You can assign an action to your button. Select the Transparent check box. Click the General tab if the Button Properties window is not already opened to this tab. Documents will appear in an opaque. 3. The Button Properties window opens. Making a button transparent You can make a button transparent. scrollable window within your title. Select the Variable from the list. You can then use the additional fields to specify other variables and relationships. Specify additional information as necessary. Double-click on the button within your work area. Clicked Image. Lectora supports the following document formats: Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Click OK. Double-click on the button within your work area. The Button Properties window opens. Click OK.

Library See also: Working with the Media Library Organizer 4. 3. Click the General tab if the Document Properties window is not already opened to this tab. select Object > Document.txt) This section describes:  Adding a document Once you have added a document. The document will appear within your work area. 2. Click OK. you can specify the following within the Equation Properties window: General tab Position and Size tab  Change the name of an equation  Specify an equation's position and size Transitions tab Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . you can complete the following within the Document Properties window: General tab Transitions tab  Change the name of a document  Specify a document's transitions Reference tab  Edit the document's resource file  Add a reference for a document  Make a document initially invisible Metadata tab  Place a document on the top layer  Include metadata for a document  Lock the size and position of a document  Enable author control on a document Position and Size tab  Specify a document's position and size Adding a document Perform the following steps to add a document to your title: 1.  Rich Text (. click on the arrow within the Import button to choose from the following: From File Select this to navigate and select a document. In the Title Explorer. Media Select this to launch your media library to select a document. select the location onto which you want to add a document. Working with Equations You can create mathematical equations for use in your title. This section describes:  Adding an equation Once you have added an equation. Click on the Import button to navigate and select the document file you want to add to your title. The Trivantis Equation Editor can be used to create your equations. The Document Properties window opens (unless the document was dragged and dropped into your work area). All equations are published as images. Do one of the following: o Right-click in your work area and select New > Object > Document. on the Insert toolbar. Alternatively. o Click the Add Document toolbar graphic o Type Ctrl+Shift+2 o Drag and drop a supported document file from a Windows Explorer window to the Lectora work area.rtf) Text (. o From the Add menu.

Double-click on the equation within your work area. 3. Working with External HTML Objects The external HTML object is an advanced Lectora feature that allows you to extend the functionality and contents of your title beyond what Lectora natively supports. The cursor will blink inside the equation template box on the content page. 1. and close the Trivantis Equation Editor. you can make changes to your equation by editing it. The Equation Properties window opens. o From the Add menu. 2. 4. In the Title Explorer. Enter the appropriate values inside of the equation template boxes within the content page. on the Insert toolbar. All instances of the equation are updated within your title. Click the X at the top-right of the window to close the Trivantis Equation Editor and insert the equation into your title. you can extend the functionality of your title by adding: Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Editing an equation When you create an equation using the Trivantis Equation Editor. Select one of the 19 template buttons and select the appropriate symbol to insert within your equation. select the location onto which you want to add an equation. The Trivantis Equation Editor is launched with your equation visible in the work area. 5. o Click the Add Equation toolbar graphic o Type Ctrl+Shift+3 The Trivantis Equation Editor window opens. With the external HTML object. Click on the Edit button. select Object > Equation. 2. To edit an equation: 1. Click the General tab if the Equation Properties window is not already opened to this tab. Make the appropriate changes to your equation. Do one of the following: o Right-click in your work area and select New > Object > Equation. Your new equation will appear at the top-left of your Lectora page. save your changes. 3.       Edit an equation Make an equation initially invisible Place an equation on the top layer Lock the size and position of an equation Enable author control on an equation Use an empty ALT tag for an equation Preload an equation for Web-based publishing  Specify an equation's transitions Adding an equation Perform the following steps to add an equation to your title.

The External HTML Object Properties window opens. When this is selected. 3. External HTML objects are only valid if you are publishing to the Web. Do one of the following: o Right-click in your work area and select New > Object > External HTML. Click the General tab if the External HTML Object Properties window is not already opened to this tab. In the Title Explorer. Select the Object Type from the list. you can specify the following within the External HTML Object Properties window: General tab Parameters tab  Change the name of an external HTML object  Specify Java Applet parameters Additional Files tab  Make an external HTML object initially invisible  Specify additional files used by an external HTML  Place an external HTML object on the top layer object  Lock the size and position of an external HTML object Transitions tab  Enable author control on an external HTML object  Specify an external HTML object's transitions Position and Size tab  Specify an external HTML object's position and size Adding an external HTML object Perform the following steps to add an external HTML object to your title.             Java Applets Header Scripting (JavaScript) Shockwave Movies Custom HTML ASP Scripts JSP Scripts Meta Tags Top of File Scripting Bottom of File Scripting PHP Scripts Cascading Style Sheets ColdFusion ASP . select Object > External HTML. 2. you must also specify the class name you would like to use within the Jar file. Use this object type to import a Shockwave file. If you use a Jar file. Use this object type to insert your own JavaScript. Choose from the following types of objects: Java Applet Header Scripting Shockwave Movie Use this object type to import a Java class or Jar file. 1. o Click the Add External HTML toolbar graphic o Type Ctrl+Shift+4 on the Insert toolbar.aspx) This section describes:  Adding an external HTML object Once you have added an external HTML object. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 .NET (. o From the Add menu. your custom script will be placed within the <script> tags in the head of the HTML page. select the location onto which you want to add an external HTML object.

An example of a meta tag is: <META NAME="Author" CONTENT="Your name"> Use this object type to insert your own code or comments at the top of the file. 2. Click the Parameters tab. 4. Click the Import button to navigate and select the file containing your script. Use this object type to insert meta tags. you can Import an external file containing your script.jsp. The External HTML Object Properties window opens.NET script. PHP. Meta tags will follow the <title> tags within the head of the HTML page. Once you have selected the object type from the list. Your custom code or comments will be placed above and outside the <HTML> tags of the HTML page. The HTML page will be published with an extension of . The HTML page will be published with an extension of . The HTML page will be published with an extension of .cfm. Use this object type to insert your own ColdFusion script. ColdFusion and ASP . Cascading style sheets will not cascade to text that Lectora produces. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Use this object type to insert your own ASP script. Alternatively. Your custom code will be placed within a <div> block in the body of the HTML page. Select this to navigate and select a file. See also: Working with the Media Library Organizer Specifying Java applet parameters You can pass parameters from the HTML page to the Java applet that is included on your page as an external HTML object. Your custom code or comments will be placed below and outside the </HTML> tags of the HTML page. The Parameter Entry window opens. or you can directly write the script or code into the Custom HTML field. To specify Java applet parameters: 1. The HTML page will be published with an extension of .php. JSP script Meta tags Top of file scripting Bottom of file scripting PHP Script Cascading Style Sheet ColdFusion ASP . JSP.NET (. Your custom code will be placed within a <div> block in the body of the HTML page. Click the Add button. Use this object type to apply a cascading style sheet. Your custom code will be placed within a <div> block in the body of the HTML page. Use this object type to insert your own code or comments at the bottom of the file. The HTML page will be published with an extension of .NET object types cannot be used on the same page within your title. Use this object type to insert your own JSP script.aspx) ASP. Use this object type to insert your own ASP . click on the arrow within the Import button to choose from the following: From File Media Library 5. custom HTML. and should only be used to format objects.Other ASP script Use this object type to insert your own free-form.asp. Click OK. Double-click on the external HTML object within your work area. Use this object type to insert your own PHP script. Select this to launch your media library to select a file. Your custom code will be placed within a <div> block in the body of the HTML page. Your custom code will be placed within a <div> block in the body of the HTML page. Your custom code will be placed within a <div> block in the body of the HTML page.aspx.

select the file within the list and click on the Remove file button. 2. Click OK. . The additional file appears within the list. Click the Additional files tab. When you Remove a parameter.jpeg. Click the Add file button to navigate and select the file referenced by your code.jpg)  GIF (. 4.3.wmf)  Portable Network Graphics (. Repeat this step as necessary for any files that are referenced by your custom code.emf)  Windows Metafiles (. To specify additional files used by an external HTML object: 1. it is removed from the list.png) This section describes:  Adding an image Once you have added an image. When you Edit an existing parameter. you can specify the following within the Image Properties window: General tab Transitions tab Change the name of an image   Specify an image's transitions Reference tab  Edit the image's resource file  Add a reference for an image  Make an image initially invisible Metadata tab  Place an image on the top layer  Include metadata for an image  Lock the size and position of an image  Enable author control on an image  Use an empty ALT tag for an image  Preload an image for Web-based publishing Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 .tif)  Windows Bitmap (. Type the parameter Name and Value in the entry fields. Repeat steps 2 through 4 for each parameter you want to define. The External HTML Object Properties window opens. 5. you can change the name or value of the parameter. 3.gif)  TIFF (. Double-click on the external HTML object within your work area. You can Edit or Remove existing parameters by selecting the parameter name or value within the list and clicking the corresponding button. Working with Images Lectora supports the following image formats:  JPEG (. Specifying additional files used by an external HTML object The custom code within your external HTML object can link to a variety of file types. Each file that your custom code references must be added as an additional file. Click OK. To remove unnecessary files. Click OK.bmp)  Windows Enhanced Metafiles (.

Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Media Select this to launch your media library to select an image. 2. Do one of the following: o Right-click in your work area and select New > Object > Image o From the Add menu. For additional information about IPIX images. visit http://www. Library See also: Working with the Media Library Organizer 4. select the location onto which you want to add an image. click on the arrow within the Import button to choose from the following: From File Select this to navigate and select an image. you can specify the following within the IPIX Properties window: General tab Additional files tab Change the name of an IPIX image   Specify additional files used by an IPIX image Transitions tab  Make an IPIX image initially invisible  Specify an IPIX image's transitions  Place an IPIX image on the top layer Reference tab  Lock the size and position of an IPIX image  Add a reference for an IPIX image  Enable author control on an IPIX image Metadata tab  Use Java for rendering an IPIX image  Include metadata for an IPIX image Position and Size tab  Specify an IPIX image's position and size Adding an IPIX image Perform the following steps to add an IPIX image to your title: 1. Do one of the following: o Right-click in your work area and select New > Object > IPIX Image.com. The image will appear within your work area. Working with IPIX Images IPIX images are 360 degree images that enable users to “look around” the image by navigating left. Lectora supports the following IPIX image formats:  IPIX files (. select the location onto which you want to add an IPIX image. 3. In the Title Explorer. 2.ipix. . Click OK.ips) This section describes:  Adding an IPIX image Once you have added an image. select Object > Image on the Insert toolbar o Click the Add Image toolbar graphic o Type Ctrl+Shift+5 o Drag and drop a supported image file from a Windows Explorer window to the Lectora work area The Image Properties window opens (unless the image was dragged and dropped into your work area). or down within the image.Position and Size tab  Specify an image's position and size Adding an image Perform the following steps to add an image to your title: 1. up. Click the General tab if the Image Properties window is not already opened to this tab. right.ipx. Click on the Import button to navigate and select the image you want to add to your title. Alternatively. In the Title Explorer.

The IPIX Properties window opens. The IPIX image will appear within your work area. Alternatively. To remove unnecessary files. Click the Add IPIX toolbar graphic on the Insert toolbar. This section describes:  Adding a menu Once you have added a menu. click on the arrow within the Import button to choose from the following: From File Select this to navigate and select an IPIX image. Specifying additional files used by an IPIX image IPIX images can link to additional IPIX images or a variety of other files. To specify additional files used by an IPIX image: 1. Click the Additional files tab. Library See also: Working with the Media Library Organizer 4. Repeat this step as necessary for any files that are referenced by your IPIX image. The IPIX Properties window opens (unless the IPIX image was dragged and dropped into your work area). Click OK. Click on the Import button to navigate and select the IPIX image you want to add to your title. select the file within the list and click on the Remove file button. Working with Menus You can create menus for use in navigating throughout a title or for executing other actions. Click the General tab if the IPIX Properties window is not already opened to this tab. Click OK. Using Java to render an IPIX image You can choose to use Java instead of ActiveX for the functionality of IPIX images in your Web-published title. Click OK. 3. select Object > IPIX Image. you can specify the following within the Menu Properties window: General tab Submenu Layout tab  Change the name of a menu  Configure a menu's submenu layout Position and Size tab  Specify menu items and sub items Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Media Select this to launch your media library to select an IPIX image. To use Java instead of ActiveX for an IPIX image: 1. Double-click on the IPIX image within your work area. Click the Add file button to navigate and select the file referenced by the IPIX image. 2. 3. Select the Use Java Runtime when Publishing to HTML check box. The IPIX Properties window opens. Double-click on the IPIX image within your work area. Each file that your IPIX image references needs to be added as an additional file. o o o o From the Add menu. 3.Type Ctrl+Shift+6 Drag and drop a supported IPIX image file from a Windows Explorer window to the Lectora work area. Click the General tab if the IPIX Properties window is not already opened to this tab. 2. The additional file appears within the list.

Click the General tab if the Menu Properties window is not already opened to this tab. To specify menu items and sub items: 1. select Object > Menu. sub items and separators. Double-click on the menu object within your work area. you design the organization of the menu and specify the selectable items within the menu. Depending on your menu's orientation. 1. Add Sub Item. The Menu Properties window opens. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . 3. You can also remove items by selecting the menu item and clicking the Remove Item button. 3. o Click the Add Menu toolbar graphic o Type Ctrl+Shift+7 on the Insert toolbar. Add Sub Item Add Separator Click this button to add a separator to the menu. In the Title Explorer. Click OK. Click OK. Sub items will appear to the user when the user has selected the main menu item in which the sub item resides.      Rename menu items and sub items Assign menu item actions Make a menu initially invisible Place a menu on the top layer Lock the size and position of a menu Enable author control on a menu Top Level Layout tab  Configure a menu's top level layout  Specify a menu's position and size Transitions tab  Specify a menu's transitions Adding a menu Perform the following steps to add a menu to your title. 2. Specifying menu items and sub items When you add a menu to your title. Click on the following buttons to add the appropriate items to your menu: Add Item Click this button to add a main menu item. See also: Specifying menu items and sub items 4. The Menu Properties window opens. The new menu item will be added following the currently selected menu item in the menu organization display area. Click this button to add a sub menu item. Click the General tab if the Menu Properties window is not already opened to this tab. 2. the separator will appear as a horizontal or vertical line within the menu. select the location onto which you want to add a menu. Main menu items will appear to the user without the user having to expand a level of the menu. and Add Separator buttons to specify the selectable items within the menu. Use the Add Item. The new sub menu item will be added to the currently selected menu item in the menu organization display area. o From the Add menu. Use the buttons beneath the menu organization display area on the left to add menu items. Do one of the following: o Right-click in your work area and select New > Object > Menu.

Assigning menu item actions Each menu item and sub item within your menu can be associated with an action. The Menu Properties window opens. 3. Double-click on the menu object within your work area. See also: Selecting an action The Target field is enabled when the action requires a target. 2. left and right margins (in pixels) of both the horizontal menu Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . See also: Selecting an action's target Repeat steps 2 and 3 to assign additional actions to other menu items. 2. o Click within the textual label for the menu item within the menu organization display area and type the new item name. 4. The Menu Properties window opens. the change will be reflected in the menu organization display area. Click OK. Horizontally oriented menus enable you to set the top. The action specified will execute when a user has selected the corresponding menu item from the menu. bottom. Click the Top Level Layout tab. Use the Action list to select the action to execute when the selects the menu item. Click the General tab if the Menu Properties window is not already opened to this tab. o Type the new name into the Menu Item Name field. To rename menu items and sub items: 1. Double-click on the menu object within your work area. Specify additional information as necessary. The Menu Properties window opens. The names used for your menu items and sub items are the options within the menu from which users can choose. Select the menu item or sub item within the menu organization display area that you want to change. 3. Rename the item by completing one of the following: o Click on the Rename Item button and type the new item name within the menu organization display area. To configure a menu's top level layout: 1. Click the General tab if the Menu Properties window is not already opened to this tab. fonts. margins and the style of the menu. 2. Configuring a menu's top level layout You can customize your menu's top level appearance by specifying colors. Double-click on the menu object within your work area. Specify the following for the top level of your menu: Menu Orientation Select between Horizontal or Vertical orientation. See also: About Actions To assign menu item actions: 1. Select the menu item or sub item within the menu organization display area to which you want to assign an action. Click OK.Renaming menu items and sub items You can change the names of your menu items and sub items at any time.

Select this to launch your media library to select an image. This is the color that will appear in the background of the menu when the user has rolled his or her mouse over a top level menu item. Web-friendly fonts such as Arial. or select Custom to select a custom color from the Color wheel. and the menu frame should appear. Text Alignment Background Color Choose how you want the text of the menu item aligned within the menu.and the vertical submenus. or Tahoma. Select a previously imported image from the list. See also: Background Image Matching Colors Used within Your Title Instead of using a background color with your menu. or select Custom to select a custom color from the Color wheel. See also: Background Highlight Color Matching Colors Used within Your Title Select the background highlight color for the menu. Lectora does not embed the fonts into the published work. Alternatively. Center. or click the Import button to navigate and select a new background image for the menu. Verdana. Select the background color for top level menu items. select the eye-dropper tool to use a color from elsewhere within your title. or select Custom to select a custom color from the Color wheel. select the eye-dropper tool to use a color from elsewhere within your title. See also: Managing Text Styles Keep in mind that if you are publishing to HTML. See also: Working with the Media Organizer Margins Specify values (in pixels) for the Top / Bottom and Left / Right margins for the top level menu items. Select a predefined color. you can use a background image. bottom. or Right. This is the color of the text that will appear when the user has rolled his or her mouse over a top level menu item. It is best to use common. Select a predefined color. select the eye-dropper tool to use a color from elsewhere within your title. Select how outlines. Margins will determine the spacing between menu items and the borders of the menu. click on the arrow within the Import button to choose from the following: From File Media Library Select this to navigate and select an image. left and right margins (in pixels) of the vertical menu and vertical submenus. To create a new text style. Select a predefined color. Vertically oriented menus enable you to set top. Text Highlight Color Select the text highlight color for the menu. Select from:  No Outlines or Frame  Windows Style 3D Menus  Draw Frame Around Menu Outlines/ Separators/ Frame Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . See also: Matching Colors Used within Your Title Text Style Use the list to select a text style to be used for the top level menu items. Select Left. separators. click on the Styles button.

or Right. or select Custom to select a custom color from the Color wheel. select the eyedropper tool to use a color from elsewhere within your title. Click the Submenu Layout tab. or select Custom to select a custom color from the Color wheel. select the eye-dropper tool to use a color from elsewhere within your title. Click OK. See also: Background Highlight Color Matching Colors Used within Your Title Select the background highlight color for a submenu. This is the color that will appear in the background of the submenu when the user has rolled his or her mouse over a submenu item. margins and the style of the submenu. you can use a background image. Draw Outline Around Each Menu Item Select the Separator Color and Outline/Frame Color from the lists. Background Color Select the background color for submenu items. Center. It is best to use common. when available. Lectora does not embed the fonts into the published work. To configure a submenu's top level layout: 1. Select a predefined color. Select a predefined color. click on the arrow within the Import button to choose from the following: From File Media Library Select this to navigate and select an image. Select this to launch your media library to select an image. The Menu Properties window opens. Alternatively. 2. or click the Import button to navigate and select a new background image for submenus. fonts. Configuring a menu's submenu layout You can customize the appearance of submenus by specifying colors. Select a previously imported image from the list. Double-click on the menu object within your work area. Verdana. click on the Styles button. Select a predefined color. See also: Managing Text Styles Keep in mind that if you are publishing to HTML. This is the color of the text that will appear when the user has rolled his or her mouse over a submenu item. select the eye-dropper tool to use a color from elsewhere within your title. To create a new text style. or Tahoma. Text Highlight Color Select the text highlight color for a submenu. See also: Background Image Managing Text Styles Instead of using a background color with your submenus. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Web-friendly fonts such as Arial. See also: Matching Colors Used within Your Title Text Style Use the list to select a text style to be used for submenu items. or select Custom to select a custom color from the Color wheel. 3. Specify the following for the submenus of your menu: Text Alignment Choose how you want the text of the submenu item aligned within the menu. Select Left.

o Click the Add Progress Bar toolbar graphic o Type Ctrl+Alt+9 on the Insert toolbar. Click the General tab if the Progress Bar Properties window is not already opened to this tab. select Object > Progress Bar. 2. separators. 3. you can specify the following within the Progress Bar Properties window: General tab Layout  Change the name of a progress bar  Specify the layout of a progress bar Position and Size tab  Specify the type of progress bar  Specify a progress bar's position and size  Automatically start a timer progress bar Transitions tab  Make a progress bar initially invisible  Specify a progress bar's transitions  Place a progress bar on the top layer  Lock the size and position of a progress bar  Enable author control on a progress bar  Empty a progress bar as progress increases Adding a progress bar Perform the following steps to add a progress bar to your title: 1. Click OK. when available. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . In the Title Explorer. Do one of the following: o Right-click in your work area and select New > Object > Progress Bar. o From the Add menu. Select how outlines.See also: Working with the Media Organizer Margins Specify values (in pixels) for the Top / Bottom and Left / Right margins for submenu items. Outlines/ Separators/ Frame 3. and the submenu frame should appear. Working with Progress Bars A progress bar can serve as a timer or as a visual representation of the user’s progress through a title. See also: Specifying the type of progress bar 4. Select from:  No Outlines or Frame  Windows Style 3D Menus  Draw Frame Around Menu  Draw Outline Around Each Menu Item Select the Separator Color and Outline/Frame Color from the lists. Select the Type of progress bar from the list and specify additional information as necessary. Each type is different in its functionality. The Progress Bar Properties window opens. Specifying the type of progress bar There are three types of progress bars you can add to your title. Click OK. select the location onto which you want to add the progress bar. This section describes:  Adding a progress bar Once you have added a progress bar. Margins will determine the spacing between submenu items and the borders of the submenu.

The frequency with which the progress bar will increment. Choose from the following options: Custom Creates a custom progress bar with a specified Range and Step Size. If your progress bar type is Timer. specify the following additional information: Automatically starting a timer progress bar You can choose to automatically start a timer progress bar when the page containing the progress bar appears to the user. and pages that are included in a Table of Contents. If your progress bar type is Custom. To empty a progress bar as progress increases: Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Select the progress bar Type from the list. the progress bar will increment on every page that is included in a Table of Contents. The total range of your progress bar. Click the General tab if the Progress Bar Properties window is not already opened to this tab. The Progress Bar Properties window opens. For example. The progress bar can be set to Auto Start or can be started using the Play action. Click OK. 3. and an On Done Playing action can be added to the progress bar to execute once the Total Time has elapsed. Emptying a progress bar as progress increases The typical functionality for a progress bar is for it to fill as progress increases. See also: Timer Selecting an Action Creates a progress bar based on time with a specified Total Time and Increment. The Progress Bar Properties window opens. This kind of progress bar must be set or incremented manually using the Set Progress and Step Progress actions. This can be any positive integer value. Double-click on the progress bar within your work area. See also: Specifying the type of progress bar To automatically start a timer progress bar: 1. The increment size within the progress bar. See also: Working with Tables of Contents 3. The total time for the progress bar. 2. Click OK. if the increment value is 2. Select the Auto Start check box. This can be any positive integer value. specify the following additional information: Range Step Size Total Time Increment 5. It can be stopped using the Stop action. sections. Click the General tab if the Progress Bar Properties window is not already opened to this tab. 4.To specify the type of progress bar: 1. This is the amount of time it will take to completely fill or empty the progress bar. Double-click on the progress bar within your work area. That is. You can specify to empty a progress bar as progress increases instead. 2. the progress bar will increment every 2 seconds. See also: Selecting an action's trigger Table of Contents Creates a progress bar that automatically tracks progress through a title in accordance with the chapters. It is not necessary for a Table of Contents to exist within a title for use of this functionality.

the progress bar will fill using the image. or select Custom to select a custom color from the Color wheel. Click OK. Select this to include tick marks in the progress bar. 2. The Progress Bar Properties window opens. or select Custom to select a custom color from the Color wheel. 3. Use the Color list to select a predefined color. Specifying the layout of a progress bar You can customize the orientation and colors used within your progress bar. Select the Empty Bar As Progress Increases check box. select the eye-dropper tool to use a color from elsewhere within your title. 2. The Progress Bar Properties window opens. Working with Reference Lists You can create a reference list within your title. you can specify a color for the progress bar. A reference list will compile all of the reference information from objects within your title to create a complete list of all your references. Select this to launch your media library to select an image. If you have cleared the Use Default Image check box. select the eye-dropper tool to use a color from elsewhere within your title.1. or click the Import button to navigate and select an image for the progress bar. When an image is selected. See also: Working with the Media Organizer Background Select the background color for the progress bar. you can specify an image for use with your progress bar. Select a previously imported Image from the list. Double-click on the progress bar within your work area. See also: Adding a reference for an object Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . click on the arrow within the Import button to choose from the following: From File Media Library Select this to navigate and select an image. Click OK. Use the Color list to select a predefined color. Click the General tab if the Progress Bar Properties window is not already opened to this tab. Each increment of the progress bar will replicate the image selected. Clear this option to specify a color or image for the progress bar. Double-click on the progress bar within your work area. Alternatively. See also: Image Matching Colors Used within Your Title If you have cleared the Use Default Image check box. The Color and Image lists are enabled. Specify the following for the layout of your progress bar: Orientation Use Default Image Color Select between Horizontal or Vertical orientation for the progress bar. To specify the layout of a progress bar: 1. See also: Matching Colors Used within Your Title Show Tick Marks 3. Click the Layout tab. The progress bar will fill solidly with the color selected.

Click the General tab if the Reference List Properties window is not already opened to this tab. Choose from the following four options: All References in the Title References in this chapter References in this section References in this page 3. To specify the scope of a reference list: 1. The Reference List Properties window opens. Will include reference information for only the objects contained in the current chapter. or just the current page. select the location onto which you want to add the reference list. the current chapter. you can specify the following within the Reference List Properties window: General tab Position and Size tab  Change the name of a reference list  Specify a reference list's position and size Transitions tab  Specify the scope of a reference list  Specify a reference list's transitions  Make a reference list initially invisible  Place a reference list on the top layer  Lock the size and position of a reference list  Enable author control on a reference list Adding a reference list Perform the following steps to add a reference list to your title: 1. Specifying the scope of a reference list You can specify whether the reference list should include information for objects within your entire title. Will include reference information for only the objects contained in the current section. Do one of the following: o Right-click in your work area and select New > Object > Reference List. Click OK. 2. o Click the Add Reference List toolbar graphic o Type Ctrl+Shift+8 on the Insert toolbar. 2.This section describes:  Adding a reference list Once you have added a reference list. Will include reference information for all objects within the title. Working with Tables of Contents A Table of Contents is a menu system that is automatically generated from your title’s organization in the Title Explorer. Select the Scope of the reference list. 3. Will include reference information for only the objects contained on the current page. select Object > Reference List. Select the Scope from the list. o From the Add menu. See also: Specifying the scope of a reference list 4. the current section. Click OK. Double-click on the reference list within your work area. In the Title Explorer. The Reference List Properties window opens. The Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Click the General tab if the Reference List Properties window is not already opened to this tab.

See also: Specifying the appearance of a table of contents Specifying the scope of a table of contents Specifying the frame of reference for a table of contents If you are using frames within your title. See also: Working with Frames To specify the frame of reference for a table of contents: 1. sections. Double-click on the table of contents within your work area. a table of contents can be generated in one frame while it is used to navigate within the chapters. select the location onto which you want to add the table of contents. 2. Click OK. Click the General tab if the Table of Contents Properties window is not already opened to this tab. The Table of Contents Properties window opens. Select the Frame that this refers to from the list. 3. 2. Do one of the following: o Right-click in your work area and select New > Object > Table of Contents. sections. sections and pages of another frame. o Click the Add Table of Contents toolbar graphic o Type Ctrl+Shift+9 on the Insert toolbar. This section describes:  Adding a table of contents  Removing chapters. Select the Appearance and Scope of the table of contents. o From the Add menu. Users will be able to select the chapter. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . and pages that are contained within your title. Click the General tab if the Table of Contents Properties window is not already opened to this tab. and pages from a table of contents Once you have added a table of contents. section or page from the Table of Contents to navigate directly to that area of the title. In the Title Explorer. The Table of Contents Properties window opens.Table of Contents will automatically be populated with the chapters. you can specify the following within the Table of Contents Properties window: General tab Position and Size tab  Change the name of a table of contents  Specify a table of content's position and size Font and Color tab  Specify the appearance of a table of contents  Specify the font and color of a table of contents  Specify the scope of a table of contents Transitions tab  Specify the frame of reference for a table of contents  Specify a table of content's transitions  Make a table of contents initially invisible  Place a table of contents on the top layer  Lock the size and position of a table of contents  Enable author control on a table of contents  Use a transparent background for a table of contents  Remove all pages from a table of contents  Remove icons from a table of contents Adding a table of contents Perform the following steps to add a table of contents to your title: 1. 4. select Object > Table of Contents.

Chapters and sections will have a [+] sign next to them. The Table of Contents Properties window opens. Using a transparent background for a table of contents If the appearance of your table of contents is Indented List or Tree View. The table of contents will only include the sub-sections and pages contained in the current section. sections and pages included in the table of contents. Tree View 3. 2. or the current section. organized in a tree. Click OK. Specifying the scope of a table of contents A table of contents can be generated to include the scope of the entire title. it can be removed. Removing chapters. 2. The Table of Contents Properties window opens. sections and pages included in the table of contents. the current chapter. Click OK. To specify the scope of a table of contents: 1. Click OK. sections and pages from a table of contents By default. Click the General tab if the Table of Contents Properties window is not already opened to this tab. To specify the appearance of a table of contents: 1. The table of contents will only include the sections and pages contained in the current chapter. This option will only work if you are publishing to the Web. The sections and pages within the list are indented from the chapter or section to which they belong. section or page in the list to which they want to navigate. title For this chapter For this section 3. similar to the functionality of the Title Explorer. enabling users to expand the chapter or section to select a page to which they want to navigate. Choose from the following options: For the entire The table of contents will include all chapters. Double-click on the table of contents within your work area. sections and pages in the entire title. sections and pages within your title are included in a table of contents. However.3. sections and pages from your table of contents:  Removing a chapter. A tree view will display all of the chapters. section or page to which they want to navigate. Double-click on the table of contents within your work area. Select the Scope (when available) from the list. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Choose from the following options: Drop-down List Indented List A drop-down list will present the table of contents in a single list from which users can select the chapter. Select the Appearance from the list. Click the General tab if the Table of Contents Properties window is not already opened to this tab. Users click on the chapter. if you do not want a specific chapter. The following topics describe how to remove chapters. section or page to appear within the table of contents. you can set the background of the table of contents to be transparent. section or page from the table of contents  Removing an assignable unit from the table of contents Specifying the appearance of a table of contents The table of contents object can have three different appearances. An indented list will display all of the chapters. all chapters.

3. or select Custom to select a custom color from the Color wheel. 2. Clear the Show Pages check box. and not the corresponding chapter. See also: Specifying the appearance of a table of contents Removing icons from a table of contents If the appearance of your table of contents is Indented List or Tree View. Click the Font and Color tab. select the eye-dropper tool to use a color from elsewhere within your title. The table of contents will then only display the names of the chapters. The Table of Contents Properties window opens. 3. sections. When users navigate to a chapter or section. To remove the icons from a table of contents: 1. To remove all pages from a table of contents: 1. Click OK. Select the Transparent Frame (HTML only) check box. you can specify to have only the chapters and sections of your title appear in a table of contents. and pages within your title. Double-click on the table of contents within your work area. they will be directed to the first page of that chapter or section. Click OK. 2. Click the General tab if the Table of Contents Properties window is not already opened to this tab. Click the General tab if the Table of Contents Properties window is not already opened to this tab. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . See also: Specifying the appearance of a table of contents Specifying the font and color of a table of contents You can specify the background color and font style used within a table of contents. Double-click on the table of contents within your work area. Double-click on the table of contents within your work area. Select the Background Color for your table of contents from the list. The Table of Contents Properties window opens. section and page icons. Users can then only directly navigate to the chapters and sections within the title. Double-click on the table of contents within your work area. Select a predefined color. Clear the Use Icons check box. To specify the font and color of a table of contents: 1. you can remove the icons from the table of contents. See also: Specifying the appearance of a table of contents Specifying the font and color of a table of contents Removing all pages from a table of contents If the appearance of your table of contents is Drop-down List or Indented List. 3. Click OK. 2.To use a transparent background for a table of contents: 1. The Table of Contents Properties window opens. 2. Click the General tab if the Table of Contents Properties window is not already opened to this tab. You can also select a color for the background of a table of contents. The Table of Contents Properties window opens.

Microsoft. Do one of the following: Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Web-friendly fonts such as Arial.mpg.mov)  Audio Video Interleave (.rmm)  Windows Media Video (. and RealMedia streaming video formats YouTube Security Warning: YouTube streaming video when published to HTML and run locally from your hard drive might display a security warning. It is best to use common. See also: Matching Colors Used within Your Title Managing Text Styles Working with Video Lectora supports the following video formats:  Apple QuickTime movie (.avi)  Flash Video (. Select the Text Style from the list. mp4)  Real Media (. YouTube. In the Title Explorer. MPEG-4. click on the Styles button. mpeg.3. this error will not occur and users of your published title will not see the security warning. select the location onto which you want to add a video. Click OK. Verdana. Lectora does not embed the fonts into the published work. Keep in mind that if you are publishing to HTML. This section describes:  Adding a video  Converting to Flash (.wmv)  Flash. When your title is published to a Web server. To create a new text style. you can specify the following within the Video Properties window: General tab Transitions tab  Change the name of a video  Specify a video's transitions Reference tab  Specify the type of video  Add a reference for a video  Edit the video resource file Metadata tab  Specify the closed-captioning file  Include metadata for a video  Make a video initially invisible Events tab  Place a video on the top layer  Using events  Lock the size and position of a video  Associate actions with video events  Enable author control on a video Skins tab  Display a video controller  Applying a skin to the controller  Continuously play a video  Automatically start a video Position and Size tab  Specify a video's position and size Adding a video Perform the following steps to add a video to your title: 1. 2. 4. or Tahoma. .flv)  Moving Picture Experts Group (.rm.flv) video Once you have added a video. The warning is a Flash security warning related specifically to running the video locally from a machine (as opposed to running it from the Web).

Click the General tab if the Video Properties window is not already opened to this tab.o o o o o Right-click in your work area and select New > Object > Video. Click OK. A preview of the media is provided to the right. or YouTube streaming video. pause. Select the Display Video Controller check box. From the Add menu. Click OK. and stop the video. Specifying a closed-captioning file You can integrate closed-captioning in Flash video. click the Import button to navigate and select a video file. The Video Properties window opens. Click the General tab if the Video Properties window is not already opened to this tab. Click OK. Type Ctrl+Alt+1 Drag and drop a supported video file from a Windows Explorer window to the Lectora work area. Double-click on the video within your work area. click on the arrow within the Import button to choose from the following: From File Select this to navigate and select a video. 3. Specifying the type of video When you add a video to your title. Alternatively. See also: Streaming Media 3. you can select from predefined skins for the controller. Example of closed-captioning XML file: Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Click the General tab if the Video Properties window is not already opened to this tab. To display a video controller: 1. The video will appear within your work area. you can specify whether the video is standard or streaming. See Associating a skin to the controller. 2. Library See also: Working with the Media Library Organizer 4. rewind. 3. For streaming video. select Object > Video. Click the Add Video toolbar graphic on the Insert toolbar.flv) video objects. Select the Video Type from the list. For Standard Video. To specify the type of video: 1. you can display a video controller so users have the ability to fast forward. RealNetworks. 2. Click on the Import button to navigate and select the video file you want to add to your title. Media Select this to launch your media library to select a video. Displaying a video controller When you add a video to your title. The Video Properties window opens (unless the video was dragged and dropped into your work area). The captioning text is displayed within the video according to details specified within an XML file. The Video Properties window opens. select from Flash. For Flash (. play. and enter the Web address of the video stream in the URL field. Double-click the video within your work area. Windows Media Services.

2.</p> <p begin="00:10" end="00:12. 2. To automatically start a video: 1.flv) can be used within a Lectora title to trigger actions while the video is playing. click Import to navigate and select a captioning file to import. Click OK. The video will loop until the user has exited the page. Double-click on the video within your work area. The Video Properties window opens. Click the General tab if the Video Properties window is not already opened to this tab. When creating the XML file using Word or a similar program.org/2006/10/ttaf1"> <body> <div xml:id="captions"> <p begin="00:08" end="00:10">[Teacher] Good morning. Important: Events added to Camtasia videos are removed if you edit and produce the video in Camtasia studio. Click OK. Select the Caption check box and use the drop-down list to select a previously imported XML file. This is especially useful when synchronized captioning is needed for video.. Double-click on the video within your work area. 3. set within a video (.5">[Students loudly] Good morning. also known as script commands. 2.wmv or . Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 .w3. 3. Click the General tab if the Video Properties window is not already opened to this tab. Double-click the video within your work area. Select the Auto Start check box. To continuously play a video: 1. Continuously playing a video You can have a video automatically restart when it has reached the end. Click the General tab if the Video Properties window is not already opened to this tab. Automatically starting a video You can chose to automatically start the video when the page containing the video appears to the user. Click OK. 3. </p> </div> </body> </tt> To specify a closed-captioning file: 1. The Video Properties window opens. Teacher!</p> <p begin="00:14" end="00:18">[Teacher laughs]</p> <p begin="00:18" end="00:30">[Teacher] Today we'll learn about. The Video Properties window opens. Class. Using events Events. Select the Play Continuously check box.<tt xmlns="http://www. be sure to save the file as a plain text file.. Otherwise.

4. Specify additional action information as necessary. see Using events. You must first create the events within the video. select it and click the Remove button. Click the Events tab. When you import the video into a Lectora title. See also: Selecting an Action Associating actions with video events Events. See also: Adding an action Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 .  To remove an event. The Lectora Video Editor opens. 13. Click OK. 2. 11. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each event you want to define. select View Current Events to see the list of events in the current video file. The Audio Properties window opens. Using the Events tab.  To add a new event. Double-click the audio within your work area or Title Explorer. Click the Events tab. For information about adding events. Once the events have been created.Follow these steps to set an event within the video: 8. click the Add button to open the Event window. also known as script commands. Click OK. The event is added to the video and the event location is marked on the slider. Use this window to manage events. 10. Click Add Events. Use the Name field to specify the name for the event. 9. Use the Time fields to directly specify the insertion point of the event. 12. Edit the details as necessary. Click the Insert Event button or select Insert Event from the Tools menu. The event details are displayed. and if events are present within the video. Select the event label from the Event list. The Video Properties window opens. select the event label from the Event list and specify the action that should be executed when the video has reached the time of the event. The Current Events window opens. The Insert Event window opens. set within a video file can be used to trigger actions while the video is playing. To associate actions with video events: 1. select it and click the Edit button. Specify the Action to be executed when the video has reached the event. Viewing current events From the Tools menu.  To edit an event. This is especially useful when you want to synchronize actions with a video. Specify the details of the new event and click OK. 14. Use the Previous Frame and Next Frame buttons (or select Move Backward and Move Forward from the Controls menu) or move the slider under the Video Sample window to the location within the video where you want to add the event. Double-click on the video within your work area. the Events tab within the Video Properties window can be used to execute specified actions. 3. you can proceed to associate actions with the video events.

In the Title Explorer. but the quality of the media will deteriorate as compression increases. The Convert to FLV window opens. . and choose Convert to FLV. 3. Applying a skin to the controller When you have selected to display a Flash (. you can apply a predefined or custom skin to the controller.flv) video You can convert your video objects to Flash (. The object is converted to .flv files require your user's computer to have the Flash plug-in installed. line or arrow. the compression results are displayed and you are asked whether to use the new file.flv. Click OK to add your updated controller to the page. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 on the Shape bar. When you convert an object to Flash audio or video. o Click the Line/Fill Properties toolbar graphic The Shape/Line Properties window opens. Add the video to your title. To convert to Flash video: 6. The option is only available for relevant file types. Higher compression levels will result in smaller files. all instances of the resource are changed throughout your title. Click Convert.Converting to Flash (. See Displaying a video controller. Use the slider to select a compression level. 10. 7. lines.flv). 8. right-click.flv) video Adding Shapes. Select the object. Lines and Arrows Various shapes. Flash . and arrows can be added to your title with the use of the Shapes and Lines toolbar. select Shapes/Lines > Set line/fill properties. See also: Converting to Flash (. These objects can be used to draw your users’ attention to a particular part of a page. Click the Skins tab. 2. When the conversion completes. The Video Properties window opens. 2. The images are created in Windows Media Format (. Do one of the following: o From the Tools menu.wmf) enabling you to resize them without losing quality. To associate a skin to the controller: 1. Click Yes. Otherwise. Use the drop-down list to select a predefined skin.flv) video object using a controller. select the location onto which you want to add a shape. 9. lines or arrows to your title: 1. Perform the following steps to add shapes. click No to restore the file to its original type. Double-click on the video object within your work area.

the shape will appear. Select a predefined color. select Shapes/Lines and select the shape or line you want to add to your title. Line/Arrow color Select the color of the line or arrow.3. Any shapes or lines you create will adhere to these properties until the properties are changed. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Parallelograms or Trapezoids submenus to add variations of those types of shapes. draw a rectangle within your work area by clicking. This enables the Outline color and Outline width fields. See also: Matching Colors Used within Your Title Outline width Select the width of the outline of the shape. or select Custom to select a custom color from the Color wheel. See also: View Menu 6. Select a predefined color. Select a predefined color. Change your shape and line properties at any time by repeating steps 2 through 4. You can also select the Block Arrows. The rectangle you draw defines the size of the shape you are adding. Select the color to be used for the outline of the shape. See also: Line thickness Matching Colors Used within Your Title Select the thickness of the line. Dimensions are in pixels. select the eye-dropper tool to use a color from elsewhere within your title. Using your mouse. Dimensions are in pixels. When you release the left mouse button. dragging the cursor to define a rectangle. or select Custom to select a custom color from the Color wheel. Click OK to save your shape and line properties. and while holding down the left mouse button. Use the Shape box to specify shape properties or use the Line/Arrow box to specify line and arrow properties. See also: Outline Shape Outline color Matching Colors Used within Your Title Select this to place an outline around the shape. o Click the toolbar graphic of the shape you want to add from one of the following toolbars:  Shapes/Line Toolbar  Block Arrow Toolbar  Triangle Toolbar  Parallelogram Toolbar  Trapezoid Toolbar Use the View menu to display these toolbars if they are not currently displayed within the Lectora interface. The shape is added as an image object to your title. Create the shape or line by completing one of the following: o From the Tools menu. or select Custom to select a custom color from the Color wheel. 5. You can specify the following: Shape Fill Color Select the color to use to fill the shape. select the eye-dropper tool to use a color from elsewhere within your title. select the eye-dropper tool to use a color from elsewhere within your title. 4. Triangles.

You can use a single command to run all of the actions inside of an action group. Selecting objects and grouping them Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . all objects within that group are deleted as well. To add an existing object to the group. Complete this by selecting the object and while holding down the left mouse button. select the location onto which you want to add a group. Release the left mouse button to add the object to the group. images. applying the transition to all objects within the group. it is referred to as an Action Group. o From the Add menu. Groups can contain all kinds of objects. audio. 2. drag and drop the existing object from the Title Explorer into the group. drag the object until the cursor is positioned over the group object and the name of the group is highlighted.  Select a set of objects and group them. Move. text blocks. you combine them so you can work with them as a single unit. Do one of the following: o Right-click in your work area and select New > Group. When a group consists entirely of actions. select Group. The group appears within your Title Explorer. This section describes:  Grouping objects  Ungrouping objects Once you have added a group. When a group object is deleted. In the Title Explorer. using a group as a target on a show or hide action will show or hide all components of the group. See also: Selecting an action You can ungroup a group of objects at any time and then regroup them later. For example. o Click the Add Group toolbar graphic o Type Ctrl+5 on the Insert toolbar. you can specify the following within the Group Properties window: General tab Transitions tab  Change the name of a group  Specify a group's transitions  Enable author control on a group Grouping Objects You can group objects in one of two ways:  Add a group to your title and add objects to the group. Adding a group Perform the following steps to add a group to your title: 1. and actions.See also: Working with Images Grouping and Ungrouping Objects When you group objects. Group properties will enable you to set a transition on the group. You can select multiple objects by holding down the Ctrl key while selecting objects. lock and unlock all objects in a group as a single unit. You can also perform actions on groups.

Select the Author Control check box. Click the General tab if the Group Properties window is not already opened to this tab. right-click the group graphic and select Ungroup from the right-click context menu. Specify the following information: Transition In Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 Select this to enable a transition when displaying the group as the page opens or within your Title Explorer. 2. Double-click on the group graphic Transitions tab. The Group Properties window opens. 3. To specify the transition: 1. Click the General tab if the Group Properties window is not already opened to this tab. Enabling author control on a group Protect the group by enabling Author Control. The master Author Control password must first be set within the Title Properties. Click OK. You can select from over 20 different transitions. There is a Slow to Fast slider to determine the speed at which the transition takes place. Click OK. 2. Transitions will produce a visual effect as the group appears and disappears. additional authors will not be able to edit the group or any of the objects in it unless they have the master Author Control password. and while holding down the left mouse button. Specify the new name of the group in the Group Name field. you can select the objects and group them. right click within the Title Explorer or within your work area and select Group from the rightclick context menu. With the objects selected. The Group Properties window opens. Complete one of the following to select objects within your title: o Select the objects within the Title Explorer. The Group Properties window opens. To select objects and group them: 1. o Using your mouse. 2. Click the . 2. of the group of objects you want to ungroup Changing the name of an object To change the name of a group: 1. dragging the cursor to define a rectangle. See also: Protecting your title with a password To enable author control on a group: 1. 3. o Select the objects within your work area. Hold down the Ctrl key to select multiple objects. draw a rectangle within your work area by clicking. All objects within the rectangle will be selected. Double-click on the group graphic within your Title Explorer. Hold down the Ctrl key to select multiple objects. Transitions assigned to a group will affect all objects within the group. Ungrouping objects You can ungroup objects. Double-click on the group graphic within your Title Explorer. With Author Control enabled.If you have a set of objects within your title that you want to group. Specifying a group's transitions You can specify how a group of objects is displayed on a page. To ungroup objects.

Select this to enable a transition when hiding the group as the page closes or the group is hidden with an action. Select a transition type as one of the following:  Box In  Split out Horizontal  Box Out  Strips Down left  Circle In  Strips Up left  Circle Out  Strips Downright Wipe Up   Strips Upright  Wipe Down  Horizontal Bars  Wipe Right  Vertical Bars  Wipe Left  Fly Top Blinds Vertical   Fly Top right  Blinds Horizontal  Fly Right  Checker Across  Fly Bottom right  Checker Down  Fly Bottom Dissolve   Fly Bottom left  Split in Vertical  Fly Left  Split out Vertical  Fly Top left  Split in Horizontal  Random Effect Delay before transition Specify the delay in seconds before starting the transition. Select between 0 and 600 seconds. Select between 0 and 600 seconds. Slow > Fast Transition Out Transition (Out) Type Use the slider to specify the speed at which the transition should occur. Transition (In) Type Select a transition type as one of the following:  Box In  Split out Horizontal Box Out   Strips Down left  Circle In  Strips Up left  Circle Out  Strips Downright  Wipe Up  Strips Upright Wipe Down   Horizontal Bars  Wipe Right  Vertical Bars  Wipe Left  Fly Top  Blinds Vertical  Fly Top right Blinds Horizontal   Fly Right  Checker Across  Fly Bottom right      Checker Down Dissolve Split in Vertical Split out Vertical Split in Horizontal      Fly Bottom Fly Bottom left Fly Left Fly Top left Random Effect Delay before transition Specify the delay in seconds before starting the transition.the group is made visible with an action. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 .

The inherit tab is available within all chapter. it will not appear on any page within that section. Furthermore. The (Object) Properties window opens.jpg) for the objects used within your title. Lines and Arrows  Video To edit an object: 1. All instances of the object are updated within your title. Click the General tab if the (Object) Properties window is not already opened to this tab. Use the slider to specify the speed at which the transition should occur. Excluding Objects Using Inheritance With Lectora’s inheritance capabilities.Slow > Fast 3. it will not appear on any page within that chapter. Click OK. This is not the same as editing your object's properties. and if the object is excluded within the properties of a page. and close the application that was used to launch it. 2. See also: Editing a resource Setting editor preferences Moving and Resizing Objects While working in Edit mode. Make the necessary changes to your resource file. you can easily move and resize objects within your title. The file will be launched using the appropriate application. any objects added directly to a chapter will appear on every page in that chapter including pages that are inside of a section within the chapter. but will rather enable you to edit the image. Select the object you want to move or resize within your work area and do one of the following: Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Click on the Edit button associated with the resource file used for the object. save the file. objects you add directly to the main title will appear on every page of your title. See the following sections for additional information:  Specifying inheritance properties for chapters. You can edit the following types of objects:  Animations  Audio  Buttons (You can edit the images associated with a button. If the object is excluded within the properties of a chapter.)  Documents  Images  Shapes. Double-click on the object within your work area. Objects added directly to a section will appear on every page in that section and objects added directly to a page will appear only on that page. This feature is only available for the above object types if you are using the Lectora Professional Publishing Suite or if you have specified your editor preferences. section and page properties. You can also edit resources from within the Resource Manager. If the object is excluded within the properties of a section. video or audio file that is used within your title. sections and pages  Specifying an assignable unit's inheritance properties Editing Objects You can directly edit the resource files (such as myimage. then the object will simply be excluded from that page. 3.

below or to either side of its current position. left. and while holding down the left mouse button. and make objects the same size. bottom. you can also modify the object's properties. You can also unlock the position of several objects at once. or right. a check mark appears next to the Size/Position Locked menu item. To unlock the position and size of multiple objects: 1. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Manually set the size of the object by altering the Width and Height of the object within the Position and Size tab of the object’s properties. left and right positions. space objects evenly. When disabled. The object will move 1 pixel in the direction of the arrow key pressed. The selected objects will be locked in size and position within Edit mode. See also: Specifying an object's position and size Using the Status bar  Locking and Unlocking Objects You can lock the position of several objects at once.   Manually set the position of the object by altering the X and Y position within the Position and Size tab of the object’s properties. 2. This will cause the object to move straight. See also: Locking the size and position of an object Aligning and Positioning Objects You can align objects to the same top. Holding your keyboard’s Shift key while performing these steps will ensure that the object is resized proportionally. Use the Ctrl key to select more than one object on a page. in the chosen direction. This preserves them from getting accidentally moved by you or by other authors working on your title. hold down the Shift key while dragging the item to its new location. Use the Ctrl key to select more than one object on a page. Click on the object and while holding down the left mouse button. To lock the position and size of multiple objects: 1. Doing so will move the object in increments of 10 pixels. This section presents additional information on the following topics:  Aligning objects  Centering objects on a page  Spacing objects evenly  Making objects the same size To directly specify the position or size of an object. To resize an object:  Click on any corner or side of the object. either up. To move the object to a new position that is directly above. down. the check mark disappears from the Size/Position Locked menu item. center objects horizontally or vertically on a page. drag the corner or side of the object to resize it. Right-click and select Size/Position Locked. 2. drag the object to its new location. You can also perform these steps while holding your keyboard’s Shift key. When enabled.To move an object:  Use your keyboard’s arrow keys to reposition the object horizontally or vertically. Right-click and select Size/Position Locked.

Centers objects vertically on the page. Multiple objects must be selected to activate the following spacing options. To evenly space objects: 1. Select from the following centering options. Center objects vertically. bottom. or align them to their horizontal or vertical centers. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Select from the following alignment options. Align objects along their top sides. You can align objects by selecting the alignment option from the Layout menu. Align objects along their right sides. Select the object you want to center. 2.See also: Specifying an object's position and size Using the Status bar Aligning objects You can use Lectora's alignment functions to align several objects along their top. You can center objects by selecting the centering option from the Layout menu. Hold down your Ctrl key and select the objects you want to evenly space. Align objects along their bottom sides. Center objects horizontally. Centering the objects will place the objects in the horizontal or vertical center of the page. Hold down your Ctrl key and select the objects you want to align. Centering Centers objects horizontally on the page. or by clicking the toolbar graphic. To center objects on a page: 1. 2. Select multiple objects by holding down your Ctrl key. left and right sides. Alignment Align objects along their left sides. or by clicking the toolbar graphic. Using the Layout menu Select Align > Left Select Align > Right Select Align > Top Select Align > Bottom Select Align > Horizontal Center Select Align > Vertical Center Toolbar graphic Centering objects on a page You can center your objects on a page. Multiple objects must be selected to activate the following alignment options. To align objects: 1. Using the Layout menu Select Center > Horizontal Select Center > Vertical Toolbar graphic Spacing objects evenly You can space several object evenly on a page either across or down.

Resizing Make objects the same width. or by clicking the toolbar graphic. The layering of objects is determined by the order of your objects as they are listed in the Title Explorer. You can space objects by selecting the spacing option from the Layout menu. Hold down your Ctrl key and select the objects you want to resize. Using the Layout menu Select Space Evenly > Across Select Space Evenly > Down Toolbar graphic Making objects the same size You can easily resize objects so they are the same size. The layering affects how the objects will appear to your users. the objects may not be resized the way you intended. You can resize objects by selecting the resizing option from the Layout menu. Select from the following spacing options. or by clicking the toolbar graphic. To make objects the same size: 1. When you select any of the layering options for an object. 2. Multiple objects must be selected to activate the following resizing options. and if objects are overlapping. Select from the following resizing options. height or both. Space objects evenly down.2. Objects will be resized according to the size of the first object you selected. See also: Specifying an object's position and size Layering Objects You can layer objects within your title. will determine which object is in the forefront and which object is in the background. Set objects to the same width. the object's position will be changed accordingly in the Title Explorer. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Using the Layout menu Select Make Same Size > Width Select Make Same Size > Height Select Make Same Size > Both Toolbar graphic If Keep original aspect ratio is selected for any of the selected objects. Make objects the same width and height. Make objects the same height. Spacing Space objects evenly across.

The example on the right shows three images layered on a page. Library objects can be reused within other titles and shared online with the entire Lectora community. section or page. To alter the layering of your objects: 1. You can also force an object to the top layer. The default location of the Library folder is C:\ Program Files\Trivantis\Lectora\Library. section or page. Places the object on the bottom layer. A library object can be a single object or a set of objects. select Layering. Hold down your Ctrl key to select multiple objects. and select the appropriate layering option. This location can be changed and kept on a shared network drive. Library objects are saved with a . Choose from the following options: Bring to Front Send to Back Up one layer Down one layer Places the object on the top layer. Notice the order of the objects in the Title Explorer. select Library Object > Save the current selection as a Library Object. Do one of the following: o Right-click in your work area and select Save as Library Object. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . A Library folder is provided in which to save these objects and easily share them with others. See also: Placing an object on the top layer Working with Library Objects Lectora makes it easy for you to organize various objects in one location for reuse. while the bottom-most object listed in the Title Explorer is on the top layer. 2. Moves the object one layer closer to the bottom. It can also be an entire chapter. Moves the object one layer closer to the top. o From the Tools menu. To create a library object: 1. Select the object you want to layer differently. Select the object you want to save as a library object.awo extension and can contain as few or as many Lectora objects as you want. It can also be an entire chapter.awo extension and can contain as few or as many Lectora objects as you want. 2. The top-most object listed in the Title Explorer is on the bottom layer of the page. Right-click on the the object. Library objects are saved with an . See these topics for more information:  Creating a library object  Inserting a library object  Sharing a library object online Creating a Library Object A library object can be a single object or a set of objects.

2. The Open window opens. The Online Library Objects window opens. 3. To insert a library object that is shared online: 1. You must agree to the terms and conditions specified in the Terms of Use before sharing library objects online. The object is saved as a Lectora library object with the extension of . 3. Select the library object you want to insert and click Insert. From the Tools menu. 2. 3.awo extension and can contain as few or as many Lectora objects as you want. Name the object and click Save. From the Tools menu. The library object is inserted into your title. Create the library object. Sharing a Library Object online You can share library objects with the entire Lectora community. Specify the keyword in the Keyword Search field and click Search Online. Select the Terms of Use check box and complete the fields as follows: Select Category Select the subcategory in which to place the library object. The results are displayed in a sortable table to the right. Navigate the categories in the Category Search box by expanding and collapsing the plus [+] and minus [-] signs before the category names.awo.The Save As window appears. Inserting a Library Object You can insert a library object that was saved to a file or shared online by other Lectora users. 4. For details.awo file and click Share Online. 3. select Library Object > Share a Library Object online. From the Tools menu. The library object is inserted into your title. To insert a library object from a file: 1. The Share Library Object Online window opens. Navigate and select the library object . You can also search for library objects using a keyword. select Library Object > Insert an online Library Object. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Select the Library Object you want to insert and click Open. see Creating a Library Object. The Open window appears. Author Specify the author. 4. To share a library object online: 1. Library objects must be saved with an . Select the location in the Title Explorer to which you want to add a library object. select Library Object > Insert a Library Object from a file. File name Specify the name of the library object file. Click on the table headings to re-sort the table. 2. Select the location in the Title Explorer to which you want to add a library object. Description Specify a short description of the library object.

on the Tools toolbar or select Media Library Organizer from the 2. To do so. The Media Online category contains custom media that has been shared online by other Lectora users using the Media Library Organizer. however it can be changed to a shared folder or a folder on a network drive. if available: Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . you should specify the location of your Media Library. Images. You can insert media directly from the Media Library Organizer into your title. Alternatively. For External HTML. if available. The Images category contains clipart installed with Lectora. double-click the media to immediately insert it into your title. You can add and remove categories and media as your media library grows. Previews of the media are displayed in the scrollable window on the right side of the Media Organizer. Clear the check boxes to remove media of that type from the preview window. and Media Online. Search for your media in the following ways: o Navigate the categories by expanding and collapsing the plus [+] and minus [-] signs before the category names. use the Ext HTML list to preview the following Web-based media types. The Media Library contains four top-level categories: My Media. For example. By default. this location is set to your Lectora ClipArt folder (C:\Program Files\Trivantis\Lectora\ClipArt). o Use the media type check boxes located above the preview window to manage the previews. Specify keywords used to find the library object. you can complete the following tasks:  Search for media  Add a custom media category  Rename a custom media category  Delete a custom media category  Add media to your media library  Delete media from your media library  Specify custom media properties  Sharing media online Searching for media Using the Media Library Organizer.Keywords 5. The library object is shared online. Working with the Media Library Organizer You can use the Media Organizer to find and share digital media files that are on your computer or shared among team members on a network folder. The Media Organizer makes it easy to find the media you are looking for by organizing the files into categories. Click Upload. locate and select the media and click Insert. Click the Media Library Organizer toolbar graphic Tools menu. See also: Specifying the location of your media library Adding a Flash animation Using the Media Organizer. The Flash category contains configurable Flash animations installed with Lectora. you can search for media by navigating the pre-defined categories or by searching by keyword. The My Media category contains your custom media. Before working with the Media Organizer. To search for media within your Media Library: 1. Flash. select the All check box to display media of all types in the preview window or select specific media types to preview only media of that type.

Select My Media in the Category Search box. To add a custom media category: 1. Results are displayed in the preview window. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Navigate and select the category you want to rename. 3. Use the plus and minus signs before the category names to expand and collapse the My Media categories. The buttons on the left are enabled. Type the keyword you want to search in the field and click the Search button. To add a custom media category: 1. Navigate and select the location to which you want to add a category. The buttons on the left are enabled. Click the Media Library Organizer toolbar graphic Tools menu. on the Tools toolbar or select Media Library Organizer from the 2. Click the Media Library Organizer toolbar graphic Tools menu. You can now add media to the new custom category. Adding a custom media category You can add custom categories to better organize your Media Library. select it and drag it to a new location in the tree. on the Tools toolbar or select Media Library Organizer from the 2. Select My Media in the Category Search box. Use the plus and minus signs before the category names to expand and collapse the My Media categories. Click the Add Category button or right-click and select Add Category. Predefined categories cannot be renamed. Type the name of the category. See Sharing Media Online for details. 3. Renaming a custom media category You can rename custom categories within your Media Library Organizer. you are actually creating new folders within the location of your media library. 4. If the category is not in the correct location in the category tree. o Select the Include Online check box to display custom media that has been shared online using the Media Library Organizer. The folder structure you see for the location of your media library within Windows Explorer should be the same as the category structure you see within Lectora's Media Library Organizer. 5.       All External HTML Text-based HTML Java archive files Java class files Shockwave files Cascading style sheets XML files o Use the Keyword Search field to search for media by keyword. See also: Adding media to your media library When you create custom media categories.

on the Tools toolbar or select Media Library Organizer from the 2. Click the Rename Category button or right-click the category and select Rename Category. 5. 5. 3. Navigate and select the category you want to delete. Select My Media in the Category Search box. Click the Media Library Organizer toolbar graphic Tools menu. Deleting media from your media library You can delete media from custom categories within your Media Library Organizer. on the Tools toolbar or select Media Library Organizer from the 2. Click the Delete Category button or right-click and select Delete Category. Adding media to your media library You can add media to custom categories within your Media Library Organizer. The Add Media to Library window opens. Predefined categories cannot be deleted. Type the new name for the category. Click Open. The buttons on the left are enabled. Select My Media in the Category Search box. To add media: 1. 3. on the Tools toolbar or select Media Library Organizer from the 2. Media cannot be deleted from Predefined categories. Click the Media Library Organizer toolbar graphic Tools menu. Use the plus and minus signs before the category names to expand and collapse the My Media categories. To delete a custom media category: 1. Use the plus and minus signs before the category names to expand and collapse the My Media categories. Deleting a category containing media objects will remove the folder and the media objects contained in the folder. The custom category is deleted. The buttons on the left are enabled. You can also add media and complete media categories to your media library by dragging and dropping media or folders from a Windows Explorer window into the Media Library Organizer. The media file is added to your library and will appear within the preview window. Select Yes to accept the warning prompt. To delete media: 1. 4. The buttons on the left are enabled. 3. 5. from the media library.4. Click the Add Media button or right-click and select Add Media. Navigate and select the category to which you want to add media. Deleting a custom media category You can delete custom categories within your Media Library Organizer. 4. Click the Media Library Organizer toolbar graphic Tools menu. Use the plus and minus signs before the category names to expand and collapse the My Media categories. Navigate and select the media file you want to add. Media cannot be added to predefined categories. Select My Media in the Category Search box. Navigate and Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 .

Entering keywords for the media You can specify keywords for your media. Search engines look within metadata for relevant information to the term that was searched. the author. To enter keywords the media: 1. 4. 4. Click OK. Specifying custom media properties Once you have added custom media to your Media Library. and so on. Click the Delete Media button or right-click and select Delete Media. Select the media within your media library to which you want to add keywords. Click the General tab if the Media Properties window is not already opened to this tab. Separate keywords with commas. Within Lectora objects. Including metadata for media Metadata is data about data. Click the General tab if the Media Properties window is not already opened to this tab. the metadata will be published as standard XML metadata into the accompanying imsmanifest. 2. SCORM. The media is deleted and no longer appears within the preview window. Click OK. Type the description for the media in the Description field. The Media Properties window opens. Metadata added to objects within a title that is published strictly to HTML will be written directly to the resulting HTML pages containing the objects. you can specify the following within the media's Properties window: General tab Metadata tab  Add a description of the media  Include metadata for media  Enter keywords for the media Adding a description of the media You can add a short description to the custom media within your Media Library. Metadata added to media within your Media Library will be carried over when the media object is added to a title.xml file for any AICC. or CourseMill published titles. 2. Type the keywords for the media in the Keyword(s) field. 3. See also: Including metadata for an object To include metadata for media: Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . The Media Properties window opens. To select multiple objects. Keywords are words that will be searched within the Keyword Search field of the Media Library Organizer. Within the preview window. the date it was created.select the category containing the media you want to delete. 4. select the media you want to delete. Click the Properties button or right-click and select Properties. Click the Properties button or right-click and select Properties. The metadata can be specified as custom metadata or as name/value pairs using predefined IMS Metadata Data Elements following the IEEE LTSC LOM standard. Select the media within your media library to which you want to add a description. It typically includes information such as a description of the object. 3. hold down the Ctrl key. To add a description of the media: 1.

Navigate and select the media object you want to share. 3. Publish this object’s metadata is checked by default so that the metadata is included in the published title. The (Media) Properties window opens. Click the Metadata tab. on the Tools toolbar or select Media Library Organizer from the 2. Select the Terms of Use check box and complete the fields as follows: Select Category Select the subcategory under the Media Online category in which to place the media or specify a custom category. Select OK to accept the data element. 4. The media is copied to the category you selected. File name Specify the name of the media file.2 required IMS Metadata data elements. Uncheck this option if you do not want the metadata included in the published title. Click the Media Library Organizer toolbar graphic Tools menu. Use the plus and minus signs before the category names to expand and collapse the My Media categories. 2. The Share Media Online window opens. Description Specify a short description of the media. Once uploaded. 4. Select from previously entered data elements from the Name/Value lists and click Edit or Remove to edit or remove the selected element. Select My Media in the Category Search box. Author Specify the author. Select a predefined data element from the Name combo box and specify a data element value from the Value edit/combo box. Click the Share Online button or right-click and select Share Online. the media is copied to subcategories under the Media Online category. Tests. Select this display a pre-populated list of name value pairs for all the SCORM 1. 6. Select the Use Metadata check box and specify the following information: Custom Metadata IMS Metadata Data Elements (IEEE LTSC LOM) Select this to display the Custom Metadata text field for you to directly enter custom metadata. Sharing media online You can share your custom media with the entire Lectora community by storing it online within the Media Library Organizer. 5. Click OK. The buttons on the left are enabled. 3. Surveys and Questions Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Click the Add button to open the Metadata Data Element Entry window. Keywords Specify keywords used to find the media. You must agree to the terms and conditions specified in the Terms of Use before sharing media online. Select the media within your media library to which you want to add metadata. Click Upload. To share media online: 1.1. Click the Properties button or right-click and select Properties. The media is screened before it is made available online.

and will contain the questions that comprise the test. 2. In the Title Explorer. When added to your title. In this chapter. the following topics are covered:  Adding Tests  Common Test and Survey Properties  Adding Questions  Specifying Question Properties  Adding Surveys  Adding Survey Questions  Specifying Survey Question Properties Adding Tests Use Lectora to easily create interactive tests containing various question types. are a means of organizing pages within the test. See also: Understanding the Book Metaphor Creating a test Creating a test is similar to creating a chapter. select the page after which you want the test to appear and do one of the following: o From the Add menu. Use the tabs on the Test Properties window to complete these tasks: General tab Results tab Change the name of a test   Set test result properties Response tab  Change a test's page size and alignment  Set CGI response properties  Remove a test from the table of contents When Completed/Passed tab  Enable author control for a test Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Additional pages can be inserted. In this chapter. They are special in that when they contain questions. eMail addresses or custom databases. a test is displayed in the Title Explorer as a new chapter following the currently selected chapter. The pages are the physical pages that your users will see. You can process results and submit them to learning management systems. similar to the section object. Lectora will be able to grade them. Tests can contain test sections and pages. the following topics are covered:  About Tests and Questions  Creating a Test  Adding Sections to a Test  Working with Test Results About tests Tests are special kinds of chapters in Lectora. Follow these steps to create a test: 1. Test sections.You can add tests and surveys containing a number of different question types to your title. select Test o Click the Add Test toolbar graphic o Right-click and select New > Test o Type Ctrl+6 on the Insert toolbar The Test Properties window opens. and questions can then be added to the pages of the test. A Page 1 and a Last test page will be added by default to the test.

When the time limit expires. All unanswered questions are considered incorrect. if they have not answered the question(s) on that page. Double-click the test graphic Click the Content tab. The Test Properties window opens. When enabled. To set a test's content properties: 1. If this option is selected. Select this to set a maximum time limit for the test. users will not be able to navigate off of the current page. Select this to randomize the selection of pages within the test. the test will be submitted. the question feedback for each question will be displayed to the user. the questions will retain any answers that were previously supplied. Use the Time allowed field to specify the maximum time in minutes. click OK to create the test. The student will be presented with the specified number of randomly chosen pages from all the pages in the test. Complete the controls on this tab as follows: Show per question feedback from each question Ensure that student answers all questions on the test Retain answers to all questions between sessions Timed test Select this to enable the return of feedback on a per-question basis for all questions in the test. This option is not initially available. See also: Adding sections to a test Adding Questions   Setting a test's content properties You can specify the test content properties. Specify the number of pages to use within the test. of the test you want to change in the Title Explorer. When standard navigation is added to a test. This action is necessary at the end of the test so the results will be submitted and the appropriate completion action Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 Random selection of pages . 2. You can then divide your test into test sections or begin adding questions to test pages. the Done button that is added to the last page of the test is programmed with the Submit/ Process Test/Survey action. Access the test properties after you have created pages within the test to set this option. Select this to enable Lectora to retain the question answers after the Lectora session is closed. such as whether students must answer all questions and whether this is a timed test. If the student returns to the test in a future session.Add standard navigation to a test  Set the resulting action when a test is passed When Canceled/Failed tab Add automatic page numbering to a test  Set the resulting action when a test is failed Background tab Transition tab  Change a test's background properties  Set a test's transition properties  Change a test's text properties Inherit tab  Specify a test's inheritance properties Content tab  Set a test's content properties When you have finished specifying test properties.

Lectora will display each question. To set test result properties: 1. a larger number of questions results in a longer time needed to generate the test results page. Complete the controls on this tab as follows: Show test results to student after end of test Select this option to display the test results to the user upon completing the test. along with the user’s answer. the test cannot be scored unless all essay and short answer questions have a weight of 0. If the answer was incorrect. the Done button should be removed and replaced with the same button used to navigate forward within the test. If you add your own custom navigation to the test. The Test Properties window opens. the button on the last page of the test that navigates users out of the test must have this action. If you later randomize your test. use the Lowest Passing Score field to specify the passing percentage score (out of 100%). such as showing test results to the user after the end of the test and whether to grade the test. Double-click the test graphic Click the Results tab. If you have included either essay or short answer questions in your test. of the test you want to change in the Title Explorer. Select Customized Test Results if you want to create a test results page that will enable you to choose the information to be included in the test results. With Grade the test enabled.is taken. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Click OK. indicating if it was correct or incorrect. the correct answer is displayed. See also: Adding standard navigation to a test/survey 3. See also: Specifying Question Properties Include test score in overall score* For AICC/SCORM content titles. See also: Setting test results content properties Grade the test Select this option to have Lectora compute a percentage score for the test upon completion. enable this to specify whether the score of this test is to be included in the overall score of the course. This value is also used to determine whether the When Completed/Passed or When Canceled/Failed action is executed upon completion of the test. 2. It is not recommended to use Customized Test Results if your test consists of a large number of questions. This option is only available when the title has been specified as a AICC/SCORM title. Since the test results are dynamically generated based on the questions within your test. Setting test result properties You can specify the options pertaining to test results.

Use the Method list to select whether the submission is done using a POST or GET. Select this to enable the test results to be emailed to the email address specified in the Email To field. If you have a large test or are submitting a large amount of variable data. Submit Test to CGI program Select this to submit the test results to the CGI application specified in the Submit results to field. (Separate multiple email addresses with a semicolon. If enabled. select Submit in XML format.See also: Specifying the type of title Results Submission Use this section to specify whether test results are to be submitted using email or a CGI program. a success message will be presented to the user upon successful submission of the test results. The passing score is specified in the Results tab of your test's properties. The name of each variable and its value at the time of submission is sent. all defined Lectora variables will be included with the test results data that is submitted. so results can be successfully submitted. See also: Setting CGI test/survey response properties Prompt the student for If enabled. the controls within the Response tab of the Test Properties window are enabled. If enabled. the email server must be configured to accept communications from the published title's location. such as Microsoft Outlook. Email Results of Test Setting the resulting action when a test is passed You can specify the action to take when the test is completed or completed with a passing score if the test is being graded. To submit the emailed results in XML format. users are prompted at the beginning of the test to enter their name. results are automatically submitted to the LMS. Survey and Form Results to CGI If this options is selected. and no additional information is needed here. See also: Submitting Test. If you do not have a LMS or to submit results to an email address or CGI program in addition to the LMS. the test Include all variable values in submission Show the student a success dialog if submission is successful 3. In addition. use the POST method instead. on the computer from which they are accessing the published title. select Email Results of Test or Submit Test to CGI program. If the title resides within a learning management system (LMS). their name to identify The user's name is submitted with the test results data.) The use of this feature requires that each user have an email client. The GET method can only support the submission of 256 characters of data. The default is Test Results. See also: Setting test result properties To set the resulting action when a user completes or passes a test: Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Click OK. Specify the subject line in Email Subject Line.

See also: Selecting an action 3. The Test Properties window opens. The only Action available is Go To. See also: Selecting an action 3. Changing a test result page's size and alignment Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . In the Page Name field. 2. Working with test results If the Show test results to student after end of test and Customized Test Results check boxes are enabled on the Results tab of the Test properties. The only Action available is Go To. The Test Results Properties window opens. Select the appropriate Target from the list. Setting the resulting action when a test is failed You can specify the action to take when the test is canceled or completed with a failing score if the test is being graded. the contents of this Test Results page can be customized by editing its properties. Select the appropriate Target from the list. Click the When Completed/Passed tab. Double-click the test results graphic of the test results page you want to change in the Title Explorer. Double-click the test graphic of the test you want to change in the Title Explorer.1. Click OK. 3. 2. specify the name of your page as you want it to appear in the Title Explorer. See also: Setting test result properties To set the resulting action when a user cancels or fails a test: 1. Similar to other pages in your title. The passing score is specified in the Results tab of your test's properties. Click the When Canceled/Failed tab. Double-click the test graphic of the test you want to change in the Title Explorer. 2. Click the General tab if the Test Results Properties window is not already opened to this tab. Click OK. The Test Properties window opens. a Test Results page appears within the test in the Title Explorer. Click OK. See also: Setting test result properties Complete these tasks using the controls on the Test Results Properties window: General tab Inherit tab  Change the name of a test results page  Specify a test results page's inheritance properties Results Content tab  Change a test results page's size and alignment  Set test results content properties  Enable author control for a test results page Transitions tab Background tab  Set a test results page's transition properties  Change a test results page's background properties  Change a test results page's text properties Changing the name of a test results page To change the name of your test results page: 1.

Click the General tab if the Test Results Properties window is not already opened to this tab. additional authors will not be able to edit the contents of the page unless they have the master Author Control password. the default background image. This includes all objects on the test results page. Double-click the test results graphic of the test results page you want to change in the Title Explorer. Select Use Default to inherit the page size used within the Test Properties. Click OK. Double-click the test results graphic of the test results page you want to change in the Title Explorer. With Author Control enabled. Click the Background tab. See also: Protecting your title with a password To enable Author Control for a test results page: 1. Click the General tab if the Test Results Properties window is not already opened to this tab. or select Custom to select a custom color from the Color wheel. Otherwise.Lectora will automatically generate the test results page size based on the number of test results that need to be displayed. The master Author Control password must first be set within the Title Properties. The page alignment will determine how the content is displayed within the user's browser window for any Web-based. Changing a test results page's background properties The default background color. However. Click OK. 3. The Test Results Properties window opens. Double-click the test results graphic of the test results page you want to change in the Title Explorer. you can directly specify the size of your test results page. To use a new background image for your test results page. Changes applied to the background color. The Test Results Properties window opens. You can also . To change these background properties: 1. Enabling author control for a test results page You can protect the contents of a test results page by enabling Author Control. select the eye-dropper tool to use a color from elsewhere within your title. 4. Default Background Image Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 The default background image inherited from the test properties is specified. To change your test results page size: 1. Specify the following background information: Default Background Color The default background color inherited from the test properties is specified. The Default page alignment is inherited from the test properties. Check the Author Control check box. 3. and the default background sound are inherited from the test properties by default. 2. Select a predefined color. specify the new page dimensions in the Width and Height fields. or sound within your page's properties will only be applied to the test results page. 2. published content. 2. Use the list to select a new default background color for your test results page. you will not be able to see your background color. image. Choose the Page Alignment for HTML Publishing from the list. The Test Results Properties window opens. See also: Matching Colors Used within Your Title If you choose a background image. select a previously imported image from the list or click the Import button to navigate and select an image.

Changes applied to the default text style and default link color within your page's properties will only be applied to the test results page. click on the Styles button. the browser will cache the image and only load the image one time. The Test Results Properties window opens. select a previously imported sound file from the list or click the Import button to navigate and select a sound file. To create a new text style. however. the background color will not be visible. Text blocks created on your page will be automatically formatted to the selected style.click on the arrow within the Import button to choose from the following: From File Media Library Select this to navigate and select an image. Select this to launch your media library to select an audio file. Specify the following text information: Default Text Style The default text style inherited from the test properties is specified. unless the image is somewhere transparent. 2. To change these text properties: 1. 3. See also: Managing text styles Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Changing a test results page's text properties The default text style and link color are inherited from the test properties by default. Default Background Sound The default background sound inherited from the test properties is specified. If you use a background image that is smaller than your page size. Click the Background tab. and will repeat. Click OK. Select this to launch your media library to select an image. Double-click the test results graphic of the test results page you want to change in the Title Explorer. See also: Working with the Media Library Organizer You can also use the Background Wizard to create a background for your test results page. See also: Working with the Media Library Organizer A background sound will play continuously on the test results page. Use the list to select a new default text style to be used on your test results page. If you choose a background image. You can also click on the arrow within the Import button to choose from the following: From File Media Library Select this to navigate and select an audio file. Lectora will automatically tile that image across and down your page. This is a much more efficient manner of creating a background as opposed to one large background image that will have a much longer load time. To use a new background sound for your test results page. The sound will continue playing while the user is on the page.

Keep in mind that if you are publishing to HTML, Lectora does not embed the fonts into the published work. It is best to use common, Web-friendly fonts such as Arial, Verdana, or Tahoma.

Default Link Color

The default link color inherited from the test properties is specified. Use the list to select the color to be used for all hyperlinks on your test results page. Select a predefined color, select the eye-dropper tool to use a color from elsewhere within your title, or select Custom to select a custom color from the Color wheel. See also: Matching Colors Used within Your Title

Textual hyperlinks are underlined and displayed in the selected color. 3. Click OK.

Specifying a test results page's inheritance properties
With Lectora’s inheritance capabilities, objects you add directly to a test will appear on every page in that test including pages that are inside of a test section within the test. Objects added directly to a test section will appear on every page in that section and objects added directly to a page will appear only on that page. See also: Understanding Inheritance

The inherit tab is available within all test, test section and page properties. If the object is excluded within the properties of a test, it will not appear on any page within that test. If the object is excluded within the properties of a test section, it will not appear on any page within that test section, and if the object is excluded within the properties of a page, then the object will be excluded from that page. By default, all objects are excluded from a test results page. To specify a test result page's inheritance properties: 1. Double-click the test results graphic of the test results page you want to change in the Title Explorer. The Test Results Properties window opens. Click the Inherit tab. 2. Select from one of the following inheritance options: o Inherit all objects from parent o Inherit no objects from parent o Exclude inheritance of certain objects Inherit all object from parent will place all objects within the Inherited list. These objects are inherited from your test and will appear on the test results page. Inherit no objects from parent will place all objects within the Excluded list. These objects will not appear on the test results page. Select Exclude inheritance of certain objects to move objects from one list to the other. Select an object in either list and click the arrow buttons to move items from one list to the other in the direction of the buttons. You can select several objects by holding down the Ctrl key while selecting multiple objects. 3. Click OK.

Setting test results content properties
You can specify properties relating to the content of your test results, such as whether to open the results in a pop-up window, Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010

show the test score, and show questions answered both correctly and incorrectly. The information you choose to display will be displayed for all questions in the test. The test results page content is generated dynamically based on the questions within your test and the test results content properties specified. When you add a new question to your test, Lectora will subsequently add the corresponding test results information to your test results page. To set test results content properties: 1. Double-click the test results graphic of the test results page you want to change in the Title Explorer. The Test Results Properties window opens. Click the Results Content tab. 2. Complete the controls as follows: Open in Popup Window Select this to launch the test results in a new window. Show Test Score Show Pass/Fail Status Select this to display the overall test score on the test results page. Select this to display whether or not the score is passing or failing, based upon the Lowest Passing Score specified within the test properties. See also: Setting test result properties Show Correct Questions Show Incorrect Questions Show Unanswered Questions Include Question Number Include Question Text Include Student's Answer Include Correct Answer Make Link Back to the Original Question 3. Click OK. Select this to display the question if the user answered correctly. Select this to display the question if the user answered incorrectly. Select this to display questions the user did not answer or skipped. Select this to display the question number. Select this to display the text associated with the question. Select this to display the answer provided by the user. Select this to display the correct answer to the question. Select this to create a standard question button that will link to the corresponding question page.

Setting a test results page's transition properties
The transition type is inherited from the test properties by default. Changes applied to the transition type within your page's properties will only be applied to the test results page. Transitions will produce a special effect as users navigate from one page to another. You can select from over 20 different transitions. There is a Slow to Fast slider to determine the speed at which the transition takes place. To set your test results page's transition: 1. Double-click the test results graphic of the test results page you want to change in the Title Explorer. The Test Results Properties window opens. Click the Transitions tab. 2. Select a transition from the Transition Type list, and adjust the Slow/Fast slider accordingly. 3. Click OK. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010

Transitions are not recommended for titles published to the Web. This is because an entire page needs to load before the transition occurs and a result, buttons and hyperlinks are disabled until the transition is complete.

Adding sections to a test
Test sections can be used to organize the pages in a test. Unlike regular chapter sections, test sections cannot contain subsections, and can only contain pages. Test sections can be configured to randomly present a specified number of pages within the section, and individual test section scores can be presented to the user. Follow these steps to create a test section: 1. In the Title Explorer, select the test to which you want to add a new section and do one of the following: o From the Add menu, select Test Section

o Click the Add Test Section toolbar graphic o Right-click and select New > Test Section o Type Ctrl+7

on the Insert toolbar

The Test Section appears within the test in the Title Explorer. 2. Configure the test section properties. Double-click the test section graphic the Title Explorer. The Test Section Properties window opens. of the test section you want to change in

3. Use the tabs on the Test Section Properties window to complete these tasks: General tab Inherit tab  Change the name of a test section  Change a test section's inheritance properties Section Content tab Change a test section's page size and alignment   Set a test section's content properties  Remove a test section from the table of contents Transition tab  Enable author control for a test section  Set a test section's transition properties Background tab Change a test section's background properties Change a test section's text properties When you have completed configuring test section properties, click the OK button to apply your changes. You can now begin adding questions to populate the test. See also: Adding Questions

 

Changing the name of a test section
To change the name of a test section: 1. Double-click the test section graphic of the test section you want to change in the Title Explorer. The Test Section Properties window opens. Click the General tab if the Test Section Properties window is not already opened to this tab. 2. In the Test Section Name field, specify the new name as you want it to appear in the Title Explorer. Lectora will create a variable using the test name and test section name to store the user’s test section score. For example, if the test name is Lab Safety Test, and the test section name is Equipement Safety, the test section score variable will be named Lab_Safety_Test_Equipment_Safety_Score. 3. Click OK.

Changing a test section's page size and alignment
The page size and alignment of your test section are inherited from the test properties by default. Changes applied to the page Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010

size and alignment within your test section's properties will only be applied to the pages contained within the test section. Consideration should be made for your intended users, and the width of the page size should match the most common resolution of users' monitors. The alignment will determine how the content is displayed within the user's browser window for any Web-based, published content. To change the page size of your test section: 1. Double-click the test section graphic of the test section you want to change in the Title Explorer. The Test Section Properties window opens. Click the General tab if the Test Section Properties window is not already opened to this tab. 2. In the Page Size in Screen Pixels box, clear the Use Default check box to specify the Width and Height of the test section's pages. If Use Default is selected, the page size you specified in the test properties will apply. 3. Choose the Page Alignment for HTML Publishing from the list. The Default page alignment is inherited from the test properties. 4. Click OK.

Removing a test section from the table of contents
A Table of Contents in Lectora is a menu system that is automatically populated with the chapters, sections and pages within your title. Users can use the Table of Contents to navigate to the different areas of your title. By default, all chapters, sections, and pages are included in a Table of Contents, however you can specify not to include individual chapters, sections or pages. When you remove a test section from the Table of Contents, neither the test section nor any of the pages within the test section will appear within the Table of Contents. Users will not be able to navigate to the test section using the Table of Contents. This setting also affects the Table of Contents progress bar. See also: Working with Tables of Contents Working with Progress Bars

To remove a test section from the Table of Contents: 1. Double-click the test section graphic of the test section you want to change in the Title Explorer. The Test Section Properties window opens. Click the General tab if the Test Section Properties window is not already opened to this tab. 2. Clear the Include in Table of Contents check box. 3. Click OK.

Enabling author control for a test section
You can protect the contents of a test section by enabling Author Control. With Author Control enabled, additional authors will not be able to edit the contents of the test section unless they have the master Author Control password. This includes all pages within the test section and all objects on those pages. The master Author Control password must first be set within the Title Properties. See also: Protecting your title with a password

To enable Author Control for a test section: 1. Double-click the test section graphic of the test section you want to change in the Title Explorer. The Test Section Properties window opens. Click the General tab if the Test Section Properties window is not already opened to this tab. 2. Select the Author Control check box. 3. Click OK.

Changing a test section's background properties
Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010

The default background color, the default background image, and the default background sound are inherited from the test properties by default. Changes applied to the background color, image, or sound within your test sectin's properties will only be applied to the pages contained within the test section. To change these background properties: 1. Double-click the test section graphic of the test section you want to change in the Title Explorer. The Test Section Properties window opens. Click the Background tab. 2. Specify the following background information: Default Background Color The default background color inherited from the test properties is specified. Use the list to select a new default background color for the pages within your test section. Select a predefined color, select the eye-dropper tool to use a color from elsewhere within your title, or select Custom to select a custom color from the Color wheel. See also: Matching Colors Used within Your Title If you choose a background image, you will not be able to see your background color. Default Background Image The default background image inherited from the test properties is specified. To use a new background image for the pages of your test section, select a previously imported image from the list or click on the Import button to navigate and select the image. You can also click on the arrow within the Import button to choose from the following: From File Media Library Select this to navigate and select an image. Select this to launch your media library to select an image. See also: Working with the Media Library Organizer You can also use the Background Wizard to create a background for your test section. If you use a background image that is smaller than your page size, Lectora will automatically tile that image across and down your page; however, the browser will cache the image and only load the image one time. This is a much more efficient manner of creating a background as opposed to one large background image that will have a much longer load time. If you choose a background image, the background color will not be visible, unless the image is somewhere transparent. Default Background Sound The default background sound inherited from the test properties is specified. To use a new background sound for the pages of your test section, select a previously imported audio file from the list or click on the Import button to navigate and select the audio file. You can also click on the arrow within the Import button to choose from the following: From File Media Library Select this to navigate and select an audio file. Select this to launch your media library to select an audio file. See also: Working with the Media Library Organizer

A background sound will play continuously throughout the test section. The sound will continue playing as users navigate throughout the test section, and will repeat. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010

3. Click OK.

Changing a test section's text properties
The default text style and link color are inherited from the test properties by default. Changes applied to the default text style and default link color within your test section's properties will only be applied to the pages contained within the test section. To change these text properties: 1. Double-click the test section graphic of the test section you want to change in the Title Explorer. The Test Section Properties window opens. Click the Background tab. 2. Specify the following text information: Default Text Style The default text style inherited from the test properties is specified. Use the list to select a new default text style to be used within your test section. Text blocks created within your test section will be automatically formatted to the selected style. To create a new text style, click on the Styles button. See also: Managing text styles

Keep in mind that if you are publishing to HTML, Lectora does not embed the fonts into the published work. It is best to use common, Web-friendly fonts such as Arial, Verdana, or Tahoma. Default Link Color The default link color inherited from the test properties is specified. Use the list to select the color to be used for all hyperlinks within your test section. Select a predefined color, select the eye-dropper tool to use a color from elsewhere within your title, or select Custom to select a custom color from the Color wheel. See also: Matching Colors Used within Your Title

Textual hyperlinks are underlined and displayed in the selected color. 3. Click OK.

Specifying a test section's inheritance properties
With Lectora’s inheritance capabilities, objects you add directly to a test will appear on every page in that test including pages that are inside of a test section within the test. Objects added directly to a test section will appear on every page in that section and objects added directly to a page will appear only on that page. See also: Understanding Inheritance

The inherit tab is available within all test, test section and page properties. If the object is excluded within the properties of a test, it will not appear on any page within that test. If the object is excluded within the properties of a test section, it will not appear on any page within that test section, and if the object is excluded within the properties of a page, then the object will be excluded from that page. To specify a test section's inheritance properties: 1. Double-click the test section graphic of the test section you want to change in the Title Explorer. The Test Section Properties window opens. Click the Inherit tab. 2. Select from one of the following inheritance options: o Inherit all objects from parent o Inherit no objects from parent o Exclude inheritance of certain objects Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010

Specify the number of pages to use within the test section. buttons and hyperlinks are disabled until the transition is complete. Click OK. See also: Adding standard navigation to a test/survey 3. You can select several objects by holding down the Ctrl key while selecting multiple objects. Select Exclude inheritance of certain objects to move objects from one list to the other. The Test Section Properties window opens. When standard navigation is added to a test. the Done button that is added to the last page of the test is programmed with the Submit/Process Test/Survey action. This is because an entire page needs to load before the transition occurs and a result. Transitions are not recommended for titles published to the Web. Setting a test section's transition properties The transition type is inherited from the test properties by default. These objects will not appear on any pages within your test section. Click the Section Content tab. If you add your own custom navigation to the test. These objects will continue to appear throughout your test section. Click OK. Select the Random selection of pages check box to randomize the selection of pages within the test section. Click the Transitions tab. 2. Changes applied to the transition type within your test section's properties will only be applied to the pages contained within the test section. and the last page of the test is included in a randomized test section. Click OK. To set your test section's transitions: 1. You can select from over 20 different transitions. Select a transition from the Transition Type list. If you later randomize your test sections. There is a Slow to Fast slider to determine the speed at which the transition takes place. Double-click the test section graphic of the test section you want to change in the Title Explorer. the button on the last page of the test that navigates users out of the test must have this action. Transitions will produce a special effect as users navigate from one page to another. and adjust the Slow/Fast slider accordingly. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . 3.Inherit all object from parent will place all objects within the Inherited list. Setting a test section's content properties You can specify whether to randomly select pages from the test section for each user. Select an object in either list and click the arrow buttons to move items from one list to the other in the direction of the buttons. 3. 2. the Done button should be removed and replaced with the same button used to navigate forward within the test. To set a test's content properties: 1. The student will be presented with the specified number of randomlychosen pages from all the pages in the test section. Double-click the test section graphic of the test section you want to change in the Title Explorer. The Test Section Properties window opens. This action is necessary at the end of the test so the results will be submitted and the appropriate completion action is taken. Inherit no objects from parent will place all objects within the Excluded list.

the page size you specified in the title properties will apply. The Test or Survey Properties window opens. published content. For rests. 2. The Default page alignment is inherited from the title properties. Click OK. In the Name field. sections and pages within Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Click the General tab if the Properties window is not already opened to this tab. Lectora will create a variable using the test name to store the user's test score. Changing a test/survey's page size and alignment The page size and alignment of your test or survey are inherited from the title properties by default. To change the page size of your test or survey: 1. 4. In the Page Size in Screen Pixels box. You can access these properties for or a test or survey by double-clicking the test or survey graphic in the Title Explorer. 2. Removing a test/survey from the table of contents A Table of Contents in Lectora is a menu system that is automatically populated with the chapters. Click OK. If Use Default is selected. The alignment will determine how the content is displayed within the user's browser window for any Web-based. Double-click the test or survey graphic of the test or survey you want to change in the Title Explorer.Common Test and Survey Properties Many properties for test and surveys in Lectora are the same. The Test or Survey Properties window opens. Choose the Page Alignment for HTML Publishing from the list. 3. the test score variable will be named Lab_Safety_Test_Score. and the width of the page size should match the most common resolution of users' monitors. if the test name is Lab Safety Test. Consideration should be made for your intended users. 3. clear the Use Default check box to specify the Width and Height of the test or survey's pages. For example. The following can be completed within test and survey properties:  Change the name of a test/survey  Change a test/survey's page size and alignment  Remove a test/survey from the table of contents  Enable author control for a test/survey  Add standard navigation to a test/survey  Add automatic page numbering to a test/survey  Change a test/survey's background properties  Change a test/survey's text properties  Change a test/survey's inheritance properties  Set CGI test/survey response properties  Set a test/survey's transition properties Changing the name of a test/survey To change the name of a test or survey: 1. specify the new name as you want it to appear in the Title Explorer. Double-click the test or survey graphic of the test or survey you want to change in the Title Explorer. Changes applied to the page size and alignment within your test or survey's properties will only be applied to the pages contained within the test or survey. Click the General tab if the Properties window is not already opened to this tab. Surveys are not scored.

Clear the Include in Table of Contents check box. You can remove these controls and add your own custom navigation. The Test or Survey Properties window opens. sections. While initially specifying test and survey properties. Double-click the test or survey graphic of the test or survey you want to change in the Title Explorer. Check the Author Control check box. neither the test/survey nor any of the pages within the test/survey will appear within the Table of Contents. This action is necessary at the end of the test so the results will be submitted and the appropriate completion action is taken. By default. When you select this option. This includes all pages within the test/survey and all objects on those pages. Click OK. and pages are included in a Table of Contents. Double-click the test or survey graphic of the test or survey you want to change in the Title Explorer. If you add your own custom navigation to the test. and Done) to the pages of your test or survey. Click OK. however you can specify not to include individual chapters. Users will not be able to navigate to the test/survey using the Table of Contents. 2. This setting also affects the Table of Contents progress bar. If you later randomize your test. See also: Protecting your title with a password To enable Author Control for a test or survey: 1. Users can use the Table of Contents to navigate to the different areas of your title. Enabling author control for a test/survey You can protect the contents of a test or survey by enabling Author Control. sections or pages. if desired. Click the General tab if the Properties window is not already opened to this tab. Next. Adding standard navigation to a test/survey You can add standard navigation buttons (Cancel. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . a first and last test/survey page are also automatically added to your test or survey. See also: Working with Tables of Contents Working with Progress Bars To remove a test or survey from the Table of Contents: 1. 3.your title. With Author Control enabled. select the Add standard navigation buttons to the test/survey check box. additional authors will not be able to edit the contents of the test/survey unless they have the master Author Control password. 3. The Done button that is added to the test is programmed with the Submit/Process Test/Survey action. When you remove a test or survey from the Table of Contents. Click the General tab if the Properties window is not already opened to this tab. Back. all chapters. The Test or Survey Properties window opens. the Done button should be removed and replaced with the same button used to navigate forward within the test. 2. The master Author Control password must first be set within the Title Properties. The option to add standard navigation to a test or survey is only available when initially specifying the test/survey properties. the button on the last page of the test that navigates users out of the test must have this action.

or sound within your test or survey's properties will only be applied to the pages contained within the test or survey. Specify the following background information: Default Background Color The default background color inherited from the title properties is specified. When you select this option. If you use a background image that is smaller than your page size. select a previously imported image from the list or click the Import button to navigate and select an image. 2. While initially specifying test and survey properties. however. Click the Background tab. Use the list to select a new default background color for the pages within your test or survey. and the default background sound are inherited from the title properties by default. select the eye-dropper tool to use a color from elsewhere within your title. Double-click the test or survey graphic of the test or survey you want to change in the Title Explorer. You can also click on the arrow within the Import button to choose from the following: From File Select this to navigate and select an image. the browser will Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . the default background image. Changing a test/survey's background properties The default background color. See also: Matching Colors Used within Your Title If you choose a background image. page numbering in the form of Page X of XX will appear on each page of your test or survey. The Test or Survey Properties window opens. Default Background Image The default background image inherited from the title properties is specified. Select a predefined color. you will not be able to see your background color. image. To change these background properties: 1. To use a new background image for the pages of your test or survey. or select Custom to select a custom color from the Color wheel. Changes applied to the background color.See also: Setting a test's content properties Adding automatic page numbering to a test/survey You can automatically number the pages within your test or survey. Media Library Select this to launch your media library to select an image. The option to add automatic page numbering to a test or survey is only available when initially specifying the test/ survey properties. Page numbering can later be added to the test by using the Page Numbering Tool. select the Auto number the pages within the test/survey check box. See also: Working with the Media Library Organizer You can also use the Background Wizard to create a background for your test or survey. Lectora will automatically tile that image across and down your page.

select the eye-dropper tool to use a color from elsewhere within your title. 3. and will repeat. Select this to launch your media library to select an audio file. This is a much more efficient manner of creating a background as opposed to one large background image that will have a much longer load time. Specifying a test/survey's inheritance properties With Lectora’s inheritance capabilities. Use the list to select a new default text style to be used within your test or survey. The sound will continue playing as users navigate throughout the test or survey. You can also click on the arrow within the Import button to choose from the following: From File Media Library Select this to navigate and select an audio file. Select a predefined color. Double-click the test or survey graphic of the test or survey you want to change in the Title Explorer. 2. Click the Background tab. or select Custom to select a custom color from the Color wheel. or Tahoma. Click OK. See also: Matching Colors Used within Your Title Textual hyperlinks are underlined and displayed in the selected color. Verdana. To change these text properties: 1. To create a new text style. Web-friendly fonts such as Arial. click on the Styles button. Lectora does not embed the fonts into the published work. objects you add directly to a test or survey will appear on every page in that test/survey Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Changing a test/survey's text properties The default text style and link color are inherited from the title properties by default. It is best to use common. Default Background Sound The default background sound inherited from the title properties is specified. Specify the following text information: Default Text Style The default text style inherited from the title properties is specified. Click OK. select a previously imported sound file from the list or click the Import button to navigate and select a sound file. 3. Text blocks created within your test or survey will be automatically formatted to the selected style. To use a new background sound for the pages of your test or survey. The Test or Survey Properties window opens. Changes applied to the default text style and default link color within your test or survey's properties will only be applied to the pages contained within the test or survey. See also: Working with the Media Library Organizer A background sound will play continuously throughout the test or survey. Use the list to select the color to be used for all hyperlinks within your test or survey.cache the image and only load the image one time. Default Link Color The default link color inherited from the title properties is specified. See also: Managing text styles Keep in mind that if you are publishing to HTML.

See also: Submitting Test. Click OK. Select an object in either list and click the arrow buttons to move items from one list to the other in the direction of the buttons. it will not appear on any page within that test/survey section. To specify a test/survey's inheritance properties: 1. Setting CGI test/survey response properties When submitting test or survey data to a CGI program. Click the Inherit tab. Select Receive response from CGI submission. the CGI program can issue a response. it will not appear on any page within that test/survey. Click the Response tab. You can select several objects by holding down the Ctrl key while selecting multiple objects. Setting a test/survey's transition properties Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . 3.including pages that are inside of a test/survey section within a test/survey. Select Exclude inheritance of certain objects to move objects from one list to the other. Survey and Form Results to CGI To set CGI test/survey response properties: 1. Inherit no objects from parent will place all objects within the Excluded list. Use the Variable to receive response drop-down list to select the variable into which you want to store the response. test section. These objects will continue to appear throughout your test or survey. If the object is excluded within the properties of a test/survey. The Test or Survey Properties window opens. 2. the response is received and stored as a text string in the specified Lectora variable. click the New Variable button to create a new variable in which to store the CGI response. By default. Double-click the test or survey graphic of the test or survey you want to change in the Title Explorer. Objects added directly to a test/survey section will appear on every page in that section and objects added directly to a page will appear only on that page. If the object is excluded within the properties of a test section or a section contained in a survey. If enabled. See also: Understanding Inheritance The inherit tab is available within all test. then the object will be excluded from that page. Select from one of the following inheritance options: o Inherit all objects from parent o Inherit no objects from parent o Exclude inheritance of certain objects Inherit all object from parent will place all objects within the Inherited list. The Test or Survey Properties window opens. and if the object is excluded within the properties of a page. These objects will not appear on any pages within your test or survey. Alternatively. 2. all objects are excluded from a test/survey. The response is stored as a text string in the specified variable. See also: About variables 3. survey and page properties. Click OK. Double-click the test or survey graphic of the test or survey you want to change in the Title Explorer. You can specify whether you want to enable Lectora to receive a response from the CGI program.

Choose from one of the following question types: True/False Multiple Choice Short Answer A question with one correct answer out of two possibilities. test section or page to which you want to add a question and do one of the following: o From the Add menu. Complete the controls on the window as follows: Name Type on the Insert toolbar Specify the name by which you will recognize this test question. buttons and hyperlinks are disabled until the transition is complete. Click OK.The transition type is inherited from the title properties by default. This question type cannot be automatically graded by the testing module and therefore cannot be used in titles within AICC or SCORM learning management systems. Changes applied to the transition type within your test or survey's properties will only be applied to the pages contained within the test or survey. select the test. 2. A question in which the user supplies a long (typically more than 80 characters) answer. Select the question type from the list. To set your test/survey's transitions: 1. and can be organized to be randomly presented to the user. select Question o Click the Add Question toolbar graphic o Right-click and select New > Question o Type Ctrl+8 The Question Properties window opens. Double-click the test or survey graphic of the test or survey you want to change in the Title Explorer. Questions on pages contained in a test can issue feedback back to the user. Essay Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . In the Title Explorer. Adding Questions Questions can be added to any page of your title. Follow these steps to add a question to your title: 1. A question in which the user supplies a short (typically less than 80 characters) answer. Select a transition from the Transition Type list. Transitions will produce a special effect as users navigate from one page to another. 2. Click the Transitions tab. 3. can be scored. and adjust the Slow/Fast slider accordingly. The Test or Survey Properties window opens. This question type cannot be automatically graded by the testing module and therefore cannot be used in titles within AICC or SCORM learning management systems. Transitions are not recommended for titles published to the Web. Questions need not be contained in a test. A question with one or more possible correct answers and multiple possibilities. You can select from over 20 different transitions. they can be interspersed in the title to provide simple knowledge checks to the user. There is a Slow to Fast slider to determine the speed at which the transition takes place. whether it is inside or outside of a test. This is because an entire page needs to load before the transition occurs and a result.

It may be accessed from anywhere in the title. The new page will be added after the currently selected page. additional authors will not be able to edit the question unless they have the master Author Control password. This must be a new unique variable that does not already exist. The default weight of each question is 1. work area image. Question Weight The question weight is irrelevant if the question is not within a test. the question will revert back to its default state of unanswered with every launch of the course. When the user returns to this question in a future session. The sum of the test points is 8 points. Lectora will use the sum of test points to calculate question weight and further. The Question window opens. Therefore. Question 5 is 4 points. A question that requires the user to drag source objects such as text or images to defined targets within a larger. If this option is not selected. one or more possible correct answers are possible. The user must match items in the left column with items in the right column to answer the question. Create new page for the question Retain question answer between sessions Author Control This option will automatically create a new page onto which the question will be added. Points are used to calculate the percentage weight of each question and will be factored into the overall test score. A question with a column of items on the left-hand side and a column of scrambled items on the right-hand side. It is best to keep the default naming convention (Question_####) for question variables. If this option is not selected. Drag and Drop Hot Spot Associated Variable Name Specify the associated variable name for this question. questions 1 – 4 are worth approximately 13% each whereas question 5 has a weight of 50%. The variable will be used to store the user’s answer to the question. A question with a visual multiple-choice set used to identify areas of an image. the answer provided previously by the student is retained.Fill in the Blank Matching A question in which the user supplies a short answer that is compared to a list of known correct answers. all the questions within a test are of equal value. the test score. With Author Control enabled. If points are assigned to each question. Define the following properties for the different question Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . See also: Protecting your title with a password 3. Example: Questions 1 – 4 are 1 point each. Select the weight of the test question. Set the Question Weight to 0 for any short answer or essay questions that are included in a graded test. without changing this option. Therefore. the question will be added to the currently selected page. This option causes the question answer to be retained after the Lectora session is closed. 4. Click the Next button. Lectora will automatically increment the numeric value in the variable to correspond with the number of questions that have been created within the title. Use this window to define how the question will appear to the user.

For additional information. Click the Import button to navigate and select the image you want to associate with the question. you can enable the ability to provide feedback to the user for correct and incorrect answers. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Complete the fields as directed and click Finish.  If the question is included in a test. Select this to launch your media library to select an image. or to the user upon leaving the page. Question Type All All Select a previously imported image to display with the All question text. You can also click on the arrow within the Import button to choose from the following: From File Media Library Select this to navigate and select an image. Selecting this enables the Image and Align image lists. Select this to show an image with the question. the Results and Feedback window opens. the feedback for all questions on the page will be presented when the user attempts to leave the page (unless immediate feedback is selected). the feedback will only appear if the test has the Show per question feedback option enabled within the test’s properties. See also: Working with the Media Library Organizer Align image 5. Specify where the image should appear in relation to the question text. select the type of question you are adding: o True / False o Multiple Choice o Short Answer o Essay o Fill in the Blank o Matching o Drag and Drop o Hotspot 6.  Creating a true or false question Once you have configured the properties within the Question Properties and Question windows. The feedback can be displayed immediately after a user has provided an answer. See also: Setting a test's content properties If there is more than one question on the page with question feedback. use the list or Import button to specify the destination image upon which the question’s drag objects or hot spot buttons will be placed. The feedback will be presented as the feedback text in a message box or as a specified page in a window. Along with defining the question. Click the Next button. For Drag and Drop and Hot Spot questions. All You will be presented with one or more additional windows that are based on the type of question you selected.types: Property Question Show image with question Image Drop image Hot Spot image Description Specify the text of the question.

Select this to specify the page for the false choice feedback. specify the text of the feedback message for the true choice. False Choice Text Show feedback Feedback for message for Instead of showing a page to the user. the test must be set to Show per question feedback from each question. If the question is within a test. Select this to specify the page for the true choice feedback. Select this to enable the question feedback fields for the two possible responses for this question. The page will be presented in a pop-up window to the user. The text will be presented in a generic message box to the user. Complete the controls within the Choices window as necessary: Number of choices Correct Specify the number of choices to include in the question. Select the corresponding Correct radio button if the false choice is correct. See also: Adding Questions 1. Select this to create a multiple choice question with multiple answers. Feedback is provided immediately or upon leaving the page. the Choices window opens. 2. All of the designated Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Use the list to select the feedback page. This enables the Feedback page for false choice list. I disagree or No). This enables the Feedback page for true choice list. Instead of showing a page to the user. The default text is False. Specify the text for the false choice (for example. Use the list to select the feedback page. The true or false question is added to your title. The text will be presented in a generic message box to the user.See also: Adding Questions 1. Click Finish. The default text is True. This field is enabled when you select Show feedback. I agree or Yes). Complete the controls within the Results and Feedback window as necessary: True Choice Text Specify the text for the true choice (for example. Select the corresponding Correct radio button if the true choice is correct. The feedback will be presented as the feedback text in a message box or as a specified page in a pop-up window. The page will be presented in a pop-up window to the user. specify the text of the feedback false choice message for the false choice. in order for the feedback to be displayed to the user. Creating a multiple choice question Once you have configured the properties within the Question Properties and Question windows. See also: Setting a test's content properties Immediate feedback Show page for true choice feedback Feedback message for true choice Show page for false choice feedback Select this to display feedback immediately to the user upon answering the question.

Click the Next button. the test must be set to Show per question feedback from each question. This enables the Feedback page for correct choice list. The Choice X of XX window is displayed for each choice. This field is enabled when you select Show feedback for multi-choice answer. The text will be presented in a generic message box to the user. complete the controls as follows: Choice Text Correct Choice Specify the text for this choice. Feedback for Instead of showing a page to the user. The page will be presented in a pop-up window to the user. choice answer Show page for incorrect answer feedback Feedback for incorrect multi-choice answer Select this to specify the page for the incorrect choice feedback. This option is only available if the correct answer requires more than one choice. in order for the feedback to be displayed to the user. The page will be presented in a pop-up window to the user. specify the text of the feedback message for the incorrect choice.choice. otherwise. The number of windows that follow is equal to the Number of choices that you defined on the Choices window. Select this to give the user credit for each each selection that he or she correctly identifies. Instead of showing a page to the user. Use the list to select the feedback page. (Click the Back button if you want to return to that window. Drop-Down List / List Box Show feedback for multi-choice answer The feedback on this screen is valid only if the multiple answer option is used. This enables the Feedback page for incorrect choice list.answer requires more than one choice Grade each choice item as a separate question correct answers must be selected for the question to be considered correct. See also: Setting a test's content properties Immediate feedback Show page for correct answer feedback Select this to display feedback immediately to the user upon answering the question.) 3. If the question is within a test. 2. Use the list to select the feedback page. Select this to specify the page for the correct choice feedback. specify the text of the feedback message for the correct correct multi. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . and will override the individual feedback on the following windows. Select the check box if this choice is correct. The text will be presented in a generic message box to the user. For each choice. the user will be required to select all correct answers to receive credit for answering the question correctly. Display Select this to display the choices in a drop-down list (for questions with only one answer) or in question as a list box (for questions requiring multiple answers).

the Feedback window opens. See also: Adding Questions 1. This enables the Feedback page list. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . 4. Select a previously imported image to display with the choice text. Complete the controls within the Feedback window as necessary: Maximum answer text length Specify the maximum length of the text answer in number of characters. Show image with choice Image Select this to show an image with the choice. This field is enabled when you select Show feedback. Selecting this enables the Image and Align image fields. Select this to specify the page for the feedback. The page will be presented in a pop-up window to the user. You can also click on the arrow within the Import button to choose from the following: From File Media Library Select this to navigate and select an image. Alternatively.The feedback will be presented as the feedback text in a message box or as a specified page in a pop-up window. click on the Import button to navigate and select the image you want to associate with the choice. See also: Working with the Media Library Organizer Align image Show feedback Specify where the image should appear in relation to the choice text. Instead of showing a page to the user. in order for the feedback to be displayed to the user. Click Next until you have finished configuring each choice and click Finish. See also: Setting a test's content properties Immediate feedback Show page for feedback Feedback message Immediate feedback Select this to display feedback immediately to the user upon selecting this choice. Creating a short answer question Once you have configured the properties within the Question Properties and Question windows. Select this to launch your media library to select an image. The multiple choice question is added to your title. Select this to enable the question feedback fields for this choice. The text will be presented in a generic message box to the user.You must select at least one of the choices as being the Correct choice for the question. the test must be set to Show per question feedback from each question. Select this to display feedback immediately to the user upon making this choice. This field is enabled when you select Show feedback. Feedback is provided immediately or upon leaving the page. If the question is within a test. Use the list to select the feedback page. specify the text of the feedback message for this choice.

The page will be presented in a pop-up window to the user. the Feedback window opens. This field is enabled when you select Show feedback. This field is enabled when you select Show feedback. Select this to display feedback immediately to the user upon answering the question. Select this to specify the page for the feedback. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . specify the text of the feedback message. If the question is within a test. Click Finish. Select this to specify the page for the feedback.Show Feedback Select this to show feedback. The short answer question is added to your title. 2. The feedback will be presented as the feedback text in a message box or as a specified page in a pop-up window. Select this to show feedback. See also: Adding Questions 1. The feedback will be presented as the feedback text in a message box or as a specified page in a pop-up window. Use the list to select the feedback page. The text will be presented in a generic message box to the user. The essay question is added to your title. Feedback message Instead of showing a page to the user. the test must be set to Show per question feedback from each question. This enables the Feedback page list. This enables the Feedback page list. Click Finish. The page will be presented in a pop-up window to the user. Creating an essay question Once you have configured the properties within the Question Properties and Question windows. in order for the feedback to be displayed to the user. specify the text of the feedback message. Feedback is provided immediately or upon leaving the page. Complete the controls within the Feedback window as necessary: Maximum answer text length Show Feedback Specify the maximum length of the text answer in number of characters. in order for the feedback to be displayed to the user. Use the list to select the feedback page. The text will be presented in a generic message box to the user. See also: Setting a test's content properties Immediate feedback Show page for feedback Feedback message 2. the test must be set to Show per question feedback from each question. Instead of showing a page to the user. See also: Setting a test's content properties Immediate feedback Show page for feedback Select this to display feedback immediately to the user upon answering the question. Feedback is provided immediately or upon leaving the page. If the question is within a test.

This enables the Feedback page for correct answer list. The text will be presented in a generic message box to the user. See also: Adding Questions Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . specify the text of the correct answer feedback message. in order for the feedback to be displayed to the user.Creating a fill in the blank question Once you have configured the properties within the Question Properties and Question windows. separating the answers by using the Enter key. Complete the controls within the Feedback window as necessary: Maximum answer text length Possible Correct Answers Specify the maximum length of the text answer in number of characters. Feedback is provided immediately or upon leaving the page. will be sufficient to receive full credit for correctly answering this question. Select this to specify the page for incorrect answer feedback. The feedback will be presented as the feedback text in a message box or as a specified page in a pop-up window. Select this to show feedback. Type each answer within the space provided. Select this to specify the page for correct answer feedback. This field is enabled when you select Show feedback. This enables the Feedback page for incorrect answer list. The page will be presented in a pop-up window to the user. Creating a matching question Once you have configured the properties within the Question Properties and Question windows. Instead of showing a page to the user. specify the text of the incorrect answer feedback message. See also: Setting a test's content properties Immediate feedback Show page for correct answer feedback Feedback message for correct answer Show page for incorrect answer feedback Feedback message for incorrect answer Select this to display feedback immediately to the user upon answering the question. See also: Adding Questions 1. when supplied by the user. Use the list to select the feedback page. The words entered in this option will be checked in a case-insensitive manner to the answer supplied by the user to determine the score on the question. Any of these answers. the Feedback window opens. Specify all possible correct answers to the question. If the question is within a test. The fill in the blank question is added to your title. Click Finish. Instead of showing a page to the user. The text will be presented in a generic message box to the user. the test must be set to Show per question feedback from each question. The page will be presented in a pop-up window to the user. Show Feedback 2. This can include common misspellings or additional appropriate correct answers. Use the list to select the feedback page. the Matching Pairs window opens.

specify the text of the correct answer feedback message. Feedback is provided immediately or upon leaving the page. If the question is within a test. Select this to show feedback. Selecting this enables the Image and Align image fields. Distractors are items that are not part of a matched pair. Specify the text of the choice as it should be presented to the user in the left column of the question. Click Next. 3. Feedback can be provided for a correct answer. The Pair X of XX window opens for each matching choice. Instead of showing a page to the user. Complete the controls as follows: Matching Pair Type Left Column Select the type of Matching Pair as either Matching Pair. all pairs matched correctly. Select this to specify the page for correct answer feedback. Select optional images to display. This field is enabled when you select Show feedback. This enables the Feedback page for correct answer list.1. or for an incorrect answer. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . otherwise. The page will be presented in a pop-up window to the user. Select this to give the user credit for each matching pair that he or she correctly identifies. the test must be set to Show per question feedback from each question. depending on which type of distractor is selected. Use the list to select the feedback page. or Right Column Distractor. See also: Setting a test's content properties Immediate feedback Show page for correct answer feedback Feedback message for correct answer Show page for incorrect answer feedback Feedback message for incorrect answer Select this to display feedback immediately to the user upon answering the question. enter the text of the choice as it should be presented to the student in both the left and right column of the question. 2. Left Column Distractor. Use the list to select the feedback page. the user will be required to get all the matching pairs correct to receive credit for answering the question correctly. This enables the Feedback page for incorrect answer list. Click Show image with item to show an image with the matching item. For each matching pair. but are available as a possible choice to the user. in order for the feedback to be displayed to the user. specify the text of the incorrect answer feedback message. For a distractor. only one column will need to be filled in. Complete the controls within the Matching Pairs window as necessary: Number of matching pairs Number of distractors Grade each matching pair as a separate question Show Feedback Specify the total number of matching pairs that will be presented to the student. The page will be presented in a pop-up window to the user. Specify the total number of distractors. The feedback will be presented as the feedback text in a message box or as a specified page in a pop-up window. Instead of showing a page to the user. The text will be presented in a generic message box to the user. one or more pairs matched incorrectly. Select this to specify the page for incorrect answer feedback. They are used to add complexity to a matching question. The text will be presented in a generic message box to the user.

. Creating a drag and drop question Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . 3-3. Lectora will automatically scramble the options in the right-hand column. Once the user selects a matching item from the opposite column. The text or image selected should be the corresponding match to the information entered for the left column. Select this to launch your media library to select an image. You can also manually rearrange the pairs on the page as appropriate. The resulting page will represent how the question will appear to the users when they encounter the question.Use the Image list to select a previously imported image to display with the choice. 2-2. one object can only be matched to a single. That is. Lectora will automatically draw a line between the two selected items once the user has made both selections for a matching pair. Use the Image list to select a previously imported image to display with the choice.. Click Show image with item to show an image with the matching item. Then click Finish. Instead. a generic result of 1-1. Select this to launch your media library to select an image. See also: Working with the Media Library Organizer Use the Align image list to specify where the image should appear in relation to the choice text. is displayed. See also: Working with the Media Library Organizer Use the Align image list to specify where the image should appear in relation to the choice text. The user will see a blue highlight around their first selected item in one column. click on the Import button to navigate and select the image you want to associate with the choice. See also: Moving and Resizing Objects The user will always know which item is selected in one column as the matching item in the opposite column is being selected. Right Column Specify the text of the choice as it should be presented to the student in the right column of the question. 4. different object. Alternatively. Lectora will maintain a one-toone relationship for matching pairs. Test results for matching questions do not reflect the actual matching pairs the user has selected within the test. You can also click on the arrow within the Import button to choose from the following: From File Media Library Select this to navigate and select an image. You can also click on the arrow within the Import button to choose from the following: From File Media Library Select this to navigate and select an image. Click Next to continue through the remaining choices for the question. The matching question is added to your title. Selecting this enables the Image and Align image fields. another blue highlight will briefly appear around that item. Alternatively. click on the Import button to navigate and select the image you want to associate with the choice.

Alternatively. This field is enabled when you select Show feedback. This enables the Feedback page for incorrect answer list.Once you have configured the properties within the Question Properties and Question windows. all dragged items placed correctly. Click Next button. Show page for correct answer feedback Feedback message for correct answer Show page for incorrect answer feedback Feedback message for incorrect answer Select this to specify the page for correct answer feedback. Specify the total number of distractors. the Drag Items window opens. The page will be presented in a pop-up window to the user. Show Feedback Select this to show feedback. If the question is within a test. the user will be required to drag all question the items to their correct locations to get credit for answering the question correctly. You can also click on the arrow within the Import Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . See also: Setting a test's content properties Immediate feedback Select this to display feedback immediately to the user upon answering the question. Feedback can be provided for a correct answer. For each drag item. This enables the Feedback page for correct answer list. Use the list to select the feedback page. A Drop Point Distractor is an area within the drop image. at least one dragged item placed incorrectly. Use the list to select the feedback page. Instead of showing a page to the user. A Drag Item Distractor is a dragable item (text or image) with no correct point within the drop image. but is not one of the correct locations. Grade each dragged Select this to give the user credit for each dragged item that he or she drags to the item as a separate correct location on the destination image. The page will be presented in a pop-up window to the user. The feedback will be presented as the feedback text in a message box or as a specified page in a pop-up window. otherwise. specify the text of the correct answer feedback message. Feedback is provided immediately or upon leaving the page. Instead of showing a page to the user. Complete the controls within the Drag Items window as necessary: Number of drag/ drop pairs Number of distractors Specify the total number of pairs that will be presented to the user. which can accept a drag item. Complete the controls as follows: Drag/Drop Item Type Drag Item Text Drag Image Select the type of Drag/Drop item as either Drag/Drop Pair. Select this to specify the page for incorrect answer feedback. specify the text of the incorrect answer feedback message. click on the Import button to navigate and select the drag image. They are used to add complexity to a drag and drop question. Specify an optional label that will appear next to the drag item in the question. Drag Item Distractor. in order for the feedback to be displayed to the user. See also: Adding Questions 1. The text will be presented in a generic message box to the user. Select a previously imported image for the drag image. The text will be presented in a generic message box to the user. or for an incorrect answer. 2. the test must be set to Show per question feedback from each question. The Drag X of XX window opens for each drag item. or Drop Point Distractor. 3. enter the text and select the image to display.

Creating a hot spot question Once you have configured the properties within the Question Properties and Question windows.button to choose from the following: From File Media Library Select this to navigate and select an image. This enables the Feedback page for correct answer list. the Choices window opens. All of the designated correct answers must be selected for the question to be considered correct. click the Place drop point button. the user will be required to select all correct answers to receive credit for answering the question correctly. Select this to create a hot spot question with multiple answers. See also: Working with the Media Library Organizer Align image Place drop point Use the list to specify where the image should appear in relation to the text. 4. you can move the image using the arrow buttons and keys. the test must be set to Show per question feedback from each question. otherwise. See also: Setting a test's content properties Immediate feedback Show page for correct answer feedback Select this to display feedback immediately to the user upon answering the question. in order for the feedback to be displayed to the user. Click Next to continue through the remaining choices for the question. Select this to specify the page for the correct answer feedback. If the question is within a test. The feedback on this screen is valid only if the multiple answer option is used. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Select this to give the user credit for each each selection that he or she correctly identifies. The window displays a small representation of the drop image with a green rectangle representing the current drag choice and its location on the drop image. This option is only available if the correct answer requires more than one choice. Then click Finish. Select this to launch your media library to select an image. This field is enabled when you select Show feedback for multiple choice answer. Use the window to move the drag image over the drop image to define the location where the drag image must reside to get credit for answering that part of the question correctly. and will override the individual feedback on the following windows. To set the location where the drag image is to reside. Once the drag image is placed correctly on the drop image. This launches the Place drag item window. In addition to moving the image with your mouse. Complete the controls within the Choices window as necessary: Number of hot spots Correct answer requires more than one choice Grade each choice item as a separate question Show feedback for multiple choice answer Specify the number of choices to include in the question. click the OK button to return to the drag choice window. See also: Adding Questions 1. Use the list to select the feedback page. The page will be presented in a pop-up window to the user. The drag and drop question is added to your title.

Feedback is provided immediately or upon leaving the page. The hot spot question is added to your title. The text will be presented in a generic message box to the user. See also: Setting a test's content properties Immediate feedback Select this to display feedback immediately to the user upon selecting this choice. Specifying Question Properties Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . To set the location where the choice is to reside. The page will be presented in a pop-up window to the user. The Choice X of XX window opens for each choice. In addition to moving the radio button with the mouse. place the hotspot on the image as desired. The text will be presented in a generic message box to the user. Click Next to continue through the remaining choices for the question. For each choice. Click Finish. click the Place hot spot button. Select this to specify the page for the incorrect answer feedback. You must select at least one of the choices as being the Correct choice for the question. Complete the controls as follows: Correct Choice Select this if this choice is correct. The feedback will be presented as the feedback text in a message box or as a specified page in a pop-up window. The page will be presented in a pop-up window to the user. Once the hot spot radio button is placed correctly on the image. This enables the Feedback page list.Feedback for correct multiple choice answer Show page for incorrect answer feedback Feedback for incorrect multiple choice answer Instead of showing a page to the user. If the question is within a test. Use the list to select the feedback page. 2. The window displays a small representation of the hot spot radio button with a green square representing the current choice and its location on the hot spot image. you can move the radio button using the arrow buttons and keys. Use the window to move the hot spot radio button over the hot spot image to define the location. Use the list to select the feedback page. Instead of showing a page to the user. Feedback message Specify the text of the feedback message. The text will be presented in a generic message box to the user. This field is enabled when you select Show feedback. click the OK button to return to the hot spot choice screen. in order for the feedback to be displayed to the user. 3. This launches the Place Hot Spot window. 4. This enables the Feedback page for incorrect answer list. the test must be set to Show per question feedback from each question. Click Next. specify the text of the feedback message for the incorrect choice. specify the text of the feedback message for the correct choice. Show page for feedback Place hot spot Select this to specify the page for feedback. Show feedback Select this to show feedback.

Double-click the question or survey question graphic of the question you want to change in the Title Explorer. Click the General tab if the Question Properties window is not already opened to this tab. This name must be unique to all existing variable names. Click the General tab if the Question Properties window is not already opened to this tab. 3. 2. 3. Double-click the question or survey question graphic of the question you want to change in the Title Explorer. and edit other properties of your question. Click the General tab if the Question Properties window is not already opened to this tab. Use the controls on the Question Properties window to complete the following tasks: General tab Transitions tab Change the name of a question   Specify a question's transitions  Change the associated variable name of a question  Edit the question  Retain the question answer between sessions  Enable author control on a question Changing the name of a question To change the name of question: 1. Variable names cannot contain spaces or special characters. Change the Question Type or question Weight as necessary. Specify the new name of the question in the Question Name field. The variable associated with the question is used to store the user's answer to the corresponding question. 3. The variable will be used to store the user’s answer to the question. 2. Click on the Edit button. double-click the question graphic See also: Adding Questions of the question in the Title Explorer.To access the properties of a question. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . It can be accessed from anywhere in the title. Click OK. Specify the associated variable name in the Associated Variable Name field. Changing the associated variable name of a question You can change the name of the variable associated with a question. To edit a question: 1. Editing a question You can change the possible answers. See also: Actions and Variables To change the associated variable name of question: 1. Lectora will automatically increment the numeric value in the variable name to correspond with the number of questions that have been created within the title. 2. Double-click the question graphic of the question you want to edit in the Title Explorer. alter the question text. The Edit a Question Window opens. It is best to keep the default naming convention (Question_####) for question variables. Click OK.

Image Drop image Hot Spot image Select a previously imported image to display with the question text. This question type cannot be automatically graded by the testing module and therefore cannot be used in titles within AICC or SCORM learning management systems. A question that requires the user to drag source objects such as text or images to defined targets within a larger. Points are used to calculate the percentage weight of each question and will be factored into the overall test score. Alter the following properties as appropriate: Property Question Description Specify the text of the question. all the questions within a test are of equal value. one or more possible correct answers are possible. Fill in the Blank Matching Drag and Drop Hot Spot Question Weight The question weight is irrelevant if the question is not within a test. If points are assigned to each question. Short Answer A question in which the user supplies a short (typically less than 80 characters) answer. Select the weight of the test question. Click Next. This question type cannot be automatically graded by the testing module and therefore cannot be used in titles within AICC or SCORM learning management systems. Choose from one of the following question types: True/False Multiple Choice A question with one correct answer out of two possibilities. use the list or Import button to specify the destination image upon which the All Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . A question with one or more possible correct answers and multiple possibilities. For Drag and Drop and Hot Spot questions. the test score. work area image. without changing this option. Lectora will use the sum of test points to calculate question weight and further. A question in which the user supplies a short answer that is compared to a list of known correct answers. 4. The Question window opens. Essay A question in which the user supplies a long (typically more than 80 characters) answer. Therefore. The user must match items in the left column with items in the right column to answer the question. Question Type All All Show Select this to show an image image with with the question. A question with a column of items on the left-hand side and a column of scrambled items on the right-hand side. Set the Question Weight to 0 for any short answer or essay questions that are included in a graded test. A question with a visual multiple-choice set used to identify areas of an image. Selecting question this enables the Image and Align image lists. The default weight of each question is 1.Type Select the question type from the list.

Click OK. The master Author Control password must first be set within Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . click Next to proceed through the question windows and finally click Finish.question’s drag objects or hot spot buttons will be placed. Click the General tab if the Question Properties window is not already opened to this tab. Edit the question as necessary. You can also click on the arrow within the Import button to choose from the following: Fro Select this to navigate m and select an image. Double-click the question or survey question graphic of the question you want to change in the Title Explorer. For additional information. Click the Import button to navigate and select the image you want to associate with the question. You will be presented with one or more additional windows that are based on the type of question you selected. All 5. the question will retain any answer that was previously supplied. additional authors will not be able to edit the question unless they have the master Author Control password. Select the Retain question answer between sessions check box. 2. Enabling author control on a question Protect the question by enabling Author Control. If the user returns to the question in a future session. Click Next. 3. Retaining the question answer between sessions You can enable Lectora to retain question answers after the Lectora session is closed. select the type of question you are adding: o True or False o Multiple Choice o Short Answer o Essay o Fill in the Blank o Matching o Drag and Drop o Hot Spot 6. File Med Select this to launch ia your media library to Libr select an image. With Author Control enabled. ary See also: Working with the Media Library Organizer Align image Specify where the image should appear in relation to the question text. To retain the question answer between sessions: 1.

2. Specify the following information: Transition In Transition (In) Type Select this to enable a transition when displaying the question as the page opens or the object is made visible with an action. Transitions will produce a visual effect as the question appears and disappears. Double-click the question or survey question graphic of the question you want to change in the Title Explorer. To specify the transition: 1. Click the General tab if the Question Properties window is not already opened to this tab. Select the Author Control check box. Click OK. You can select from over 20 different transitions. Delay before transition Slow > Fast Transition Out Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Use the slider to specify the speed at which the transition should occur.the Title Properties. Double-click the question Click the Transitions tab. There is a Slow to Fast slider to determine the speed at which the transition takes place. Select a transition type as one of the following:  Box In  Split out Horizontal  Box Out  Strips Down left  Circle In  Strips Up left  Circle Out  Strips Downright Wipe Up   Strips Upright  Wipe Down  Horizontal Bars  Wipe Right  Vertical Bars  Wipe Left  Fly Top Blinds Vertical   Fly Top right  Blinds Horizontal  Fly Right  Checker Across  Fly Bottom right  Checker Down  Fly Bottom Dissolve   Fly Bottom left  Split in Vertical  Fly Left  Split out Vertical  Fly Top left  Split in Horizontal  Random Effect Specify the delay in seconds before starting the transition. See also: Protecting your title with a password To enable author control on a question: 1. 2. Select between 0 and 600 seconds. or survey question graphic of the question you want to change in the Title Explorer. Select this to enable a transition when hiding the question as the page closes or the object is hidden with an action. Specifying a question's transitions You can specify how a question is displayed on a page. 3.

the following topics are covered:  About Surveys  Creating a Survey  Adding Sections to a Survey About surveys Surveys are only slightly different from tests. Like a test. In this chapter. See also: Understanding the Book Metaphor Creating a survey Creating a survey is similar to creating a chapter. and will contain the questions that comprise the survey. In the Title Explorer. and survey questions can then be added to the pages of the survey. Adding Surveys Add surveys to obtain feedback from your users about your title. They are different in that surveys are not graded and there are no correct answers or feedback for survey questions. Click OK. You can process results and submit them to learning management systems. Use sections to organize pages within a survey. email addresses or custom databases. select the page after which you want the survey to appear and do one of the following: o From the Add menu. surveys can contain sections and pages. A Page 1 and a Last survey page will be added by default to the survey. a survey is displayed in the Title Explorer as a new chapter following the currently selected chapter. select Survey Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 .Transition (Out) Type Select a transition type as one of the following:  Box In  Split out Horizontal  Box Out  Strips Down left Circle In   Strips Up left  Circle Out  Strips Downright  Wipe Up  Strips Upright  Wipe Down  Horizontal Bars Wipe Right   Vertical Bars  Wipe Left  Fly Top  Blinds Vertical  Fly Top right  Blinds Horizontal  Fly Right Checker Across   Fly Bottom right  Checker Down  Fly Bottom  Dissolve  Fly Bottom left  Split in Vertical  Fly Left Split out Vertical   Fly Top left  Split in Horizontal  Random Effect Specify the delay in seconds before starting the transition. Additional pages can be inserted. Follow these steps to create a survey: 1. The pages are the physical pages that your users will see. When added to your title. Use the slider to specify the speed at which the transition should occur. Delay before transition Slow > Fast 3. Select between 0 and 600 seconds.

the questions will retain between sessions any answers that were previously supplied. Setting survey result properties You can specify if survey results should be submitted to an email address or CGI script. users will not be able to navigate off of the current page. See also: Adding Sections to a Survey Adding Survey Questions Setting a survey's content properties You can specify the survey content properties. if they have not answered the question(s) on that page. The Survey Properties window 2. To set survey result properties: Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Click OK. If the student returns to the survey in a future session. To set a survey's content properties: 1. Use the tabs on the Survey Properties window to complete these tasks: General tab Results tab  Change the name of a survey  Set survey result properties Response tab  Change a survey's page size and alignment  Set CGI survey response properties  Remove a survey from the table of contents When Completed tab  Enable author control for a survey  Set the resulting action when a survey is completed  Add standard navigation to a survey When Canceled tab  Add automatic page numbering to a survey  Set the resulting action when a survey is canceled Background tab Transition tab  Change a survey's background properties  Set a survey's transition properties  Change a survey's text properties Inherit tab  Specify a survey's inheritance properties Content tab  Set a survey's content properties When you have finished specifying survey properties. such as whether students must answer all questions and whether to retain survey question answers. 2. click OK to create the survey. Complete the controls on this tab as follows: Ensure that student answers all questions on the survey When enabled. Double-click the survey graphic opens. of the survey you want to change in the Title Explorer. 3. You can then divide your survey into sections or begin adding questions to survey pages. Click the Content tab.o Click the Add Survey toolbar graphic o Right-click and select New > Survey o Type Alt+6 on the Insert toolbar The Survey Properties window opens. Retain answers Select this to enable Lectora to retain the question answers after the Lectora session is to all questions closed.

1. on the computer from which they are accessing the published title. the email server must be configured to accept communications from the published title's location. Click the Results tab. The GET method can only support the submission of 256 characters of data. Survey and Form Results to CGI If this options is selected. The user’s name is submitted with the test results data. Email Survey Data Select this to enable the survey data to be emailed to the email address specified in the Email results to field. all defined Lectora variables will be included with the survey results data that is submitted. If enabled. See also: Setting CGI test/survey response properties Prompt the student for their name to identify the survey Include all variable values in submission If enabled. Submit Survey Data to CGI program Select this to submit the survey data to the CGI application specified in the Submit results to field. Double-click the survey graphic opens. such as Microsoft Outlook. Click the When Completed tab.) The use of this feature requires that each user have an email client. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . The default is Survey Results. users are prompted at the beginning of the survey to enter their name. Use the Method list to select whether the submission is done using a POST or GET. use the POST method instead. The name of each variable and its value at the time of submission is sent. In addition. To submit the emailed results in XML format. Show the student If enabled. Double-click the survey graphic of the survey you want to change in the Title Explorer. (Separate multiple email addresses with a semicolon. The Survey Properties window opens. of the survey you want to change in the Title Explorer. See also: Submitting Test. Survey data are not automatically sent to learning management systems. a success message will be presented to the user upon successful submission a success dialog if of the survey results. Complete the controls on this tab as follows: Survey Data Submission Use this section to specify whether survey data are to be submitted using email or a CGI program. Specify the subject line in Email Subject Line. so results can be successfully submitted. Setting the resulting action when a survey is completed You can specify the action to take when the survey is completed. select Submit in XML format. If you have a large survey or are submitting a large amount of variable data. To set the resulting action when a user completes a survey: 1. submission is successful 3. the controls within the Response tab of the Survey Properties window are enabled. Click OK. The Survey Properties window 2.

a section graphic appears in the Title Explorer in the survey you selected. Select the appropriate Target from the list. Configure the survey section properties. 2. survey section or page to which you want to add a survey question and do one of the following: o From the Add menu. See also: Selecting an action 3. and can only contain pages. survey sections cannot contain subsections. Survey questions on pages contained in a survey will be submitted using the survey results submission properties specified. Adding sections to a survey Survey sections can be used to organize the pages in a survey. To add a section to a survey. Setting the resulting action when a survey is canceled You can specify the action to take when the survey is canceled.2. See also: Working with Sections Adding Survey Questions Survey questions are only slightly different from other questions in Lectora. See also: Setting survey result properties Follow these steps to add a survey question to your title: 1. The Survey Properties window opens. See also: Selecting an action 3. follow these steps: 1. To set the resulting action when a user cancels a survey: 1. Click OK. 3. Click the When Canceled tab. In the Title Explorer. The Section Properties window opens. In the Title Explorer. select the survey. Double-click the section graphic representing the Survey Section in the Title Explorer. select Survey Question Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . They are different in that they do not contain correct or incorrect answers and they do not issue feedback. whether it is inside or outside of a survey. Unlike regular chapter sections. 2. select Section o Select the Add Section toolbar graphic o Right-click and select New > Section o Type Ctrl+2 on the Insert toolbar When you add the new section. The only Action available is Go To. Double-click the survey graphic of the survey you want to change in the Title Explorer. Survey questions can be added to any page of your title. Click OK. Complete the controls within the Section Properties window as necessary. The only Action available is Go To. select the survey to which you want to add a new section and do one of the following: o From the Add menu. Select the appropriate Target from the list.

A question that asks users to rank a series of statements. Associated Specify the associated variable name for this question. A series of likert questions that asks users to specify their level of agreement according to a single statement.o Click the Add Survey Question toolbar graphic o Right-click and select New > Survey Question o Type Alt+8 The Survey Question Properties window opens. the answer provided previously by the student is retained. A question with one or more possible answers. Create new page for the question Retain question answer between sessions Author Control This option will automatically create a new page onto which the question will be added. A question that asks users to specify their level of agreement to a statement. 2. typically in order of importance. A question in which the user supplies a short (typically less than 80 characters) answer. the question will be added to the currently selected page. A question in which the user supplies a long (typically more than 80 characters) answer. The new page will be added after the currently selected page. the question will revert back to its default state of unanswered with every launch of the course. Select the survey question type from the list. With Author Control enabled. It may be accessed from anywhere in the title. Lectora will automatically increment the numeric value in the variable to correspond with the number of questions that have been created within the title. A question with a visual multiple-choice set used to identify areas of an image. one or more possible answers. presented in a table. See also: Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 Protecting your title with a password . This option causes the question answer to be retained after the Lectora session is closed. additional authors will not be able to edit the question unless they have the master Author Control password. It is best to keep the default naming convention (Question_####) for question variables. Choose from one of the following question types: True/False Multiple Choice Short Answer Essay Hot Spot Likert Likert Table Ordinal A question with two possible answers. The variable will be used to store the user’s answer to the Name question. Complete the controls on the window as follows: Name Type on the Insert toolbar Specify the name by which you will recognize this survey question. When the user returns to this question in a future session. This must be a new unique variable Variable that does not already exist. If this option is not selected. If this option is not selected.

All but Likert Table Likert Table Question Type All but Likert Table All but Hot Spot and Likert Table All but Likert Table Use this list to select the type of Likert question. The Survey Question window opens. See also: Working with the Media Organizer Align image Number of likert questions Likert Type Specify where the image should appear in relation to the question text. additional windows will open. Specify the number of questions to include in the likert table question. Click the Next button. If you do not want to show the corresponding text with the choices.3. Select this to launch your media library to select an image. Unimportant)  4 Choices (Very Important thru Very Unimportant)  5 Choices (Very Important thru Very Unimportant with Neutral)  Custom (Specify number of choices and choice’s label) If you select the Custom type. click on the Import button to navigate and select the image you want to associate with the question. prompting you for the number of choices and the text to display for each choice. Neither Agree nor Disagree. Select a previously imported image to display with the question text. 4. Disagree)  4 Choices (Strongly Agree thru Strongly Disagree)  5 Choices (Strongly Agree thru Strongly Disagree with Neither)  3 Choices (Important. Use this window to define how the question will appear to the user. You can also click on the arrow within the Import button to choose from the following: From File Media Library Select this to navigate and select an image. Selecting this enables the Image and Align image lists. Select from:  3 Choices (Agree. clear the Show text with choices check box. Alternatively. Likert and Likert Table Likert Style Select from one of the following Likert styles: Color Gradient Bar Likert and Likert Table Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Neutral. Select this to show an image with the question. Additionally choose whether to include a not applicable option by selecting Include N/A Choice. Define the following properties for the different question types: Property Question Show image with question Image Description Specify the text of the question.

The default text is True. Click the Next or Finish button. you will be presented with one or more additional windows that are based on the type of question you selected. select the type of survey question you are adding: o True / False o Multiple Choice o Short Answer o Essay o Hotspot o Likert o Likert Table o Ordinal 6. I agree or Yes). Creating a true or false survey question Once you have configured the properties within the Survey Question Properties and Survey Question windows. See also: Adding Survey Questions 1. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Complete the controls within the Results and Feedback window as necessary: True Choice Text Specify the text for the true choice (for example. If you clicked Next. the Results and Feedback window opens.Double Connector Bar Single Connector Bar No Connector Bar 5. For additional information. Complete the fields as directed and click Finish.

Creating a multiple choice survey question Once you have configured the properties within the Survey Question Properties and Survey Question windows. See also: Adding Survey Questions 1. Select a previously imported image to display with the choice text. Complete the controls within the Choices window as necessary: Number of choices Allow more than one choice Display question as Drop-down List / List Box Specify the number of choices to include in the question. 2. For each choice. (Click the Back button if you want to return to that window. Selecting this enables the Image and Align image fields. Click Finish. 4. complete the controls as follows: Choice Text Show image with choice Image Specify the text for this choice. Select this to launch your media library to select an image. Click the Next button. the Feedback Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Creating a short answer survey question Once you have configured the properties within the Survey Question Properties and Survey Question windows. The default text is False. I disagree or No). Select this to show an image with the choice.) 3. the Choices window opens. Click Next until you have finished configuring each choice and click Finish. See also: Working with the Media Library Organizer Align image Specify where the image should appear in relation to the choice text. You can also click on the arrow within the Import button to choose from the following: From File Media Library Select this to navigate and select an image. Select this to display the choices in a drop-down list (for questions with only one answer) or in a list box (for questions allowing the selection of multiple answers). The number of windows that follow is equal to the Number of choices that you defined on the Choices window. click on the Import button to navigate and select the image you want to associate with the choice. The true or false survey question is added to your title. 2. Alternatively. Select this to create a multiple choice question where users can select multiple answers. The Choice X of XX window is displayed for each choice.False Choice Text Specify the text for the false choice (for example. The multiple choice survey question is added to your title.

Specify the Maximum answer text length in number of characters. click the Place hot spot button. 3. The window displays a small representation of the hot spot radio button with a green square representing the current choice and its location on the hot spot image. Creating a hot spot survey question Once you have configured the properties within the Survey Question Properties and Survey Question windows. See also: Adding Survey Questions 1. click the OK button to return to the hot spot choice screen. See also: Adding Survey Questions 1. For each choice. you can move the radio button using the arrow buttons and keys. Click Finish. Within the Custom Likert Choices window. See also: Adding Survey Questions 1. the Choices window opens. The short answer survey question is added to your title. Use the window to move the hot spot radio button over the hot spot image to define the location. In addition to moving the radio button with the mouse. This launches the Place Hot Spot window. Click Next to continue through the remaining choices for the question. place the hotspot on the image as desired. The essay survey question is added to your title. the Custom Likert Choices window opens. Click Finish. Specify the Number of choices to include in the likert question. 4. Select this to create a hot spot question where users can select multiple answers. Click Next. the Feedback window opens. 2. The Choice X of XX window opens for each choice.window opens. Complete the controls within the Choices window as necessary: Number of hot spots Allow more than one choice Specify the number of choices to include in the question. See also: Adding Survey Questions 1. Creating an essay survey question Once you have configured the properties within the Survey Question Properties and Survey Question windows. Creating a Likert survey question Once you have configured the properties within the Survey Question Properties and Survey Question windows and you have chosen to specify your own custom choices for the Likert Type. Specify the Maximum answer text length in number of characters. Click Finish. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . 2. To set the location where the choice is to reside. Once the hot spot radio button is placed correctly on the image. 2. The hot spot survey question is added to your title.

Click Next until you have finished configuring each choice and click Finish. Specify the Number of choices to include in the Likert question. See also: Adding Survey Questions If you have chosen to specify custom choices for the Likert Type: 1. complete the following: 1. Click the Next button. Selecting this enables the Image and Align image fields. complete the controls as follows: Rankable item Show image with choice Specify the text for this rankable item. The number of windows that follow is equal to the Number of rankable items that you defined on the Items window.) 3. If you haven't chosen to specify custom choices for the Likert Type. See also: Adding Survey Questions 1. Specify the Question text. Specify the Number of rankable items. the Likert Question X of XX window is displayed for each question included in the Likert table. (Click the Back button if you want to return to that window. specify the Choice Text. The number of questions is specified in the Survey Question window. Click the Next button. Select this to show an image with the item. The Choice X of XX window is displayed for each choice. The number of windows that follow is equal to the Number of choices that you defined on the Choices window. For each Likert question. For each choice. For each rankable item.2. The Likert table survey question is added to your title. 3. Creating an ordinal survey question Once you have configured the properties within the Survey Question Properties and Survey Question windows. Click Next until you have finished configuring each choice.) 3. 2. The Rankable Item X of XX window is displayed for each item. For each choice. (Click the Back button if you want to return to that window. 4. This is the number of statements that will be ranked in order of importance. Click Next until you have finished configuring each question and click Finish. 2. specify the Choice Text. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Within the Custom Likert Choices window. 4. Click the Next button. or have already configured your custom choices. 2. the Items window opens. The custom Likert survey question is added to your title. The Choice X of XX window is displayed for each choice. Creating a Likert table survey question Once you have configured the properties within the Survey Question Properties and Survey Question windows the resulting windows differ based upon whether or not you have chosen to specify your own custom choices for the Likert Type.

To edit a question: 1. You can also click on the arrow within the Import button to choose from the following: From File Media Library Select this to navigate and select an image. See also: Adding Survey Questions of the survey question in the Title Use the controls on the Survey Question Properties window to complete the following tasks: General tab Transitions tab  Change the name of a survey question  Specify a question's transitions Change the associated variable name of a survey question   Edit the survey question  Retain the survey question answer between sessions  Enable author control on a survey question Editing a survey question You can change the possible answers. A question with a visual multiple-choice set used to identify areas of an image. The ordinal survey question is added to your title. Specifying Survey Question Properties To access the properties of a survey question. alter the question text. Double-click the survey question graphic of the survey question you want to edit in the Title Explorer. The Edit a Survey Question Window opens. double-click the survey question graphic Explorer. and edit other properties of your question. Select this to launch your media library to select an image. A question with one or more possible answers. click on the Import button to navigate and select the image you want to associate with the item. See also: Working with the Media Library Organizer Align image Specify where the image should appear in relation to the choice text. 3. 2. A question in which the user supplies a short (typically less than 80 characters) answer. Change the Question Type as necessary by selecting one of the following: True/False Multiple Choice Short Answer Essay Hot Spot A question with two possible answers. Click on the Edit button. Click Next until you have finished configuring each rankable item and click Finish. Click the General tab if the Question Properties window is not already opened to this tab. one or more Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . A question in which the user supplies a long (typically more than 80 characters) answer. 4.Image Select a previously imported image to display with the rankable item text. Alternatively.

typically in order of importance. Unimportant)  4 Choices (Very Important thru Very Unimportant)  5 Choices (Very Important thru Very Unimportant with Neutral)  Custom (Specify number of choices and choice’s label) If you select the Custom type. Select a previously imported image to display with the question text. Click Next. Likert Likert Table A question that asks users to specify their level of agreement to a statement. Neutral. 4. Select from:  3 Choices (Agree. Additionally choose whether to include a not applicable option by selecting Include N/A Choice. Alternatively. additional windows will open. You can also click on the arrow within the Import button to choose from the following: From File Media Library Select this to navigate and select an image. prompting you for the number of choices and the text to display for each choice. Use this window to change how the question will appear to the user. Selecting this enables the Image and Align image lists. Likert and Likert Table Likert Style Select from one of the following Likert styles: Color Gradient Bar Likert and Likert Table Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . All but Likert Table Likert Table Question Type All but Likert Table All but Hot Spot and Likert Table All but Likert Table Use this list to select the type of Likert question. A series of likert questions that asks users to specify their level of agreement according to a single statement.possible answers. Define the following properties for the different question types: Property Question Show image with question Image Description Specify the text of the question. presented in a table. Neither Agree nor Disagree. See also: Working with the Media Library Organizer Align image Specify where the image should appear in relation to the question text. Ordinal A question that asks users to rank a series of statements. clear the Show text with choices check box. If you do not want to show the corresponding text with the choices. Disagree)  4 Choices (Strongly Agree thru Strongly Disagree)  5 Choices (Strongly Agree thru Strongly Disagree with Neither)  3 Choices (Important. Select this to show an image with the question. click on the Import button to navigate and select the image you want to associate with the question. Select this to launch your media library to select an image. Number of likert questions Likert Type Specify the number of questions to include in the likert table question.

a test timer appears within your Title Explorer. click Next to proceed through the question windows and finally click Finish. select the type of question you are adding: o True or False o Multiple Choice o Short Answer o Essay o Hot Spot o Likert o Likert Table o Ordinal 6. For additional information.Double Connector Bar Single Connector Bar No Connector Bar 5. Edit the survey question as necessary. you can complete the following: General tab  Change the name of a test timer  Make a test timer initially invisible  Place a test timer on the top layer  Lock the size and position of a test timer Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 Position and Size tab  Specify a test timer's position and size Font and Color tab  Specifying the font and color of a test timer Transitions tab  Specify a test timer's transitions . The test timer displays the remaining time left within the test. Working with Test Timers When you specify that your test is a timed test. Within the properties of the test timer. Click Next. You will be presented with one or more additional windows that are based on the type of survey question you selected.

To create a new text style. Click the Font and Color tab. To specify the font and color of a test timer: 1. click on the Styles button. or select Custom to select a custom color from the Color wheel. Double-click on the test timer within your work area. select the eye-dropper tool to use a color from elsewhere within your title. 4. The Test Timer Properties window opens. Select the Background Color for your test timer from the list. Web-friendly fonts such as Arial. Select a predefined color. Create a form on a page and then add each form object into the form. check boxes and entry fields. Forms are logical objects because they have no physical representation on a page but can contain form objects. See also: Managing Text Styles Keep in mind that if you are publishing to HTML. Click OK. Verdana. Working with Forms Forms and form objects enable you to add user controls. Select the Text Style from the list. In this chapter.and Web-published titles. or they can be used inside of a form to be submitted outside of the published title. See also: Matching Colors Used within Your Title 3. 2. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Form objects can be used as standalone components to gather information from the user. or Tahoma. You can configure forms to send a collection of data using email or send and receive a collection of data using a CGI-submit/receive command for both CD. the following topics are covered:  About Forms  About Form Objects  Adding a Form  Changing Common Form Object Properties  Adding a Radio Button Group  Adding a Radio Button  Adding a Check Box  Adding an Entry Field  Adding a Drop-Down List  Adding a List Box About Forms Forms are special Lectora objects that provide a mechanism to communicate outside the Lectora title. It is best to use common. Enable author control on a test timer See also: Setting a test's content properties Specifying the font and color of a test timer You can specify the background color and font style used for a test timer. Lectora does not embed the fonts into the published work. The information contained in the form objects of a form can be submitted using email or a CGI program through a Submit Form action. such as radio buttons.

drop-down lists and list boxes are input objects that have physical representations that can be added to any form or page.See also: Selecting an action The following form objects can be created within a form:  Radio Button Groups  Radio Buttons  Check Boxes  Entry Fields  Drop-Down Lists  List Boxes About Form Objects Form objects are special Lectora objects that enable the user to provide information. Form objects have one additional attribute that other Lectora objects do not have. This variable can then be accessed from anywhere in the title. Additionally. They have an associated variable. When form objects are contained in a form. See also: Adding a Form Submitting Test. Survey and Form Results to CGI You can add the following form objects to your title:  Radio Button Groups  Radio Buttons  Check Boxes  Entry Fields  Drop-down Lists  List Boxes Radio buttons. select the page onto which you want to add a form and do one of the following: o From the Add menu. It is used to group a set of radio buttons together to enable only one radio button of the group to be selected at a time. multiple form objects can use the same variable. check boxes. Use the tabs on the Form Properties window to complete these tasks: General tab Parameters tab  Change the name of a form  Specify additional parameters to submit with a form Response tab  Retain form information between sessions Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . entry fields. 2. A radio button group is a logical input object that does not have a physical representation. This variable provides a place for Lectora to store the input data for the form object. Adding a Form Perform the following steps to add a form to your title: 1. In the Title Explorer. select Object > Form Object > Form on the Form toolbar o Click the Form toolbar graphic o Right-click and select New > Object > Form Object > Form o Type Ctrl+Alt+2 The Form Properties window opens. the data captured by the form objects can be submitted to an email address or a specified CGI program. Form objects can be used within a form or by themselves.

. Select the Retain values of all form elements between sessions check box. To retain form information between sessions: 1. To submit the emailed results in XML format.Enable author control for a form  Set CGI form response properties Transition tab Set form submission properties  Specifying a form's transitions On Select/Change tab  Execute an action when a form element is used Once you have created a form. Retaining form information between sessions You can choose to retain the information captured through form elements after the Lectora session is closed. In addition. Setting form submission properties You can specify if form results should be submitted to an email address or CGI script. 2. In the Name field. Click OK. If this option is not selected. you can populate it with form objects. If the user returns to the form in a future session. Specify the subject line in Email Subject Line. Click the General tab if the Form Properties window is not already opened to this tab. the values from the previous session will be loaded into the form elements. the email server must be configured to accept communications from the published title's location. The Form Properties window opens. The default is Form Submit. Form results are not automatically sent to learning management systems. Click the General tab if the Form Properties window is not already opened to this tab. See also: About Form Objects   Changing the name of a form To change the name of a form: 1. the form element objects will be loaded with their initial values for each new Lectora session. Select this to enable the form results to be emailed to the email address specified in the Email results to field. select Submit in XML format. Click the General tab if the Form Properties window is not already opened to this tab. To set form submission properties: 1. Double-click the form graphic of the form you want to change in the Title Explorer. Double-click the form graphic of the form you want to change in the Title Explorer. The Form Properties window opens. 2. specify the new name as you want it to appear in the Title Explorer. on the computer from which they are accessing the published title. so results can be successfully submitted. Click OK. (Separate multiple email addresses with a semicolon.) The use of this feature requires that each user have an email client. Submit form Select this to submit the survey results to the CGI application specified in the Submit results Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Double-click the form graphic of the form you want to change in the Title Explorer. 3. 2. such as Microsoft Outlook. The Form Properties window opens. 3. Complete the controls on this tab as follows: Form Submission Email form Use this section to specify whether form results are to be submitted using email or a CGI program.

Enabling author control on a form Protect the form by enabling Author Control. With Author Control enabled. or types in an entry field within the form. The GET method can only support the submission of 256 characters of data. Survey and Form Results to CGI If this options is selected. Use the Method list to select whether the submission is done using a POST or GET. 3. use the POST method instead. all defined Lectora variables will be included with the form data that is submitted. The Form Properties window opens. Click the General tab if the Form Properties window is not already opened to this tab. The Form Properties window opens. uses a drop-down list or list box within the form.to CGI program to field. Click OK. Click OK. additional authors will not be able to edit the form or any of the form elements within the form unless they have the master Author Control password. a success message will be presented to the user upon successful submission of the student a form data. Double-click the form graphic of the form you want to change in the Title Explorer. 2. See also: Submitting Test. Executing an action when a form element is used You can specify the action to take when the user selects or changes the form data. The master Author Control password must first be set within the Title Properties. See also: Protecting your title with a password To enable author control on a form: 1. Show the If enabled. See also: Setting CGI form response properties Include all variable values in form submission If enabled. the controls within the Response tab of the Form Properties window are enabled. Double-click the form graphic of the form you want to change in the Title Explorer. If you have a large test or are submitting a large amount of variable data. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . The name of each variable and its value at the time of submission is sent. See also: About Actions To execute an action when a form control is used: 1. success dialog if submission is successful 3. When this option is enabled. Click the On Select/Change tab. Select the Author Control check box. the action specified will execute when a user selects any of the radio buttons or check boxes within the form.

Use the Variable to receive response drop-down list to select the variable into which you want to store the response. The Parameter Entry window opens. click the New Variable button to create a new variable in which to store the CGI response. See also: Selecting an action's target 3. the name/value pairs are submitted as the input for a POST submit or as part of the URL specification for a GET submit. See also: About variables Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . the CGI program can issue a response. Specifying additional parameters to submit with a form You can specify additional parameter data in the form of name/value pairs to be submitted with the form. Survey and Form Results to CGI To set CGI form response properties: 1. This data is communicated using an email or a submit command to a CGI program with the data being formatted as name/value pairs (for example. it is removed from the list. The response is stored as a text string in the specified variable. Setting CGI form response properties When submitting form data to a CGI program. 4. You can Edit or Remove existing parameters by selecting the parameter name or value within the list and clicking the corresponding button. Click OK. The Form Properties window opens. 2. For a CGI program. Specify additional information as necessary. Click the Parameters tab. Click the Response tab. See also: Submitting Test. Repeat steps 2 through 4 for each parameter you want to define. 2. the response is received and stored as a text string in the specified Lectora variable. Click OK. When you Edit an existing parameter. In an email.2. the name/value pairs are listed as one pair per line. To specify additional name/value pairs to be included in the form submission: 1. Use the Action list to select from the following actions: See also: Selecting an action The Target field is enabled when the action requires a target. Select Receive response from CGI submission. Click OK. You can specify whether you want to enable Lectora to receive a response from the CGI program. Double-click the form graphic of the form you want to change in the Title Explorer. Type the parameter Name and Value in the entry fields. Submitting parameters with form data is optional. Click the Add button. The Form Properties window opens. If enabled. 3. 5. Double-click the form graphic of the form you want to change in the Title Explorer. When you Remove a parameter. parameter name = parameter value). you can change the name or value of the parameter. Alternatively.

Select between 0 and 600 seconds. Select this to enable a transition when hiding the form as the page closes or the form is hidden with an action. Double-click the form graphic of the form you want to change in the Title Explorer. Transition (Out) Select a transition type as one of the following: Type  Box In  Split out Horizontal  Box Out  Strips Down left  Circle In  Strips Up left Circle Out   Strips Downright  Wipe Up  Strips Upright  Wipe Down  Horizontal Bars  Wipe Right  Vertical Bars Wipe Left   Fly Top Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Click OK. Click the Transitions tab. Specifying a form's transitions You can specify how all of the form objects within a form are displayed on a page. There is a Slow to Fast slider to determine the speed at which the transition takes place. You can select from over 20 different transitions. Select a transition type as one of the following:  Box In  Split out Horizontal                Delay before transition Slow > Fast Transition Out Box Out Circle In Circle Out Wipe Up Wipe Down Wipe Right Wipe Left Blinds Vertical Blinds Horizontal Checker Across Checker Down Dissolve Split in Vertical Split out Vertical Split in Horizontal                Strips Down left Strips Up left Strips Downright Strips Upright Horizontal Bars Vertical Bars Fly Top Fly Top right Fly Right Fly Bottom right Fly Bottom Fly Bottom left Fly Left Fly Top left Random Effect Specify the delay in seconds before starting the transition. 2.3. Use the slider to specify the speed at which the transition should occur. To specify the transition: 1. Transitions will produce a visual effect as the form objects appear and disappear. The Form Properties window opens. Specify the following information: Transition In Transition (In) Type Select this to enable a transition when displaying the form as the page opens or the form is made visible with an action.

Click OK. See also: Selecting an action To make a form object initially invisible: 1. they appear when users open the pages on which the form objects are located. That is. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . The following can be completed within most form object properties:  Change the name of a form object  Make a form object initially invisible  Place a form object on the top layer  Lock the size and position of a form object  Enable author control on a form object  Retain a form object's selection between sessions  Specify a form object's position and size  Specify a condition for submitting form object data  Display a conditional message  Specify a form object's transitions Changing the name of a form object To change the name of a form object: 1.        Delay before transition Slow > Fast 3. Double-click on the form object within your work area. 3. drop-down lists and so on) are the same. check boxes. Use the slider to specify the speed at which the transition should occur. Click the General tab if the (Form Object) Properties window is not already opened to this tab. You can initially hide a form object until an action has been executed to show the form object. form objects are set to be initially visible. Double-click on the form object within your work area. Click the General tab if the (Form Object) Properties window is not already opened to this tab. You can access these properties for individual form objects by double-clicking the form object or by selecting the object and pressing the Enter key. Changing Common Form Object Properties Many properties for form objects in Lectora (radio buttons. The (Form Object) Properties window opens. The (Form Object) Properties window opens. Making a form object initially invisible By default. 2. Specify the new name of the form object in the (Form Object) Name field. Click OK. Select between 0 and 600 seconds. Blinds Vertical Blinds Horizontal Checker Across Checker Down Dissolve Split in Vertical Split out Vertical Split in Horizontal         Fly Top right Fly Right Fly Bottom right Fly Bottom Fly Bottom left Fly Left Fly Top left Random Effect Specify the delay in seconds before starting the transition.

Click the General tab if the (Form Object) Properties window is not already opened to this tab. This preserves it from getting accidentally moved by you or by other authors working on your title. See also: Protecting your title with a password To enable author control on a form object: 1. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . The master Author Control password must first be set within the Title Properties. 2. 3. Double-click on the form object within your work area. See also: Layering Objects Locking the size and position of a form object You can lock the size and position of a form object. To force a form object to the top layer: 1. The top-most object listed on the page in the Title Explorer is on the bottom layer of the page. Select the Size/Position Locked check box. Lectora will refer to the ordering of the objects in the Title Explorer to determine which of the objects is on the top layer.2. Double-click on the form object within your work area. Click the General tab if the (Form Object) Properties window is not already opened to this tab. The (Form Object) Properties window opens. The (Form Object) Properties window opens. The object will be locked in size and position within Edit mode. See also: Locking and Unlocking Objects Enabling author control on a form object Protect the form object by enabling Author Control. Select the Author Control check box. You can also lock the size and position of the form object by right-clicking on the form object within the Title Explorer (or within your work area) and selecting Size/Position Locked from the right-click context menu. With Author Control enabled. 3. The (Form Object) Properties window opens. Click the General tab if the (Form Object) Properties window is not already opened to this tab. Clear the Initially Visible check box. This is useful when you have multiple objects layered on your page. Click OK. Click OK. additional authors will not be able to edit the form object unless they have the master Author Control password. To lock the position and size of a form object: 1. When the object is locked. Select the Always on Top check box. a check mark will appear to the left of the Size/Position Locked option within the menu. 3. Click OK. 2. If multiple objects are set to Always on Top. 2. Double-click on the form object within your work area. Placing a form object on the top layer You can force a form object to always be on the top layer of the page.

3. Specify the following information. you can specify a condition on form object data. Coordinate Y Specify the vertical distance of the form object relative to the top-left corner of the page. Coordinate Offset from right Offset from bottom Width Height Select this to change the reference point (from the right) from which the form object is placed. Select this to change the reference point (from the bottom) from which the form object is placed. a condition message should be specified so users can complete the form appropriately. X Specify the horizontal distance of the form object relative to the top-left corner of the page. Click OK. The (Form Object) Properties window opens. Double-click on the form object within your work area. Click OK. To specify the position and size of a form object: 1. Click the Position and Size tab. Retaining a form object's selection between sessions You can enable Lectora to retain user selections made with form objects after the Lectora session is closed. To retain the form object's selection between sessions: 1. All measurements are based on pixels. 3. Specify the width of the object. Double-click on the form object within your work area. Click the General tab if the (Form Object) Properties window is not already opened to this tab. and you intend on submitting the results of the form. Click OK. The (Form Object) Properties window opens.3. See also: Using the Status bar Moving and Resizing Objects Aligning and Positioning Objects Specifying a condition for submitting form object data If your form object is included in a form. You can also specify the position of your form object directly from the status bar. Click the Condition Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . If a condition is used. the form data will not be submitted unless the condition is met. 2. Double-click on the form object within your work area. See also: Displaying a conditional message To specify a condition for submitting for object data: 1. Specifying a form object's position and size You can directly set the position and size of a form object from within its properties. the form object will retain the previously supplied selection. Specify the height of the object. The (Form Object) Properties window opens. If the user returns to the form object in a future session. 2. Select the Retain value between sessions check box. When a condition is specified.

Click the Transitions tab. select whether All of the Following conditions or Any of the Following conditions should be true to execute the action specified on the On Select/Change tab. Select the Variable from the list. 2. The (Form Object) Properties window opens. Double-click on the form object within your work area. 3. Transitions will produce a visual effect as the form object appears and disappears. Use the additional fields to specify other variables and relationships. Select Allow form object to be submitted ONLY if the following is TRUE. Specifying a form object's transitions You can specify how a form object is displayed on a page. you can further display a message to the user when the conditions are not met. There is a Slow to Fast slider to determine the speed at which the transition takes place. Select a transition type as one of the following:  Box In  Split out Horizontal  Box Out  Strips Down left  Circle In  Strips Up left  Circle Out  Strips Downright Wipe Up   Strips Upright  Wipe Down  Horizontal Bars  Wipe Right  Vertical Bars  Wipe Left  Fly Top Blinds Vertical   Fly Top right  Blinds Horizontal  Fly Right  Checker Across  Fly Bottom right  Checker Down  Fly Bottom Dissolve   Fly Bottom left Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Click the Condition Message tab. See also: Making an action conditional 3. You can select from over 20 different transitions. This message notifies the user so they can complete the form appropriately. click the Multiple Conditions button. 2. Displaying a conditional message If you have specified a condition for submitting form object data. Click OK. Type the message you want to display to the user in the field provided. select a Relationship and enter a Value. 2. If multiple conditions are defined. To display a message when form object conditions are not met: 1. The (Form Object) Properties window opens. Double-click on the form object within your work area. To specify the transition: 1. To input multiple conditions. Specify the following information: Transition In Transition (In) Type Select this to enable a transition when displaying the form object as the page opens or the form object is made visible with an action. Conditions require the use of a variable. Click OK.tab.

Select between 0 and 600 seconds. Adding a Radio Button Group Radio button groups are logical objects because they have no physical representation on a page. Wipe Up Wipe Down Wipe Right Wipe Left Blinds Vertical Blinds Horizontal Checker Across Checker Down Dissolve Split in Vertical Split out Vertical Split in Horizontal             Strips Upright Horizontal Bars Vertical Bars Fly Top Fly Top right Fly Right Fly Bottom right Fly Bottom Fly Bottom left Fly Left Fly Top left Random Effect Specify the delay in seconds before starting the transition. Use the slider to specify the speed at which the transition should occur. Use the tabs on the Radio Group Properties window to complete these tasks: General tab Condition tab Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . the user will only be able to select one of the radio buttons contained within the group. 2. When a set of radio buttons is placed within a radio button group. Select between 0 and 600 seconds. Use the slider to specify the speed at which the transition should occur.   Delay before transition Slow > Fast Transition Out Transition (Out) Type Split in Vertical Split out Vertical Split in Horizontal    Fly Left Fly Top left Random Effect Specify the delay in seconds before starting the transition. Select this to enable a transition when hiding the form object as the page closes or the form object is hidden with an action. Select the form or page in the Title Explorer to which you want to add the radio button group and do one of the following: o From the Add menu. Radio button groups are used to group individual radio buttons. Click OK. To add a radio button group: 1. Select a transition type as one of the following:  Box In  Split out Horizontal Box Out   Strips Down left  Circle In  Strips Up left  Circle Out  Strips Downright             Delay before transition Slow > Fast 3. select Object > Form Object > Radio Button Group o Click the Radio Button Group toolbar graphic o Right-click and select New > Object > Form Object > Radio Button Group o Type Ctrl+Alt+3 The Radio Group Properties window opens.

Suppose the user selects 21-30. or change images. The Radio Group Properties window opens. Specify the associated variable name in the Associated Variable Name field. the Age_Range variable will take on the value of that radio button. Use the Action list to select from the following actions: Action Setting Cancel Test/ Survey Description This action cancels the target test or survey and causes the When Canceled/Failed action within the target test's or target survey's properties to execute. To change the associated variable name of a radio button group: 1. The variable can be accessed from anywhere in the title. The variable will be used to store the user’s selection within the radio button group. then when the user selects from the available radio buttons. Click the General tab if the Radio Group Properties window is not already opened to this tab. The name/value pair submitted from the published title using email or CGI is the radio button group's associated variable name and its value. 31-45. 21-30. Double-click on the radio button group graphic within your Title Explorer. video and other objects. Executing an action when a radio button group is used You can execute an action anytime a user makes a selection within a radio button group. If no selection is made. the variable remains empty (has no value). See also: Submitting Test. The action selected will execute when a user clicks on any of the radio buttons contained within the radio button group. This action can be used to change the contents of a text block to a specified variable value. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Click the On Select/Change tab. change the contents of questions. and Over 60. Click OK. audio. if the radio button group's associated variable name is Age_Range. 2. See also: Change Contents Setting the resulting action when a test is failed Setting the resulting action when a survey is canceled This action changes the contents of the object to which the action is applied and replaces it with the target object specified. 45-60. See also: About Actions To execute an action when a radio button group is used: 1. The Radio Group Properties window opens. Double-click on the radio button group graphic within your Title Explorer. Survey and Form Results to CGI 3. then Age_Range = 21-30. For example. and within it are 5 radio buttons with the options Under 21. 2.  Change the name of a radio button group Change the associated variable name of a radio button group  Retain the radio button group's selection between sessions  Enable author control on a radio button group On Select/Change tab  Execute an action when a radio button group is used  Specify a condition for submitting the radio button group data Condition Message tab  Display a message when the conditions for submitting radio button group data are not met Transition tab  Specifying a radio button group's transitions Changing the associated variable name of a radio button group The associated variable of a radio button group takes on the value specified for the radio button chosen by the user.

Display Message

This action can be used to display two different types of messages. You can display specified text in a generic message box or you can display one of your title's pages in a pop-up window. To display specified text in a generic message box, select Standard Message Window and specify the custom message. To display one of your title's pages in a pop-up window, select Custom Message Window and select the page you want to display. If the location selected is scrollable, you can also choose to automatically scroll to an object on the page. Select the object from the Scroll To list. If the content on the page fits within the viewing window without requiring a scrollbar, this setting has no effect. When the action is executed, it will display the page with the scroll point at the top of the window.

Exit Title/Close This action exits the title if it is executed from the main window presenting the title or closes the Window current window if it is executed from a secondary or pop-up window. Flash Command This action enables communications with a Flash animation and is only available if a Flash animation exists in the location to which you are adding the action. When you select this option, further specify the Flash command and additional information as necessary. See also: Go To Executing Flash commands

This action navigates to the target location specified. When you select this option, you can further specify if the target location should be opened in a separate window. See also: Executing Go To actions

Hide

This action causes the target object to become hidden if it is currently visible. When the target object is hidden, the selected transition (out) will be applied to the target object. See also: Specifying an object's transitions

Launch a Program/ Document

This action will launch the specified program or document. You can launch one of the additional files contained within your title, or you can specify a relative or fully qualified Web address of the file you want to launch. To display an additional file, select the Use Attached File check box and select the file from the Attached File list. If you have not yet added the additional file, click the Add File button to navigate and select the file you want to add. See also: Adding additional files to your title

To specify a relative or fully qualified Web address of the file you want to launch, specify the file's location in the Program/Document field. Mail To This action launches the user's email application and creates a new email to the address specified in the Email Address field. This action requires that each user have an email client, such as Microsoft Outlook, on the computer from which they are accessing the published title. In addition, the email server must be configured to accept communications from the published title's location, so the email can be successfully submitted. Modify Variable This action enables you to set or change the value of a variable. See also: Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 Modifying variable values

Move To

This action repositions the target object to a specified X Coordinate and Y Coordinate at the Animation Speed you select. You can directly specify the coordinates, specify random coordinates, or specify the value of an existing variable to use for either coordinate. To specify a random X or Y coordinate, enter RAND(min, max) in the X Coordinate or Y Coordinate field. The random number assigned will be greater than or equal to the min value specified and less than or equal to the max value specified. The random number generated will be used to reposition the object to the new X Coordinate or Y Coordinate. To specify the value of an existing variable to use for the X or Y coordinate, enter VAR(Variable_Name) in the X Coordinate or Y Coordinate field, where Variable_Name is the name of the variable whose value will be used to reposition the object to the new X Coordinate or Y Coordinate. Use the Animation Speed slider to select a speed from Slow to Fast.

Mute FLV Media None Pause Play

When executed, the action will stop the audio of all Flash media in the title. This action does nothing. This is the default action. This action causes the target media object such as a video or audio clip to pause, if it is currently playing. This action causes the target media object such as a video or audio clip to begin playing, if it is not already playing. This action can also be used to begin a timer progress bar. See also: Working with Progress Bars

Print Current Page Process Question

This action will launch the user's Print window, enabling the user to print the current page. This action processes the target question. Processing the question includes determining whether the answer is correct or incorrect and displaying the corresponding feedback (if any) defined within the question properties. See also: Adding Questions

Reset All Variables Reset Form

This action causes all the variables contained in the title (except for the read-only, reserved variables) to be reset to their initial or default values. This will reset all test results, questions, and form objects. This action causes all the form objects of the target form to be reset to their initial or default values.

Reset Question This action resets the target question. This will clear the question's answer if it was previously supplied, and reset the question back to its default, unanswered state. Reset Test/ Survey If the target is a test, this action causes the test score to be reset to 0, and will reset all of the questions contained within the test to their default, unanswered state. If the target test is randomized, the action will additionally cause the test pages to be re-randomized. If the target is a survey, this action will reset all of the survey questions contained within the survey to their default, unanswered state. Run Action Group This action starts the target action group (a group containing only actions). The actions contained within the action group will begin executing one-by-one, from top to bottom, as the actions are listed within the group in the Title Explorer.

Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010

See also: Set Progress

Grouping and Ungrouping Objects

This action sets the target custom progress bar to a specified Position. This position is relative to the Range specified within the target progress bar's properties. You can directly specify a position, specify a random position, or specify the value of an existing variable to use for the position. To specify a random position, enter RAND(min, max) in the Position field. The random number assigned will be greater than or equal to the min value specified and less than or equal to the max value specified. The random number generated will be used to specify the new Position of the progress bar. To specify the value of an existing variable to use for the position, enter VAR(Variable_Name) in the Position field, where Variable_Name is the name of the variable whose value will be used to specify the new Position of the progress bar. See also: Working with Progress Bars

Show

This action causes the target object to become visible if it is currently hidden. When the target object is shown, the selected transition (in) will be applied to the target object. See also: Specifying an object's transitions

Size To

This action resizes the target object to a specified Width and Height in pixels at the Animation Speed you select. You can directly specify a width and height in pixels, specify a random width or height, or specify the value of an existing variable to use for the width and height. You can also specify a percentage relative to the target object's current size. To specify a random width or height, enter RAND(min, max) in the Width or Height field. The random number assigned will be greater than or equal to the min value specified and less than or equal to the max value specified. The random number generated will be used to specify the new Width or Height of the object. To specify a percentage relative to the target object's current size, select the Use Percentage check box. Select the percentage from the Percentage list, or directly type a value into the field. To specify the value of an existing variable to use for the width, height, or percentage enter VAR(Variable_Name) in the Width, Height or Percentage field, where Variable_Name is the name of the variable whose value will be used to specify the new Width, Height or Percentage of the object. Use the Animation Speed slider to select a speed from Slow to Fast.

Step Progress

This action increments the target custom progress bar according to the specified Step Size within the target progress bar's properties. See also: Working with Progress Bars

Stop Submit Form

This action causes the target media object such as a video or audio clip to stop playing, if it is currently playing. This action submits the target form using the specified submission properties set for the target form. See also: Setting form submission properties

Submit Variable Values

This action submits the values of all defined variables to the relative or fully qualified Web address (typically a CGI script) specified in the Submit Address field.

Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010

You can also specify mailto:<email_address> in this field, where <email_address> is the email address of a recipient to which you want to submit the variable values. This action requires that each user have an email client, such as Microsoft Outlook, on the computer from which they are accessing the published title. In addition, the email server must be configured to accept communications from the published title's location, so the email can be successfully submitted. See also: Submit/ Process Test/ Survey Submitting Test, Survey and Form Results to CGI

If the target is a test, this action causes the test to be scored, results to be submitted, and the appropriate When Completed/Passed or When Canceled/Failed test actions to be executed. See also: Creating a test

If the target is a survey, this action causes the survey results to be submitted, and the appropriate When Completed or When Canceled survey actions to be executed. See also: Toggle Play Mode Toggle Visibility State Creating a survey

This action causes the target media object such as a video or audio clip to either start or stop playing, depending on whether it is currently stopped or currently playing. This action causes the target object to either become visible or hidden, depending on its current visibility state. When the target object is shown, the selected transition (in) will be applied to the target object. When the target object is hidden, the selected transition (out) will be applied to the target object. See also: Specifying an object's transitions

Ummute FLV Media

When executed, the action will play the audio of all Flash media in the title.

3. The Target field is enabled when the action requires a target. Specify additional information as necessary. 4. Click OK. See also:

Selecting an action Selecting an action's target

Adding a Radio Button
Radio buttons are input objects that enable users to select a specified option. Radio buttons can be added to any form or page. When radio buttons are contained within a radio button group, users will only be able to select one of the radio buttons. See also: Adding a Radio Button Group

You can customize the appearance of radio buttons within your title. Set the desired appearance of your radio buttons within your Lectora Preferences. To add a radio button: 1. Select the radio button group, form, or page in the Title Explorer to which you want to add the radio button and do one of the following: o From the Add menu, select Object > Form Object > Radio Button on the Form toolbar o Click the Radio Button toolbar graphic o Right-click and select New > Object > Form Object > Radio Button Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010

o Type Ctrl+Alt+4
The Radio Button Properties window opens. 2. Use the tabs on the Radio Button Properties window to complete these tasks: General tab On Select/Change tab  Change the name of a radio button  Execute an action when a radio button is selected  Change the associated variable name of a radio button Condition tab  Specify a condition for submitting the radio button data  Specify the label for a radio button Condition Message tab  Make a radio button initially invisible  Display a message when the conditions for submitting  Place a radio button on the top layer radio button data are not met  Lock the size and position of a radio button Transition tab  Enable author control on a radio button  Specifying a radio button's transitions  Place the radio button label on the left side  Set a radio button to be selected by default  Retain the radio button's value between sessions Position and Size tab  Specify the radio button's position and size

Changing the associated variable name of a radio button
Radio buttons contained in a radio button group do not have an associated variable. The radio button group will have the variable used to hold the value of the selected radio button. If the radio button is not contained within a radio button group, the radio button has an associated variable. The associated variable will take on a value of "on" if the radio button is selected, and otherwise will remain empty (have no value). To change the associated variable name of a radio button group: 1. Double-click on the radio button graphic within your Title Explorer. The Radio Button Properties window opens. Click the General tab if the Radio Button Properties window is not already opened to this tab. 2. Specify the associated variable name in the Associated Variable Name field. The variable will be used to store a value of "on" if the user has selected the corresponding radio button. The name/value pair submitted from the published title using email or CGI is the radio button's associated variable name and its value. See also: Submitting Test, Survey and Form Results to CGI 3. Click OK.

Specifying the label for a radio button
You can specify the textual label to appear with the radio button. This is the text that will appear next to the radio button. By default, the label is placed to the right of the radio button, however you can also place it to the left of the radio button. See also: Placing the radio button label on the left side

To specify the label for a radio button: 1. Double-click on the radio button graphic within your Title Explorer. The Radio Button Properties window opens. Click the General tab if the Radio Button Properties window is not already opened to this tab. 2. Specify the label for the radio button in the Label field. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010

3. Click OK.

Placing the radio button label on the left side
By default, the textual label associated with a radio button is placed to the right of the radio button. To place the radio button label to the left of a radio button: 1. Double-click on the radio button graphic within your Title Explorer. The Radio Button Properties window opens. Click the General tab if the Radio Button Properties window is not already opened to this tab. 2. Select the Text on left side check box. 3. Click OK.

Setting a radio button to be selected by default
You can set a radio button to be automatically selected. The radio button is selected when the control is displayed to the user. To set a radio button to be selected by default: 1. Double-click on the radio button graphic within your Title Explorer. The Radio Button Properties window opens. Click the General tab if the Radio Button Properties window is not already opened to this tab. 2. Select the Initially selected check box. 3. Click OK.

Executing an action when a radio button is selected
You can execute an action anytime a user selects a radio button. The action selected will execute when the user selects the corresponding radio button. See also: About Actions

To execute an action when a radio button is selected: 1. Double-click on the radio button graphic within your Title Explorer. The Radio Button Properties window opens. Click the On Select/Change tab. 2. Use the Action list to select from the following actions: Action Setting Cancel Test/ Survey Description This action cancels the target test or survey and causes the When Canceled/Failed action within the target test's or target survey's properties to execute. See also: Change Contents Display Message Setting the resulting action when a test is failed Setting the resulting action when a survey is canceled

This action changes the contents of the object to which the action is applied and replaces it with the target object specified. This action can be used to change the contents of a text block to a specified variable value, change the contents of questions, or change images, audio, video and other objects. This action can be used to display two different types of messages. You can display specified text in a generic message box or you can display one of your title's pages in a pop-up window. To display specified text in a generic message box, select Standard Message Window and specify the custom message.

Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010

click the Add File button to navigate and select the file you want to add. Select the object from the Scroll To list. When the action is executed. To specify a random X or Y coordinate. When you select this option. This action requires that each user have an email client. the selected transition (out) will be applied to the target object. Mail To This action launches the user's email application and creates a new email to the address specified in the Email Address field. See also: Modifying variable values This action repositions the target object to a specified X Coordinate and Y Coordinate at the Animation Speed you select. specify random coordinates. you can also choose to automatically scroll to an object on the page. such as Microsoft Outlook. If the content on the page fits within the viewing window without requiring a scrollbar. specify the file's location in the Program/Document field. You can directly specify the coordinates. Exit Title/Close This action exits the title if it is executed from the main window presenting the title or closes the Window current window if it is executed from a secondary or pop-up window. If the location selected is scrollable. or specify the value of an existing variable to use for either coordinate. so the email can be successfully submitted. further specify the Flash command and additional information as necessary. it will display the page with the scroll point at the top of the window. this setting has no effect. When the target object is hidden. you can further specify if the target location should be opened in a separate window. See also: Go To Executing Flash commands This action navigates to the target location specified. max) in the X Coordinate or Y Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . on the computer from which they are accessing the published title.To display one of your title's pages in a pop-up window. Flash Command This action enables communications with a Flash animation and is only available if a Flash animation exists in the location to which you are adding the action. When you select this option. the email server must be configured to accept communications from the published title's location. select Custom Message Window and select the page you want to display. select the Use Attached File check box and select the file from the Attached File list. If you have not yet added the additional file. or you can specify a relative or fully qualified Web address of the file you want to launch. See also: Adding additional files to your title To specify a relative or fully qualified Web address of the file you want to launch. Modify Variable Move To This action enables you to set or change the value of a variable. In addition. To display an additional file. See also: Specifying an object's transitions Launch a Program/ Document This action will launch the specified program or document. enter RAND(min. You can launch one of the additional files contained within your title. See also: Executing Go To actions Hide This action causes the target object to become hidden if it is currently visible.

Coordinate field. enter VAR(Variable_Name) in the X Coordinate or Y Coordinate field. Mute FLV Media None Pause Play When executed. Use the Animation Speed slider to select a speed from Slow to Fast. The random number generated will be used to reposition the object to the new X Coordinate or Y Coordinate. This position is relative to the Range specified within the target progress bar's properties. This is the default action. if it is not already playing. questions. You can directly specify a position. reserved variables) to be reset to their initial or default values. If the target is a survey. enabling the user to print the current page. Reset Test/ Survey If the target is a test. This action can also be used to begin a timer progress bar. this action causes the test score to be reset to 0. unanswered state. and will reset all of the questions contained within the test to their default. this action will reset all of the survey questions contained within the survey to their default. from top to bottom. unanswered state. This action causes the target media object such as a video or audio clip to pause. This action causes all the form objects of the target form to be reset to their initial or default values. This action does nothing. This will reset all test results. and reset the question back to its default. This will clear the question's answer if it was previously supplied. Processing the question includes determining whether the answer is correct or incorrect and displaying the corresponding feedback (if any) defined within the question properties. and form objects. To specify the value of an existing variable to use for the X or Y coordinate. See also: Set Progress Grouping and Ungrouping Objects This action sets the target custom progress bar to a specified Position. This action processes the target question. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . if it is currently playing. The actions contained within the action group will begin executing one-by-one. This action causes the target media object such as a video or audio clip to begin playing. the action will stop the audio of all Flash media in the title. as the actions are listed within the group in the Title Explorer. the action will additionally cause the test pages to be re-randomized. If the target test is randomized. unanswered state. where Variable_Name is the name of the variable whose value will be used to reposition the object to the new X Coordinate or Y Coordinate. See also: Print Current Page Process Question Working with Progress Bars This action will launch the user's Print window. specify a random position. Run Action Group This action starts the target action group (a group containing only actions). The random number assigned will be greater than or equal to the min value specified and less than or equal to the max value specified. See also: Adding Questions Reset All Variables Reset Form This action causes all the variables contained in the title (except for the read-only. Reset Question This action resets the target question. or specify the value of an existing variable to use for the position.

where Variable_Name is the name of the variable whose value will be used to specify the new Width. on the computer from which they are accessing the published title. if it is currently playing. This action submits the target form using the specified submission properties set for the target form. The random number generated will be used to specify the new Position of the progress bar. The random number assigned will be greater than or equal to the min value specified and less than or equal to the max value specified. such as Microsoft Outlook. or percentage enter VAR(Variable_Name) in the Width. the selected transition (in) will be applied to the target object. Use the Animation Speed slider to select a speed from Slow to Fast. The random number generated will be used to specify the new Width or Height of the object. so the email can be successfully submitted. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Height or Percentage of the object. the email server must be configured to accept communications from the published title's location.To specify a random position. Height or Percentage field. or specify the value of an existing variable to use for the width and height. To specify the value of an existing variable to use for the position. select the Use Percentage check box. or directly type a value into the field. where Variable_Name is the name of the variable whose value will be used to specify the new Position of the progress bar. Step Progress This action increments the target custom progress bar according to the specified Step Size within the target progress bar's properties. To specify the value of an existing variable to use for the width. height. To specify a percentage relative to the target object's current size. See also: Specifying an object's transitions Size To This action resizes the target object to a specified Width and Height in pixels at the Animation Speed you select. enter RAND(min. This action requires that each user have an email client. The random number assigned will be greater than or equal to the min value specified and less than or equal to the max value specified. enter RAND(min. max) in the Position field. You can also specify mailto:<email_address> in this field. You can also specify a percentage relative to the target object's current size. Select the percentage from the Percentage list. See also: Working with Progress Bars Stop Submit Form This action causes the target media object such as a video or audio clip to stop playing. In addition. See also: Setting form submission properties Submit Variable Values This action submits the values of all defined variables to the relative or fully qualified Web address (typically a CGI script) specified in the Submit Address field. specify a random width or height. enter VAR(Variable_Name) in the Position field. You can directly specify a width and height in pixels. max) in the Width or Height field. When the target object is shown. To specify a random width or height. where <email_address> is the email address of a recipient to which you want to submit the variable values. See also: Show Working with Progress Bars This action causes the target object to become visible if it is currently hidden.

See also: Selecting an action Selecting an action's target Adding a Check Box Check boxes are input objects that enable users to select and clear a specified option. depending on its current visibility state. the selected transition (in) will be applied to the target object. or page in the Title Explorer to which you want to add the check box and do one of the following: o From the Add menu. depending on whether it is currently stopped or currently playing. To add a check box: 1. this action causes the test to be scored. Use the tabs on the Check Box Properties window to complete these tasks: General tab On Select/Change tab  Change the name of a check box  Execute an action when a check box is selected  Change the associated variable name of a check box Condition tab  Specify a condition for submitting the check box data  Specify the label for a check box Condition Message tab  Make a check box initially invisible  Display a message when the conditions for submitting  Place a check box on the top layer check box data are not met Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . 2. See also: Creating a test If the target is a survey. Set the desired appearance of your check boxes within your Lectora Preferences. results to be submitted.See also: Submit/ Process Test/ Survey Submitting Test. When the target object is shown. this action causes the survey results to be submitted. When the target object is hidden. You can customize the appearance of check boxes within your title. and the appropriate When Completed/Passed or When Canceled/Failed test actions to be executed. Media 3. See also: Specifying an object's transitions Ummute FLV When executed. The Target field is enabled when the action requires a target. the selected transition (out) will be applied to the target object. See also: Toggle Play Mode Toggle Visibility State Creating a survey This action causes the target media object such as a video or audio clip to either start or stop playing. Select the form. Check boxes can be added to any form or page. Specify additional information as necessary. Survey and Form Results to CGI If the target is a test. select Object > Form Object > Check Box on the Form toolbar o Click the Check Box toolbar graphic o Right-click and select New > Object > Form Object > Check Box o Type Ctrl+Alt+5 The Check Box Properties window opens. This action causes the target object to either become visible or hidden. the action will play the audio of all Flash media in the title. and the appropriate When Completed or When Canceled survey actions to be executed.

Click OK. Click the General tab if the Check Box Properties window is not already opened to this tab. See also: Placing the check box label on the left side To specify the label for a check box: 1. 2. See also: Submitting Test. The Check Box Properties window opens. The Check Box Properties window opens. Placing the check box label on the left side By default. Double-click on the check box graphic within your Title Explorer. and otherwise will remain empty (have no value). This is the text that will appear next to the check box. The Check Box Properties window opens. To place the check box label to the left of a check box: 1. the label is placed to the right of the check box. Click the Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Double-click on the check box graphic within your Title Explorer. the textual label associated with a check box is placed to the right of the check box. The variable will be used to store a value of "on" if the user has selected the corresponding check box. Specify the label for the check box in the Label field. Click the General tab if the Check Box Properties window is not already opened to this tab. To change the associated variable name of a check box: 1. By default. 3. The associated variable will take on a value of "on" if the check box is selected. Specifying the label for a check box You can specify the textual label to appear with the check box. The name/value pair submitted from the published title using email or CGI is the check box's associated variable name and its value. however you can also place it to the left of the check box. Click OK. Specify the associated variable name in the Associated Variable Name field. 2. Double-click on the check box graphic within your Title Explorer.     Lock the size and position of a check box Enable author control on a check box Place the check box label on the left side Set a check box to be selected by default Retain the check box's value between sessions Position and Size tab  Specify the check box's position and size Transition tab  Specifying a check box's transitions Changing the associated variable name of a check box Check boxes have an associated variable that will store whether the check box has been checked. Survey and Form Results to CGI 3.

Double-click on the check box graphic within your Title Explorer. If the content on the page fits within the viewing window without requiring a scrollbar. select Standard Message Window and specify the custom message. Click OK. The Check Box Properties window opens. Click the General tab if the Check Box Properties window is not already opened to this tab. This action can be used to display two different types of messages. 2. you can also choose to automatically scroll to an object on the page. 3. Executing an action when a check box is selected You can execute an action anytime a user selects or clears a check box. To display one of your title's pages in a pop-up window. This action can be used to change the contents of a text block to a specified variable value. Click the On Select/Change tab. Select the Text on left side check box. 2. Exit Title/Close This action exits the title if it is executed from the main window presenting the title or closes the Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 .General tab if the Check Box Properties window is not already opened to this tab. 3. select Custom Message Window and select the page you want to display. You can display specified text in a generic message box or you can display one of your title's pages in a pop-up window. audio. Use the Action list to select from the following actions: Action Setting Cancel Test/ Survey Description This action cancels the target test or survey and causes the When Canceled/Failed action within the target test's or target survey's properties to execute. Setting a check box to be selected by default You can set a check box to be automatically selected. If the location selected is scrollable. To set a check box to be selected by default: 1. video and other objects. Double-click on the check box graphic within your Title Explorer. change the contents of questions. The Check Box Properties window opens. See also: Change Contents Display Message Setting the resulting action when a test is failed Setting the resulting action when a survey is canceled This action changes the contents of the object to which the action is applied and replaces it with the target object specified. Click OK. When the action is executed. this setting has no effect. To display specified text in a generic message box. 2. either to select it or clear it. See also: About Actions To execute an action when a check box is selected: 1. Select the Initially selected check box. Select the object from the Scroll To list. The action selected will execute when the user selects the corresponding check box. it will display the page with the scroll point at the top of the window. or change images. The check box is checked when the control is displayed to the user.

you can further specify if the target location should be opened in a separate window. To specify the value of an existing variable to use for the X or Y coordinate. You can directly specify the coordinates. The random number generated will be used to reposition the object to the new X Coordinate or Y Coordinate. click the Add File button to navigate and select the file you want to add. To specify a random X or Y coordinate. See also: Executing Go To actions Hide This action causes the target object to become hidden if it is currently visible. the email server must be configured to accept communications from the published title's location. or you can specify a relative or fully qualified Web address of the file you want to launch. You can launch one of the additional files contained within your title. To display an additional file. Mail To This action launches the user's email application and creates a new email to the address specified in the Email Address field. select the Use Attached File check box and select the file from the Attached File list. When you select this option. max) in the X Coordinate or Y Coordinate field. When the target object is hidden. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . on the computer from which they are accessing the published title. When you select this option. If you have not yet added the additional file. Modify Variable Move To This action enables you to set or change the value of a variable. See also: Executing Flash commands Go To This action navigates to the target location specified.Window Flash Command current window if it is executed from a secondary or pop-up window. where Variable_Name is the name of the variable whose value will be used to reposition the object to the new X Coordinate or Y Coordinate. See also: Adding additional files to your title To specify a relative or fully qualified Web address of the file you want to launch. This action enables communications with a Flash animation and is only available if a Flash animation exists in the location to which you are adding the action. See also: Specifying an object's transitions Launch a Program/ Document This action will launch the specified program or document. specify random coordinates. enter VAR(Variable_Name) in the X Coordinate or Y Coordinate field. See also: Modifying variable values This action repositions the target object to a specified X Coordinate and Y Coordinate at the Animation Speed you select. This action requires that each user have an email client. or specify the value of an existing variable to use for either coordinate. The random number assigned will be greater than or equal to the min value specified and less than or equal to the max value specified. further specify the Flash command and additional information as necessary. In addition. the selected transition (out) will be applied to the target object. such as Microsoft Outlook. so the email can be successfully submitted. enter RAND(min. specify the file's location in the Program/Document field.

This will reset all test results. enter RAND(min. max) in the Position field. unanswered state. To specify the value of an existing variable to use for the position. If the target is a survey. This action causes the target media object such as a video or audio clip to pause. This action does nothing. Processing the question includes determining whether the answer is correct or incorrect and displaying the corresponding feedback (if any) defined within the question properties. This is the default action. This will clear the question's answer if it was previously supplied. unanswered state. and reset the question back to its default. where Variable_Name is the name of the variable whose value will be used to specify the new Position of the progress bar. To specify a random position. or specify the value of an existing variable to use for the position. The random number assigned will be greater than or equal to the min value specified and less than or equal to the max value specified. This action processes the target question. Reset Test/ Survey If the target is a test. Reset Question This action resets the target question. as the actions are listed within the group in the Title Explorer. the action will stop the audio of all Flash media in the title. Run Action Group This action starts the target action group (a group containing only actions). If the target test is randomized. this action will reset all of the survey questions contained within the survey to their default. this action causes the test score to be reset to 0. if it is currently playing. This action causes the target media object such as a video or audio clip to begin playing. unanswered state. if it is not already playing. enter VAR(Variable_Name) in the Position field. reserved variables) to be reset to their initial or default values. enabling the user to print the current page. and form objects. The actions contained within the action group will begin executing one-by-one. You can directly specify a position. See also: Adding Questions Reset All Variables Reset Form This action causes all the variables contained in the title (except for the read-only. This position is relative to the Range specified within the target progress bar's properties.Use the Animation Speed slider to select a speed from Slow to Fast. questions. and will reset all of the questions contained within the test to their default. See also: Print Current Page Process Question Working with Progress Bars This action will launch the user's Print window. Mute FLV Media None Pause Play When executed. This action can also be used to begin a timer progress bar. See also: Set Progress Grouping and Ungrouping Objects This action sets the target custom progress bar to a specified Position. specify a random position. This action causes all the form objects of the target form to be reset to their initial or default values. from top to bottom. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . the action will additionally cause the test pages to be re-randomized. The random number generated will be used to specify the new Position of the progress bar.

so the email can be successfully submitted. In addition. or directly type a value into the field. select the Use Percentage check box. See also: Submitting Test. where Variable_Name is the name of the variable whose value will be used to specify the new Width. or percentage enter VAR(Variable_Name) in the Width. See also: Setting form submission properties Submit Variable Values This action submits the values of all defined variables to the relative or fully qualified Web address (typically a CGI script) specified in the Submit Address field. You can also specify mailto:<email_address> in this field. this action causes the test to be scored. or specify the value of an existing variable to use for the width and height. To specify a random width or height. specify a random width or height. To specify a percentage relative to the target object's current size. See also: Working with Progress Bars Stop Submit Form This action causes the target media object such as a video or audio clip to stop playing. You can directly specify a width and height in pixels. This action submits the target form using the specified submission properties set for the target form. the email server must be configured to accept communications from the published title's location. The random number generated will be used to specify the new Width or Height of the object. Survey and Form Results to CGI Submit/ Process Test/ Survey If the target is a test. You can also specify a percentage relative to the target object's current size. results to be submitted. See also: Specifying an object's transitions Size To This action resizes the target object to a specified Width and Height in pixels at the Animation Speed you select. Use the Animation Speed slider to select a speed from Slow to Fast. Height or Percentage of the object. the selected transition (in) will be applied to the target object. max) in the Width or Height field. The random number assigned will be greater than or equal to the min value specified and less than or equal to the max value specified. enter RAND(min. height. Select the percentage from the Percentage list. Step Progress This action increments the target custom progress bar according to the specified Step Size within the target progress bar's properties. Height or Percentage field.See also: Show Working with Progress Bars This action causes the target object to become visible if it is currently hidden. This action requires that each user have an email client. and the appropriate When Completed/Passed or When Canceled/Failed test actions to be executed. To specify the value of an existing variable to use for the width. on the computer from which they are accessing the published title. if it is currently playing. such as Microsoft Outlook. See also: Creating a test Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . where <email_address> is the email address of a recipient to which you want to submit the variable values. When the target object is shown.

2. the selected transition (out) will be applied to the target object. See also: Toggle Play Mode Toggle Visibility State Creating a survey This action causes the target media object such as a video or audio clip to either start or stop playing. Specify additional information as necessary. Use the tabs on the Entry Field Properties window to complete these tasks: General tab On Select/Change tab  Change the name of an entry field  Execute an action when a user types within an entry field Change the associated variable name of an entry field  Condition tab  Specify default text for an entry field  Specify a condition for submitting the entry field data  Specify a background color for an entry field Condition Message tab  Specify the maximum number of characters for an entry  Display a message when the conditions for submitting field entry field data are not met  Make an entry field initially invisible Transition tab  Place an entry field on the top layer  Specifying an entry field's transitions  Lock the size and position of an entry field  Enable author control on an entry field  Create a multi-line entry field  Create a password entry field  Create a read-only entry field Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . this action causes the survey results to be submitted. See also: Specifying an object's transitions Ummute FLV Media When executed. When the target object is shown. See also: Selecting an action Selecting an action's target Adding an Entry Field Entry fields are input objects that enable users to type a value. depending on whether it is currently stopped or currently playing. When the target object is hidden. 4. This action causes the target object to either become visible or hidden.If the target is a survey. 3. depending on its current visibility state. To add an entry field: 1. the selected transition (in) will be applied to the target object. Click OK. and the appropriate When Completed or When Canceled survey actions to be executed. Select the form. Entry fields can be added to any form or page. the action will play the audio of all Flash media in the title. select Object > Form Object > Entry Field on the Form toolbar o Click the Entry toolbar graphic o Right-click and select New > Object > Form Object > Entry Field o Type Ctrl+Alt+6 The Entry Field Properties window opens. or page in the Title Explorer to which you want to add the entry field and do one of the following: o From the Add menu. The Target field is enabled when the action requires a target.

Double-click on the entry field graphic within your Title Explorer. The default color is white. Click the Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Double-click on the entry field graphic within your Title Explorer. The Entry Field Properties window opens. 2. Specifying the maximum number of characters for an entry field You can specify the maximum number of characters users can type into an entry field. Retain the entry field's value between sessions Position and Size tab  Specify an entry field's position and size Changing the associated variable name of an entry field Entry fields have an associated variable that will store the value that a user types into the entry field. Click the General tab if the Entry Field Properties window is not already opened to this tab. Select a background color from the Default background color list. Double-click on the entry field graphic within your Title Explorer. The default text will appear within the entry field when the control is displayed to the user. The variable will be used to store the value the user types into the entry field. 3. Specifying default text for an entry field You can specify default text for an entry field. Specify the default text in the Default text field. The Entry Field Properties window opens. Click OK. Click OK. Double-click on the entry field graphic within your Title Explorer. Click the General tab if the Entry Field Properties window is not already opened to this tab. 2. To specify the maximum number of characters for an entry field: 1. Select a predefined color. To specify default text for an entry field: 1. See also: Matching Colors Used within Your Title 3. select the eye-dropper tool to use a color from elsewhere within your title. The Entry Field Properties window opens. Click the General tab if the Entry Field Properties window is not already opened to this tab. Specify the associated variable name in the Associated Variable Name field. Survey and Form Results to CGI 2. See also: Submitting Test. Specifying a background color for an entry field To specify a background color for an entry field: 1. The Entry Field Properties window opens. The name/value pair submitted from the published title using email or CGI is the entry field's associated variable name and its value. To change the associated variable name of an entry field: 1. or select Custom to select a custom color from the Color wheel. Click OK.

2. 2. but they will not be able to change it.General tab if the Entry Field Properties window is not already opened to this tab. Click the General tab if the Entry Field Properties window is not already opened to this tab. Double-click on the entry field graphic within your Title Explorer. 2. The Entry Field Properties window opens. The Entry Field Properties window opens. To create a multi-line entry field: 1. Click the General tab if the Entry Field Properties window is not already opened to this tab. Double-click on the entry field graphic within your Title Explorer. Select the Password field check box. Double-click on the entry field graphic within your Title Explorer. See also: About Actions To execute an action when a a user types within an entry field: Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Creating a read-only entry field You can set an entry field to be read-only. Click the General tab if the Entry Field Properties window is not already opened to this tab. Creating a multi-line entry field You can enable your entry field to accept multiple lines of text. 2. When you select this option. 3. Click OK. Creating a password entry field You can specify that your entry field will be used for a password. Enter the maximum number of characters in the Maximum characters allowed field. users will be able to supply multiple lines or an entire paragraph. Click OK. Select the Read Only check box. Click OK. See also: Changing the associated variable name of an entry field To create a password entry field: 1. 3. 3. The value of the associated variable will reflect the actual characters typed into the field. users will be able to see the value within the entry field. 3. Click OK. Users will not be able to type more than the maximum number of characters in the field. To create a read-only entry field: 1. Executing an action when a user types within an entry field You can execute an action anytime a user types a character within an entry field. Instead of only being able to type a single line of text. That is. The Entry Field Properties window opens. Select the Multi-line check box. an asterisk (*) will be displayed for every character the user types within the entry field.

1. Use the Action list to select from the following actions: The Target field is enabled when the action requires a target. 2. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . The Drop-down List Properties window opens. Click OK. Use the tabs on the Drop-Down List Properties window to complete these tasks: General tab On Select/Change tab  Change the name of a drop-down list  Execute an action when a user makes a selection from a drop-down list Change the associated variable name of a drop-down list  Condition tab  Specify a background color for a drop-down list  Specify a condition for submitting the drop-down list  Make a drop-down list initially invisible data  Place a drop-down list on the top layer Condition Message tab  Lock the size and position of a drop-down list  Display a message when the conditions for submitting  Enable author control on a drop-down list drop-down list data are not met Transition tab  Retain the drop-down list's value between sessions  Specifying a drop-down list's transitions  Add items to a drop-down list  Specify the default value of a drop-down list Position and Size tab  Specify a drop-down list's position and size Changing the associated variable name of a drop-down list Drop-down lists have an associated variable that will store the value a user selects from the drop-down list. Drop-down lists can be added to any form or page. Double-click on the entry field graphic On Select/Change tab. or page in the Title Explorer to which you want to add the drop-down list and do one of the following: o From the Add menu. The variable will be used to store the value the user selects from the drop-down list. Select the form. Click the General tab if the Drop-down List Properties window is not already opened to this tab. 2. Double-click on the drop-down list graphic within your Title Explorer. To change the associated variable name of a drop-down list: 1. select Object > Form Object > Drop-Down List on the Form toolbar o Click the Drop-Down List toolbar graphic o Right-click and select New > Object > Form Object > Drop-Down List o Type Ctrl+Alt+7 The Drop-down List Properties window opens. To add a drop-down list: 1. See also: Selecting an action Selecting an action's target Adding a Drop-Down List Drop-down lists are input objects that enable users to select a value from a list of pre-defined values. Click the 2. Specify the associated variable name in the Associated Variable Name field. 3. The Entry Field Properties window opens. within your Title Explorer. Specify additional information as necessary.

To add items to a drop-down list: 1. Select a background color from the Default background color list. Click the General tab if the Drop-Down List Properties window is not already opened to this tab. 2. highlight the item and click the Remove button. To specify the default value of a drop-down list: 1. Click OK. To specify which of the drop-down list's values should be used as the default. 5. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to add additional items to your drop-down list. See also: Matching Colors Used within Your Title 3. See also: Submitting Test. The Drop-Down List Properties window opens. The Move Up button will move the item one place higher in the list. The Initial Values window opens. 2. The default color is white. Click OK to accept your changes and return to the Drop-Down List Properties window. or select Custom to select a custom color from the Color wheel. Select a predefined color. Specifying the default value of a drop-down list You can specify if one of the values contained in a drop-down list should be selected by default. Each new line of text is a new value that can be selected from the drop-down list. Type the values you want within your drop-down list in the space provided. Click the General tab if the Drop-Down List Properties window is not already opened to this tab. 4. and you can further reorganize and delete items from the list. Click the Add button. Double-click on the drop-down list graphic within your Title Explorer. Survey and Form Results to CGI 3. Double-click on the drop-down list graphic within your Title Explorer. To remove an item from the list. Click OK. You can add as many or as few items as you want. Separate different values by pressing the Enter key on your keyboard. Specifying a background color for a drop-down list To specify a background color for a drop-down list: 1. highlight the item you want to move within the list and click either the Move Up or Move Down button. Each has a check box located to its left. 2. The Drop-Down List Properties window opens. select the check box next to the appropriate Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Click OK. while the Move Down button will move the item one place lower in the list. To reorganize the list of items.The name/value pair submitted from the published title using email or CGI is the drop-down list's associated variable name and its value. Click the General tab if the Drop-down List Properties window is not already opened to this tab. The Drop-down List Properties window opens. The values you entered are displayed in the list on the bottom-left of the Drop-Down List Properties window. select the eye-dropper tool to use a color from elsewhere within your title. Adding items to a drop-down list You specify the list of items that users can choose from within a drop-down list. 3. The default value will appear selected within the drop-down list when the control is displayed to the user. Highlight any of the items in the list to reorganize or remove the items. Double-click on the drop-down list graphic within your Title Explorer.

audio. This action can be used to change the contents of a text block to a specified variable value. Click OK. The list of values is only available if you have already populated your drop-down list. See also: Change Contents Display Message Setting the resulting action when a test is failed Setting the resulting action when a survey is canceled This action changes the contents of the object to which the action is applied and replaces it with the target object specified. If the content on the page fits within the viewing window without requiring a scrollbar. video and other objects. Use the Action list to select from the following actions: Action Setting Cancel Test/ Survey Description This action cancels the target test or survey and causes the When Canceled/Failed action within the target test's or target survey's properties to execute. Select the object from the Scroll To list. When you select this option. Only one item can be specified as the default. Executing an action when a user makes a selection from a drop-down list You can execute an action any time a user makes a selection from a drop-down list. this setting has no effect. Exit Title/Close This action exits the title if it is executed from the main window presenting the title or closes the Window current window if it is executed from a secondary or pop-up window. it will display the page with the scroll point at the top of the window. If the location selected is scrollable.value within the list of possible values. See also: Go To Executing Flash commands This action navigates to the target location specified. When you select this option. or change images. change the contents of questions. Flash Command This action enables communications with a Flash animation and is only available if a Flash animation exists in the location to which you are adding the action. See also: About Actions To execute an action when a user makes a selection from a drop-down list: 1. You can display specified text in a generic message box or you can display one of your title's pages in a pop-up window. you can further specify if the target location should be opened in a separate window. select Custom Message Window and select the page you want to display. further specify the Flash command and additional information as necessary. When the action is executed. To display one of your title's pages in a pop-up window. See also: Adding items to a drop-down list 3. 2. To display specified text in a generic message box. Click the On Select/Change tab. See also: Executing Go To actions Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . The Drop-Down List Properties window opens. select Standard Message Window and specify the custom message. you can also choose to automatically scroll to an object on the page. This action can be used to display two different types of messages. Double-click on the drop-down list graphic within your Title Explorer.

The random number assigned will be greater than or equal to the min value specified and less than or equal to the max value specified. This action causes the target media object such as a video or audio clip to begin playing. if it is not already playing. the email server must be configured to accept communications from the published title's location. if it is currently playing.Hide This action causes the target object to become hidden if it is currently visible. such as Microsoft Outlook. If you have not yet added the additional file. Use the Animation Speed slider to select a speed from Slow to Fast. To display an additional file. so the email can be successfully submitted. The random number generated will be used to reposition the object to the new X Coordinate or Y Coordinate. max) in the X Coordinate or Y Coordinate field. the selected transition (out) will be applied to the target object. specify the file's location in the Program/Document field. To specify a random X or Y coordinate. or you can specify a relative or fully qualified Web address of the file you want to launch. This action can also be used to begin a timer progress bar. When the target object is hidden. Modify Variable Move To This action enables you to set or change the value of a variable. click the Add File button to navigate and select the file you want to add. See also: Specifying an object's transitions Launch a Program/ Document This action will launch the specified program or document. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . This action causes the target media object such as a video or audio clip to pause. You can launch one of the additional files contained within your title. You can directly specify the coordinates. See also: Adding additional files to your title To specify a relative or fully qualified Web address of the file you want to launch. To specify the value of an existing variable to use for the X or Y coordinate. Mail To This action launches the user's email application and creates a new email to the address specified in the Email Address field. specify random coordinates. See also: Modifying variable values This action repositions the target object to a specified X Coordinate and Y Coordinate at the Animation Speed you select. enter RAND(min. Mute FLV Media None Pause Play When executed. This action requires that each user have an email client. In addition. enter VAR(Variable_Name) in the X Coordinate or Y Coordinate field. the action will stop the audio of all Flash media in the title. where Variable_Name is the name of the variable whose value will be used to reposition the object to the new X Coordinate or Y Coordinate. This is the default action. on the computer from which they are accessing the published title. This action does nothing. select the Use Attached File check box and select the file from the Attached File list. or specify the value of an existing variable to use for either coordinate.

or specify the value of an existing variable to use for the position. See also: Working with Progress Bars Show This action causes the target object to become visible if it is currently hidden. unanswered state. or specify the value of an existing variable to use for the width and height. enabling the user to print the current page. this action causes the test score to be reset to 0. reserved variables) to be reset to their initial or default values. This action processes the target question. and form objects. enter VAR(Variable_Name) in the Position field. and will reset all of the questions contained within the test to their default. This position is relative to the Range specified within the target progress bar's properties. specify a random width or height. This will clear the question's answer if it was previously supplied. If the target is a survey. When the target object is shown. To specify a random position. See also: Adding Questions Reset All Variables Reset Form This action causes all the variables contained in the title (except for the read-only. the selected transition (in) will be applied to the target object. and reset the question back to its default. unanswered state. This action causes all the form objects of the target form to be reset to their initial or default values. To specify the value of an existing variable to use for the position. See also: Set Progress Grouping and Ungrouping Objects This action sets the target custom progress bar to a specified Position. as the actions are listed within the group in the Title Explorer.See also: Print Current Page Process Question Working with Progress Bars This action will launch the user's Print window. enter RAND(min. from top to bottom. The random number generated will be used to specify the new Position of the progress bar. You can directly specify a width and height in pixels. The random number assigned will be greater than or equal to the min value specified and less than or equal to the max value specified. This will reset all test results. Reset Test/ Survey If the target is a test. this action will reset all of the survey questions contained within the survey to their default. specify a random position. the action will additionally cause the test pages to be re-randomized. The actions contained within the action group will begin executing one-by-one. questions. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . max) in the Position field. Processing the question includes determining whether the answer is correct or incorrect and displaying the corresponding feedback (if any) defined within the question properties. where Variable_Name is the name of the variable whose value will be used to specify the new Position of the progress bar. See also: Specifying an object's transitions Size To This action resizes the target object to a specified Width and Height in pixels at the Animation Speed you select. Reset Question This action resets the target question. If the target test is randomized. Run Action Group This action starts the target action group (a group containing only actions). unanswered state. You can also specify a percentage relative to the target object's current size. You can directly specify a position.

or percentage enter VAR(Variable_Name) in the Width. See also: Submitting Test. height. This action requires that each user have an email client. See also: Stop Submit Form Working with Progress Bars This action causes the target media object such as a video or audio clip to stop playing. results to be submitted. depending on its current visibility state. Height or Percentage of the object. The random number generated will be used to specify the new Width or Height of the object. this action causes the test to be scored. enter RAND(min. Use the Animation Speed slider to select a speed from Slow to Fast. When the target object is hidden. This action submits the target form using the specified submission properties set for the target form. the selected transition (out) will be applied to the target object. When the target object is shown. See also: Creating a test If the target is a survey. on the computer from which they are accessing the published title. Height or Percentage field. See also: Setting form submission properties Submit Variable Values This action submits the values of all defined variables to the relative or fully qualified Web address (typically a CGI script) specified in the Submit Address field. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 .To specify a random width or height. To specify a percentage relative to the target object's current size. if it is currently playing. This action causes the target object to either become visible or hidden. or directly type a value into the field. See also: Toggle Play Mode Toggle Visibility State Creating a survey This action causes the target media object such as a video or audio clip to either start or stop playing. where <email_address> is the email address of a recipient to which you want to submit the variable values. the email server must be configured to accept communications from the published title's location. depending on whether it is currently stopped or currently playing. You can also specify mailto:<email_address> in this field. and the appropriate When Completed/Passed or When Canceled/Failed test actions to be executed. Survey and Form Results to CGI Submit/ Process Test/ Survey If the target is a test. To specify the value of an existing variable to use for the width. The random number assigned will be greater than or equal to the min value specified and less than or equal to the max value specified. such as Microsoft Outlook. select the Use Percentage check box. Select the percentage from the Percentage list. this action causes the survey results to be submitted. so the email can be successfully submitted. In addition. and the appropriate When Completed or When Canceled survey actions to be executed. Step Progress This action increments the target custom progress bar according to the specified Step Size within the target progress bar's properties. max) in the Width or Height field. where Variable_Name is the name of the variable whose value will be used to specify the new Width. the selected transition (in) will be applied to the target object.

The variable will be used to store the values selected from the list box. 4. 2. Click OK. The Target field is enabled when the action requires a target. the value of the associated variable will be a comma-separated list of the list items selected. Select the form. select Object > Form Object > List Box on the Form toolbar o Click the List Box toolbar graphic o Right-click and select New > Object > Form Object > List Box o Type Ctrl+Alt+8 The List Box Properties window opens. List boxes can be added to any form or page. To change the associated variable name of a list box: 1. Double-click on the list box graphic within your Title Explorer. Media 3. 2. Specify additional information as necessary. If multiple items are selected in a list box. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . To add a list box: 1. See also: Selecting an action Selecting an action's target Adding a List Box List boxes are input objects that enable users to select one or more values from a list of pre-defined values.See also: Specifying an object's transitions Ummute FLV When executed. Click the General tab if the List Box Properties window is not already opened to this tab. Specify the associated variable name in the Associated Variable Name field. Use the tabs on the List Box Properties window to complete these tasks: General tab On Select/Change tab  Change the name of a list box  Execute an action when a user makes a selection  Change the associated variable name of a list box from a list box  Specify a background color for a list box Condition tab  Make a list box initially invisible  Specify a condition for submitting the list box data  Place a list box on the top layer Condition Message tab  Lock the size and position of a list box  Display a message when the conditions for submitting  Enable author control on a list box list box data are not met Transition tab  Retain the list box's value between sessions  Specifying a list box's transitions  Enable multiple selections within a list box  Add items to a list box  Specify the default value of a list box Position and Size tab  Specify a list box's position and size Changing the associated variable name of list box List boxes have an associated variable that will store the value a user selects from the list box. or page in the Title Explorer to which you want to add the list box and do one of the following: o From the Add menu. The List Box Properties window opens. the action will play the audio of all Flash media in the title.

Click on the Add button. See also: Matching Colors Used within Your Title 3. Click OK to accept your changes and return to the List Box Properties window. The List Box Properties window opens. See also: Submitting Test. The default color is white. Double-click on the list box graphic within your Title Explorer. select the eye-dropper tool to use a color from elsewhere within your title. Select the Allow multi-select check box. Click OK. highlight the item you want to move within the list and click either the Move Up or Move Down button. The Initial Values window opens. Enabling multiple selections within a list box You can enable the selection of multiple items within a list box. Separate different values by pressing the Enter key on your keyboard. or select Custom to select a custom color from the Color wheel. Double-click on the list box graphic within your Title Explorer. The List Box Properties window opens. Type the values you want within your list box in the space provided. users will be able to select multiple items in the list box while holding down the Ctrl key. Each new line of text is a new value that can be selected from the list box. highlight the item and click the Remove button. 2. Select a predefined color. Highlight any of the items in the list to reorganize or remove the items. Each has a check box located to its left. Adding items to a list box You specify the list of items that users can choose from within a list box. Survey and Form Results to CGI 3. 3. The values you entered are displayed in the list on the bottom-left of the List Box Properties window. Click the General tab if the List Box Properties window is not already opened to this tab. 3. 2. To enable multiple selections within a list box: 1. Double-click on the list box graphic within your Title Explorer. To add items to a list box: 1. To reorganize the list of items.The name/value pair submitted from the published title using email or CGI is the list box's associated variable name and its value. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . When this is enabled. Click the General tab if the List Box Properties window is not already opened to this tab. The List Box Properties window opens. and you can further reorganize and delete items from the list. Click OK. To remove an item from the list. 4. Click the General tab if the List Box Properties window is not already opened to this tab. Specifying a background color for a list box To specify a background color for a list box: 1. 2. while the Move Down button will move the item one place lower in the list. The Move Up button will move the item one place higher in the list. Select a background color from the Default background color list. Click OK. You can add as many or as few items as you want.

change the contents of questions. If the location selected is scrollable. Executing an action when a user makes a selection from a list box You can execute an action any time a user makes a selection within a list box. The default value will appear selected within the list box when the control is displayed to the user. 2. Click the General tab if the List Box Properties window is not already opened to this tab. The list of values is only available if you have already populated your list box. Double-click on the list box graphic within your Title Explorer. select Standard Message Window and specify the custom message. Only one value can be specified as the default. or change images. this setting has no Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Use the Action list to select from the following actions: Action Setting Cancel Test/ Survey Description This action cancels the target test or survey and causes the When Canceled/Failed action within the target test's or target survey's properties to execute. To display one of your title's pages in a pop-up window. 5.Repeat steps 2 and 3 to add additional items to your list box. See also: About Actions To execute an action when a user makes a selection from a list box: 1. If the content on the page fits within the viewing window without requiring a scrollbar. The List Box Properties window opens. select the check box next to the appropriate value within the list of possible values. See also: Enabling multiple selections within a list box To specify the default value of a list box: 1. You can display specified text in a generic message box or you can display one of your title's pages in a pop-up window. See also: Adding items to a list box 3. The List Box Properties window opens. Specifying the default value of a list box You can specify if one or more (if multiple selections is enabled) of the values contained in a list box should be selected by default. unless multiple selections is enabled for the list box. Click OK. This action can be used to change the contents of a text block to a specified variable value. select Custom Message Window and select the page you want to display. 2. you can also choose to automatically scroll to an object on the page. Select the object from the Scroll To list. This action can be used to display two different types of messages. Double-click on the list box graphic within your Title Explorer. video and other objects. Click OK. Click the On Select/Change tab. To display specified text in a generic message box. audio. To specify which of the list box's values should be used as the default. See also: Change Contents Display Message Setting the resulting action when a test is failed Setting the resulting action when a survey is canceled This action changes the contents of the object to which the action is applied and replaces it with the target object specified.

See also: Go To Executing Flash commands This action navigates to the target location specified. See also: Executing Go To actions Hide This action causes the target object to become hidden if it is currently visible. max) in the X Coordinate or Y Coordinate field. Flash Command This action enables communications with a Flash animation and is only available if a Flash animation exists in the location to which you are adding the action. or you can specify a relative or fully qualified Web address of the file you want to launch. The random number generated will be used to reposition the object to the new X Coordinate or Y Coordinate. on the computer from which they are accessing the published title. This action requires that each user have an email client. specify the file's location in the Program/Document field. When the target object is hidden. To specify the value of an existing variable to use for the X or Y coordinate. The random number assigned will be greater than or equal to the min value specified and less than or equal to the max value specified. When you select this option. Mail To This action launches the user's email application and creates a new email to the address specified in the Email Address field. so the email can be successfully submitted. See also: Specifying an object's transitions Launch a Program/ Document This action will launch the specified program or document. such as Microsoft Outlook. you can further specify if the target location should be opened in a separate window. enter RAND(min. When the action is executed. See also: Modifying variable values This action repositions the target object to a specified X Coordinate and Y Coordinate at the Animation Speed you select. In addition. further specify the Flash command and additional information as necessary. If you have not yet added the additional file. When you select this option. enter Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Modify Variable Move To This action enables you to set or change the value of a variable. specify random coordinates. See also: Adding additional files to your title To specify a relative or fully qualified Web address of the file you want to launch. the selected transition (out) will be applied to the target object. To display an additional file. To specify a random X or Y coordinate. You can directly specify the coordinates. or specify the value of an existing variable to use for either coordinate. the email server must be configured to accept communications from the published title's location. Exit Title/Close This action exits the title if it is executed from the main window presenting the title or closes the Window current window if it is executed from a secondary or pop-up window. You can launch one of the additional files contained within your title. click the Add File button to navigate and select the file you want to add. it will display the page with the scroll point at the top of the window. select the Use Attached File check box and select the file from the Attached File list.effect.

The random number generated will be used to specify the new Position of the progress bar. unanswered state. from top to bottom. enter RAND(min. enabling the user to print the current page. This action can also be used to begin a timer progress bar. and form objects. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Mute FLV Media None Pause Play When executed. The random number assigned will be greater than or equal to the min value specified and less than or equal to the max value specified. See also: Adding Questions Reset All Variables Reset Form This action causes all the variables contained in the title (except for the read-only. This action causes all the form objects of the target form to be reset to their initial or default values. unanswered state. where Variable_Name is the name of the variable whose value will be used to reposition the object to the new X Coordinate or Y Coordinate. unanswered state. This position is relative to the Range specified within the target progress bar's properties.VAR(Variable_Name) in the X Coordinate or Y Coordinate field. You can directly specify a position. if it is currently playing. If the target test is randomized. or specify the value of an existing variable to use for the position. the action will stop the audio of all Flash media in the title. This will reset all test results. Run Action Group This action starts the target action group (a group containing only actions). questions. specify a random position. This action causes the target media object such as a video or audio clip to pause. this action causes the test score to be reset to 0. Reset Test/ Survey If the target is a test. as the actions are listed within the group in the Title Explorer. This action processes the target question. If the target is a survey. The actions contained within the action group will begin executing one-by-one. reserved variables) to be reset to their initial or default values. Processing the question includes determining whether the answer is correct or incorrect and displaying the corresponding feedback (if any) defined within the question properties. Reset Question This action resets the target question. See also: Print Current Page Process Question Working with Progress Bars This action will launch the user's Print window. and will reset all of the questions contained within the test to their default. This action does nothing. This action causes the target media object such as a video or audio clip to begin playing. To specify a random position. This is the default action. max) in the Position field. this action will reset all of the survey questions contained within the survey to their default. and reset the question back to its default. This will clear the question's answer if it was previously supplied. the action will additionally cause the test pages to be re-randomized. if it is not already playing. Use the Animation Speed slider to select a speed from Slow to Fast. See also: Set Progress Grouping and Ungrouping Objects This action sets the target custom progress bar to a specified Position.

or percentage enter VAR(Variable_Name) in the Width. Height or Percentage of the object. In addition. To specify a random width or height. on the computer from which they are accessing the published title. enter RAND(min. See also: Specifying an object's transitions Size To This action resizes the target object to a specified Width and Height in pixels at the Animation Speed you select. where Variable_Name is the name of the variable whose value will be used to specify the new Position of the progress bar. select the Use Percentage check box.To specify the value of an existing variable to use for the position. such as Microsoft Outlook. or specify the value of an existing variable to use for the width and height. max) in the Width or Height field. enter VAR(Variable_Name) in the Position field. Select the percentage from the Percentage list. This action requires that each user have an email client. Survey and Form Results to CGI Submit/ Process Test/ If the target is a test. See also: Show Working with Progress Bars This action causes the target object to become visible if it is currently hidden. See also: Working with Progress Bars Stop Submit Form This action causes the target media object such as a video or audio clip to stop playing. Step Progress This action increments the target custom progress bar according to the specified Step Size within the target progress bar's properties. To specify a percentage relative to the target object's current size. the email server must be configured to accept communications from the published title's location. You can also specify mailto:<email_address> in this field. results to be submitted. You can directly specify a width and height in pixels. The random number assigned will be greater than or equal to the min value specified and less than or equal to the max value specified. and the appropriate When Completed/Passed or When Canceled/Failed test actions to be executed. this action causes the test to be scored. You can also specify a percentage relative to the target object's current size. This action submits the target form using the specified submission properties set for the target form. See also: Setting form submission properties Submit Variable Values This action submits the values of all defined variables to the relative or fully qualified Web address (typically a CGI script) specified in the Submit Address field. where Variable_Name is the name of the variable whose value will be used to specify the new Width. or directly type a value into the field. See also: Submitting Test. where <email_address> is the email address of a recipient to which you want to submit the variable values. Use the Animation Speed slider to select a speed from Slow to Fast. the selected transition (in) will be applied to the target object. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . if it is currently playing. To specify the value of an existing variable to use for the width. height. The random number generated will be used to specify the new Width or Height of the object. specify a random width or height. When the target object is shown. Height or Percentage field. so the email can be successfully submitted.

See also: Specifying an object's transitions Ummute FLV When executed. The Action defines which targets can be used. depending on its current visibility state. test. See also: Selecting an action Selecting an action's target Actions and Variables Actions and variables can be used to create interesting titles with varying interactivity and dynamically updated information. section. Similarly. sections. Targets can be chapters. tests. This action causes the target object to either become visible or hidden. if an action is added to the title level. respectively. Depending on where you are adding an action. chapters. and the appropriate When Completed or When Canceled survey actions to be executed. if an action is added to a page. if an action is added to a chapter. or cancel a test. questions. test sections and surveys adhere to the same inheritance principles as other objects within your title. surveys. such as a keystroke or a mouse click. Actions added to organizational levels including the title. or test section. it will only execute on that page if the action is triggered. or variables. pages. Specify additional information as necessary. section. the options available to you will vary. the selected transition (out) will be applied to the target object. tests. When the target object is shown. it will execute on every page within the chapter. sections. Finally. the action will play the audio of all Flash media in the title. Specifies what should happen when the On trigger occurs. This chapter covers the following topics:  About Actions  Adding an Action  Working with Variables About Actions Three components make up an action: On Action Target Specifies which event should trigger an action. objects. depending on whether it is currently stopped or currently playing. this action causes the survey results to be submitted.Survey See also: Creating a test If the target is a survey. the selected transition (in) will be applied to the target object. survey or test section. 4. the action will execute on every page of the title if the action is triggered. if the action is triggered. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . That is. launch a program. When the target object is hidden. pages. See also: Toggle Play Mode Toggle Visibility State Creating a survey This action causes the target media object such as a video or audio clip to either start or stop playing. test. survey. Click OK. These three parts work together to create the end result. The Target field is enabled when the action requires a target. Specifies a target used by the action. such as display a message. Media 3.

and pages) and to objects within your title. Section. and the target. or Section Current Page First Page in Title Previous Chapter. actions. Actions are dependent upon 3 major parts: the on event. and targets available in your title: On Keystroke Mouse Click Mouse Double-Click Mouse Enter Mouse Exit Show Done Playing Any Key Right Mouse Click Timer Hide Action Cancel Test/Survey Change Contents Display Message Exit Title/Close Window Flash Command Go To Hide Launch a Program/Document Mail To Modify Variable Move To Mute FLV Media Pause Play Print Current Page Process Question Reset All Variables Reset Form Reset Question Reset Test/Survey Run Action Group Set Progress Show Size To Step Progress Stop Submit Form Submit Variable Values Submit/Process Test/Survey Toggle Play Mode Toggle Visibility State Unmute FLV Media Target Back Chapter. or Section This Object Title Web Address Objects* Variables* Adding an Action You can add actions to the organizational levels of your title (chapters. or Page Next Chapter. select Action on the Insert toolbar o Click the Action toolbar graphic o Right-click and select New > Action o Type Ctrl+4 The Action Properties Window opens. select the location onto which you want to add an action and do one of the following. Page. Page. sections.See also: Understanding inheritance The following table lists all events. the action. o From the Add menu. See also: About Actions To add an action to your title: 1. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . In the Title Explorer.

2. the action will execute. test sections. Click the General tab if the Action Properties window is not already opened to this tab. Use the tabs on the Action Properties window to complete these tasks: General tab Condition tab  Change the name of an action  Make an action conditional Else tab  Select an action's trigger  Execute an alternative action when conditions are not  Select an action met  Select an action's target  Delay an action  Enable author control on an action When you have completed defining your action. test sections. Executes the action when a media object (such as a video) to which the action is attached. you can preview the functionality of the action within your title by clicking the Run Mode or Preview Mode toolbar graphic on the Mode bar. The Action Properties window opens. 3. chapters. Double-click on the action graphic of the action you want to change within your Title Explorer. This will also launch the Debug Window. 2. has completed playing. Different action triggers are available based on the location to which you are adding an action. Actions with this trigger can also be applied to timer progress bars. sections. tests. The action will only execute in titles published to the Web if the media is converted to Flash. is hidden. Executes the action when the user presses a specified key on his or her keyboard. and surveys. This trigger can also be used to execute an action when navigating off of a page and can be applied to organizational levels such as the title. Click the Next Key Typed button. Specify the new name of the action in the Action Name field. pages. When the time specified within the timer progress bar has elapsed. and surveys. Selecting an action's trigger The action trigger determines when an action is executed. Actions with this trigger can only be applied to organizational levels such as the title. sections. chapters. Alt. Click OK. tests. which will display when the action was fired and any variable manipulations that occur with the action. Use the On list within the Action Properties window to select from the following triggers: On Setting Any Key Description Executes the action when the user presses any key on his or her keyboard. and press the key you want to execute the action. See also: Hide Publishing a Title Working with Progress Bars Done Playing Executes the action when an object to which the action is attached. Keystroke Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . pages. See also: Using Lectora's Modes Changing the name of an action To change the name of an action: 1. Key combinations using the Shift. You can also preview the functionality of the action within your title by clicking the Debug Mode toolbar graphic on the Mode bar.

This trigger cannot be applied to organizational levels such as the title. audio. tests. tests. Actions with this trigger can only be applied to organizational levels such as the title. and surveys. Different actions are available based on the trigger selected. tests. form object. When this is selected. and surveys. video and other objects. test sections. Executes the action when an object to which the action is attached. Mouse Exit Show Right Mouse Click Timer Selecting an action The action determines what action will be taken when the specified On trigger has occurred. tests. select Standard Message Window and specify Display Message Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . You can display specified text in a generic message box or you can display one of your title's pages in a pop-up window. and surveys. Executes the action when a user moves the mouse cursor off of the object to which the action is attached. sections. tests. sections. pages. test sections. sections.and Ctrl keys are accepted. chapters. This trigger cannot be applied to organizational levels such as the title. chapters. sections. This trigger cannot be applied to organizational levels such as the title. specify the time interval (in seconds) by typing a value in the Time Interval field. To display specified text in a generic message box. test sections. sections. chapters. This trigger can also be used to execute an action when navigating on to a page and can be applied to organizational levels such as the title. pages. pages. and surveys if the title is being published to the Web. chapters. Executes the action when a user clicks his or her right mouse button on the object or page to which the action is attached. sections. is displayed. and surveys if the title is being published to the Web. and surveys. Executes the action continuously on a specified time interval. pages. Mouse Click Executes the action when a user clicks his or her left mouse button on the object or page to which the action is attached. and surveys if the title is being published to the Web. Mouse Enter Executes the action when a user places the mouse cursor over the object to which the action is attached. tests. pages. test sections. chapters. change the contents of questions. On triggers do not apply to actions specified within button. Mouse Double Executes the action when a user double clicks his or her left mouse button on the object or page to which Click the action is attached. sections. chapters. test or survey properties. chapters. This trigger cannot be applied to organizational levels such as the title. test sections. See also: Change Contents Setting the resulting action when a test is failed Setting the resulting action when a survey is canceled This action changes the contents of the object to which the action is applied and replaces it with the target object specified. This action can be used to change the contents of a text block to a specified variable value. or change images. This action can be used to display two different types of messages. pages. test sections. tests. This will capture the keystroke for the action. pages. This trigger cannot be applied to organizational levels such as the title. Use the Action list within the Action Properties window to select from the following actions: Action Setting Cancel Test/ Survey Description This action cancels the target test or survey and causes the When Canceled/Failed action within the target test's or target survey's properties to execute. test sections.

specify the file's location in the Program/Document field. Exit Title/Close Window Flash Command This action exits the title if it is executed from the main window presenting the title or closes the current window if it is executed from a secondary or pop-up window. When you select this option. the selected transition (out) will be applied to the target object. you can further specify if the target location should be opened in a separate window. the email server must be configured to accept communications from the published title's location. you can also choose to automatically scroll to an object on the page. If the location selected is scrollable. This action enables communications with a Flash animation and is only available if a Flash animation exists in the location to which you are adding the action. You can directly specify the coordinates. See also: Adding additional files to your title To specify a relative or fully qualified Web address of the file you want to launch. See also: Go To Executing Flash commands This action navigates to the target location specified. To specify a random X or Y coordinate. When the target object is hidden. or specify the value of an existing variable to use for either coordinate. If you have not yet added the additional file. this setting has no effect. Mail To This action launches the user's email application and creates a new email to the address specified in the Email Address field. To display an additional file. See also: Specifying an object's transitions Launch a Program/ Document This action will launch the specified program or document. This action requires that each user have an email client. enter RAND(min. it will display the page with the scroll point at the top of the window. further specify the Flash command and additional information as necessary. When the action is executed. When you select this option. so the email can be successfully submitted. You can launch one of the additional files contained within your title. Modify Variable This action enables you to set or change the value of a variable. click the Add File button to navigate and select the file you want to add. If the content on the page fits within the viewing window without requiring a scrollbar. or you can specify a relative or fully qualified Web address of the file you want to launch. To display one of your title's pages in a pop-up window. See also: Executing Go To actions Hide This action causes the target object to become hidden if it is currently visible. such as Microsoft Outlook.the custom message. specify random coordinates. select the Use Attached File check box and select the file from the Attached File list. max) in the X Coordinate or Y Coordinate Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . See also: Move To Modifying variable values This action repositions the target object to a specified X Coordinate and Y Coordinate at the Animation Speed you select. select Custom Message Window and select the page you want to display. In addition. on the computer from which they are accessing the published title. Select the object from the Scroll To list.

field. The random number assigned will be greater than or equal to the min value specified and less than or equal to the max value specified. enabling the user to print the current page. This position is relative to the Range specified within the target progress bar's properties. This action resets the target question. This action causes the target media object such as a video or audio clip to pause. This action can also be used to begin a timer progress bar. Use the Animation Speed slider to select a speed from Slow to Fast. where Variable_Name is the name of the variable whose value will be used to reposition the object to the new X Coordinate or Y Coordinate. Process Question This action processes the target question. Processing the question includes determining whether the answer is correct or incorrect and displaying the corresponding feedback (if any) defined within the question properties. this action causes the test score to be reset to 0. Mute FLV Media None Pause Play When executed. if it is currently playing. This action causes the target media object such as a video or audio clip to begin playing. specify a random position. enter VAR(Variable_Name) in the X Coordinate or Y Coordinate field. from top to bottom. This will reset all test results. If the target test is randomized. Run Action Group This action starts the target action group (a group containing only actions). questions. See also: Grouping and Ungrouping Objects Set Progress This action sets the target custom progress bar to a specified Position. To specify a random position. and reset the question back to its default. the action will additionally cause the test pages to be re-randomized. This action causes all the form objects of the target form to be reset to their initial or default values. unanswered state. If the target is a test. this action will reset all of the survey questions contained within the survey to their default. enter RAND(min. See also: Working with Progress Bars Print Current Page This action will launch the user's Print window. unanswered state. if it is not already playing. This is the default action. as the actions are listed within the group in the Title Explorer. To specify the value of an existing variable to use for the X or Y coordinate. You can directly specify a position. This action does nothing. The actions contained within the action group will begin executing one-by-one. the action will stop the audio of all Flash media in the title. The random number generated will be used to reposition the object to the new X Coordinate or Y Coordinate. or specify the value of an existing variable to use for the position. reserved variables) to be reset to their initial or default values. and will reset all of the questions contained within the test to their default. The random number assigned will be greater than or equal to the min value specified and less than or equal to the max value specified. The random number generated will be used to specify the new Position of the Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . max) in the Position field. unanswered state. This will clear the question's answer if it was previously supplied. and form objects. See also: Reset All Variables Reset Form Reset Question Reset Test/Survey Adding Questions This action causes all the variables contained in the title (except for the read-only. If the target is a survey.

The random number assigned will be greater than or equal to the min value specified and less than or equal to the max value specified. height. You can also specify a percentage relative to the target object's current size. Step Progress This action increments the target custom progress bar according to the specified Step Size within the target progress bar's properties. This action submits the target form using the specified submission properties set for the target form. To specify the value of an existing variable to use for the width. To specify the value of an existing variable to use for the position. so the email can be successfully submitted. Use the Animation Speed slider to select a speed from Slow to Fast. such as Microsoft Outlook. or percentage enter VAR(Variable_Name) in the Width. where <email_address> is the email address of a recipient to which you want to submit the variable values. When the target object is shown. enter RAND(min. results to be submitted. This action requires that each user have an email client. the selected transition (in) will be applied to the target object. or specify the value of an existing variable to use for the width and height. You can also specify mailto:<email_address> in this field. See also: Working with Progress Bars Stop Submit Form This action causes the target media object such as a video or audio clip to stop playing. To specify a random width or height. and the Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . where Variable_Name is the name of the variable whose value will be used to specify the new Position of the progress bar. The random number generated will be used to specify the new Width or Height of the object. Survey and Form Results to CGI Submit/Process If the target is a test. enter VAR(Variable_Name) in the Position field. select the Use Percentage check box. In addition. See also: Specifying an object's transitions Size To This action resizes the target object to a specified Width and Height in pixels at the Animation Speed you select. this action causes the test to be scored. Height or Percentage of the object. on the computer from which they are accessing the published title. See also: Show Working with Progress Bars This action causes the target object to become visible if it is currently hidden. specify a random width or height. To specify a percentage relative to the target object's current size. See also: Setting form submission properties Submit Variable Values This action submits the values of all defined variables to the relative or fully qualified Web address (typically a CGI script) specified in the Submit Address field. Select the percentage from the Percentage list. if it is currently playing. where Variable_Name is the name of the variable whose value will be used to specify the new Width. Height or Percentage field. See also: Submitting Test. You can directly specify a width and height in pixels.progress bar. or directly type a value into the field. the email server must be configured to accept communications from the published title's location. max) in the Width or Height field.

Use the Command list to select from the available Flash commands for communicating with your Flash animation: Go To Frame When executed. Similar to the Go To Frame option. and the appropriate When Completed or When Canceled survey actions to be executed. the action will navigate within the target Flash animation to the previous frame. the selected transition (out) will be applied to the target object. When executed. See also: Ummute FLV Media Specifying an object's transitions When executed. When executed. 3. The frame number specified is 0-based. When the target object is shown. If you want to navigate to the 34th frame of the target Flash animation. the action will navigate within the target Flash animation to the frame number specified in the Number field. the action will set the value of a variable contained within the target Flash animation to the value specified in the Value field. enter "33" in the Number field. Specify the target Flash Go To Next Frame Go To Previous Frame Go To Label Set Variable Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . this action causes the survey results to be submitted. When the target object is hidden. That is. when executed. Executing Flash commands The Flash Command action is only available if a Flash object (. Toggle Visibility State This action causes the target object to either become visible or hidden. if you want to navigate to the first frame of the target Flash animation. See also: Adding an Action 2.swf) is accessible from the location to which the action is being added. enter "0" in the Number field. the selected transition (in) will be applied to the target object. the action will play the audio of all Flash media in the title. Add an action to your title and select Flash Command from the Action list. the action will navigate within the target Flash animation to the next frame. This is the Flash animation to which you want to apply the Flash command. See also: Creating a test If the target is a survey. When executed. depending on its current visibility state. The label Name specified must match a frame label within the target Flash animation. Select the target Flash animation from the Target list.Test/Survey appropriate When Completed/Passed or When Canceled/Failed test actions to be executed. See also: Creating a survey Toggle Play Mode This action causes the target media object such as a video or audio clip to either start or stop playing. depending on whether it is currently stopped or currently playing. See also: Working with Animations To execute a Flash command: 1. the action will navigate within the target Flash animation to the frame label specified in the Name field.

When executed. where it should appear relative to the parent window. the action will stop the audio of the target Flash media. 2. Play Stop Pause Mute FLV Media Ummute FLV Media Call Function Executing Go To actions The Go To action enables direct navigation within a title. See also: Selecting an action's target When the Go To action is selected and the Target is either Chapter. max) in the Value field. the action will play the target Flash animation. the action will play the audio of the target Flash media. You can directly specify a value. 4. Select the Open in New Window check box. Use the Name field to specify the name of the function you want to execute. and additional HTML properties that Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . or specify the value of an existing variable to which the Flash animation's variable should be set. if your Flash animation contains a function myFunction( arg ). the action will execute a function defined within the target Flash animation. To specify the value of an existing variable to which Flash animation's variable should be set. Section or Page or Web Address. To specify a random value. The random number generated will be assigned to the value of the variable specified in the Name field. When executed. This option gives you the ability to open the target location in a new window. Use the Value field to optionally specify a string-valued argument for the function. enter VAR(Variable_Name) in the Value field. where Variable_Name is the name of the variable within your title whose value will be assigned to the value of the variable specified in the Name field. When executed. The resulting window enables you to define the window size. When executed. Click the Window Properties button to configure the new window's properties. specify myFunction in the Name field and specify the appropriate value (representing arg) that you want passed into the function in the Value field. Click OK. For example. Specify the target Flash animation's variable name in the Name field and use the Variable list to select the variable within your title to which you want to save the value. When executed. the action will retrieve the value of a variable contained within the target Flash animation and save it to a specified variable within your title. When executed. To open the target location in a new window: 1. the action will stop the target Flash animation. specify a random value. The resulting action is dependent upon the target used with the action. The function myFunction must be registered as callable from a container within Flash. the action will pause the target Flash animation.animation's variable name in the Name field and use the Value field to specify the value to which this variable should be set. The random number assigned will be greater than or equal to the min value specified and less than or equal to the max value specified. enter RAND(min. The Window Properties button is enabled. that you want to execute. the Open in New Window check box is enabled. Get Variable When executed.

Use the Target list within the Action Properties window to select from the following targets: Target Setting Back Description This target can be used with the Go To action. See also: Publishing Options Web 2. it will take the user to the previously viewed page. Different targets are available based on the action selected. When this target is selected. Screen Position No Scrollbars No Menubar No Toolbar Non resizable Window No Status Bar No Location Bar When this option is selected. the status bar is disabled within the browser window. the toolbar is disabled within the browser window. When this option is selected. Specify the following information within the New Window Properties window: Window Name Window Style The name specified will appear at the top of the new window. This is the default. 3. regardless of its location within the title. Clear this option to specify the exact x and y coordinates of where you want the new window to open. 4. this setting Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 .0 Style Pop Up Select this to display a Web 2. This specifies the location of where the new window will open. the location bar is disabled within the browser window. When the action is executed. When this option is selected. or This target can be used with the Go To action. This will override the publishing option for pop-up windows (Use Web 2. the window will open to the page size of the target location. section or page from the Name list. Chapter. Clear this option to specify the width and height of the new window size in pixels.0 style pop-ups eliminate issues your users might encounter with pop-up blockers. users will not be able to resize the browser window. the menu bar is disabled within the browser window. If the location selected is scrollable. Using Web 2. This specifies the size to which the new window will open. Select from the following: Use Publish Option Select this to use the publishing option for pop-up windows (Use Web 2.0-based pop-up window. New Browser Window Window Size Select this to create a new browser window. When this option is selected. you can select a Page specific chapter. Click OK. Section. the scrollbars are disabled within the browser window.determine the controls that should be displayed within the browser window if the title is published to the Web. When this option is selected. Use the drop-down list to select the style of the window.0 Style Pop Ups). When this option is selected.0 Style Pop Ups) to determine the style of the window. Selecting an action's target The target is the object or location to which the action is applied. If the content on the page fits within the viewing window without requiring a scrollbar. If Use Default Size is selected. you can also choose to automatically scroll to an object on the page. Select the object from the Scroll To list. relative to the upper-left corner of the parent window.

Variables are the targets for any Modify Variable actions and Change Contents actions where the target is a text block. Click OK. you can scroll to an object on the current page. Enabling author control on an action Protect the contents of an action by enabling Author Control. When the action's trigger is fired. Next Section. it will take the user to the location and scroll point specified. When the action is executed. it will open the title specified in the Title location field. audio. When the action is executed. With Author Control enabled. or previous page. This target can be used with the Go To action. To delay an action: 1. Previous Page Title Web Address This target can be used with the Go To action. When the action is executed. A relative or fully qualified path can be specified within the Web address field. or Next Page Previous Chapter. See also: Current Page Executing Go To actions This target can be used with the Go To action. or to the previous chapter. Click the General tab if the Action Properties window is not already opened to this tab. relative to the current location. The Action Properties window opens. When the action is executed. Double-click on the action graphic of the action you want to change within your Title Explorer. When this target is used. Objects such as images. the action will not execute until the delay time has elapsed. 2. When this target is used. These targets can be used with the Go To action. 3. Next Chapter. or next page. previous section. additional authors will not be able to edit the action unless they have the master Author Control password. relative to the current location. next section. When the action is executed. See also: Modifying variable values within a title Displaying a variable value Delaying an action You can delay an action by a specified number of seconds. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . video and progress bars can be targets of many actions. When the action is executed. Select the Delay before action check box and specify the number of seconds to delay the action. These targets can be used with the Go To action. See also: This Object Objects Variables Executing Go To actions Use this target to reference the object to which the action is applied. Select the object from the Scroll To list. it will take the user to the Web address specified in the Web address field. it will take the user Previous Section. the current page will scroll to present the scroll point object at the top of the window. This enables you to easily re-use the action on other objects without having to specifically identify a new target. it will take the user to the next chapter. you have the ability to open the target location in a new window. When this target is selected. The master Author Control password must first be set within the Title Properties. you have the ability to open the target location in a new window.has no effect.

To input multiple conditions. If MyVariable = 1. Create the new action as necessary. You can directly specify a value. Select Perform Action ONLY if the following is TRUE. Click the Condition tab. Double-click on the action graphic of the action you want to change within your Title Explorer. click on the Multiple Conditions button. You can specify single or multiple conditions for an action. Value The value to which the value of the Variable is being compared. You can then use the additional fields to specify other variables and relationships. Making an action conditional Using variables. Defining conditions Three components make up a condition: Variable The name of the variable whose value must satisfy the Relationship with the Value for the action to execute. is true. 3. Click OK. Double-click on the action graphic of the action you want to change within your Title Explorer. specify a random number or specify the value of an existing variable. Click the General tab if the Action Properties window is not already opened to this tab. only when the specified conditions have been satisfied. From the Conditions tab of the new Action Properties window. Conditional actions are actions that will only execute when a logical variable statement such as MyVariable equals 1. Action A will execute when the On trigger specified on the General tab of the Action Properties window is fired. select whether All of the Following conditions or Any of the Following conditions should be true to execute the action specified on the General tab of the Action Properties window. click the Copy Conditions button. you can create conditional actions. the action will not execute. If MyVariable is equal to anything other than 1.See also: Protecting your title with a password To enable author control on an action: 1. This enables you to execute the action. 2. You can copy and paste multiple conditions from one action to another. If multiple conditions are defined. Once you have finished defining your actions. See also: Defining Conditions To place a condition on an action: 1. Select the Variable from the list. click the Multiple Conditions button and further click the Paste Conditions button to paste the copied conditions to the new action. Click OK. 3. 2. Conditions require the use of a variable. Select the Author Control check box. The Action Properties window opens. Consider the following example:  Action A The action specified on the General tab of the Action Properties window.  MyVariable = 1 The condition specified on the Condition tab of the Action Properties window. The Action Properties window opens. select a Relationship and enter a Value. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Relationshi The relationship between the value of the Variable and the value in the Value field that must be true for the p action to execute.

The random number generated will be used to determine the Relationship with the Variable. Determines if the question associated with the Variable was answered correctly. See also: Setting test result properties Is Not Passed Determines if the test associated with the Variable was passed. the condition is true. Determines if the value of the Variable is equal to the value typed in the Value field. Determines if the question associated with the Variable was answered correctly. the condition is true. enter RAND(min. Within each condition. Determines if the test associated with the Variable was passed. These three parts work together to create a single condition. Executing an alternative action when conditions are not met Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . the condition is true. See also: Setting test result properties Less Than Less Than or Equal Not Equal To Determines if the value of the Variable is less than the value typed in the Value field. the condition is true. The random number assigned will be greater than or equal to the min value specified and less than or equal to the max value specified. max) in the Value field. Determines if the value of the Variable is less than or equal to the value typed in the Value field. If so. If not. the condition is true. Determines if the value of the Variable is greater than the value typed in the Value field. the condition is true. the condition is true. To specify the value of an existing variable. If not. Determines if the value of the Variable is equal to the value typed in the Value field. If so.To specify a random number. Based on the test's Lowest Passing Score. where Variable_Name is the name of the variable whose value will be used to determine the Relationship with the Variable. Determines if the value of the Variable is greater than or equal to the value typed in the Value field. If not. If so. Based on the test's Lowest Passing Score. If so. the condition is true. the condition is true. If so. If not. If so. Determines if the Variable has a value. the following relationships can be used: Contains Does Not Contain Equal To Greater Than Greater Than or Equal Is Correct Is Empty Is Not Correct Is Not Empty Is Passed Determines if the value of the Variable contains the value typed in the Value field. Determines if the Variable has a value. If so. Determines if the value of the Variable contains the value typed in the Value field. the condition is true. the condition is true. the condition is true. If so. the condition is true. If not. enter VAR(Variable_Name) in the Value field. If so. the condition is true.

You can execute an alternative action when the conditions specified on the Condition tab of the Action Properties window have not been met. Action B The action specified on the Else tab of the Action Properties window. Double-click on the action graphic of the action you want to change within your Title Explorer. Select the If the conditions are not met. To execute an alternative action when the conditions are not met: 1. as the title author. Specify additional information as necessary. For example. Variables enable you. The Target field is enabled when the action requires a target. Every title has a set of reserved variables and you can create your own variables. to capture what a user has done (such as click on a button) within the title and to conditionally act on that at a later time. 2. You can conditionally perform actions in a title based on variable values and you can display variable values to the user. Click OK. 5. This section covers the following topics:  About variables  Reserved variables  Using the Variable Manager  Modifying variable values within a title  Displaying a variable value About Variables Variables are logical objects within a Lectora title that enable you to store. 3. Variables can be used to create conditional actions or display dynamic information to the user.. Consider the following example:  Action A The action specified on the General tab of the Action Properties window. including branching to different sections of a title depending on user preferences and displaying information based on multiple user inputs. Action A will execute and otherwise. Action B will execute when the On trigger specified on the General tab of the Action Properties window is fired. modify. There are many uses for variables. perform the following action check box. and test values of numbers or strings during the runtime of a published title. The Action Properties window opens. Click the Else tab. See also: Selecting an action Selecting an action's target Working with Variables Lectora gives you the ability to use variables within your title. Use the Action list to select the action to execute when the conditions are not met. If MyVariable = 1.   MyVariable = 1 The condition specified on the Condition tab of the Action Properties window. suppose you want to give users 3 opportunities to answer a question correctly. 4. You can create a question with Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 .

4:20 PM. this variable contains today’s date in the form <Day of the Week>. See also: Specifying the type of title Description This variable contains the name of the browser currently used to view the title. March 11. The user will click on the button to see if their answer is correct. If there is no current section. This variable contains the name of the chapter that includes the current page being displayed. <Month> <Day>. For titles published to the Web. such as Internet Explorer. some of which are read-only. you can execute a conditional action that if the Question_Count is greater than or equal to 3. they cannot be modified. then this variable has the value of Unknown. 2008. The variable is set to Lectora when run in preview mode. For titles published to the Web. For example: Wednesday. reveal the correct answer to the user. the variable value contains the browser used to view the title. <Year>. 2008. This variable contains the name of the current page. reserved variables. For example. The Question_Count variable is initially 0. and LectoraViewer when run as a published CD title. Dynamically Updated? No Predefined Variable BrowserType CurrentChapterName Yes CurrentDate No CurrentPageName CurrentSectionName Yes Yes CurrentTime No Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . you can increment the value of a Question_Count variable. Every time the user clicks on the button. this variable contains today’s date in the form <Month> <Day>. These variables are read-only. Finally. For titles published to a single-file executable or CD-ROM. This variable contains the current time in the form hh:mm AM/ PM. are available within the title depending upon the type of title you are creating.a Check My Answer button. Reserved variables Every Lectora title has a set of predefined. For example: March 11. Additional variables. and can modified to increase by a value of 1 every time the user clicks on the Check My Answer button. then this variable has the value of Unknown. <Year>. If there is no current chapter. This variable contains the name of the section that includes the current page being displayed.

<Year> hh:mm AM/PM. This variable contains the current page number relative to the pages within the current section. the value is 0. For CD-published titles. a variable will be created that will contain the score of the test. For each test section in the title. For example. and MacPPC for Macintosh PowerPC platforms. This variable contains the current page number relative to the pages within the current chapter. 2008 4:20 PM. If the test has not yet been taken or the test cannot be scored. If Yes your title contains frames. the value is 0. This variable contains the user's answer to the question. this variable contains the total number of pages within that frame.CurrentTitleName ElapsedTime PageInChapter PagesInChapter PageInSection PagesInSection PageInTitle This variable contains the name of the title. This variable contains the amount of time the user has spent within the current title. This variable contains the user's selection from the radio buttons contained in the group. For titles published to the Web. This variable name can be changed within the question's properties. For each test in the title. a variable will be created that will Yes Checkbox_#### Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . a variable will be created that will contain the score of the test section. This variable contains the total number of pages in the current section. this variable contains the current page relative to the total number of pages within that frame. If selected. July 21. the variable will have a value of "on" and otherwise will have no value. Microsoft Windows XP. This variable contains the total number of pages in the current chapter. No PagesInTitle Platform PublishDate No <test name>_Score No <test name>_<test section >_Score Question_#### No Yes RadioGroup_#### Yes Radio_#### For each radio button (not contained in a radio button group) in Yes the title. the variable contains Win32 for 32-bit Windows platforms. If your title contains frames. a variable will be created that will contain whether the radio button is selected. This variable name can be changed within the radio button's properties. This variable name can be changed within the radio button group's properties. For each check box in the title. This variable contains the total number of pages in the title. This variable contains the date and time that the title was published in the form <Month> <Day>. If the test has not yet been taken or the test cannot be scored. Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes This variable contains the current page number relative to the Yes entire title. This variable contains the name of the platform on which the published title is running. this could contain Microsoft Windows NT. and so on.

If you modify the value of this variable within the content of a course that contains more than one automatically Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . This variable contains the id of the course in the AICC/SCORM No learning management system. The AICC/SCORM LMS will further modify the variable based on the current AICC_Score for the user and the value specified as the Mastery Score. This variable reflects whether the AICC/SCORM title is being taken for "credit" or just in a "browse" mode. a variable will be created that will Yes contain what the user has selected from the drop-down list. This variable name can be changed within the list box's properties. This variable name can be changed within the drop-down list's properties. Yes List_#### If you have designated your title as an AICC/SCORM/CourseMill (3.x and above) Published Title. If selected. Yes DropList_#### For each drop-down in the title. Entry_#### For each entry field in the title. Lectora sets the value of this variable to incomplete. the following additional variables are available within your title: Predefined Variable AICC_Core_Lesson Description Modifiable? This variable contains information used by the published title to Yes properly calculate the score of the user in the current title. then the AICC_Score of the student cannot be properly updated and reflected to the AICC/SCORM Learning Management System (LMS). a variable will be created that will contain what the user has typed within the entry field. This variable contains the current location within the title content. a variable will be created that will contain what the user has selected from the list box. This variable name can be changed within the entry field's properties. No No Yes AICC_Core_Vendor AICC_Course_ID AICC_Credit AICC_Lesson_ID AICC_Lesson_Location AICC_Lesson_Status Yes AICC_Score This variable contains the average of all test scores in the Yes published title. For each list box in the title. This variable contains the current status of the course within the AICC/SCORM LMS. This variable is not used by Lectorapublished content. the variable will have a value of "on" and otherwise will have no value. This variable contains the name of the title's assignable unit. This variable contains the information required by Lectora when No running an AICC-compliant title within an AICC learning management system. This variable name can be changed within the check box's properties. If you modify the value of this variable within the content of a title that contains more than one automatically graded test.contain whether the check box is selected. The Lectora published content sets this variable on every page of the title to reflect the current location of the student within the AICC/SCORM LMS.

This variable is only accessible in SCORM 2004 published titles and contains information related to whether the student has previously accessed the published title.graded test. add. AICC_Student_ID AICC_Student_Name AICC_Time This variable contains the user id as reported by the AICC/ SCORM LMS. In a SCORM 2004 published course. No No Yes CMI_Core_Entry No CMI_Core_Exit This variable is only accessible in SCORM-published titles and Yes is used to indicate how or why the student exited the published title. You can display all of the User-Defined variables. this variable must be in the format of HH:MM: SS:mm to be valid when reported to the AICC LMS. the modification will be lost when the student exits the title. This variable contains the user name as reported by the AICC/ SCORM LMS. The Variable Manager window opens.0 learning management system. and delete variables. If you modify the value of this variable. edit. All reserved and user-defined variables within your title are accessible from the Variable Manager window. This variable contains the student name as reported by CourseMill. Unused variables. Yes CMI_Completion_Status If the title is being created for placement on the CourseMill 2. This variable contains the total time the user has been in the published title. This variable contains the name of the title as defined in CourseMill This variable contains the student ID as reported by CourseMill. Click the Variable Manager toolbar graphic from the Tools toolbar or select Variable Manager from the Tools menu. the modification will be lost when the user completes an automatically graded test. This value is automatically updated while the student is viewing the title. Modifiable? No No No No Using the Variable Manager You can use the Variable Manager to browse. the author MUST set this variable at the point in the course that the student has been determined to have completed viewing the necessary content for the course. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . or Reserved variables by clicking the corresponding tabs. This variable is only accessible in SCORM 2004 published titles and determines the point at which the student has actually completed viewing the published title. Also. the following additional variables are available: Predefined Variables CM_Course_ID CM_Course_Name CM_Student_ID CM_Student_Name Description This variable contains the ID of the course as defined in CourseMill. Use the tabs within the Variable Manager window to display the lists of variables within your title.

2. When the published title is launched. When you select this option. the next time the user launches the published sessions title. you can also create your own variables. Use the controls within the Variable Information box to specify the following: Variable Name Initial Value Specify the name for the variable.Use the Variable Manager window to complete the following tasks:  View a variable's usage  Create a variable  Edit a variable  Delete a variable Viewing a variable's usage The Variable Manager will display the details of where your variables are being used within the title. Creating a variable Every Lectora title has a set of reserved variables. The variable's usage details are displayed within the Variable Used box. Variable names cannot contain spaces or special characters. the specific chapter. With value between this selected. Select the variable within the list. Click Close. Click the Variable Manager toolbar graphic The Variable Manager window opens. To view a variable's usage: 1. Click the Add button. 3. This is the default value of the variable when the published title is launched. 4. or page containing the action using the variable will be displayed. Random initial value Select this to assign a random integer value to a variable. The Variable Manager window opens. specify the Min Value and Max Value in the fields provided. from the Tools toolbar or select Variable Manager from the Tools menu. 3. Retain variable Select this to retain the variable's value through subsequent launches of the published title. See also: Reserved variables To create a variable: 1. if the variable value has changed. Otherwise. Click the Variable Manager toolbar graphic from the Tools toolbar or select Variable Manager from the Tools menu. If the variable is used within an action at the title level. the variable will load with the previously modified value. 2. This name must be unique to all existing variable names. the Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . the action name will appear within the list. For example: o Action 1 o Chapter 1 > Page 1 > My Action o Chapter 2 > Section 3 > Page 4 > My Other Action Click on any of the locations within the Variable Used box to highlight the corresponding action within the Title Explorer of your title. Specify the initial value for the variable. Click the User-Defined tab if you want to see the usage of one of your user-defined variables or click the Reserved tab if you want to see the usage of a reserved variable. The new variable is added to the list. however. section. Click on the User-Defined tab if the Variable Manager window is not already opened to this tab.

the variable will load with the previously modified value. Reserved variables and user-defined variables being used within your title cannot be deleted. To delete a variable: 1. To edit a variable: 1. multiply and divide variable values. 3. Specify the initial value for the variable. subtract from. the next time the user launches the published sessions title. so this action can be added to any location within your title. initial value. 3. The Variable Manager window opens. Click OK to accept the changes. Click Close. Variable names cannot contain spaces or special characters. Click the Unused tab. Deleting a variable You can delete unused variables within your title. if the variable value has changed. With value between this selected. Click OK to create the new variable.default value of the variable will be a random number greater than or equal to the Min Value specified and less than or equal to the Max Value specified. add to. If you want to delete all unused variables within your title. The Variable Manager window opens. 2. When the published title is launched. 4. Click on the User-Defined tab if the Variable Manager window is not already opened to this tab. Editing a variable When you have created a user-defined variable. This name must be unique to all existing variable names. Add an action to your title and select Modify Variable from the Action list. To modify a variable value: 1. This is the default value of the variable when the published title is launched. Use the controls within the Variable Information box to edit the following: Variable Name Initial Value Specify the name for the variable. you can edit its name. click the Delete All button. The Modify Variable action enables you to replace. the default value of the variable will be a random number greater than or equal to the Min Value specified and less than or equal to the Max Value specified. specify the Min Value and Max Value in the fields provided. and whether or not it is retained. Reserved variables cannot be edited. Click the Variable Manager toolbar graphic from the Tools toolbar or select Variable Manager from the Tools menu. 4. Modifying variable values within a title You can modify the value of a variable during the runtime of a published title. Click the Variable Manager toolbar graphic from the Tools toolbar or select Variable Manager from the Tools menu. Select the variable you want to delete and click the Delete button. See also: Adding an Action Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . round. 2. When you select this option. Random initial value Select this to assign a random integer value to a variable. All variables can be accessed from anywhere within your title. Retain variable Select this to retain the variable's value through subsequent launches of the published title. Select the user-defined variable you want to edit and click the Edit button.

When necessary. It will result in the mathematical multiplication of the target variable's value and the value specified in the Value field. For example. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . For example. specify the value in the Value field by which you want to modify the target variable's value. click the New Variable button and add a new variable. For example. the resulting value of the target variable is BCB. the resulting value of the target variable is 3. Round Variable This modification type is only applicable for number-valued variables. For example.5 but greater than 3. The random number assigned will be greater than or equal to the min value specified and less than or equal to the max value specified. the resulting value of the target variable is 5. if the target variable's value is 3 and the value specified in the Value field is 2. This is the variable whose value you want to modify. Multiply Variable by Round Down This modification type is only applicable for number-valued variables. if the target variable's value is greater than or equal to 3. It can be a string-valued variable (containing non-numeric characters) or a number-valued variable (containing only numeric characters). The random number generated will be used to modify the Target variable. Set Variable This modification type will replace the current value of the target value with the value specified in Contents the Value field. this will result in the mathematical subtraction of the value that you specify in the Value field from the target variable's value.2. For string-valued variables.5 and less than 4. the resulting value of the target variable is 21.75. For example. the resulting value of the target variable is 4. the resulting value of the target variable is HelloWorld. If you have not created the variable you want to modify. if the target variable's value is Hello and the value specified in the Value field is World. enter RAND(min. if the target variable's value is 21 and the value specified in the Value field is 7. if the target variable's value is ABACAB and the value specified in the Value field is A. select a random number or specify the value of an existing variable. For example. this will result in the joining of the target variable's value and the value specified in the Value field. the resulting value of the target variable is 3. the resulting value of the target variable is 3. Select how you want to modify the variable from the Modification Type list. this will result in the mathematical addition of the target variable's Variable value and the value specified in the Value field. It will result in the target Variable variable's value being replaced by the greatest whole number lower than its current value. max) in the Value field.Choose from the following: Add to For number-valued variables. Select the target variable name from the Target list. You can directly specify a value. Subtract from Variable For number-valued variables. the resulting value of the target variable is 2. if the target variable's value is 3 and the value specified in the Value field is 7. For string-valued variables. For example. It will result in the mathematical division of the target variable's value by the value specified in the Value field. if the target variable's value is 5 and the value specified in the Value field is 3. this will result in the removal of all instances of the value that you specify in the Value field from the target variable's value. To select a random number. It will result in the target variable's value being replaced by the nearest whole number greater or lower than its current value. If the target variable's value is less than 3. See also: Creating a variable 3. 4. if the target variable's value is 3. Divide Variable by This modification type is only applicable for number-valued variables. This modification type is only applicable for number-valued variables. For example.

This will also launch the Debug Window. See also: Using Lectora's Modes Displaying a variable value Using actions. Move or resize the text block as necessary. You can also preview the functionality of the action within your title by clicking the Debug Mode toolbar graphic on the Mode bar. Complete the controls on the General tab as follows: o From the On list. For example. which will display when the action was fired and any variable manipulations that occur with the action. This enables you to customize your title for each user. that you selected in step 1 and add an action by clicking the Add Action toolbar graphic on the Insert toolbar. Note the name of the text block. The Action Properties window opens. The Variable_Name is the name of the variable whose value should be used to modify the Target variable. You can also type text within the text block. follow these steps: 1. Click OK. Variables are displayed by setting the contents of a text block to the value of a variable. select Show o From the Action list. See also: Adding a text block and typing the text within the text block Understanding Inheritance To display a variable.To specify the value of an existing variable. When you have completed defining your action. When you have completed defining your action. Click the General tab if the Action Properties window is not already opened to this tab. suppose you want to display the page number on each page. the page number will appear on every page of the title. Click OK. you can display the value of a variable within a title. 5. Select a page in the Title Explorer to which you want to display a variable's value and add a text block by clicking the Add Text Block toolbar graphic on the Insert toolbar. This text will be replaced with the variable value when the action is triggered. enter VAR(Variable_Name) in the Value field. You can complete the following using various Lectora tools and wizards: Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . You can create a single action to display the value of the PageInTitle variable. See also: Using Lectora's Modes Tools and Wizards This chapter describes many of the tools and wizards provided by Lectora to assist you in building your title. select the name of the variable (PageInTitle. 2. which will display when the action was fired and any variable manipulations that occur with the action. for example) you want to display 5. and through inheritance. you can preview the functionality of the action within your title by clicking the Run Mode or Preview Mode toolbar graphic on the Mode bar. select the name of the text block you created in step 1 o From the New Contents list. You can also preview the functionality of the action within your title by clicking the Debug Mode toolbar graphic on the Mode bar. select Change Contents o From the Target list. 4. 3. you can preview the functionality of the action within your title by clicking the Run Mode or Preview Mode toolbar graphic on the Mode bar. Select the same page in the Title Explorer. This will also launch the Debug Window.

2. Lectora immediately runs your title through an error check process. If you are running the error check during the publishing process. select Error Check. Review the errors listed. pages without objects. and buttons leading to non-existent pages. Lectora rapidly reviews your title for errors and displays the results in the Check Title for Errors window.                    Run an Error Check Check for 508 Compliance Import Objects from Existing Lectora Titles Check Spelling Add Shapes. Common errors include pages with duplicate names. 3. See also: Specifying publish messages preferences Checking for 508 Compliance Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Double-click items that are warnings (displayed in blue) or errors (displayed in red) to jump to the page containing the object that is causing the problem. and Arrows Work with Library Objects Work with Notes Manage Variables Manage Resources Create New Media Using the Publishing Suite Tools Create Customized Backgrounds Create Custom Buttons Create Customized Certificates Create Customized Charts Automatically Number Pages Integrate PowerPoint Presentations into Your Title Translate Your Title's Text Capture screen images using Snagit Capture screen videos using Camtasia Create content using Flypaper Running an Error Check When you publish your title. Save your title. See also: Specifying the type of title Publishing a Title Follow these steps to perform an error check on your title: 1. These messages will not impede the publishing process. 4. Error messages (displayed in red) must be resolved before Lectora can successfully publish your title. The errors that are displayed are dependent upon the type of title and publishing format chosen. you can click the Publish button to proceed with publishing your title. You can configure the types of warning messages that are displayed during the publishing process. Re-run the error check as necessary until you have eliminated all errors. Lines. From the Tools menu. Make the necessary changes to your title to resolve the errors and click Done. Some warning messages (displayed in blue) may never be resolved. An error check identifies any logical errors within your title.

Save your title. Double-click items that are warnings (displayed in blue) or errors (displayed in red) to jump to the page containing the object that is causing the problem. Select it and click Open.22 (a) through (p) for Web-based Intranet and Internet Information and Applications. Use the Ctrl key to select multiple objects. You can import entire titles. see Lectora and 508 Compliancy. Lectora rapidly reviews your title for 508 Compliance errors and displays the results in the Check Title for 508 Compliance window. along with additional information about how to resolve the issue. Some warning messages (displayed in blue) may never be resolved. Make the necessary changes to your title to resolve the errors and click Done. 4. See also: Specifying notes preferences Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Use the Title Explorer to reorganize the imported content within your title. Select the object you want to import into the current working title. and pages. as well as individual objects. and SCORM/Web-based). a reference to the corresponding 508 rule is cited. From the Tools menu.22 of the Rehabilitation Act. 3. For each item that is flagged by the tool. For information about creating Lectora titles that comply with the standards set in Section 508 . Use the Import from Existing Lectora Title window to navigate and select the appropriate . 4. Click Import. follow these steps: 1. The Import from Existing Lectora Title window opens. select 508 Compliance Check.1194.awt title file from which you want to import content. 3. sections. Use the plus [+] and minus [-] signs to expand and contract the objects within the title. Select the location in the Title Explorer to which you want to import your content. To import content from an existing Lectora title. select Import from Existing Title. The content will appear within your current title. See also: Using the Title Explorer Working with Notes Notes can be added throughout a title to serve as reminders or provide instructions to title authors. From the Tools menu. Importing Objects from Existing Lectora Titles Importing from other Lectora titles saves time by eliminating the unnecessary re-development of content.The 508 Compliance Checker will help in determining if your title complies with Section 508 of the Rehabilitation Act Paragraph 1194. Re-run the 508 compliance check as necessary until you have eliminated all errors. 2. Follow these steps to run the 508 Compliance Check: 1. This is helpful in many instances. and do not appear within the published title. section. CourseMill. The Import from a Title window opens. a chapter. 2. The 508 Compliance Checker only applies to titles that will be published to a Web-based format (HTML. Simply import the entire chapter into your new Lectora title. Notes are only displayed in Edit mode. chapters. 5. You can select the entire title. 6. such as when you are creating a title that uses a similar chapter from another title. or page as well as individual objects. AICC/Web-based. You can configure the appearance of your notes within your preferences. The Import from a Title window displays the Title Explorer of the title you selected in step 3.

notes display the author name of the user that created the note. See Creating a Notes Report for more information. the page. You can also print the Notes Report. Each page containing a note will appear bolded and italicized in the Title Explorer. 3. and the date and time it was written. The notes associated with the title are displayed. Type the text of the note and close the note by clicking the close button (X) in the upper-right corner. In addition to the text contained within the note. Managing Resources Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . location. Click Close to close the Title Notes window and return to the title. Creating a Notes Report Use the Notes Report tool to view the notes associated with a title. Click the Add a Note toolbar graphic on the Tools toolbar or select Add a Note from the Tools menu. 2. Double-click any note icon to view its contents. Adding a Note To add a note to a page: 1. originator. follow these steps: 1. the Title Explorer reflects the location of the notes. and date and time of the note are displayed. The Title Notes window opens. The notepad opens within your work area with the cursor inside. 2. Select Notes Report from the Tools menu.See Adding a Note for more information. color. If the page is contained in a chapter or section. When you place notes within your title. To use the Notes Report tool. subsequently the chapter and section names will also appear bolded in the Title Explorer. For each note. select the location in which you want to add a note. In the Title Explorer. Click Print to print the Title Notes window. You can view and print the notes associated with your title using the Notes Report tool. 3. The note icon appears on the content page.

and the Resource Manager window lists all instances of the resource in the title. audio and video. See also: Searching for a resource 3. Viewing a resource's usage The Resource Manager will display the details of where your resources are being used within the title. on the Tools toolbar or select Resource Manager from the Tools menu. click the Search tab to search for a resource within your title. For example: o Chapter 1 > Page 1 > My Image o Chapter 2 > Section 3 > Page 4 > My Button Click on any of the locations within the Resource Used box to place focus on the corresponding object within Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Within the Resource Manager window. To search for a resource: 1. Select the resource within the list. the resource can be edited. and all of the information for those resources. Resources in Lectora are the actual files that are used for objects such as images. 2. Search for your resource in the following ways: o Navigate the categories by expanding and collapsing the plus [+] and minus [-] signs before the resource category names. Click the Resource Manager toolbar graphic The Resource Manager window opens. Click the Resource Manager toolbar graphic The Resource Manager window opens. you can complete the following:  Search for a resource  View a resource's usage  Change the name of a resource file  Create a unique resource  Edit a resource  Delete a resource on the Tools toolbar or select Resource  Converting to Flash audio and video Searching for a resource You can use the Resource Manager to search for a resource you have added to your title. click the Resource Manager toolbar graphic Manager from the Tools menu. The resource's usage details are displayed within the Resource Used box. The name of the file that the resource represents can be changed. Click the All tab to navigate the categories and select a resource from the list. Previews of the resources are displayed in the window on the right side of the Resource Manager window. o Click the Search tab. Click Close. To access the Resource Manager. To view a resource's usage: 1. The location and object name (name of the object as it appears in the Title Explorer) of the resource is displayed. The resulting list is populated with the resources whose file names contain the search terms provided. 3. on the Tools toolbar or select Resource Manager from the Tools menu. Alternatively. enter the search terms into the field and click the Search button. 2.The Resource Manager gives you access to all of the resources used in your title.

If you only want that image to change on one of the pages. This will not affect the name of the object within your title. Alternatively. video or audio file that is used within your title. 4.)  Documents  Images Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Click Close. Click the Create Unique Resource button.your title. Click the Resource Manager toolbar graphic The Resource Manager window opens. you can directly edit the resources used within your title. 2. Select the instance of the resource you want to make unique. you will need to create a unique resource for that image. click the Search tab to search for the resource you want to rename. See also: Searching for a resource 3. Click the Resource Manager toolbar graphic The Resource Manager window opens. you can choose to create a unique resource file from one of the instances of the resource. You can edit the following types of objects:  Animations  Audio  Buttons (You can edit the images associated with a button. 5. This is not the same as editing your object's properties. 2. The additional resource is add to the list of resources on the left. For example. Changing the name of a resource file The Resource Manager can be used to change the name of a resource file. but will rather enable you to edit the image. To change the name of a resource file: 1. If you edit that image. The resource's usage details are displayed within the Resource Used box. so you can edit it without affecting the other instances of the image. Creating a unique resource If a resource is being used multiple times within your title. Alternatively. on the Tools toolbar or select Resource Manager from the Tools menu. The option to create a unique resource is only available if the resource is being used in multiple locations. 4. Click Close. Click Close. Editing a resource Using the Resource Manager. all instances of the image will be changed within your title. Click the All tab to navigate the categories and select the resource you want to make unique. Click the All tab to navigate the categories and select the resource you want to rename. Type the new name of the resource file in the Name field and click the Rename button. and the location of the resource no longer appears within the Resource Used box. but rather will change the file name of the resource file used for the object. To create a unique resource: 1. on the Tools toolbar or select Resource Manager from the Tools menu. 4. See also: Searching for a resource 3. click the Search tab to search for the resource you want to make unique. suppose you have an image that is used on multiple pages.

click the Search tab to search for the resource you want to edit. 3. The Resource Manager window opens.flv). Click the Unused tab to navigate the categories and select the resource you want to delete. Click the Resource Manager toolbar graphic The Resource Manager window opens. 2. See also: Setting editor preferences 4. Click Remove. on the Tools toolbar or select Resource Manager from the Tools menu. The Convert to FLV window opens. Deleting a resource You can delete unused resources within your title. 2. Click the All tab to navigate the categories and select the resource you want to edit. When you convert an object to Flash audio or video. all instances of the resource are changed throughout your title. Click Close. Click the Edit button. Click the Resource Manager toolbar graphic on the Tools toolbar or select Resource Manager from the Tools menu. save the file. Lines and Arrows Video To edit a resource: 1. Click the Resource Manager toolbar graphic The Resource Manager window opens. Make the necessary changes to your resource file. To delete a resource: 1. but the quality of the media will deteriorate as compression Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Higher compression levels will result in smaller files. 12. All instances of the object are updated within your title. The option is only available for relevant file types. on the Tools toolbar or select Resource Manager from the Tools menu. Converting to Flash audio and video You can convert your audio and video objects to Flash (. The file will be launched using the appropriate application. To convert objects in your title to Flash audio and video: 11. Flash . Use the slider to select a compression level. Select the object and click the Convert to FLV button. Alternatively. See also: Searching for a resource 3. and close the application that was used to launch it.flv files require your user's computer to have the Flash plug-in installed. 5.  Shapes. Click Close. 4. 13.

Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 .flv extension. This is a highly compressed format and has the capability of synchronizing events with the audio. Otherwise. 3. This is a highly compressed format and has the capability of synchronizing events with the audio. Select the format to which you want to record the audio. Select from the following formats: Flash Audio Saves the new audio file with a . the compression results are displayed and you are asked whether to use the new file. From the Help menu within the Audio Recording Tool. See also: Working with Audio Saves the new audio file with a . The recording is added to your title. 14.flv. From the Tools menu. Requires the Windows Media Player browser plug-in. If you only have Lectora Publisher (also known as the Lectora Enterprise Edition) these tools will not appear within your Lectora Tools menu. you can record new audio files using an external microphone attached to your computer. Click the Pause button to pause the recording. Windows Media Audio Real Audio WAV Audio 3. select Contents. Requires the Real Audio browser plug-in. Use the following Publishing Suite Tools to add new images.increases. The object is converted to .ra extension. can be played with most players. 15. Creating New Media Using the Publishing Suite Tools If you have the Lectora Professional Publishing Suite. Select the location in the Title Explorer to which you want to add new audio.wav extension. screen recordings and audio to your title:  Audio Recording Tool  New Animation Tool  New Image Tool Using the Audio Recording Tool Using the Audio Recording Tool. These tools correspond with the media editor applications that are installed with the Lectora Professional Publishing Suite. For additional information about using the Audio Recording Tool. Click the Stop button to complete the recording. You can resume recording by clicking the Record button. These audio files are not compressed and result in large file sizes and long download times. Click Convert. click the Record button. screen captures.wma extension. access the help for the Audio Editor. To use the Audio Capture Tool: 1. The Audio Recording Tool window opens. click No to restore the file to its original type. When the conversion completes. Saves the new audio file with a . The Audio Recording Tool records the audio. It will appear in the Title Explorer with the label Audio Capture and the speaker graphic will appear within your work area. 4. select Audio Capture Tool. Saves the new audio file with a . 2. Click Yes. however. Click Finish. 5. an additional set of tools is available from your Lectora Tools menu. Requires the Flash browser plug-in. When you are ready to record.

The Snagit Image Editor opens. 3. From the Tools menu. Creating Custom Backgrounds Using the Background Wizard. the new animation is added to your title. The Animation Tool window opens. Thumbnails for the animation are displayed in the main window. To use the New Animation Tool: 1. Use the Width and Height fields to specify the size of the new image you want to create. Select the location in the Title Explorer to which you want to add a new animation. The Image Tool window opens. 4. Use the Image Editor controls to create and save the new animation. The background will be applied to your title properties. Use it to create and save the new image. See also: Changing a title's background properties Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . 2. select New Image Tool. 2. you can:  Create a customized background for your entire title  Create a customized background for a chapter. select New Animation Tool. you can create animated GIF files. Use the Width and Height fields to specify the size of the new animation you want to create. Click Finish. Using the New Image Tool Using the New Image Tool. From the Help menu within the Image Editor. To use the New Image Tool: 1. From the Help menu within Snagit. See also: Working with Animations For additional information about using the animation tools within the Image Editor. See also: Working with Images For additional information about using the image tools within Snagit. you can create GIF and JPEG images. section or page Creating a background for your entire title You can use the Background Wizard to create a background for your title. Click Finish. access the help for the Image Editor. When you exit the Image Editor. the new image is added to your title. access the help for the Snagit Image Editor. Select the location in the Title Explorer to which you want to add a new image. select Contents. 5. select Contents. From the Tools menu. 4. Select whether you want to create a GIF (GIFs can have transparent backgrounds) or a JPEG. 3.Using the New Animation Tool Using the New Animation Tool. The Image Editor opens with the animation tools enabled. When you exit the image editor.

placement of the border and the border size. 4. Select the scope to which you want to apply the background. Shaded Border Select this to create a background with a shaded border. Select this to create a background with a 3-dimensional. sections or pages of your title. page color. section or page You can use the Background Wizard to create a background for individual chapters. You can configure the border color. raised border. 2.To create a background for your entire title: 1. Creating a background for a chapter. 2. and Textiles. Solid Border Solid Color Select this to create a background with a solid border. Beveled Border Select this to create a background with a 3-dimensional. You can configure the border color. Select this to add a colored gradient background to your title. ending color. Select the type of background you want to add to your title and click the Next button. Click the Next button to configure the background properties and click Finish to apply the background to your title. the direction of the gradient and the percentage of the background the gradient should cover. You can configure the starting color. the direction of the gradient and the percentage of the background the gradient should cover. o The current page only o All pages in the current section o All pages in the current chapter o All pages in the title 4. raised border. 3. Beveled Border Shaded Border Select this to create a background with a shaded border. To create a background for a chapter. page color. The Scope of the background change window opens. Choose from the following types of backgrounds: Stock background from clipart Gradient Select this to choose from three categories of backgrounds: HighTech. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Select this to add a colored gradient background to your title. page color. The Scope of the background change window opens. Select the title at the top of your Title Explorer. You can configure the border color. You can configure the border color. and Textiles . placement of the border and the border size. page color. Select this to create a solid color for your background. Select the type of background you want to add to your title and click the Next button. You can configure the starting color. Click the Background Wizard graphic from the Tools toolbar or select Background Wizard from the Tools menu. Natural. Choose from the following types of backgrounds: Stock background from clipart Gradient Select this to choose from three categories of backgrounds: HighTech. placement of the border and the border size. section or page within your title: 1. You can configure the border color. ending color. Natural. placement of the border and the border size. Select the location in Title Explorer to which you want to apply the background. Click the Background Wizard graphic from the Tools toolbar or select Background Wizard from the Tools menu. 3. Select from one of the following and click Next.

6. Optionally. select the eye-dropper tool to use a color from elsewhere within your Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . These kinds of buttons enable you to specify the text. you can create two different types of buttons:  Custom color buttons with text  Stock buttons from clipart Creating custom color buttons with text Using the Button Wizard. Select each style to see samples in the preview window on the right. Select a predefined color. Using the Button window. To create a custom color button with text: 1. Select the location in the Title Explorer to which you want to add a button. If you are creating one button. 4. Select the style of button you want to create. 5. Click Next. Select a predefined color. specify the following information: Text Font Highlight Color (Font) Type the text you want to appear on the button. If you are creating multiple buttons. You can configure the border color. The Custom Button Type window opens. Click the Font button to display the Font window for selecting the font attributes of the text within your button. Click the Next button to continue. or select Custom to select a custom color from the Color wheel. Select Custom color Button with text and click Next. 2. Click the Next button to configure the background properties and click Finish to apply the background to your title. Select the color to which the text will change when the user places the cursor over the button.page color. select the eye-dropper tool to use a color from elsewhere within your title. appearance and colors used within the button. placement of the border and the border size. Button Color Select the color of your button. from the Tools toolbar or select Button Wizard from the Tools menu. select the eye-dropper tool to use a color from elsewhere within your title. page color. 5. See also: Matching Colors Used within Your Title Highlight Color Select the color to which the button will change when the user places the cursor over the button. See also: Matching Colors Used within Your Title Bevel Height Select the height of the shadowing to appear on the button so that it appears raised on the page. or select Custom to select a custom color from the Color wheel. placement of the border and the border size. Creating Custom Buttons Using the Button Wizard. Solid Color Select this to create a solid color for your background. The 3. you can create custom color buttons with text. use the Align buttons list to select whether you would like the buttons to be aligned across or down and use the Spacing between buttons field to specify the number of pixels you would like between each button. Solid Border Select this to create a background with a solid border. select Multiple Buttons and enter the number of buttons you want to create in the Number of buttons field. Click the Button Wizard toolbar graphic Button Type window opens. Select a predefined color. select Single button.

6. To create a stock button from clipart: 1. The Choose a Button window opens. Select a predefined color. 7. If you are creating multiple buttons. or select Custom to select a custom color from the Color wheel. Select the button you want to add. y size button to fit this button's text Set size of Select this option to manually set the height and width of the button. See also: Matching Colors Used within Your Title Outline Button Outline Color Select this option to outline the button. 3. If you selected more than one button. From the Tools menu. Home and Exit buttons within the gallery are pre-programmed with the corresponding action. 4. Select Stock Button from clipart and click Next. The Layout for multiple buttons window appears. Select the color of the line that will outline the button. Use the tabs within the Choose a Button window to browse the different button categories. Use the button properties to assign an action to the button. All Back. click Finish . Next. The Button Type window opens. Otherwise. If you are adding the buttons to pages with a light-colored background. select Dark backgrounds. select Button Wizard. Hold down your Ctrl key to select multiple buttons. See also: Matching Colors Used within Your Title Automaticall Select this to size all buttons to the same height and width. See also: Working with Buttons Creating stock buttons from clipart Using the Button Wizard. select the eyedropper tool to use a color from elsewhere within your title. click Next and specify the attributes for the additional buttons. Specify the height and width button of the button (in pixels) in the Height and Width fields. This option is only available if you are y size all creating multiple buttons. select Light backgrounds. click Next to align the buttons. 2. you can select from a gallery of stock buttons to add to your title. 5. buttons to the same height and width Automaticall Select this to size the button to fit this button’s text. or select Custom to select a custom color from the Color wheel. Use the Align buttons list to select whether you would like the buttons to be aligned across or down and use the Spacing between buttons field to specify the number of pixels you would like between each button. Select the location in the Title Explorer to which you want to add a button. Click Finish to add the buttons to your title.(Button) title. and if you are adding the buttons to pages with a dark-colored background. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 .

The tool guides you through customizing a certificate to add to your title. When completed. Use the Chart Title field to specify the chart title. from the Tools toolbar or select Certificate Tool from the Tools menu. The Font window opens. To use the certificate tool: 1. 2. If you have not created the variable you want to use. See also: Creating a variable 8. select the Use variable to set student name check box and select the Variable to use from the list. Creating Custom Charts Create and customize charts using the Chart Tool. When completed. The title is displayed above the chart. Enter the text you want to use as the body for your certificate. 4. from the Tools toolbar or select Chart Tool from the Tools menu. Click the Certificate Tool graphic Certificate Style window opens. 2. To display the legend. Click Next to continue. Click the Finish button to complete creating the certificate. 9. the certificate is added as a page within your title. enable the Show Legend box and use the dropSupport | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . use the button properties to assign an action to the button. Use the Chart Type drop-down list to select the type of chart. Choose from a variety of charts based on standard spreadsheet-formatted data. if applicable. Select the page in the Title Explorer on which you want to add the chart. 7. 5. the chart is added as an image that you can size and move within the page. Enter the text you want to use as the header for your certificate and click the Next button.If necessary. 5. The 3. The Header window opens. Click the Next button and enter the text that should appear below the certificate recipient's name. To use the Chart Tool: 1. Select the page in the Title Explorer after which you want to add the certificate. See also: Working with Buttons Creating Custom Certificates Create and customize certificates using the Certificate Tool. Use the controls on the Font window to specify the font settings for your certificate. This can be the AICC_Student_Name variable (if publishing to a learning management system) or any other variable used within your title containing the appropriate name for the certificate. click the New Variable button and add a new variable. A preview of the selected style is displayed to the right of the list. Double-click within the cells of the spreadsheet to edit the cells. The certificate is added as a page to your title. appearing above the name of the certificate recipient. Click the Chart Tool graphic opens. If you want to use a variable value for the name appearing on the certificate. Select the style of certificate from the list. A preview is displayed to the right. Click OK to apply your font settings. Use the scrollable spreadsheet to specify the labels and data that comprise your chart. Click the Title & Legend tab to configure the chart title and legend. The Chart Data window 3. Click Clear Data if you need to erase the data from the chart. Select if you want to Include date course was completed or Print the certificate when the page is shown. Click the Font buttons to change the font settings for the certificate text. 6. 4.

for example. you can:  Number the pages within your entire title  Number the pages within a chapter or section of your title Numbering the pages within a title To automatically number the pages within your entire title: 1. you can edit it in the Chart Tool. Specify the text representing the page in the numbering. Click OK to apply your font settings. 4. 2. Either double-click on it and click Edit on the General Tab. Select the font characteristics you want to use for the page numbering and click OK. or right-click on the chart and select Edit from the right-click menu. Select a predefined color. The text block and actions are automatically inherited throughout the rest of the title to display page numbering on every page. 6. “Page 4 of 12”. The default is “of”. Click the Font buttons to change the font settings. A sample of the text is displayed. The Page Numbering Details window opens. Use the second field to specify the text used between the page number and the total number of pages. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . The default is Page. Click the Page Numbering Tool graphic from the Tools toolbar or select Page Numbering Tool from the Tools menu. Numbering the pages within a chapter or section To automatically number the pages within a chapter or section of your title: 1. Use the controls on the Font window to specify the font settings for the chart. “-“ or “/”. Click the Finish button to add the chart to your title. Lectora will create a text block and a series of actions at the title level in the Title Explorer. See also: Matching Colors Used within Your Title Text background color Text font and color Click the Select Font button to open the Font window. 3. When the chart is added to your title. The chart is added to your title as an image object. select the eye-dropper tool to use a color from elsewhere within your title. Complete the controls on the Page Numbering Details window as follows: Include the total number of pages in the text Text Select this to include the total number of pages within your title. Slide or Sheet. For example. Click Finish. Automatically Numbering Pages Using the Page Numbering Tool. Select the chapter or section in the Title Explorer to which you want to add the page numbering.down list to select the location of the legend on the page. for example. The current fonts for the Chart Title and Legend are displayed. or select Custom to select a custom color from the Color wheel. Select the title at the top of your Title Explorer. The Font window opens. These objects are necessary for the functionality of the page numbering and should not be deleted unless you want to remove the page numbering from your title. Select the background color that will appear behind the page numbering text.

Complete the controls on the Details window as follows: Include the total number of pages in the text Text Select this to include the total number of pages within your title. “Page 4 of 12”. Complete the controls on the Scope of the Page Numbering window. 3. Click the Page Numbering Tool graphic from the Tools toolbar or select Page Numbering Tool from the Tools menu. or select Custom to select a custom color from the Color wheel. sequentially for each section and chapter 5. Select the font characteristics you want to use for the page numbering and click OK. Click Finish. the first page of each section will be numbered Page 1. The text block and actions are automatically inherited to display page numbering on the appropriate pages. Slide or Sheet. Use the second field to specify the text used between the page number and the total number of pages. the first page of each chapter will be numbered Page 1. Choose from the following: Number the pages sequentially for the entire title Number the pages sequentially for each chapter Will number all of the pages within the scope of the page numbering in sequential order. Will number all of the pages within the scope of the page numbering in sequential order for each chapter. Number the Will number all of the pages within the scope of the page numbering in sequential order for pages each section. A sample of the text is displayed. Click the Next button. Integrating PowerPoint Presentations into Your Title If you have the Lectora Integrator for PowerPoint installed. That is. 4. select the eye-dropper tool to use a color from elsewhere within your title.2. For example. The Details window opens. “-“ or “/”. or section. Select the background color that will appear behind the page numbering text. See also: Matching Colors Used within Your Title Text background color Text font and color Click the Select Font button to open the Font window. Select a predefined color. Lectora will create a text block and a series of actions in the Title Explorer. The default is “of”. Further select how you would like to number the pages within the title. The Scope of the Page Numbering window opens. for example. These objects are necessary for the functionality of the page numbering and should not be deleted unless you want to remove the page numbering from your title. chapter. regardless of their inclusion in chapters or sections. for example. Select if you want to add page numbering to: o The current section only o The current chapter only o All pages in the title 4. Specify the text representing the page in the numbering. That is. The default is Page. you can import individual slides from a PowerPoint presentation into your title. See the Lectora Integrator for PowerPoint Information Center for details about installation and importing PowerPoint slides into Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . 6.

Click OK. and page names so that they are included for translation. 3. Click the Browse button to navigate and select the RTF file you are importing. Click Open. Select Import text from a translation file. Select the radio button that describes the scope of the text you are importing. This text is displayed in red and is similar to the following: ##~~Do not edit this line. specify the translated RTF files in the Languages tab when publishing. Choose from the following: o The current page only o The current chapter only o The current section only o The entire title 4. section. select Translation Tool. If this option is not selected. After your main title is published. To publish the same title in multiple languages. the altered RTF file can be imported back into the original title. text within custom buttons created using the Button Wizard and text used within Display Message actions. To import translated text: 1.45~~## Once the text changes have been made. Lectora will automatically create the RTF file in the same location as your . 5. This includes all text within text blocks. Creating images using Snagit Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Translating Your Title's Text Using the Translation Tool. The content within your Lectora title will change to reflect the text from the RTF file.your titles. Select the radio button that describes the scope of the text that will be extracted from the title. Select Include Image and Button names (used for ALT tags) to translate image and button object names.awt title is stored. The Increase text box size if needed option allows you to specify whether or not to automatically increase the size of text blocks if the imported text will not fit into the existing text block. 2. and the content of the RTF file can be translated for importing back into the Lectora title. The Translation Tool window opens. RTF files can be edited with most word processing applications. Click the Translation Tool graphic Translation Tool window opens. From the Tools menu. 3. text from your Lectora title can be extracted and saved to an RTF (rich text format) file. See Languages for details. To export text for translation: 1. Select the Include Chapters/Section/Page names check box to export the chapter. Choose from the following: o The current page only o The current chapter only o The current section only o The entire title 4. Lectora will publish your translated titles using the translation files you provide. Select Export text to a translation file. you may have to manually adjust text block sizes after the translated text is imported. The RTF file created will include text that must not be altered. from the Tools toolbar or select Translation Tool from the Tools menu. The 2.

or capturing an event on your system.swf file into your title. See also: Adding an Animation and Flash file  Publishing a Title When you have completed creating your title. The On Done Playing trigger is recognized when the last page of the Flypaper content loads.flv) file and add it to your title. executable file. You can also publish your title to AICC. see Using Events. you can edit it in a variety of ways and add it to your title. Events. This chapter outlines procedures on the following: Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . See the documentation included with the tool for additional information. save the image file in Snagit and drag and drop it into your title. The action trigger On Done Playing is the only supported action trigger that can be associated with Flypaper content. interactive content. It enables you to create and manage high-impact. See the documentation included with the tool for additional information. You can add events to videos produced by Camtasia.  Variables that are added to content when using Flypaper are recognized in Lectora as reserved variables. For information about the On Done Playing action. When you are ready to include a Flypaper project into your title. usable on all Windows operating systems. displaying examples of Web pages. see Reserved variables. See the documentation included with the tool for additional information. Select Lectora Output to save the video as a Flash Video (. edit and repurpose the content. also known as script commands. set within a video file can be used to trigger actions while the video is playing. you can publish it to the desired format. select Produce and share from within Camtasia Studio to launch the Production Wizard. publish the project in Flypaper and add the resultant . After you’ve captured a screen image. SCORM and LRN learning management systems. This is valuable when creating step-by-step software demonstrations. see Selecting an action's trigger. See also: Adding an image Creating videos using Camtasia Camtasia allows you to create captivating videos and record screen activity. They will be prefaced with the text "FLY_" in the variable name. After you have created the video.Snagit allows you to create and edit images and capture and save a portion of the visual image of your screen. Publish your title to a single. all without touching any programming code. and include it into your title. you can manipulate it in a variety of ways and add it to your title. For information about using reserved variables in Lectora. Publish to a CD-ROM or the Web. See also: Adding a video Creating Content using Flypaper Flypaper is a Flash content management tool. When you are finished capturing and editing the video. For more information. When you are finished editing the screen image. This is especially useful when you want to synchronize actions with audio.

You can publish titles in multiple languages. RTF files can be edited with most word processing applications. Selecting this option enables Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . All Pages/ Resources in the Title Replace Select this to use a unique icon representation of the published title. Use the Publish Location window to specify publishing details. Publish Select this to publish only the pages and resources that have been updated since your title was last Only published. 2. 5. see Languages.awt title file. This directory listing is for local or network locations. The Publish Location window opens. If necessary. Click Publish when you are satisfied with the results of the error check. and the content of the RTF file can be translated for importing back into the Lectora title. follow these steps: 1. This will compact the entire title and all supporting files into a single executable file for easy distribution. Updated Pages/ Resources Publish Select this to publish all the pages and resources regardless of whether they have been updated. To publish your title to as a single executable file. Lectora will automatically create the executable file in the same working directory as the . click Cancel and repeat steps 1 and 2 until your title is free of errors. Resolve any errors within your title. For details about publishing in multiple languages. Complete the controls as follows: Destinatio n Folder Specify the directory in which you want to save the resulting executable file or click the Choose Folder button to navigate and select a location. This option is only available if you have previously published the title. select Publish to Single File Executable. Text from your Lectora title can be extracted and saved to a RTF (rich text format) file. unless otherwise specified. Lectora performs an error check and displays the results in the Publish Title to Single File Executable window. Save your title. 4. not the Internet. From the Publish menu.          Publishing to a Single Executable File Publishing to a CD-ROM Publishing to HTML Publishing to CourseMill Publishing to AICC Publishing to SCORM Publishing to LRN Publishing to SCORM/Disconnected Command Line Publishing Common Publishing Options Publishing to a Single Executable File Use the Publish to Single File Executable option to create a self-contained title. See also: Running an Error Check 3.

Lectora will create the necessary files for you to burn to a CD-ROM. When a user launches the executable file. they will be prompted to enter the password. Click OK to publish your title to your local directory as a single executable file. Publish Only Select this to publish only the pages and resources that have been updated since your title was Updated Pages/ last published. the title will not launch. Lectora will automatically create the CD-ROM files in a cd folder in the same working directory as the . 4. unless otherwise specified. Click the Select Icon button to navigate and select the icon you want to use for your title. Select this if you want to password-protect the resulting executable file. This directory listing is for local or network locations. 5. RTF files can be edited with most word processing applications. click Cancel and repeat steps 1 and 2 until your title is free of errors. follow these steps: 1. Lectora performs an error check and displays the results in the Publish Title to CDRom window. You can publish titles in multiple languages. You can configure a title that is published to CD-ROM to run in full-screen mode. Click the Set Title Password button and enter the password in the Password field. When the publishing process has completed. 2. Resources Publish All Pages/ Resources in the Title Select this to publish all the pages and resources regardless of whether they have been updated. Complete the controls as follows: Destination Specify the directory in which you want to save the resulting CD-ROM files or click the Choose Folder Folder button to navigate and select a location. When you publish to CD-ROM. See also: Running an Error Check 3. single file executabl e 6. Text from your Lectora title can be extracted and saved to a RTF (rich text format) file. Selecting this option enables the Set Title Password button. The Publish CDRom Location window opens. and the published title will automatically start. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Lectora can only use . This option is only available if you have previously published the title. and the content of the RTF file can be translated for importing back into the Lectora title.awt title file.ico files for this option. After the CD-ROM is created. see Languages. Publishing to a CD-ROM Use the Publish to CD-ROM option to create a CD-ROM of your title. To publish your title for a CD-ROM. For details. From the Publish menu. Name of Specify the name of the resulting executable file.Icon Encrypt Published Title the Select Icon button. Use this window to specify publishing details. If the correct password is not provided. For details about publishing in multiple languages. Resolve any errors within your title. you can distribute your published title. users will be able to insert the CD-ROM into their computer's CD-ROM drive. If necessary. Click Publish when you are satisfied with the results of the error check. see Run title in full screen mode for CD publishing. not the Internet. Save your title. select Publish to CDRom.

Selecting this option enables the Select Icon button. When you publish to HTML. If this is how you will be creating your CD. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Some CD burning software operates by dragging and dropping files from the Windows Explorer interface. the CD-ROM image contains the Lectora Testing Submission Module which is responsible for transmitting the test results to the internet. By default. Lectora will create the necessary files for you to upload to a Web server. Title in a Zip File Remove Bookmark option from Published Title Replace Icon Select this to turn off the bookmarking feature in CD-ROM published titles. To add bookmarks to a CD-ROM-published title. Lectora can only use . See also: Using bookmarks in a published title Select this to use a unique icon representation of the published title. See also: Submitting Test. Windows does not display some files. This will cause you to not copy all of the needed support files to the CD when you drag and drop to your software. ensure that the Windows Explorer option to View All Files is selected. Select Bookmarks from the list and further choose the page to which you want to navigate. Click OK to publish your title to your local directory. Survey and Form Results to CGI  Using bookmarks in a published title In a CD-ROM-published title. To navigate within the title using the added bookmarks. click on the Lectora icon in the upper-left corner of the window presenting the published title. you can burn the resulting files to a CD-ROM. click on the Lectora icon in the upper-left corner of the window presenting the published title. The bookmarking feature will enable users to add bookmarks to the published title so they can quickly navigate to bookmarked pages within the title. The page name of the page bookmarked will appear within the Bookmarks submenu. When the publishing process has completed.Store Published Select this to compress all of the CD-ROM files into a single Zip file.ico files for this option. Publishing to HTML Use the Publish to HTML option if you want to post your title to the Internet or your own Intranet.  If the content of the title contains a test that submits results via either CGI or email. Click the Select Icon button to navigate and select the icon you want to use for your title. even though the files are present. Select Bookmarks from the list and click Add to add a bookmark. 6. bookmarks can be added to enable the user to quickly navigate to bookmarked pages within the title.

The CourseMill learning management system makes the delivery. and tracking of online learning across your organization easier and more affordable. See also: Running an Error Check 3. visit http://www.When you publish to HTML. select Publish to HTML.trivantis. Use the pull-down on the Preview button to choose the browser or open the location of the published files. When you make changes to your title. 4. Save your title. follow these steps: 1. You can publish titles in multiple languages. you will need to republish it so the new changes are reflected in the published title. Lectora performs an error check and displays the results in the Publish Title to HTML window.jpg or . Your title is published to your local directory. the actions in your title are converted to Web-based programming code. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . follow these steps: 1. see Languages. If necessary. see Languages. they are automatically converted. For more information about CourseMill.gif format. Before publishing to CourseMill. and the content of the RTF file can be translated for importing back into the Lectora title. click Cancel and repeat steps 1 and 2 until your title is free of errors. From the Publish menu. click OK. you can also click the Preview button to launch the published title. click the FTP Title button to upload your title to the Web server specified. RTF files can be edited with most word processing applications. See also: Setting CourseMill preferences To publish your title to a CourseMill server. and the content of the RTF file can be translated for importing back into the Lectora title. Text from your Lectora title can be extracted and saved to a RTF (rich text format) file. If your images are not already in . For details about publishing in multiple languages. this option is not available. When the publishing process has completed. Repeat these steps as necessary to republish your title. Text from your Lectora title can be extracted and saved to a RTF (rich text format) file. 2. 6. Publishing to CourseMill CourseMill is a learning management system developed by Trivantis and designed especially for easy integration of Lectora titles.html. Click Publish when you are satisfied with the results of the error check. You can publish titles in multiple languages. If you did not configure FTP settings. The Publish HTML Location window opens.com/products/ coursemill. Use the following tabs within this window to specify publishing options. To publish your title to HTML. For details about publishing in multiple languages. Resolve any errors within your title. management. RTF files can be edited with most word processing applications. FTP information and compression guidelines: o Options o Companion CD o FTP Options o Proxies o Compression 5. Once you have completed configuring all of the publishing options. Save your title. such as JavaScript. When available. make sure the CourseMill server has been defined within your Lectora preferences. Click the Done button to close the publishing window.

select Publish to CourseMill. You must have the Course ID to send your title to the CourseMill server. Use this window to specify CourseMill server login details. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . 2. and explanations of terms. follow these steps: 1. Resolve any errors within your title. See also: Running an Error Check 3. 5. For the latest specifications. Lectora performs an error check and displays the results in the Publish Title to AICC Compliant Web Content window. Resolve any errors within your title. Click Publish when you are satisfied with the results of the error check. Your title is published to your local directory. When the publishing process has completed. RTF files can be edited with most word processing applications. Password Specify the corresponding instructor's password. From the Publish menu.2. From the Publish menu.org). see Languages. click Cancel and repeat steps 1 and 2 until your title is free of errors. Text from your Lectora title can be extracted and saved to a RTF (rich text format) file. The Publish CourseMill/SCORM Location window opens. select Publish to AICC/Web-Based. To publish your title to an AICC system. 6. click OK. Save your title. If necessary. Repeat these steps as necessary to republish your title. When you make changes to your title. Click the Done button to close the publishing window. Once you have completed configuring all of the publishing options. For details about publishing in multiple languages. Complete the controls as follows: Course ID Specify the Course ID that is defined with CourseMill. Lectora performs an error check and displays the results in the Publish Title to CourseMill window. Use the additional following tabs within this window to specify publishing options and compression guidelines: o SCORM Options o SCORM Options 2 o Options o Companion CD o Compression 7. you can also click the Preview button to launch the published title. click the Send Title button to upload your title to the CourseMill server specified. click Cancel and repeat steps 1 and 2 until your title is free of errors. 4. Publishing to AICC/Web-Based The Aviation Industry CBT Committee (AICC) was established in 1988 to define standards on how Computer Managed Instruction (CMI) systems should operate in presenting course materials to students. When available. you will need to republish it so the new changes are reflected in the published title. See also: Running an Error Check 3. Titles published with Lectora will meet or exceed the guidelines for a Web-based CMI system. documents. Instructor ID Specify the ID of the instructor that is assigned to the course to which you are uploading the title.aicc. If necessary. see the official AICC website (http://www. 8. and the content of the RTF file can be translated for importing back into the Lectora title. You can publish titles in multiple languages.

a signed applet is automatically provided to facilitate the communication between the content server and the AICC system. you will need to republish it so the new changes are reflected in the published title. Click the Done button to close the publishing window. Repeat these steps as necessary to republish your title. Specify the description of the course’s contents as you want it to be displayed within the AICC system.4. If you did not configure FTP settings. the window will close. If you are not using the JavaScript Title Manager. Click Publish when you are satisfied with the results of the error check. this option is not available. Complete the controls as follows: Course Creator Course ID Course Title URL of Course Folder Course Description The published course will reside on the same network server as the LMS Specify the name you want the AICC system to display as the creator of the published title. See Sample. Once you have completed configuring all of the publishing options. and the user presented in a will be returned to the AICC system. course will be When this option is selected. Use the following tabs within this window to specify publishing options. click OK. The Publish AICC Location window opens. When the publishing process has completed. Interaction data includes the following information for each graded question:  User's answer  Whether the user's answer is correct or not Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . and the user exits the published title. 7. Your title is publish to your local directory. click the FTP Title button to upload your title to the Web server specified. you can also click the Preview button to launch the published title. This is typically the location of a script that is used to facilitate the communication between the content server and the AICC system. If you are using the JavaScript Title Manager (see AICC Options) you will need to specify the Cross-domain redirector URL in the field provided. Specify the Web address of the location of your course within the AICC system. Specify the title of the course as you want it to be displayed within the AICC system. 5. The published Select this option if you want the published title to be launched from the AICC system in a new window. Clear this option if you know that the course will be published to a content server that is separate from the AICC system. FTP information and compression guidelines: o AICC Options o AICC Options 2 o Options o Companion CD o FTP Options o Proxies o Compression 6. When available. When you make changes to your title. separate window than the LMS The published course will report Test/ Survey Interactions to the LMS Select this to record interaction data for the questions contained in the graded test being submitted to the AICC system. AICC Options Use the AICC Options tab within the Publish AICC Location window to specify publishing options pertaining to the AICC system. Specify the ID of the course as it will be know within the AICC system.

Send postbody 'Send back the response' Response. use:' ' Set xml = Server.' xml.Open "POST". the user will have the option to prompt to restore skip to the page he or she last viewed within the published title.form("session_id") aicc_data=Request.Querystring("command") version=Request.XMLHTTP") ' Or. False xml. version. session_id. aicc_loc. for version 3.URLEncode(session_id) if aicc_data <> "" then postbody = postbody + "&aicc_data=" + Server.Querystring("aicc_loc") <> "") then aicc_loc=Request. aicc_loc.Querystring("session_id") aicc_data=Request.Querystring("aicc_loc") command=Request.0 of XMLHTTP.CreateObject("MSXML2.  Time the question was answered Amount of time the user spent on the page containing the answer The published Select this to enable the automatic bookmarking feature for the published title. "application/x-www-form-urlencoded" 'Actually Sends the request and returns the data:' xml. xml.form("aicc_loc") command=Request.form("aicc_data") end if ' Build the post body string' postbody = "command=" + Server. aicc_data.form("version") session_id=Request. command.Buffer = True Dim objXMLHTTP.Write xml.form("command") version=Request.CreateObject("Microsoft.setRequestHeader "Content-Type". course will and the user is returning to the published title within the AICC system.Querystring("aicc_data") else aicc_loc=Request.Querystring("version") session_id=Request. postbody 'get passed params depending on method sent' if(Request.URLEncode(version) + "&session_id=" + Server.URLEncode(command) + "&version=" + Server.URLEncode(aicc_data) end if ' Create an xmlhttp object:' Set xml = Server. the last viewed location within the LMS Sample ASP Script <%@ Language=VBScript %> <% Response.responseText Set xml = Nothing %> Publishing to SCORM/Web-Based Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . When this is selected.ServerXMLHTTP")' ' Opens the connection to the remote server.

Use the following tabs within this window to specify publishing options. Titles published with Lectora will meet or exceed the guidelines for SCORM 1. Click Publish when you are satisfied with the results of the error check The Publish SCORM Location window opens. See also: Running an Error Check 3. 2. You can publish titles in multiple languages. you can also click the Preview button to launch the published title. Text from your Lectora title can be extracted and saved to a RTF (rich text format) file. FTP information and compression guidelines: o SCORM Options o SCORM Options 2 o Options o Companion CD o FTP Options o Proxies o Compression 5. you will need to republish it so the new changes are reflected in the published title.0. 6. IMS.gov/). see Languages. documents.The Shareable Content Object Reference Model (SCORM) is a set of inter-related technical specifications built upon the work of the AICC. and the content of the RTF file can be translated for importing back into the Lectora title. From the Publish menu. RTF files can be edited with most word processing applications. When you make changes to your title. click OK. Resolve any errors within your title.0 Conformant  SCORM 1. select Publish to SCORM/Web-Based. Repeat these steps as necessary to republish your title.2 and 2004. 1. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . this option is not available.2 Conformant  SCORM 2004 Conformant Course Creator Course ID Specify the name you want the SCORM system to display as the creator of the published title. For the latest specifications. Once you have completed configuring all of the publishing options. see the official SCORM website (http://www. SCORM Options Use the SCORM Options tab within the Publish SCORM Location window to specify publishing options pertaining to the SCORM system. Your title is publish to your local directory. and explanations of terms. Save your title. If you did not configure FTP settings. Specify the ID of the course as it will be know within the SCORM system. Click the Done button to close the publishing window. If necessary. 1. Lectora performs an error check and displays the results in the Publish Title to SCORM Compliant Web Content window. click the FTP Title button to upload your title to the Web server specified.1. follow these steps: 1. When the publishing process has completed.1 Conformant  SCORM 1. To publish your title to a SCORM system. When available. Complete the controls as follows: Course Is Use the list to select the conformance type and level. and IEEE to create a unified content model for Web-based learning content. 4.adlnet. click Cancel and repeat steps 1 and 2 until your title is free of errors. Select from  SCORM 1. For details about publishing in multiple languages.

You can publish titles in multiple languages. The published Select this option if you want the published title to be launched from the SCORM system in a new course will be window. if you are planning on publishing your title to LRN. it is not necessary to use navigation buttons or a table of contents object in your title. select Publish to LRN. sharing. and creating online content and courseware. From the Publish menu. searched terms are compared to course titles and keywords and will help users find the content for which they are searching.Course Title URL of Course Folder Course Description Additional Keywords Specify the title of the course as you want it to be displayed within the SCORM system. Because of this. the last viewed location within the LMS Publishing to LRN LRN (Learning Resource Interchange) is a Microsoft-specified content interchange descriptor that provides to content creators a standard way of identifying. To publish your title to LRN. the user will have the option to prompt to restore skip to the page he or she last viewed within the published title. Specify the Web address of the location of your course within the SCORM system. When users search for courses within the SCORM system. Text from your Lectora title can be extracted and saved to a RTF (rich text format) file. and presented in a the user will be returned to the SCORM system. follow these steps: 1. and it is strongly recommended that you do not use frames. RTF files can be edited with most word processing applications. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . 2. Save your title. Lectora performs an error check and displays the results in the Publish Title to LRN window. and the user exits the published title. with a table of contents on the left. the window will close. the course materials that you create will be contained in a frame on the lower right. report Test/ Survey Question Interaction data includes the following information for each graded question: Interactions to  Question text (CourseMill and SCORM 2004 only) the LMS  User's answer  Whether the user's answer is correct or not  Time the question was answered  Amount of time the user spent on the page containing the answer The published Select this to enable the automatic bookmarking feature for the published title. Specify the description of the course’s contents as you want it to be displayed within the SCORM system. and navigation buttons on the top. except that LRN provides a standard table of contents and navigation for the course. For details about publishing in multiple languages. and the content of the RTF file can be translated for importing back into the Lectora title. updating. Publishing to LRN is very similar to publishing to HTML. separate window than the LMS The published Select this to record interaction data for the questions contained in the graded test being submitted to course will the SCORM system. see Languages. course will and the user is returning to the published title within the SCORM system. When this option is selected. Specify any additional keywords that can be used to define the content of the course. When this is selected. When using the LRN Viewer from Microsoft to view the published course.

2. When available. the published title can update the host learning management system with the results of the user's interactions. RTF files can be edited with most word processing applications. this option is not available. Your title is published to your local directory. and the content of the RTF file can be translated for importing back into the Lectora title. Resolve any errors within your title. If necessary. Text from your Lectora title can be extracted and saved to a RTF (rich text format) file. Click Publish when you are satisfied with the results of the error check The Publish LRN Location window opens. Publishing to SCORM/Disconnected The Publish to SCORM/Disconnected option is part of an evolving standard that enables users on learning management systems to download SCORM conformant materials for use in an off-line (not connected to the Internet) environment. You can open your browser and view the published HTML files or you can use the Microsoft LRN toolkit to view the content as LRN. To publish your title for a disconnected SCORM system. If necessary. For details about publishing in multiple languages. click Cancel and repeat steps 1 and 2 until your title is free of errors. 4. Save your title. you can also click the Preview button to launch the published title. you will need to republish it so the new changes are reflected in the published title. Repeat these steps as necessary to republish your title. FTP information and compression guidelines: o SCORM Options o AICC/SCORM Options 2 o Options o Companion CD o FTP Options o Proxies o Compression Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Once you have completed configuring all of the publishing options. When the publishing process has completed. From the Publish menu. Resolve any errors within your title. 4. Click the Done button to close the publishing window. click the FTP Title button to upload your title to the Web server specified. and when they have re-established Internet connectivity. click Cancel and repeat steps 1 and 2 until your title is free of errors. Use the following tabs within this window to specify publishing options. click OK. Lectora performs an error check and displays the results in the Publish Title to SCORM Compliant Web Content window. see Languages. When you make changes to your title. Click Publish when you are satisfied with the results of the error check The Publish SCORM Location window opens. The user completes the published title. If you did not configure FTP settings. 6. You can publish titles in multiple languages. See also: Running an Error Check 3.See also: Running an Error Check 3. FTP information and compression guidelines: o Options o Companion CD o FTP Options o Proxies o Compression 5. select Publish to SCORM/Disconnect. Use the following tabs within this window to specify publishing options. follow these steps: 1.

6.5. this option is not available. LMSCommit. You can publish titles in multiple languages.score. For details about publishing in multiple languages. Click the Done button to close the publishing window. A benefit of this feature is that a third-party application can issue the batch command to publish without having to go through the Lectora interface to publish the title.45 and cmi.core.xml) is created to illustrate what input parameters are required by Lectora to operate in a disconnected SCORM environment. Command Line Publishing Lectora supports command line publishing. When you make changes to your title. If there are special parameters that you want to use when publishing using the command line interface. Once you have completed configuring all of the publishing options. The command line publishing interface will use the most-recent options that have been specified within Lectora.core.session_time to 00:12:34. a sample input parameter file (ims_disconn. Repeat these steps as necessary to republish your title. Your title is publish to your local directory.raw to 75. RTF files can be edited with most word processing applications. then the command is followed by URL-encoded name/value pairs that associate to the particular data items in the SCORM data model. When you publish to SCORM/Disconnected. and the content of the RTF file can be translated for importing back into the Lectora title. a typical series of commands will be as follows: command=LMSSetValue&cmi%2Ecore%2Esession_time%3D00%3A12%3A34%2E45&cmi%2Ecore%2Escore %2Eraw%3D75 command=LMSCommit command=LMSFinish These three commands (typically you will receive all three) sets the value of data item cmi. When the publishing process has completed. or LMSFinish) If the command is LMSSetValue. the results are posted in the following format: Command=command-name (where command-name is one of: LMSSetValue. you will need to republish it so the new changes are reflected in the published title. commits the SetValue transaction(s). When available. If you did not configure FTP settings. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . When the disconnected published title sends the results to the location defined in the <submitto> parameter. Text from your Lectora title can be extracted and saved to a RTF (rich text format) file. see Languages. For example. you must first publish the title using Lectora and select those options. you can also click the Preview button to launch the published title. click the FTP Title button to upload your title to the Web server specified. This is an advanced feature and should only be used if you are familiar with command line programming. and issue an exit of the SCO. This enables you to use a command line invocation of the program to publish to the standard publishing formats that Lectora supports. click OK.

 AICC/SCORM Options 2  Options  Companion CD  FTP Options  Proxies  Compression  Languages See also: Publishing a Title AICC/SCORM Options 2 If you have not specified that your title is an AICC/SCORM/CourseMill (3. use the AICC/ SCORM Options 2 tab within the Publish AICC/SCORM Location window to specify additional options pertaining to the title. open an MS-DOS command prompt.x and above) Published Title. you would specify the following to publish the title Orientation. For example.awt Common Publishing Options Many of the publishing options available are the same. and enter the following: Lectora: [/p[option]] [/c] [/o log] title /p[option] Publish the title to necessary format. regardless of the publishing format you have chosen. See also: Specifying the type of Title Complete the controls as follows: Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 .To invoke command line publishing. you can use the abbreviated name for the publishing option to publish. where option is one of the following: SFX Single File Executable CD HTML AICC SCORM LRN DISCONN /c /o title CDRom HTML AICC/Web-based SCORM/Web-based Microsoft’s LRN format SCORM/Disconnected Create a console window for messages Optional LogFile to capture publishing messages The full path to the Lectora title that you wish to publish If you have any of the optional publishing packs installed with Lectora.awt in c:\mytitles to HTML with a console window and logfile: Lectora /p HTML /c /o log c:\mytitles\Orientation. This includes the options on the following tabs within the Publishing Location window.

Specify the lowest passing score for the title. ALT tags are created based on the names that are used in your title's Title Explorer. Netscape 7. Resources in the Title Use JavaScript Title Manager This option is selected by default. It is suggested to select this option if your title contains a large number of questions or variables. This option will use a replacement ASCII character for all accented or special characters Include Title Manager Frame Convert accented characters in page Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Click the Choose Folder button to navigate and select a location. you have a number of different publishing options. instead of within the browser's cookies. Publish All Pages/ Select this to publish all the pages and resources regardless of whether they have been updated.Course Type Developer ID Mastery Score Max Time Allowed Time Limit Action Specify the short description for the type of course within the learning management system. Specify the action to take when the Max Time Allowed has elapsed Select from:  Continue No Message  Continue With Message  Exit No Message  Exit With Message Publishing Options When you publish your title. and all versions of Mozilla and FireFox. and should be cleared if the ability to submit an email is included in your title.2 and above. This option cannot support the submission of emails from a title. Store Published Title in a Zip File Create ALT Tags for Images and Buttons Select this to compress all the HTML. Specify the maximum time that users are allowed to access the published title. Lectora will automatically create the files in a new folder in the same working directory as the . AJAX is supported in Internet Explorer 5. This option is selected by default and will create ALT tags for all images and buttons in the title. unless otherwise specified.0 and above. This directory listing is for local or network locations. The JavaScript Title Manager uses a technology called AJAX (Asynchronous JavaScript and XML). This option is only available if you have previously published the title. Specify the author’s or developer's ID.0 and above. JavaScript. An ALT tag will be displayed in a tool tip when the user hovers their mouse over an image or button. Publish Only Updated Select this to publish only the pages and resources that have been updated since your title was Pages/Resources last published. the value is set to 75% of the maximum score of all graded tests within the title. This option defaults as selected only when Lectora encounters a page name with a non-ASCII character. After selecting to publish to the desired format. ALT tags are also used by screen readers to identify the image or button.awt title file. not the Internet. This option enables you to store all variable data locally. By default. use the controls on the Options tab to specify the following: Destination Folder Specify the directory in which you want to save the resulting files of the published title.0 and above. Selecting this will increase your title's performance if your title contains a significant number of questions or variables. Leave the field blank to allow unlimited access to the published title. The default is Lesson. which creates a plug-in-free title. Safari 1. Opera 8. and media files that comprise the published title into a single Zip file.

Important: Only the Windows operating system supports the use of Companion CD-ROMs. User ID. Select this to debug your title within its published format. this is index. Creating a companion CD-ROM causes everything in your title’s media folder (audio and video) to be placed in a separate folder whose contents are intended to be burned to a CD-ROM and distributed to the users of your title. This option will use the page’s unique internal number so that the generated HTML page names are compatible with Web browsers. the Companion CD tab is available on the Publish Location window. if your Web server supports streaming. See also: Streaming Media When a user interacts with a title that requires a companion CD-ROM. Specify the directory in which you want to save the resulting companion CD-ROM files or click the Choose Folder button to navigate and select a location. Protect Published Content Debug Published Content If this option is selected. This option will only default as selected when Lectora encounters a page name with a multi-byte international character. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . FTP Options When you publish your title. Select Create Companion CD to enable the Publish to Folder field and Choose Folder button. By default. as well as equivalent right-click menu options within the browser so users cannot easily copy content material.html. If this option is selected and you launch your published title. Click the button to configure the type of information you want to see in the debug window. an additional debug window will launch. Password.trivantis. you have the ability to immediately FTP the published title to a Web server.0 Style Pop Ups so that the generated HTML page names are compatible with Web browsers. When this option is selected.com.names to ASCII Generate short ASCII HTML page names Use Web 2. and Initial Remote Folder fields. Lectora will eliminate the functionality of keyboard shortcuts such as copy and paste. Select this to display Web 2. If you disable this option. displaying all of the variable interactions and actions executed within the published title. your users may encounter issues with pop-up blockers. Use the controls on the FTP Options tab to specify the following: FTP Title To Host Host Name Select this to enable the Host Name. For example. Click this tab to configure the Companion CD settings. www. An alternative to using a companion CD-ROM would be to use streaming media. the Debug Options button is enabled. the user must insert the CD-ROM for the published title to function properly. See also: Setting debug options Working with the Debug window Name of First HTML file for Title Specify the HTML page name of the first page of your title. This option is enabled by default. Specify the host name of your Web server. Companion CD If your title includes audio or video.0/AJAX-based pop-up windows.

Specify the host name of your FTP Proxy server. it is not recommended to further compress. Proxies When you publish your title and you want to FTP it to a Web server.wmv). Select this to enable the User ID and Password fields for logging into a firewall. Lectora will attempt to compress all images larger than 10k within your title.User ID Password Initial Remote Folder Specify the user ID that can access the Web server. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 .gif or . When you choose to compress audio and video.jpg will be converted to . the image will not be compressed. Even with the compression option selected. Port. compression will result in a loss of quality of the video. This means that if your audio or video files are already in a compressed format such as Windows Media Audio (. Alternatively. and image resources within your title. and Login to Firewall fields.jpg files. specify the directory in this field. Use the controls on the Proxies tab to specify the following: Use FTP Proxy FTP Proxy Host Port Login to Firewall User ID Password Select this to enable the FTP Proxy Host. if your video contains a lot of movement. This is a highly-compressed file type that can be played with the Flash plug-in. If you are already using highly-compressed audio and video within your title. If you are required to publish to a specific directory. if you need to connect to your Web server through a proxy or if you are required to go through a firewall to access your Web server. When you choose to compress images. Alternatively. it can be highly compressed without losing much quality. Lectora will not further compress any . If the audio contains simple voice overs or small sound bytes. Specify the user ID that can access the firewall. you can specify proxy information for transferring your title. your title will be published to www. Similarly. as this will greatly diminish the quality of your audio or video. images types other than . if you specify MyDirectory.trivantis. See Converting to Flash audio and video. Selecting to compress your media objects will compress all audio. Otherwise. you can compress audio.wma) or Windows Media Video (. or Images check boxes to compress the corresponding resource types within your title. Specify the password that corresponds with the user ID to access your firewall. For example. if the video contained within your title does not contain a lot of movement. Use the sliders to select from ten different levels of compression. If the audio is music. Video.com/MyDirectory. video. You should also take into consideration the type of audio and video you have added to your title. video and images.flv files. this kind of audio can be highly compressed without losing much quality. Select the Audio. You can also create a new directory by typing in the name of the directory you want to create in this field. Lectora will automatically convert the audio and video file types to . Compression When you publish your title.flv audio or video currently within your title. Specify the password that corresponds with the user ID to access the Web server. Specify the port number for the FTP Proxy server. Compression will only occur if it results in the image size decreasing by more than 2k. high compression will result in a loss of quality of the music. you can compress individual audio and video objects. it is not suggested to further compress these files.

specify the translated RTF file path and folder name. Click OK. The information in this section assumes basic Lectora knowledge. Various government agencies have successfully created Section 508-compliant content using Lectora.section508. the quality of the audio. CourseMill. and forms  Integrating methods for users to skip repetitive navigation Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 .1194. Retrofitting existing titles to make them 508-compliant can often be a difficult experience. buttons.22 of the Rehabilitation Act. While the Section 508 Standards can be interpreted in various ways. and other clickable objects  Using actions and integrating accessible interactivity  Labeling text blocks and tables for proper association of information  Using the Title Explorer to configure object layering and reading order  Ensuring users can complete and submit tests. When your compression settings are high. 3. Then click the green arrow icon. and specify the name of the folder in which to copy the translated publish files in the Publish Folder Name field. This includes all text within text blocks. SCORM/Web-based. the information provided in this section enables organizations to create 508compliant content. text within custom buttons created using the Button Wizard and text used within Display Message actions. and the content of the RTF file can be translated for importing back into the Lectora title. Be sure to review this section to learn about creating 508-compliant content prior to designing and developing your title. the quality of the audio. The main title is published along with the translated versions. video and images will be minimized. In the Translation File Path box. navigate and select the RTF file in the Translation File field. Languages Text from your Lectora title can be extracted and saved to a RTF (rich text format) file using the Translation Tool. select the publish string set in the String Set pull-down list. For each translated RTF file. make sure the appropriate RTF files are selected. To publish your title in multiple languages. The information you specified is populated in the Translation File Path box below. Lectora will publish your translated titles using the translation files you provide. The publish folder will be automatically created with the name you specify. AICC/Web-based) that comply with the standards set in Section 508 .gov. For details about using the Translation Tool. View these topics for more information:  508 requirements and how they apply to Lectora  Working with ALT tags  Providing alternative text when ALT tags cannot be used  Using hyperlinks. See also: Specifying publish strings preferences Lectora and 508 Compliancy You can use Lectora to create titles published to a Web-based format (HTML.  When your compression settings are low. video and images will be maximized. These standards govern the requirements that must be met to enable Web-based content to be accessible to individuals with disabilities. 2. RTF files can be edited with most word processing applications. View information about the Section 508 Standards at http://www. see Translating Your Title's Text. After your main title is published. To publish in multiple languages: 1. surveys.

22 (j)  Section 508 . "longdesc". or in element content).22 (f)  Section 508 .22 (d)  Section 508 .22 (i)  Section 508 .22 (b)  Section 508 .22 (a) requirements.g. Titles that meet these requirements must be published to a Web-based format.A text equivalent for every non-text element shall be provided (e.1194. These topics describe the 508 Requirements and provide references to additional information for satisfying these requirements using Lectora:  Section 508 . In other words:  Every multimedia object that conveys content must have an equivalent textual description.22 (k)  Section 508 .22 (g)  Section 508 . via "alt".1194.1194.1194. Lectora enables you to create ALT tags for your multimedia objects and insert text into your titles.  Decorative graphics or objects conveying no information must have an empty ALT description.22.1194.22 (a) .1194. Titles that are published to a single executable file or to CD-ROM will not be 508 compliant.1194. Some of the underlying requirements are inferred or assumed to be known.22 (h)  Section 508 .1194.    Using audio and video Using Lectora’s 508 Compliance Check tool Publishing a Section 508 compliant course Accessing Additional Resources 508 Requirements and How They Apply to Lectora Content that you develop with Lectora can be created to comply with the standards set in Section 508 .  ALT descriptions should succinctly describe the content conveyed by the objects.  ALT descriptions for non-textual objects used as links must describe the link destination.22 (a)  Section 508 . The rules outlined in Section 508 .22 (p) Section 508 .1194.1194.1194.22 (m)  Section 508 .1194.1194.1194. This enables you to satisfy the 1194.22 do not exclusively address content requirements for developing 508-compliant content with Lectora.22 (a) Section 508 .1194.1194.22 (c)  Section 508 .  Complex graphics must be accompanied by detailed textual descriptions.1194.22 (e)  Section 508 . see these topics:  Working with ALT tags  Providing alternative text when ALT tags cannot be used Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 .1194.22 (n)  Section 508 .22 (o)  Section 508 . For instructions and methods for complying with this rule.1194.1194.22 (l)  Section 508 ..

For instructions and methods for complying with this rule.Web pages shall be designed so that all information conveyed with color is also available without color.1194. also use context and markup to convey the same information. Their use is not recommended.22 (b) Section 508 . If your title contains animations.22 (c) .22 (b): Equivalent alternatives for any multimedia presentation shall be synchronized with the presentation.22 (e) . for example from context or mark up. Items highlighted in red must be completed. or provide the captioning in an alternative way. Because Lectora does not support the use of server-side image maps.22 (f) .22 (d) . Section 508 . as well as each hot spot region.1194. Section 508 .Documents shall be organized so they are readable without requiring an associated style sheet. Lectora does not support the use of server-side image maps. You can layer transparent buttons on top of images to serve as hot spots. the style sheets cannot be used to format text within Lectora. This requirement has no bearing on the feature set within Lectora. In other words:  Video files and animations must have synchronized captions. Using audio and video Section 508 . Items highlighted with a red asterisk (*) must be completed.Client-side image maps shall be provided instead of server-side image maps except where the regions cannot be defined with an available geometric shape. The following table presents examples of appropriate and inappropriate uses of color in your titles: Example Describing navigation Instructing users on form completion Incorrect Click the blue button to continue. appropriate ALT text is provided for the image. it should be considered when designing your content. This requirement states that style sheets can be used to control layout and design. While Lectora supports the use of style sheets with External HTML objects. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 .1194.1194. this requirement.22 (f) Section 508 . ensure that the animations include synchronized captioning. however. In other words:  Color should not be used solely to convey important information.Redundant text links shall be provided for each active region of a server-side image map. see Using audio and video.1194.22 (d) Section 508 .1194. Section 508 . This requirement does not apply to content created using Lectora.  Audio files must have synchronized captions and/or transcripts.1194.  When color is used to convey important information.1194. also referred to as image maps.22 (e) Section 508 . but the document must be understandable (even if less visually appealing) when the style sheet is turned off. Lectora enables you to add closed captioning to audio and video components within your title. as it applies to Lectora. Correct Click the blue Next button to continue.1194. Section 508 . implies that when client-side image maps are used.22 (c) Section 508 . When you do this.1194.

the information can be interpreted correctly. For instructions and methods for complying with this rule.00 109.00 36. In other words:  Data tables must have column and row headers appropriately identified.1194. For complete instructions and methods for complying with this rule. as well as the San Jose.25 Totals 196.  Tables used strictly for layout purposes should not have row or column headers.00 218. Note that the id attribute of the <th> and <td> tags are used to associate the cells accordingly.74 26-Aug-09 27.00 36.1194. and Meals. Lectora provides a means of identifying a single row as the header.00 442.27 In the above complex table.27 Travel Expense Report Hotels 112. along with the additional headers – so it will be identified with 26-Aug-09.00 45. and Totals fields. see Adding an external HTML object. you can use the External HTML Object of type Other to insert HTML code that creates a table using the appropriate header identifications.1194.00 224. San Francisco. it will be associated with the left-most column. The following code can be used within an External HTML Object of type Other to insert such a table into your title.22 (h) .00 Subtotals 131. Section 508 . <table border="1"> <caption> Travel Expense Report </caption> <tr> Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 .00 Subtotals 379. However. see Working with ALT tags. Consider the following table: Meals San Jose 25-Aug-09 37.00 112.28 Subtotals 65.00 72. See also: Making a button transparent Section 508 .22 (h) Section 508 .1194. have been identified as headers.Row and column headers shall be identified for data tables. Items within the table are then automatically associated with the left-most column of the table and the identified header row.Markup shall be used to associate data cells and header cells for data tables that have two or more logical levels of row or column headers.02 San Francisco 27-Aug-09 96. when a screen reader is identifying the highlighted cell above. the top-most row. see Labeling text blocks and tables for proper association of information.25 28-Aug-09 35. so that when a user is relying on a screen reader.00 90.00 Transportation 45. San Jose.00 162.ensure that the ALT tags for all of the transparent buttons (as well as the underlying image) have the appropriate succinct description to enable the user to understand the content being presented.22 (g) Section 508 . If you use tables within your titles.00 109. Lectora cannot natively support the appropriate identification of header rows in complex tables.22 (g) . For details about adding an external HTML object.02 421. For example.25 800.

00</td> <td></td> </tr> <tr> <td id="r8">28-Aug-97</td> <td headers="c2 r6 r8">35.00</td> headers="c5 r2 r5">379.00</td> <td headers="c3 r6 r8">109.00</td> <td></td> </tr> Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 id="r5">Subtotals</td> headers="c2 r2 r5">65.02</td> .25</td> <td headers="c3 r6 r7">109.00</td> headers="c4 r2 r5">90.00</td> <td headers="c4 r2 r3">45.<th></th> <th id="c2">Meals</th> <th id="c3">Hotels</th> <th id="c4">Transport</th> <th id="c5">Subtotals</th> </tr> <tr> <th id="r2">San Jose</th> <td></td> <td></td> <td></td> <td></td> </tr> <tr> <td id="r3">25-Aug-09</td> <td headers="c2 r2 r3">37.00</td> <td></td> </tr> <tr> <td <td <td <td <td </tr> <tr> <th id="r6">San Francisco</th> <td></td> <td></td> <td></td> <td></td> </tr> <tr> <td id="r7">27-Aug-97</td> <td headers="c2 r6 r7">96.00</td> <td></td> </tr> <tr> <td id="r4">26-Aug-09</td> <td headers="c2 r2 r4">27.00</td> <td headers="c4 r6 r7">36.28</td> <td headers="c3 r2 r4">112.74</td> <td headers="c3 r2 r3">112.00</td> <td headers="c4 r6 r8">36.02</td> headers="c3 r2 r5">224.00</td> <td headers="c4 r2 r4">45.

1194.22 (l) . Lectora provides a number of tools and features that enable you to make your titles 508-compliant without having to provide text-only alternatives.22 (i) Section 508 . The content of the text-only page shall be updated whenever the primary page changes.When pages utilize scripting languages to display content. when compliance cannot be accomplished in any other way. Avoid using objects of this type within your titles.22 (l) Section 508 . To satisfy this requirement. In Lectora. but could be made accessible. Rapidly blinking or flickering content has been known to induce seizures for some individuals. In other words:  A text-only version of your content should be provided only when there is no other way of making the content accessible.25</td> Section 508 . and thus cannot be used within titles that will reside on an AICC or SCORM learning management system (LMS). In other words.1194. shall be provided to mak e a web site comply with the provisions of this part. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . this requirement is no longer satisfied.Frames shall be titled with text that facilitates frame identification and navigation.1194. Section 508 .22 (k) Section 508 .1194.22 (j) .Pages shall be designed to avoid causing the screen to flicker with a frequency greater than 2 Hz and lower than 55 Hz. Section 508 . Explicit instructions and guidelines for creating 508-compliant content using Lectora is thoroughly described within the remainder of this section. it is important that you avoid text-only alternatives.1194. and thus you do not need to perform any additional steps to satisfy this requirement.00</td> headers="c4 r6 r9">72.1194.00</td> headers="c5 r6 r9">421.<tr> <td <td <td <td <td </tr> <tr> <th <td <td <td <td </tr> </table> See also: Working with External HTML Objects id="r10">Totals</th> headers="c2 r10">196. when frames are used. each frame must be given a title that describes the frame’s purpose or content.00</td> headers="c4 r10">162. However. the predefined frame styles that can be specified within the Title Properties are automatically labeled. In other words. Section 508 . you should avoid including rapidly blinking or flashing images or flickering or refreshing in the range of 2 to 55 Hz.27</td> id="r9">Subtotals</td> headers="c2 r6 r9">131.22 (i) .1194. the information provided by the script shall be identified with functional text that can be read by assistive technology.A text-only page.1194.  If a text-only version is provided when the main version is not accessible.22 (j) Section 508 .00</td> headers="c5 r10">800. note that frames are not AICC/SCORM compliant. with equivalent information or functionality.22 (k) . Lectora does this automatically within the code generated at the time of publishing.27</td> headers="c3 r10">442.25</td> headers="c3 r6 r9">218. or to create interface elements.

When one of these files is launched. If you use the techniques and guidelines described in the remainder of this section.1194.In other words:  Information within scripts should be text-based or a text alternative must be provided within the script itself for non-text elements.When electronic forms are designed to be completed on-line. that application must adhere to the technical standards for software applications and operating systems as outlined in 1194. a message is automatically issued to the user indicating that he or she will need to install the plug-in in order for the content to be properly viewed.1194. the form shall allow people using assistive technology to access the information. If the corresponding application does not comply with Section 508 -1194. you will succeed in providing the appropriate accessible alternatives to the JavaScript that Lectora uses.  Form elements must have labels associated with them in the HTML markup. see Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . However.22 (m) . These plug-ins allow the content to be played or displayed within Web-based published title.21 (a) through (l).1194. there are a few objects that cannot be used within your Lectora titles.21(a) through (l).  All scripts must either be directly accessible to screen readers and the keyboard. The following objects are inaccessible with use of a keyboard only. In other words:  All form controls must have text labels. Lectora also provides the ability to attach and access additional files within a course. it is launched within its native application. including all directions and cues. and functionality required for completion and submission of the form. Lectora uses HTML and JavaScript to generate the functionality of the content. field elements.22 (m) Section 508 .21(a) through (l). There is no additional work required on the part of the developer to satisfy this requirement when multimedia objects of various types are used. but also to questions that can be included in surveys and tests.  A link to the plug-in or applet required must also be provided. video and animations. There are no limitations as to what files can be attached. In other words:  If an application is necessary to access content. However. plug-in or other application be present on the client system to interpret page content. If such a plug-in is required.When a web page requires that an applet. or an alternative method of accessing equivalent functionality must be provided. In order to satisfy this requirement. See also: Adding additional files to your title Section 508 . the page must provide a link to a plug-in or applet that complies with 1194. Plug-ins can be required for published titles that include audio. however. For instructions and methods for complying with this rule. When you publish your titles to a Web-based format. The requirement not only applies to forms that are created with Lectora.1194. and therefore cannot be used within 508-compliant content:  Menu Object  Document Object  Matching Question  Drag and Drop Question  Hotspot Question Section 508 . Lectora provides a means of creating forms and also creating the appropriate form labels so the various form components are accessible to users requiring screen readers. then that file type should not be used. the user must have the appropriate application to launch such files.22 (n) . special attention must be placed on the type of additional files that are used with your titles.22 (n) Section 508 .

1194.When a timed response is required.22 (p) Section 508 . use a textual caption. Timed tests should never be used within your 508-compliant titles.22 (p) . but also implies that the alternative text must be properly implemented.Ensuring users can complete and submit tests. image. To specify that a media object should have an empty ALT tag. the objects should have empty ALT tags. and there is no way to override this functionality. This requirement summarizes that a link or button must be provided to skip over lists of navigational menus or other lengthy lists of link s. the user must have control over the timing of content changes. animation or button’s properties and check the option to Use empty ALT tag when published to HTML. See also: Providing alternative text when ALT tags cannot be used If images. it is best not to introduce timing components into your 508-compliant titles.1194. or a pop-up window to provide the object’s description. Working with ALT Tags Text equivalents in the form of ALT tags can be provided for buttons. For complete instructions and methods for complying with this rule. While you can execute nearly all actions based on timers. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . this requirement necessitates that if user interaction is required. Consideration must be given to the actual placement of navigational components both visually and within the hierarchical ordering in the Title Explorer. see Integrating methods for users to skip repetitive navigation.  Alternative text for images or animations that convey additional information should describe the conveyed meaning. Lectora automatically grades a test when the time has elapsed. In other words. Section 508 . ALT tags in Lectora are created from the object’s name as it is listed in the Title Explorer. and animations in Lectora. As a general practice. Object names serving also as the ALT tags should be limited to 156 characters. Buttons intended to be ignored should be omitted entirely from the title. See also: Changing the name of an object If you cannot describe the animation. Objects that require a description that cannot be succinctly described in less than 156 characters must be accompanied by a full textual description. The 508 requirement not only necessitates that text equivalents must be provided. This is the same name that appears in the Name field of the object’s properties. This enables screen readers to ignore the object and prevents the screen reader from announcing any unnecessary information to the user. while also conveying the meaning behind the object. the user shall be alerted and given sufficient time to indicate more time is required.22 (o) Section 508 . or button in less than 156 characters.1194. Ensure a user is given unlimited time to respond if necessary. and forms.22 (o) . and images that have an empty ALT tag cannot have actions attached to them. Take care in using timed progress bars and timed actions when user interaction is required.  Media used for decoration or simply for page layout should omit alternative text or use “empty” ALT tags so that a screen reader does not present unnecessary information to the user.1194. the user must be given as much time as necessary to respond. Section 508 .A method shall be provided that permits users to skip repetitive navigation link s. surveys. images. Follow these guidelines when providing alternative text:  Alternative text provided for buttons or other navigational components should inform the user where he or she will be taken. access the image. There are a variety of ways this can be accomplished using Lectora.  Alternative text used within ALT tags should be as succinct as possible (less than 156 characters). hidden description. animations or buttons within your content are of no informational value or are used merely for decoration.

there are limits to what can be included in 508-compliant content. cannot be included. or other clickable object is in focus. That is. use descriptive hyperlinks such as “Access the Learning Portal. out of context. there are other means of providing alternative text. Ensure that the object itself uses an empty ALT tag. the user can then press the Enter key to execute its actions. The font style. First. Then. do not use hyperlinks such as “Click here” to access the Learning Portal.See also: Using an empty ALT tag for an object Providing Alternative Text When ALT Tags Cannot Be Used If you are unable to provide a succinct description of an object within an ALT tag. buttons and other objects to execute actions when clicked. See also: Adding an Action Using Hyperlinks. When hyperlinking text. Ensure that the object itself uses an empty ALT tag. like buttons. The new information that is displayed to the user as a result of the event is not recognized by the screen reader.” Using actions and integrating accessible interactivity You can create interactive components within your titles with the use of actions. Screen readers can only interpret the content that is visible on the page when it is initially displayed to the user. size and color of the text in the text block are irrelevant. The text within the pop-up window will serve as the only description for the object. Objects. The text block should include a text-only description of the object. it will still be recognized by a screen reader. You can make it the same color of your background or make it a very small size to enable it to be hidden entirely from view. While the text will not be visible to the user. Section 508 requires that such objects must be accessible with use of a keyboard only. The text will serve as the only description for the object. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . When the button. interactive rollovers.” Hyperlinks should be logical and able to stand alone. create a separate page containing the textual description of the object and a means of closing the window. The action’s properties should be as follows: On: Mouse Click Action: Display Message Target: Custom Message Window Name: Select the page containing the object’s textual description Ensure that the object itself uses an empty ALT tag. hyperlink. Buttons and Other Clickable Objects You can use hyperlinked text. Instead. See also: Adding a text block and typing the text within the text block You can layer a text block containing a description of the object underneath the object itself. or objects that display addition information on the page when clicked. See also: Displaying a description in a pop-up window Layering Objects Changing Paragraph and Text Attributes Providing a hidden description You can also make the object a clickable object and launch a pop-up window containing the object’s textual description. add an action to the object on the original page. that have an On Mouse Click action attached to them will be able to receive focus when a user presses the Tab key. The text will serve as the only description for the object. Links should always be linked to information that is relevant to the content. However. These include: Providing a textual caption You can include a visible text block on the page in proximity to the object you need to describe. You must ensure that these objects are properly labeled or have a proper ALT tag so the user is aware of what will happen when the button or object is “clicked.

Web 2. the screen reader will automatically switch focus and begin reading the content within the new window. See also: Using the Title Explorer Objects are layered on a page based on their listed position in the Title Explorer. if that table contains data and is not used solely for layout purposes. These actions cannot be triggered without the use of a mouse. and therefore do not comply with the rules that necessitate that objects are accessible with the use of a keyboard. should use the On Mouse Click trigger. and the designated header row. When you label the text block as a heading of either type. It also provides a means of specifying the reading order in which objects are identified by screen readers. See also: Adding Text to Your Title Specifying the HTML text type of a text block When you create a table within a text block. See also: Adding Tables Formatting tables Using the Title Explorer to configure object layering and reading order The Title Explorer provides a means to control the layering of overlapping objects on a page. In general. Also. actions that must be executed after a page has initially been presented to the user. When a new window is displayed to the user. should also be avoided. Users of screen readers sometimes search by headings to find important content on a page. it is recognized by screen readers and even search engines as containing important information.Do not use any of the following actions to modify information on a page after the page has initially been displayed to the user:  Change Contents  Hide  Move To  Set Progress  Show  Size To  Step Progress  Toggle Visibility State Action triggers. When using this approach. traditional pop-up windows must be used. be sure to include a means for the user to then close the pop-up window. See also: Adding an action Selecting an action Selecting an action’s trigger An alternative approach to displaying additional information to the user after a user has clicked on an object is to launch a pop-up window containing the additional information. Actions that use keystrokes to execute the actions often conflict with the standard keystrokes built into screen readers. An object that appears in the top-most Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . You can create page titles with the use of text blocks. Lectora can only natively support the simplest of tables that contain only a single header row. Cells within the table are automatically referenced with the left-most column of the table.0 style windows cannot be used. and label the text block as a Heading 1 or Heading 2. such as On Mouse Enter and On Mouse Exit. you must identify the header row of the table so that a screen reader can properly identify the information within the table. Labeling text blocks and tables for proper association of information You can label text blocks and tables within text blocks with appropriate headings so that screen readers can more easily identify the information for the user.

buttons and animations. the object listed in the bottom-most position of the list of objects that appears in the Title Explorer is actually on the top-most layer of the page. and Matching questions should not be used within your titles. list box. will automatically bring users to the main content of the page and Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . “Last Name. Objects such as buttons have this option set by default. no additional steps are needed to ensure the questions are 508-compliant. Add a text block to your title and type the label you want to appear for the form object. A textual label must be added and properly associated with the drop-down list. These form objects include radio buttons. list box or entry field. makes it the first object identified by a screen reader. Many of Lectora’s test and survey questions also include these types of form elements. second. 4. list boxes. That is. check boxes. will cause the screen reader to ignore the object entirely. has no bearing on the actual layering of the object on the page. Section 508 requires that all such form elements are properly labeled so screen readers can announce their purpose to the user. and finally. See also: Associating a text block with a form object Integrating methods for users to skip repetitive navigation Section 508 requires that long lists of navigation components must be able to be skipped by users depending on screen readers. inherited chapter level objects are identified (from top to bottom). surveys. See also: Working with Forms When you add test and survey questions to a title. 2. See also: Placing an object on the top layer Using an empty ALT tag for an object Ensuring users can complete and submit tests. while an object on the top-most layer of the page is identified last. page level objects are identified last. For example. Be sure to modify these settings based on your needs. This property. when executed. Consider a page that inherits objects from both the title level and the chapter level in which it is contained. but additional steps are necessary if you are using drop-down lists. however. drop-down lists. Additionally. An object on the bottom-most layer of a page is identified first by the screen reader. Access the text block’s properties. A screen reader will first identify inherited title level objects (from top to bottom).position of the list of objects that appears in the Title Explorer is actually on the bottom-most layer of the page. they are always layered on the bottom-most layer of the page on which they are inherited. Reading order coincides with the layering order. screen readers identify objects on a page in the order from top to bottom that they are listed in the Title Explorer. Certain object properties can alter the layering and reading order. Most form elements are automatically labeled appropriately. or entry fields. Additionally.” 3. Select the Label for option. Add the drop-down list. This is so the user is not forced to listen to the announcement of navigation components on every page that is displayed. The Always on Top property places the object on the top-most layer of the page and at the same time. Hot Spot. and entry fields. Place the text block within visual proximity to the form object. Similarly. There are a number of ways to achieve this within your Lectora titles. You can:  Provide a skipnav button or link that. or entry field to your title. Use the following steps to properly label these form objects within your titles: 1. and also rearrange its location within the Title Explorer to ensure a logical announcement of objects by the screen reader. Drag and Drop. and forms Lectora’s form objects can be used to create forms for collecting information from the user. and choose the form object to which the label pertains. the Use empty ALT tag when published to HTML property available for images. See also: Layering Objects Objects that are inherited are always identified first. list boxes.

Access the Video’s properties. hyperlink or other clickable object and ensure it is the first object that will be announced to the user on every page he/she visits. Use the following instructions for providing closed captioning for video files: 1. you must take additional steps to ensure that audio. on its own. See also: Using the Title Explorer to configure object layering and reading order 4. Place navigation components so they are announced as the last objects on the page.  enable the screen reader to begin announcing the main content. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Within the properties of the video. 3. Hide navigation components from view if you have detected that the user is using a screen reader to interpret the content. Add an additional object to the pages of your title that is announced just before the main content on each page. This again requires careful object ordering in the Title Explorer. Since this functionality is meant entirely for users relying on screen readers. Create a button. 2. Ensure the object you created in step 1 has an appropriate ALT tag. Along with this requirement. does not conflict with a screen reader’s verbal identification of objects. and is used widely within 508-compliant content. Consider using a transparent button. and as the specified captions are displayed within the video. Users of screen readers should be accustomed to accessing information in this way. and clear the Auto Start checkbox. The video player’s controls can be accessed with use of a keyboard only. Select Display Video Controller. but after navigation components would typically be announced. 3. Convert the video to the FLV file type . Use the following steps to implement this solution: 1. See also: Display a video controller Automatically starting a video 4. See also: Converting to Flash (. an invisible button will be hidden from view for users that are not relying on screen readers. This file must be of the XML file format.flv) video 2. video or animation. or as part of a video or animation. Use the following instructions for providing closed captioning for audio files: 1. The first of these options is the preferred method. This requires careful object ordering in the Title Explorer and may not be able to be achieved in a way that takes advantage of Lectora’s inheritance feature. a screen reader will announce what is displayed. Convert the audio to the FLV file type. Examples of labels that are typically used for this kind of functionality are Skip to Main and Skip to Content. import a caption file. Configure the action on the object you created in step 1 with the following: On: Mouse Click Action: Go To Target: Current Page Scroll To <select the object created in step 3> See also: Adding an Action Using audio and video Section 508 requires that multimedia presentations have synchronized captions that are presented with the audio.

See also: Converting to Flash (. This file must be of the XML file format. Resize the video display. a video stream does not exist. so when they are announced. Page names should be succinct. See also: Display a video controller Automatically starting a video 6. However. See also: Publishing a Title When publishing your content. and as the specified captions are displayed within the video. yet descriptive. You can decrease the vertical size of the video object to accommodate approximately a 12pt text. a screen reader will announce what is displayed. the user has an idea of the kind of content to expect on the page. The audio object has been added as if it were a video to take advantage of the closed-captioning capabilities. and will supply a warning indicating that you may need to address the animation. it can detect that animations exist.flv) audio 2. See also: Adding a video 5.  Generate short ASCII HTML page names Do not select this option to ensure that the page names are generated from the naming conventions in the Title Explorer. Delete the audio object. Titles published to other formats will not be 508 compliant. the 508 Compliance Check tool cannot determine if you have appropriately provided synchronized captions for animations that may exist within your title.awt file. The video display need only to be large enough to display the captions. Import the newly converted flv audio file from within the media folder that accompanies your title’s . Within the properties of the video. Add a new video to your title by clicking the Add Video icon on the Insert toolbar. SCORM/Web-based. import a caption file. it must be published to HTML. and animations. the 508 Compliance Check tool can be used to help identify objects within your title that may require special attention in order to comply with the 508 requirements. Web 2. 4. CourseMill.0 Style Pop Ups are not 508 compliant and are not recognized by screen readers when  Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 .0 Style Pop Ups Do not select this option. Since the file was originally an audio file. ensure that you have specified the following publishing options:  Create ALT Tags for Images and Buttons Select this option to ensure that ALT tags are generated for images. and clear the Auto Start checkbox. See also: Specify a closed-captioning file 7. For example. 3. The video player’s controls can be accessed with use of a keyboard only. or if it is not. Use Web 2. Using Lectora’s 508 Compliance Check tool Lectora’s 508 Compliance Check tool should not be used as the final indicator determining if a title is 508 compliant. Select Display Video Controller. or AICC/Web-based. See also: Checking for 508 Compliance Publishing a Section 508 compliant course If you are developing 508-compliant content. Instead. buttons.

S.access-board. Survey and From Results to CGI Lectora Frequently Asked Questions Trademarks Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . both created by the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention.gov).    Appendix         Supported Media Types Title Style Gallery Matching Colors Used within Your Title Importing and Exporting Content Streaming Media Submitting Test. From the drop-down list.access-board. select Templates Online. See also: Publishing Options It is suggested that you initially publish your title to HTML. US Department of Health and Human Services.htm A Guide to the Standards for Web-based Intranet and Internet Information and Applications provided by the United States Access Board (http://www. http://www. Always use traditional pop-up windows within your 508-compliant content. This course was created with Lectora. You should test your content with types of browsers and screen readers that your end-users will most-likely be using. General Services Administration. Passing the final exam within the course gains you access to the source file (Lectora 2008 title) for the course. Dive Into Accessibility A free online book for “30 days to a more accessible web site. are available from within the online template repository.adobe.they are displayed.adobe. To access the templates. Special thanks to the Center for Disease Control for their contributions.gov The official site for Section 508 maintained by the IT Accessibility & Workforce Division (ITAW). 508-Compliant Lectora Templates Two templates.22.gov/sec508/guide/1194. See also: Using a Template   http://www.  Accessibility guide for Lectora® 2009 A self-paced instructional course for using Lectora 2008/2009 to create 508-compliant content created by the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC).section508. select the Templates tab from the launch pad when you open Lectora. U. Navigate to the 508 Templates folder and select the 800x600_CDC_Template or the 1024x768_CDC_Template. Office of Governmentwide Policy.com). maintained by Adobe (www.com/accessibility/ Information for creating accessible content in Flash.” http://www. Preview your content using a screen reader. such as JAWS. Use either to begin creating 508-compliant content of your own. Accessing Additional Resources You can use the following resources to learn more about Section 508 and how to use Lectora to create 508-compliant content. Replace the CDC’s interface components and logos with your own to get started.

aspx) See also: Working with External HTML Objects Animations  GIF (. Lectora enables you to extend the functionality of your title by adding External HTML Objects.mpg. and even three-dimensional interactive movies.mid)  MPEG.avi) Documents  Rich Text (. With such a wide selection. you can further add:  Java Applets  Header Scripting (JavaScript)  Shockwave Movies  Custom HTML  ASP Scripts  JSP Scripts  Meta Tags  Top of File Scripting  PHP Scripts  Cascading Style Sheets  ColdFusion  ASP . mpeg.wav)  Standard MIDI (.jpg)  GIF (. .au)  Apple QuickTime movie (.jpeg.bmp)  Windows Enhanced Metafiles (.gif)  Flash files (.Supported Media Types Lectora supports a wide variety of the most popular types of media found in all aspects of multimedia and the Internet.mov)  Windows Media audio (. mpg4)  Real Media (.spl) Audio  Flash Audio (.rmm)  Windows Media Video (.rm) Title Wizard Gallery Blank Title Standard e-Learning Course Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Images  JPEG (.wma)  Audio Video Interleave (.rtf)  Flash Video (. With the use of External HTML Objects.wmv)  Microsoft and Real Media streaming video formats In addition to the supported media types.txt)   Moving Picture Experts Group (. MPEG-4. .ipx. .emf)  Windows Metafiles (.png) IPIX Images  IPIX files (.asf)  RealMedia streaming media (. sound.flv) Text (. animations.rm. Audio layer 3 (. your title can host dazzling video.gif)  TIFF (.NET (.ips) Video  uLaw audio (.wmf)  Portable Network Graphics (.tif)  Windows Bitmap (. The following chart illustrates the media types that Lectora supports. .swf.flv)  Uncompressed Windows audio (.mp3)  Advanced Systems Format (.

Reflection Creates a title with a colored shaded border on the sides. or bottom. Add other navigation as you see fit. top. Platinum Creates a title for a product launch announcement with optional default and custom topics. Product Launch Creates a title based on chapters or pages with four optional color themes and chapter-name buttons. Shaded Border Presentation Creates a title with commonly used course components and structure suitable for publishing to a learning management system. NaturalWave Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 .or page-based title with the option to build chapter-name buttons.Creates a new title with blank pages. populated with pages and chapters as specified. Photo Album Creates a chapter.

or page-based title with three optional color themes and chapter name buttons. iPhone Corporate Site ModuleX Creates a chapter.Creates a digital photo album of your own images. Creates a title with a fun template with five optional color themes and chapter-name buttons. Framed Title with TOC Creates a chapter. iPhone Gel-tech Creates a Corporate Site title with dimensions formatted for the iPhone. Corporate Orientation Creates a framed title with a table of contents in the left frame. Certification Course Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 .or page-based title with page dimensions formatted for the iPhone.

Your mouse cursor will display the eye-dropper. Select the eye-dropper tool from the color list. The eye-dropper tool will enable you to select a currently used color from within your title. an eye-dropper tool available in the color list. a color from an image within your title. The new color will be selected within the Color list. click your left mouse button. whether it be for a background. or link color. Matching Colors Used within Your Title When you have the ability to select a color. or a color elsewhere. When the eye-dropper is on top of the color you want to use. To use the eye-dropper tool: 1. is Importing and Exporting Content Lectora enables you to work with data from text files and other programs in the following formats:  CSV Question File Comma-separated value (CSV) files are questions exported from spreadsheets like Microsoft Excel and Access. Aqua Creates a title containing commonly used course components. 2.  QTI Question Test Interoperability (QTI) is a test file standard developed by the IMS Global Learning Consortium. Lectora can also export test and test question in QTI format.Creates a corporate orientation title with optional default and custom topics. Move your mouse to place the eye-dropper tool over the color within your title that you want to use. Tabbed Presentation Creates a title designed for the 640 x 480 screen format with optional chapter name buttons and scrollable page format. Creates a title with a tabbed folder look with three optional styles of folders. Lectora Online Package  Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . This can be a color from the Lectora interface. structure and a completion certification. 3. text.

Microsoft PowerPoint You can integrate PowerPoint slides into a title. Each question record starts on a new line. ZIP You can share ZIP-compressed titles from within the application. 4. Use the Default page Size box to specify the Width and Height of the page. 6. Click the File Format button to review whether your file meets the CSV requirements. select Import > CSV Question File. There can be line breaks within quoted fields. 8.  Importing a CSV question file Comma-separated value (CSV) files are delimited text files containing questions that have been exported from spreadsheets like Microsoft Excel and Access. Importing and exporting a QTI file Question Test Interoperability (QTI) is a test file standard developed by the IMS Global Learning Consortium. highlight the page onto which you want to add the questions from the CSV file. select the Offset question on page check box. Specify the distance above the bottom line in the Y offset field. you must install the Lectora Integrator for PowerPoint. In the Title Explorer.You can import and export a title to use in Lectora Online . 3. select the Add navigation to pages check box. The Comma Separated Value Question Import Options window opens. You can import the following questions types within CSV files:  True/False  Multiple Choice  Essay  Short Answer The format is the same for each question type. To import a QTI file: Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . To import a CSV file: 1. 2. 7. To added standard navigation to the question pages. To enable Lectora to add PowerPoint slides. Use the File to Import field to specify the file to import or click the Browse button to navigate and select a CSV file. Click OK. Word You can export a title's text to Word. and all text fields are enclosed in quotes. From the File menu. All fields are separated by a comma. Specify the distance to the right in the X offset field. This is the default export format from Microsoft Excel and Access when exporting to CSV.    XML Extensible Mark-up Language (XML) is a popular import and export file type with today’s content management software. This enables the X offset and Y offset fields. 5. To offset the question on the page.

highlight the page onto which you want to add the contents from the QTI file. select Import > QTI. From the File menu. select Export > XML. The Export to QTI window opens. The Import from QTI window opens. Your current title is saved as a Lectora Online Package. 3. Navigate and specify the file to export and click Save. click the folder icon to change the directory to contain the imported files. The Lectora XML Specification describes the basic structure of a Lectora title represented in XML format. select Export > Lectora Online Package. From the File menu. Navigate and specify the file to export and click Save. The Import from Lectora Online Package File window opens. You can export your title to XML and further import any titles you have previously exported to XML.1. Importing and exporting to Lectora Online You can import and export a title to use in Lectora Online. 2. In the Package File to Import field. The Export to XML window opens. To export a XML file: 1. Navigate and specify the file to export and click Save. select one of the following: o a question o a page containing one or more questions o a test containing one or more questions 2. 3. 2. In the Title Explorer. click the folder icon to navigate and specify the file to import. Navigate and specify the file to import and click Open. To import a XML file: 1. From the File menu. From the File menu. 2. Navigate and specify the file to import and click Open. 2. From the File menu. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . select Import > Lectora Online Package. 3. The Import from XML window opens. To import a Lectora Online Package file: 1. 3. 2. Save and close the current title on which you are working. Your current title is saved in XML format. From the File menu. The Export to Lectora Online Package window opens. To export a title as a Lectora Online Package file: 1. Importing and exporting a XML file Extensible Mark-up Language (XML) is a popular import and export file type with today’s content management software. Click OK. The package file is uncompressed and the new title is displayed. In the Directory for Imported Title field. Save and close the current title on which you are working. To export a QTI file: 1. select Export > QTI. In the Title Explorer. select Import > XML.

Navigate and specify the file to export and click Save. Follow these steps to use streaming media with Lectora: 1. From the File menu. The text is saved. Digitize the segment into one of the popular media types. o If you want to produce Real Media streaming content (. The Export to ZIP window opens. Streaming Media You can stream long video and audio. or both. See also: How Lectora Organizes Your Content Importing PowerPoint presentations You can import an entire Microsoft PowerPoint presentation to create a new title. To export to a doc file: 1. 3. select Import > ZIP. The Import from ZIP window opens. Save and close the current title on which you are working. Exporting to Word You can export the text from the text blocks within your title to a Word document (. To import a ZIP file: 1. 2. The export window opens. See the Lectora Integrator for PowerPoint Information Center for details about installation and importing PowerPoint slides into your titles. Ensure that you have access to a Web server that is configured for streaming media. 2. 2. obtain a streaming media development kit from http:// Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . and can stream different quality levels of the content depending on the users’ Internet connection speed. Navigate and specify the file to export and click Save. 3. Inquire as to whether the Web server will be capable of streaming to the number of simultaneous users you expect to be using the server at one time. in a Web-based title.doc) file. Navigate and specify the file to import and click Open. 2.rm). Streaming media can download and play the video (or audio) simultaneously. Your current title and its contents are compressed and saved in a ZIP file. select Export > Word. To export a ZIP file: 1.Importing and exporting a ZIP file You can share ZIP-compressed titles from within the application. From the File menu. From the File menu. You must install the Lectora Integrator for PowerPoint to enable Lectora to import PowerPoint slides. Produce or acquire a segment of audio or video that you would like to stream. 4. select Export > ZIP.

test questions. In each of the following. Name QuestionX AnswerX CorrectAnswerX Value The text of the question The user's answer to the question The correct answer to the question (not applicable for survey questions) Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . CGI program that can then write the information to a file or database.com. test answers. enabling you to manage user results from your titles more efficiently and effectively. All data communicated to the CGI program are reported as name/value pairs:  Variable values are submitted with the name of the variable as the name. the name/value pairs that are submitted are fixed as follows: Name name email TestName NumQuestions Passing Grade Score Value The user's name The user's email address The name of the test/survey The number of questions in the test/survey The value specified as the Lowest Passing Score within the test's properties (not applicable for surveys) The total score of the test (if it is scored)  For questions contained in surveys or tests. 6. Web Address action from a button. o If you want to produce a Windows Media Services streaming file (. o Select the desired streaming audio/video type from the Video Type or Audio Type list. To have the video or audio embedded on a page: o Create a new video or audio object in your Lectora title. All information for test and surveys.com. and scores is submitted. o Type in the URL provided by your administrator.real.www. You should be given a URL from your administrator to access the media from Lectora. survey. and the value of the variable as the value. Convert the segment with a streaming media production tool. the X is replaced by the actual number of the question. and the value of the form object selected or provided by the user.  For tests and surveys. Have your ISP or server administrator place the converted streaming file on your streaming server. obtain a streaming media development kit from www. the name/value pairs that are submitted iterate for the number of questions contained in the test or survey. form results and variable data to a server-side. 5.asf). To display the Streaming video outside of the title in a separate window: o Create a Go To. as the value. hyperlink or action. including the user's name and email address.  Form object values are submitted with the name of the form object as the name.microsoft. See also: Working with Audio Working with Video Submitting Test. Survey and Form Results to CGI You can enable Lectora to submit test. o Specify the URL provided by your administrator.

contact the Trivantis Support team.QuestionTypeX The type of the question. A programmer knowledgeable in server-side scripting and database integration over the Internet/Intranet should perform the integration between Lectora and the database. Sample ASP Script <%@ Language=VBScript %> <% ' Get the parameters posted from the test' testname=Request. The type of question is identified with one of the following numbers:  True/False = 1  Multiple Choice = 2  Short Answer = 3  Essay = 4  Fill in the Blank = 5  Matching = 6  Drag and Drop = 7  Hot Spot = 9  Likert = 10  Ordinal = 11  Likert Table = 12 Use the following information to help you design a script to process Lectora output. The following are examples of scripts that you can use when creating your custom CGI scripts.form("name") numQuestions=Request.Write "<body>" Response. Combining the information offered here with the expertise of your database manager and IT or ISP staff. If you have questions about the information contained here.form("NumQuestions") passingGrade=Request. you should be able to develop an effective connection between Lectora and your database.form("Score") user=Request. Cross-domain scripting is forbidden within Web browsers.Write "<br>" Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 .form("TestName") score=Request.Write "<head><title>Failure</title></head>" Response.Write "STATUS=500" Response. the script must reside on the same server as the published title content.form("PassingGrade") ' Validate that this is actually from a Lectora test' if testname="" Or score="" Or user="" Or numQuestions="" Or passingGrade= "" then Response.Write "<html>" Response.  Sample ASP Script  Sample Perl Script See also: Setting test result properties Setting survey result properties Setting form submission properties For titles published to the Web.

$q = new CGI.Close Set objInFile = Nothing Set objFSO = Nothing end if %> Sample Perl Script #!perl use CGI.e. but' 'to keep it simple.OpenTextFile( fileName.e.form(nameA) objInFile.Response. " & score ) ' Older courses produced by Lectora used a zero based index for the questions (i." Response.CreateTextFile (fileName) Set objInFile = objFSO.log" ' Open the results file for append' Const ForReading = 1.FileExists(fileName) then objFSO. Question1 is the first question)' ' determine which one it is' Dim startIndex valTemp = Request.Write "</body></html>" else ' ' Write the results to a file named the same as the test' This could be a database or any kind of object store. True ) ' Write the results' objInFile. we will just use a flat text file' fileName = "c:\" & testname & ". ForAppending. ForWriting = 2.form(nameQ) valA = Request.form("Question0") if( valTemp="" ) then startIndex=1 else startIndex=0 end if ' Write all of the questions and answers' for i = startIndex to cint(startIndex + numQuestions-1) nameQ = "Question" + CStr(i) nameA = "Answer" + CStr(i) valQ = Request.WriteLine( nameA & ": " & valA ) Next ' Close results file' objInFile. " & user & ". #get the parameters passed to the script ################### $name = $q->param('name').WriteLine( nameQ & ": " & valQ ) objInFile. Question0 is the first question)' 'Newer courses are one based (i. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . ForAppending = 8 Set objFSO = CreateObject("Scripting. " & Time & ".FileSystemObject") if not objFSO.WriteLine( Date & ".Write "Could not parse test results due to a parameter error. $testName = $q>param('TestName').

$index += 1. Question1 is the first question)' # determine which one it is' ##################### $startindex = 0. ##################### #Write out all of the questions and answers ##################### while( $index < ($startindex + $numQuestions) ) { $qst = "Question$index". print "</body></html>". ##################### #opens test data file for append and write the data ##################### $testName . $passingGrade = $q->param('PassingGrade'). $currtime = "$year-$mon-$mday $hour:$min:$sec".= ".$min.e. } $index = $startindex. log". print TESTDATA "$currtime $name $numQuestions $passingGrade $score\n".$isdst) = localtime (time). $temp = $q->param('Question0').">>c:\\$testName" ) or die.". print "<html>". $ans = "Answer$index". print "<br>".e.$yday.$mday. print TESTDATA "$ans: $aval\n". $aval = $q->param( $ans ). exit 0.$numQuestions = $q->param('NumQuestions'). open( TESTDATA. } Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . print "Could not parse test results due to a parameter error.$year. print TESTDATA "$qst: $qval\n". if( $temp eq "" ) { $startindex = 1. Question0 is the first question)' # Newer courses are one based (i. ##################### # Older courses produced by Lectora used a zero based index for the questions (i.$hour.$wday. print "STATUS=500". } ##################### #get the current time ##################### ($sec.$mon. $mon = $mon + 1. print "<body>". $year = $year + 1900. print "<head><title>Failure</title></head>". $score = $q->param('Score'). $qval = $q->param( $qst ). if( $testName eq "" || $numQuestions eq "" ) { print "Content-type: text/html\n\n".

After you click on any object. AICC. print "STATUS=200\r\n". its location and size are displayed in a status area in that corner. or deleted something and you Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Lectora Frequently Asked Questions Frequently asked questions about Lectora:  Why can't I select and edit title objects?  What is the size or position of my object?  What if I changed something by accident?  How do I resize by image?  How do I check my spelling?              How do I open a new browser window? What file extensions does Lectora support? Can I import an existing Lectora title into my current working title? How do I keep my objects from moving? How do I select all the objects on my page? How do I select and format hyperlink text? How do I add the same object to every page? How do I exclude an item from a page? What extensions do my files have? Why after publishing to HTML. See also: Using Lectora's Modes What is the size or position of my object? A useful way to find out the dimensions or position of any object on the page is to look at the bottom right corner of the Lectora main window. you will not be able to select and manipulate any objects on the screen until you switch back to Edit mode (red light) by using the leftmost Stoplight icon at the far left of Lectora’s toolbar. resized. When a title is in Run mode. ##################### #reply that it worked #################### print $q->header(). If you have just changed. added. See also: Using the Status bar What if I changed something by accident? Lectora features multiple Undo commands.close TESTDATA. These numbers will update as you modify the size and/or position of the object. or SCORM my send test results by email is giving me an error? Why is my random test finishing too soon? Can Lectora display Mathematic Equations? Does Lectora support book marking? Why can't I select and edit title objects? A common occurrence when developing a title in Lectora is to forget that your title is currently in Run mode .

You can also spell check all text blocks on the current page or all text blocks in the entire document by selecting those items from the Tools menu. On the action specify Go To and then Web Address. All sizable objects can be sized proportional to their current width and height.rtf •. Checking this box will link to the Web address in a separate window.mov •. sizing the image keeps the image at the same width to height ratio as the original image imported into the title. See also: Moving and Resizing Objects Making objects the same size How do I check my spelling? Lectora helps you spell check your text. you will see an option for Open in new Browser window.wav •. See also: Checking Spelling How do I open a new browser window? If you are publishing your title to HTML and you want to link to an external Web address.txt Image •.mp3 Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 Document •. select Redo from the Edit menu. which is set by default and can be accessed on the objects Position and Size tab. If you are in text edit mode. When this is selected. Optionally.jpg •.gif •. the object will size relative to its current width and height. When this property is set. All CD published titles open Web addresses in a separate browser window. but want the student taking the title to stay in your title. See also: Edit Menu How do I resize my image? Objects that can be sized and have an original aspect ratio (width to height ratio) such as images and buttons have a property called Keep original aspect ratio. Alternately.mid •. Undo the action by holding down the Ctrl-Z keys. This affects a title published to HTML. If you then decide you want to Redo the action then simply press Ctrl-Y. See also: Executing Go To actions What file extensions does Lectora support? Lectora supports several types of files: Sound • . or you were unhappy with the result. By holding down Shift while using the mouse to drag a corner or side of the object. You can do this by creating an action or putting an action on a button or a text link. you can select Undo from the Edit menu. open the external Web address in a different window.avi • .mpg .suddenly realize that you did not intend to do that.bmp Video • . you can spell check the current block by choosing the Spell Check button on your text toolbar or selecting the Spell Check option on the right-click menu for the text block.

follow these steps: 1.png •. See also: Selecting objects and grouping them How do I select and format hyperlink text? Perform the following steps: 1. 1. See also: Working with Objects How do I keep my objects from moving? Lectora provides object locking.emf • . Select the Size/Position Locked check box. Browse for the appropriate .tif •. Select Import from an existing title from the Tools menu.aif •. See also: Locking and Unlocking Objects How do I select all the objects on my page? You can select all the objects on a page in several ways:  Hold down the Ctrl key on your keyboard and select each object under a page in the Title Explorer. See also: Adding Hyperlinks to Text Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . . 3. Press Shift on your keyboard and use your keyboard arrow keys to select the hyperlink text.rm •. it must be unlocked to change the placement or size. OR 1.  Right-click on a page in the Title Explorer and choose Select All Objects from the pop-up menu.awt file. Right-click on any object. Once an item is locked. 2. .  Hold down the Ctrl key on your keyboard and select each object on your working page. Click OK.•.rmm. Select Properties from the pop-up menu.au •. 2.rmm See also: Supported Media Types • . Select Locked from the pop-up menu. It is a good idea to lock all your objects in a finished title to prevent the user from accidentally moving an object.mpg • . 3. Click OK.aiff •.rm. 2.rmi • . To do so. Continue to press Shift and apply any formatting to the text by using your mouse to access the menus.wmf •.wmv mpg4 Can I import an existing Lectora title into my current working title? Yes.ipx • . 2.

However.How do I add the same object to every page? The Inherit feature enables you to easily place the same object on every page of your title: 1. Use the arrow keys to move items from the Include to Exclude list. A blank page will appear in the working area of Lectora. The Page Properties window opens.html. . Objects added directly under a section will appear on every page of that section. see Understanding Inheritance. See also: Publishing a Title Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . select the title icon in the Title Explorer. AICC. and . 4. but once the course is uploaded to the hosting server it should be able to use its email server. 5. Click the Inherit tab. you need to have your server configured to do so. The Inherit feature also enables you to place the same object on every page of a specific chapter or section by selecting the chapter or section and following the steps above. This means that it will not be able to email from your computer. Select the Exclude Inheritance of Certain Objects radio button.js (javascript). Objects that are added directly under a chapter will appear on every page of that chapter. 3. .asp or . See also: Working with External HTML Objects Why after publishing to HTML. my send test results by email is giving me an error? If you are publishing to HTML and wanting to submit the test results. All of these files MUST be published to the Web. When you publish to HTML. When viewing your title in run/preview mode. See also: Understanding Inheritance What extensions do my files have? Your Lectora title will have a file extension of .jsp.jar (java). Add the object to this page in the exact spot you want it to appear on every page of your title. Perform the following steps to exclude an item from a page: 1. How do I exclude an item from a page? Anything you add directly under the main title will appear on every page of your title. Select Properties from the pop-up menu. or SCORM. it uses your local email program.awt. Lectora uses the email server to do this. Here is what you need to have on the server end:   Must have port 25 wide open with absolutely no restrictions. If you would like the same object to appear on every page of the entire title. after publishing to HTML. your published pages will have the extensions of . Click OK. you will have several different files in the HTML folder. from a CD publish/single file executable. If you have added ASP or JSP code to a page using the External HTML Object. Must have a server mail client on that same server that the course is hosted with the relay option enabled that is able to capture the email from port 25. 2.css (cascading style sheets). Right-click the appropriate icon in the Title Explorer. For more information on the Inherit feature. The files that will be published to the Web will have extensions of . 2. 6.

in the United States and/or other countries. or both. in the United States and/or other countries. See also: Publishing a Title Trademarks Lectora is a trademark of the Trivantis Corporation in the United States. Inc. manage variables properties. Inc. Macintosh. Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Support | About Trivantis (C) Copyright Trivantis Corporation 2010 . Firefox is a trademark or registered trademark of Mozilla Corporation. Keep in mind that Lectora is using cookies to keep this information and will only be stored if they come back to the test from the same machine. QuickTime. or other countries. Inc. See also: Setting a test's content properties Can Lectora display Mathematic Equations? Yes. make sure “retain variable values between sessions” is selected for your user-defined variables from the tools. See also: Working with Equations Does Lectora support book marking? If you are publishing to AICC/SCORM then it should be automatic through your LMS. YouTube is a trademark or registered trademark of Google. product. Remove the done button from the last page and inherit the forward button in its place.Why is my random test finishing too soon? This occurs when the done button is left on the last page. Inc. RealMedia is a trademark or registered trademark of RealNetworks. Other company. and service names may be trademarks or service marks of others. In many cases the last page of the exam will be randomly picked before the test is over and the done button will remain on the page. Use the Equation Editor on the toolbar to create an equation. Flash is a trademark or registered trademark of Macromedia. If you are publishing to HTML then you can use the “retain test answers between sessions” and also keep track of users taking your course by using variables. in the United States and/or other countries. iPhone and iPod are trademarks or registered trademarks of Apple Inc. Internet Explorer is a product of Microsoft Corporation. Java and JavaScript are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful